Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
531 Codisco Way
PERMIT Al CONTRAC' ADDRESS PHONE NUMBER Y`" ) , 3 d y � t,�7 PROPERTY OWNER ADDRESS PHONE NUMBER ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR MECHANICAL CONTRACTO PLUMBING CONTRACTOR MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR PERMIT NUMBER FEE MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACTOR PERMIT NUMBER, FEE SUBDIVISION PERMIT # to g �� DATE , 0 PERMIT DESCRIPTION�.L-Q� PERMIT VALUATION a cw b SQUARE FOOTAGE ly p D CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION t Permit # : Date: 0-7 �S 3 t 12 0.7 Z Job Address: C Description of Wor,G'Z 'z Historic District Zoning: Value of Work: S 00. r-- Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/alarm Pool Electrical: New. Service — #.of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole. Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) Plumbing/New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines 2— # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: #.of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type:, Residential Commercial K Industrial Total Square Footage: Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FENIA form required for other than X) Parcel"#: Ap CAttach Proof Q Ownership & Lersal Description) Oivrers Name & Address: �I ftl ti, �� �10 PP)hone: /�' C67 ontractor & Address C f1 tC(%�Ct p(� t e ten, t , 2AwjS �-�7K F' �y (V� (fit n Q C) iG frL e. l State License Number: CFCOb 7 v � IItt Phone & az: ` [ t'(-)::) 2:2,0 �Y 3 Contact Person: Bonding Company: Address:: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Address: Phone: Fax: Phone:3 Coto'"1 Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance ofa permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate . permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, eta OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance v-,ith all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning:; WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDINGYOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may, be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the reqiAi_rcyAe0A"da en _ w, FS 713. n Signature of Owner/Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's Name Signature of Notary-Statc of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced E APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: Zoning: (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) Special Conditions: Name ry"St115f}ci" Date AEBBIE BLAINTON MY COM "9SSION # DD 1 `is�=H4�iR•so�ajiagl5t't�;'��e. Utilities: FD: (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) r _ , i Q. CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION Permit # : Date: Job Address: f coCOwn J�11 !r C ( l//mil-C� DescwDistrict: n of Work 7-Stbh HvAC oning: Value of Work: 0 C� 44N Permit Type: Building Electrical Mechanical t Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarm Pool i Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Add tion/Alteration Change of Service TempofaryPole . ' Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential/ Replacement New (Duct Layout:& _Energy Calc: Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines 3 Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercialj,,"Industrial Total Square Footage:' Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) L �� Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) v�Fi 0 . � Parcel #: ( P g P ) j Owners Name & Address: SYt dod"' Y1 .�5 �— t—•C Phone: Contractor Name &Address: 1l C i t^ / ��, Lin YYI P V^C1. 'C S �' L/� � � 't"1 `�)� �7 /' 07 0 Q 2 �' L 8 7 4 �� State License Numbe.r:: CA l Phone & Fax: -7 J� ��� S J� $ S 00 J5Contact Person: lei, 3 O Phone: i ( S Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: -- Address: --- — Architect/Engineer: Phone: r E Address: Fax: _ / Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the s issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. L,understand that a separate permit must.be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS; WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done incompliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMM ENT Y RESULT IN YOUR Pl�N11,rG TWICE. FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING,, CONS T WITH OUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there maybe additional restrictions app}rcable to this p pdit , tha y be ou d in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities suefi as water man ement di cts state gencies, or federal agencies. j Acceptance of permit is verification. that I will notify the owner of the property of the r uirements of "da Lien S 7 - Signature of Owner/Agent Date S` tune of Contractor/Agent Date ; ROSERT G. DELLO F-11 Print.Owner/AgenF's Name Print Contractor/Agent'�_Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Signature ofNotary-Stada Date i Owner/Agent is Personally Known to Me or Contractor/Arent is J Personally KnowntoMe or Produced ID..Prod.ucec ID APPLICATION APPROVED BY. Blo Zoning:..:L ,.ties FD.` g -v: � -(Initial,& Date) : (imnal & Latej (Imtiai & Datz) (uHual D �{ei tir z-r- S ecial Conditions: P "If n ftSen_ I �J +7 d�rvrtecs I s �ll 1 3 � rye K, .xwvommo�x� Permit Nu b ~all uall III Nil ouwmomonIII 1NN . Parcel / |dUU8aU N b �3' ^ ' - MARYANNE MORGE, CLERK OF CIRCUIT COURT Prepared by, ` SEMINOLE COUNTY � BK08550 Pg 1518; (1' ) ` CLERK'S # 2007005453 RECORDED 01/10/8007 110150 AM RECORDING ��E9 ���@N --''" i Return to: DEL -AIR HEATING & AIR 0\ RECORDED BY H Bailey ' .} 109 �o[��� R(�� �T��-- � HAKE M�y' FLORIDA��74� KYARYAN �\- CLERK vru °E""ID _'__-_'. u ` / ^ State of ..' j PJ '� C 0untvOf ~) _`.' ' - � The undersigned hereby gives hWice,thati will � omedebo�e�a|nree|p � �y. ondi � eoco�ano' / with Chapter 713 Florida,Shahu�� U�e following ' ! w �p r ..... mYingin[onnaUoniapnovidad|n(hiuNoUcoofCommenoemeni 1 DencdpUonofppoper�Ucgb|description b(\h ' d � ` epn}pa�y.aD street address ifonsi|ab|e) k^ cQ,� � ' -/ c^ 2Genmsddoocr'|pt|nnof|mprove�»ent(s)/ L� � ,- - . . . . 3. Owner Information \ // . 0 /� . ,r-- Name �) �`� Telephone Number Addvean A/- p- '- ���_�-7/ Fax Number C. \m�.JO/L- Interest inPropc�y: 4. Fee Simple TiUeHolder (i[other than owner shown above) Name x/ �\ Telephone Number Address `` ` ' Fax Number � ' 5. Contractor Name DEL -AIR HEATING & AM [E0�ND' 109 cop��— Te|ephnno \ Number u`O Address LAKE MARY/ FLO�IDA �2�46Fo» Number m-) cC��S O. Surety (if any) - Nome ` , - _ '� Telephone Number Address /` } �\ ' r� ' Fax Number Amount ofbond 7. Lend*rU[any\ Nome � } �L , Telephone Number Address Fax Number ` 8 Persons within the State.ofF|ohdu designated -by Owner upon whom nohues oroUUerdocumerks may bE served as provided by §713.13/1\(a)7,,Florida Statutes, ` Nome Address � / 64 Telephone Number '" ' ` Fax Number A. In addition to himself or herself, Owner designp(es the following to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice provided in q713.13(1)(b). Florida S(aiu(es. Name / / � / �\` Telephone Number Address ��� ' � Fax Number 10, Exp|rat/ondate ofnot|oeofcom encomcnL8he expiration date is one year from the date ofreco[din'` i unless 8different date iSnpedUod): � Date JignA / [�uo3t:Pe/ 5/ /3'oy/0/. z*vne[ must sign .-and no one else may bepennittaU to sign i/ _ his orher stead." ' Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of who is___je1_perso.naIIy known to me OR -pro L,�ked ' as identification, \/ r -- - _S/Hnumvo of Notary (notarial seal mappear below) .'- ` exn Revised: Iz/Qnfor 19_m20_ss ~\ .1<7 XY�' ~ ) ~� \cx� i CITY OF SANFORD PERMIT APPLICATION s i Date: Description of Work: C� Total Square Footage [ Or _INFO Historic District: Zoning: — J. Value of Work: $ R oA 2 !k g �� ('Sow Plumbing Fire Sprinkler/Alarmug Pool I Permit Type: Buildin�c/tr cal- Mechanical p Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration Change of Service Temporary Pole Mechanical. Residential Non -Residential ReplacementNew (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial _Le�_ Construction Type: 0�8 # of Stories: %^ # of Dwelling Units: _� Flood Zone: (FEMA form required ) Owners Name & Address: Phone: Contractor Name &Address: nA r h L n Phone & : ax: —�Sttate'LicenseNum1ber: b ontact Person: '. m1 /DhA-) J�(�/{up o err o.Phone: _ Bonding Company: A/ Address: 0 f r _ Mortgage L::nder:— Address: Architect/Engineer. —Phone: v Address: _ Fax: Application is hereby made to e rain a permit t, do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit �d r .t- ;;l work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be _ uuied for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS„ FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OVdNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating _ con; truction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN, YOUR PAYING T}'JICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ;cTTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: in addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of r' this nty; atfd-the-m a tonal permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. o i Acceptance o it is v will. noti , _the owner of the property of the req ments gf rida Lien Law, FS S' caner/Ag nt Date gn Contractor/Agent Date Print Owner/Agent's P ontractot/Agent' i aine Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced ID APPROVALS: ZONIN5;? / f DI UTIL: ram•" Special Conditions: Rev 03/2006 DEBBIE BLANTON MY COMMISSION # DD 188491 ra EXPIRES: February 25, 2W7 1-8003-NOT ARY FL Not Discount Assoc. Co. ontracto / $erSOItaIIynowFrtO M99O Produced ID CITY OF SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FEES FOR SERVICES PHONE # 407-302-2516 FAX # 407-302-2526 I #: D 1). DATE: PERMIT BUSINESS NAME / PROJECT: e ADDRESS: PHONE NO.: FAX NO.: CONST. INSP. [ ] C / O INSP.:[ ] REINSPECTION [ ] PLANS REVIrRMIT F. A. [ ] F.S. [ } HOOD [ ] PAINT OOTH [ BURNtTENT PERMIT TANK PERMIT [ ] OTHER" mx> ` TOTAL FEES: $®0 (PER UNIT SEE BELOW) COMMENTS: --- Address / Bldg. # / Unit # 1, Square Footage Fees per Bldg. / Unit�"J 2. 3 4. 5. - 6. 7. 8. 9 p 10. 11. E 12. 13. - -- 14. I 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. I Fees must be paid to Sanford Building Department; 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, FI. 32771 Phone # -407- 330-5656. Proof of Payment must be made to Fire Prevention division before any further services can take place. I certify that the above is true and correct and that I will comply with all applicable codes and ordinances of the City of Sanford, Florida. Sanf rd Fire Prevention Divis Applicant's Signature 3 1161Ill Ili 11eriiiWItill WIli k -,;W 4114iIai1ia1W1Will NOTICE OF COMMENCEMEIWANNE. MIME, CLERK OF CIRCUIT COURT SE;MINOLE COUNTY Permit No. W)PA b Rb 0899; f 1Pgl State of Florida CLERK' S # 2006109664 County of Seminole RECORDED 07/07/2006 01:43:27 PM REQORDINO FEES 10.00 The undersigned hereby gives notice that improvement will be made to certaifl1M WbpbVt)4 fti1tYltltordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. 1. Description of property: (legal description of the property and street address if available) 531 Codisco Way Sanford, Florida 2. General description of improvement: Add to existing offices 3. Owner information a. Name and address Sanford Partners LLC General Partner Robert Dello Russo 109 Commerce St Lake Mary Florida 32746 b. Interest in property 100" c. Name and address of fee simple titleholder (if other than Owner) 4. Contractor a. Name and address Certified Construction & Design John Schneeman : ,' 4 r -L t, Lrl2 !�2 Z, /X) 6 �L� ��� I r Phone number 407-324-851 Fax number 407- 23� 4-9244 5. Surety a. Name and address N/A b. Phone number Fax number rE I�' SE c. Amount of bond I=KI` U� ' �'UR 6. Lender SE,N Iv I r, FLJIRlDn a. Name and address NSA 0V b. Phone number Fax number 7. Persons within the State of Florida designated by Owner upon whom notices or other documents may be ser: ed as provided by Section 713.13(1)(a)7., Florida Statutes: a. Name and address John Schneeman 521 Silvergate Loop Lake Mary, Florida fi47 46 ; b. Phone number 4U /-324-8S16 Fax number In addition to himself or herself, Owner designates of to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes. a. Phone number Fax number Expiration date of notice of commencement (the expiration date is 1 year from the date of recor ' a different date is specified) 1rn to (orAfRped) a cribed before me this day of l SSG Personally Known �-'OR Produced Identification T Identification Produced DIANE CAROL TOOKMANIAN u ;•oa....�r. gnature of Notary Pu ic, State of Florida try COMMISSION a DD 18 , Commission ExpP ISTRtTM'EI`I:T PfkEPARED BY: EXPIRES: February 17, 2007 y,ey 9999F�!!!!°....•' Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters NAME ADDR. 2L1 .I-L /V of Owner 20 by Dec 28 2006 11:08RM HP LFISERJET FAX Cif of Sanford Building Division 300 N. Park Ave Sanford, Florida 32771 Phone: 407-330-5656 Fax: 407-328-3859 PLAN REVIEW RESPONSE p.l .PFVIF WED CITY SA NFORD Date: December 28, 2006 Contact Person: John Schneeman Contact Phone Number: 407-324-8516 Contact Fax Number: 407-32+9244 Contact E-mail Address: Reference Humber: Project Description: Tenant improvement / Interior alteration Job Address: 531 Codisco Way The following is a list of the areas of the submitted plans that contained violations of the co( adopted by the City of Sanford and enforced by the Building Division. The violations noted m be addressed before the plans can be approved. Changes must be submitted on the origi submitted format. Changes to construction documents that require an Architect or Engineer's must be submitted with the appropriate seal. ARCMTTECTURAL A-1 P vide the 2004 Florida Building Code construction type of the building. Identify if it is have a sprinkler system. (Note that this review is based on th ving a sprinkl r system. New comments maybe required) f is Is no t e case.) A-2 Provide the 2004 Florida Building Code occupancy use groups. 3 Identify the use of all rooms or spaces. Identify existing spaces that have not been changed. Provide a door schedule, including a hardware schedule. Unable to verify if proper maneuvering clearances are provided at the doors. Unable to verify which doors are intended to be rated. A- The plans indicate that a new stock room area is to be constructed. The plans indicate t at it will be of combustible material. Assuming that the building is intended to be a construction type of II-B (Converting 2001 FBC, of IV to II-B) combustible construction virill of be allowed. FBC Table 601 and section 603.1. The main level corridor serves an occupant load exceeding 50. Two exits are required. Tie second -exit shall not pass through the warehouse. The corridor shall not have a dead e d 1 exceeding 50-feet. See also section 1013.2 for adjoining room restrictions. FBC 1014 1, 6.3, 1013.2, and 1013.3. Lk-' The 2^a floor corridor has a dead end exceeding 50-feet to the elevator. FBC 1016.3. "e plans are unclear but from a conversation with the contractor an opening is to be at �-_ the end of the walkway on the 2"0 floor between the offices labeled Dorothy and Wes. Tlis creates a dead end condition since exiting shall not be through the warehouse from the ;ma,n;sace. FBC 1013.2, 1013.3, and 1016.3.A-9 ce supplies/storage exceeds 100 square feet and is an incidental use. The Its shall comply with FBC 302.1.1.1 see also FBC 710 for smoke partitions. 1 � �� Dec 28 2006 11:08AM HP LASERJET FAX p.2 3 0 break room as shown (without the counters or other equipment) has an occupi seeding 50. Two exits are required. The second exit shall not pass through t ehouse. FBC 1004.1, 1014.1, 1013.2. -11 a plans appear to show a possible storage room over the stairs accessed from Bc o ce. The opening at the stairs shall have a guard to prevent a fall into the stairs. F 1012.1. �3ans strate that the restrooms on the main level are accessible. FBC 11-4.16. as, shown for the restrooms on the second floor do not meet accessibi requirements. Since the locations have changed the exception to use FBC Plumbing sect 4.4.3 does not apply. FBC 11-4.16. - 4 The plans do not demonstrate that the vertical wheel chair lift is compliant with FBC 4.11. Provide the documentation that demonstrates compliance. STRUCTURAL i.�`fTie p nal s indicate that a new stock room is to be constructed the plans do not indicate d n loads. FBC 1603.1.1, 1607.3 Provide footing sizing or justify that the slab Is. adequate for support the of the new si room. - MECHANICAL iL - e equipment schedule is incomplete. Provide CFM of the equipment. Identify the door air In the schedule. Identify duct detectors when required. The phase rating of units is inconsistent from the plan and the schedule. W,>2�e walls surrounding the office supplies/ storage are required to be smoke partitions. duct work penetrating the walls shall be protected by smoke dampers. FBC 710.7. �l ne plans do not demonstrate how the outdoor air is to be provided to the units. inimurn outdoor air shall comply with FMC 403. PLUMBING V - rovide plumbing plans with isometrics of the drainage and venting systems, provide p sizin . Show the water heater location. Based on the occupant load of the warehouse and the office area the minimum fixture /requirements are not meet. FPC Table 403.1. LP-�F Drinking fountains shall be provided. FPC Table 403.1. �'-X/A service sink shall be provided. FPC 403.1 Any error or omission in this plan review shall not be construed to grant approval of any viol; of any of the adopted codes or municipal ordinances of this jurisdiction. Please direct any questions you may have to Wayne Thorne at (407) 330-5686 or fax to 328-3859. You may also contact me by E-mail at thornewdri.sanford.fl.us. -2- MEANS OF EGRESS 3. Thirty square feet (2.8 mz) per occupant for 4. Separation from the interior of the building is not re- nonambulatory occupancies in Group I-2. quired for exterior ramps or stairways connected to open-ended corridors, provided that Items 4.1 through 4.4 are met: 4.1. The building, including corridors and ramps SECTION 1022 and/or stairs, shall be equipped throughout EXTERIOR EXIT RAMPS AND STAIRWAYS with an automatic sprinkler system in accor- 1022.1 Exterior exit ramps and stairways. Exterior exit dance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2. ramps and stairways serving as an element of a required means 4.2. The open-ended corridors comply with Sec - of egress shall comply with this section. tion 1016. Exception: Exterior exit ramps and stairways for outdoor 4.3. The open-ended corridors are connected on each end to an exterior exit ramp or stairway stadiums complying with Section 1019.1, Exception 2. complying with Section 1022. 1022.2 Use in a means of egress. Exterior exit ramps and stair- 4.4. At any location in an open-ended corridor ways shall not be used as an element of a required means of where a change of direction exceeding 45 de - egress for occupancies in Group I-2. For occupancies in other grees (0.79 rad) occurs, a clear opening of not than Group I-2, exterior exit ramps and stairways shall be per- less than 35 square feet (3.3 in') or an exterior mitted as an element of a required means of egress for buildings ramp or stairway shall be provided. Where not exceeding four stories or 75 feet (22 860 mm) in height. clear openings are provided, they shall be lo- cated so as to minimize the accumulation of 1022.3 Open side. Exterior exit ramps and stairways serving as smoke or toxic gases. an element of a required means of egress shall be not less than 50 percent open on one side. Outside stairs shall be arranged to II restrict the accumulation of smoke. SECTION 1023 1022.4 Side yards. The open areas adjoining exterior exit ramps or stairways shall be either yards, courts or public ways; the remaining sides are permitted to be enclosed by the exterior walls of the building. 1022.5 Location. Exterior exit ramps and stairways shall be lo- cated in accordance with Section 1023.3. 1022.6 Exterior ramps and stairway protection. Exterior exit ramps and stairways shall be separated from the interior of the building as required in Section 1019.1. Openings shall be limited to those necessary for egress from normally occupied spaces. Exceptions: 1. Separation from the interior of the building is not re- quired for occupancies, other than those in Group R-1 or R-2, in buildings that are no more than two stories above grade where the level of exit discharge is the first story above grade. 2. Separation from the interior of the building is not re- quired where the exterior ramp or stairway is served by an exterior ramp and/or balcony that connects two remote exterior stairways or other approved exits, with a perimeter that is not less than 50 percent open. To be considered open, the opening shall be a mini- mum of 50 percent of the height of the enclosing wall, with the top of the openings no less than 7 feet (2134 mm) above the top of the balcony. 3. Separation from the interior of the building is not re- quired for an exterior ramp or stairway located in a building or structure that is permitted to have unen- closed interior stairways in accordance with Section 1019.1. EXI 1023.1 General. Exits shall discharge directly to the exterior of the building. The exit discharge shall be at grade or shall pro- vide direct access to grade. The exit discharge shall not reenter building. Exceptions: 1. A maximum of 50 percent of the number and capacity of the exit enclosures is permitted to egress through areas on the level of discharge provided all of the fol- lowing are met: 1.1. Such exit enclosures egress to a free and unob- structed way to the exterior of the building, which way is readily visible and identifiable from the point of termination of the exit enclo- sure. 1.2. The entire area of the level of discharge is sep- arated from areas below by construction con- forming to the fire -resistance rating for the exit enclosure. 1.3. The egress path from the exit enclosure on the level of discharge is protected throughout by an approved automatic sprinkler system. All portions of the level of discharge with access to the egress path shall either be protected throughout with an automatic sprinkler sys- tem installed in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2, or separated from the egress path in accordance with the require- ments for the enclosure of exits. 2. aximum of 50 percen Hum er and capacity of the exit enclosures is permitted to egress through a vestibule provided all of the following are met: FLORIDA BUILDING CODE - BUILDING 10.29 MEANS OF EGRESS arranged a reasonable distance apart so that if one becomes blocked, the others will be available. Exception: Where a building is equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2, the separation distance of at least two of the exit doors or exit access doorways shall not be less than one-third of the length of the maximum overall diagonal dimension of the area served. 1014.3 Boiler, incinerator and furnace rooms. Two exit ac- cess doorways are required in boiler, incinerator and furnace rooms where the area is over 500 square feet (46 mz) and any fuel -fired equipment exceeds 400,000 British thermal units (Btu) (422 000 KJ) input capacity. Where two exit access door- ways are required, one is permitted to be a fixed ladder or an al- ternating tread device. Exit access doorways shall be separated by a horizontal distance equal to one-half the maximum hori- zontal dimension of the room. 1014.4 Refrigeration machinery rooms. Machinery rooms larger than 1,000 square feet (93 in') shall have not less than two exits or exit access doors. Where two exit access doorways are required, one such doorway is permitted to be served by a fixed ladder or an alternating tread device. Exit access door- ways shall be separated by a horizontal distance equal to one-half the maximum horizontal dimension of room. All portions of machinery rooms shall be within 150 feet (45 720 mm) of an exit or exit access doorway. An increase in travel distance is permitted in accordance with Section 1015.1. Doors shall swing in the direction of egress travel, regardless of the occupant load served. Doors shall be tight fitting and self -closing. 1014.5 Refrigerated rooms or spaces. Rooms or spaces hav- ing a floor area of 1,000 square feet (93 m2) or more, containing a refrigerant evaporator and maintained at a temperature below 68°F (20°C), shall have access to not less than two exits or exit access doors. Travel distance shall be determined as specified in Section 1015.1, but all portions of a refrigerated room or space shall be within 150 feet (45 720 mm) of an exit or exit access door where such rooms are not protected by an approved automatic sprinkler system. Egress is allowed through adjoining refriger- ated rooms or spaces. Exception: Where using refrigerants in quantities limited to the amounts based on the volume set forth in the Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 1014.6 Stage means of egress. Where two means of egress are required, based on the stage size or occupant load, one means of egress shall be provided on each side of the stage. 1014.6.1 Gallery, gridiron and catwalk means of egress. The means of egress from lighting and access catwalks, gal- leries and gridirons shall meet the requirements for occu- pancies in Group F-2. Exceptions: 1. A minimum width of 22 inches (559 mm) is per- mitted for lighting and access catwalks. 2. Spiral stairs are permitted in the means of egress. 3. Stairways required by this subsection need not be enclosed. 4. Stairways with a minimum width of 22 inches (559 mm), ladders, or spiral stairs are permitted in the means of egress. 5. A second means of egress is not required from these areas where a means of escape to a floor or to a roof is provided. Ladders, alternating tread devices or spiral stairs are permitted in the means of escape. 6. Ladders are permitted in the means of egress. SECTION 1015 EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCE 1015.1 Travel distance limitations. Exits shall be so located on each story such that the maximum length of exit access travel, measured from the most remote point within a story to the entrance to an exit along the natural and unobstructed path of egress travel, shall not exceed the distances given in Table 1015.1. Where the path of exit access includes unenclosed stairways or ramps within the exit access or includes unenclosed exit TABLE 1015.1 EXIT ACCESS TRAVEL DISTANCEa OCCUPANCY WITHOUT SPRINKLER SYSTEM (feet) WITH SPRINKLER SYSTEM (feet) A, E 150 b 200 300c' I-1 Not Permitted \250° I-2 Not Permitted 200° I-3 150 200` / D 150 200° M 150 250` R 175 325` S-2 Unlimited Unlimited S-1, F-1, F-2 200 250` F-3 300 400° 11-1 Not Permitted. 75c H-2, H-3, H-4, H-5 Not Permitted 100° For SI: 1 foot = 304.8 mm. a. Seethe following sections for modifications to exit access travel distance re- quirements: Section 402: For the distance limitation in malls. Section 404: For the distance limitation through an atrium space. Section 1015.2: For increased limitation in Groups F-1 and S-1. Section 1024.7: For increased limitation in assembly seating. Section 1024.7: For increased limitation for assembly open-air seating. Section 1018.2: For buildings with one exit. Chapter 31: For the limitation in temporary structures. b. Buildings equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accor- dance with Section 903.3.1.1 or 903.3.1.2. See Section 903 for occupancies where sprinkler systems according to Section 903.3.1.2 are permitted. c. Buildings equipped throughout with an automatic sprinkler system in accor- dance with Section 903.3.1.1. FLORIDA BUILDING CODE — BUILDING 10.23R FIXTURES, FAUCETS AND FIXTURE FITTINGS 404.4 (Florida Building Code, Building, ll-4.17) Toilet stalls. 404.4.1(Florida Building Code, Building, 11 -4.17. 1) Loca- tion. Accessible toilet stalls shall be on an accessible route and shall meet the requirements of Section 404.4. 404.4.2 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.17.2) Wa- ter closets. Water closets in accessible stalls shall comply with Section 404.3. 404.4.3 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.17.3) Size and arrangement. The size and arrangement of the stan- dard toilet stall shall comply with Figure 404.4.3(a), Stan- dard Stall. Standard toilet stalls with a minimum depth of 56 inches (1420 mm) [see Figure 404.4.3(a)] shall have wall -mounted water closets. If the depth of a standard toilet stall is increased at least 3 inches (75 mm), then a floor -mounted water closet may be used. Arrangements shown for standard toilet stalls may be reversed to allow ei- ther a left-handed or right-handed approach. Additional stalls shall be provided in conformance with Section 404.9.4 Exception: In instances of alteration work where provi- sion of a standard stall [see Figure 404.4.3(a)] is techni- cally infeasible or where plumbing code requirements prevent comb' s to rove either al ens 1 [se�stuar 404.4.3(b)] may vide feu of the standa New Construction: 1. The standard accessible restroom stall shall contain an accessible lavatory within it, the size of such lavatory to be not less than 19 inches wide by 17 inches deep, nomi- nal size, and wall mounted. The lavatory shall be mounted so as not to overlap the clear floor space areas required by Section 404.4 [see Fig.404.4.3 (a)] and to comply with Section 404.6 of the code. Such lavatories shall be counted as part of the required fixture count f e building. 2. The sible water cl e ocated in the cor- ner, diagonal to the door. 404.4.4 (Florida Building Code, Building,ll-4.17.4) Toe clear- ances. In standard stalls, the front partition and at least one side partition shall provide a toe clearance of at least 9 inches (230 mm) above the floor. If the depth of the stall is greater than 60 inches (1525 mm), then the toe clearance is not required. 404.4.5 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.17.5) Doors. Toilet stall doors, including door hardware, shall comply with Florida Building Code, Building, §I1-4.13. The doors shall be self -closing. If toilet stall approach is from latch side of the stall door, clearance between the door side of the stall and any obstruction may be reduced to a minimum of 42 inches (1065 mm) (see Figure 404.4.3). Doors shall not swing into the clear floor space of any fix- ture. 404.4.6 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11 -4.17.6) Grab bars. Grab bars complying with the length and positioning shown in Figure 404.4.3(a), Figure 404.4.3(b), Figure 404.4.3(c) and Figure 404.4.3(d) shall be provided. Grab bars may be mounted with any desired method as long as they have a gripping surface at the locations shown and do not obstruct the required clear floor area. Grab bars shall comply with Section 404.12. 404.5 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.18) Urinals. 404.5.1(Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.18.1) Gen- eral. Accessible urinals shall comply with Section 404.5. 404.5.2 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.18.2) Height. Urinals shall be stall -type or wall -hung with an elongated rim at a maximum of 17 inches (430 mm) above the finish floor. 404.5.3 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11 -4.18.3) Clear floor space. A clear floor space 30 inches by 48 inches (760 mm by 1220 mm) shall be provided in front of urinals to al- low forward approach. This clear space shall adjoin or over- lap an accessible route and shall comply with Florida Building Code, Building, §11-4.2.4. Urinal shields that do not extend beyond the front edge of the urinal rim may be provided with 29 inches (735 mm) clearance between them. 404.5.4 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11 -4.18.4) Flush controls. Flush controls shall be hand operated or auto- matic, and shall comply with Section 404.13, and shall be mounted no more than 44 inches (1120 mm) above the fin- ish floor. 404.6 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19) Lavatories 404. l (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19.1) Gen- eral. a requirements of Section 404.6 shall apply to lava- tory fix ures, vanities and built-in lavatories. 404.6.2 Florida Building Code, Building,ll-4.19.2) Height and c arances. Lavatories shall be mounted with the rim or cou er surface no higher than 34 inches (865 mm) above the ish floor. Provide a clearance of at least 29 inches (735 mm) above the finish floor to the bottom of the apron. Knee and toe clearance shall comply with Figure 404.6.2. 404.6.3 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19.3) Clear floor space. A clear floor space 30 inches by 48 inches (760 mm by 1220 nun) complying with Florida Building Code, Building, § 11-4.2.4 shall be provided in front of a lavatory to allow forward approach. Such clear floor space shall adjoin or overlap an accessible route and shall extend a maximum of 19 inches (485 mm) underneath the lavatory (see Figure 404.6.3). 404.6.4 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19.4) Ex- posed pipes and surfaces. Hot water and drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated or otherwise configured to pro- tect against contact. There shall be no sharp or abrasive sur- faces under lavatories. 404.6.5 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19.5) Fau- cets. Faucets shall comply with Section 404.13. Lever -op- erated, push -type and electronically controlled mechanisms are examples of acceptable designs. If self -closing valves are used, the faucet shall remain open for at least 10 seconds. 404.6.6 [Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.19.6(1)] Mirrors. Mirrors shall be mounted with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface no higher.than 40 inches (1015 mm) above the finish floor (see Figure 404.6.2). 404.7 (Florida Building Code, Building, 11-4.20) Bathtubs. FLORIDA BUILDING CODE — PLUMBING 4.9 TYPES OF CONSTRUCTION TABLE 601 FIRE -RESISTANCE RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS (hours) TYPE I TYPE II TYPE III TYPE IV TYPE V A B A B A B HT A B BUILDING ELEMENT Structural framea Including colurnns; girders, trusses 3b,g 2b 1 0 1 0 HT 1 0 Bearing walls Exterior£ 4 3 1 0 2 2 2 1 0 Interior 4b 3b 1 0 1 0 2b/14T 1 0 Nonbearing wails and partitions Exterior See Table 602 Nonbearing walls and partitions 0 0 0 0 0 0 See Section 602.4.6 0 0 Interior Floor construction joists 39 2 1d Oah Id pan HT 1 Oh Including supporting beams and [Roof construction 11/2`s I° 1` 0 I` 0 HT 1° 0 Including supporting beams and joists For SI: 1 foot= 304.8.mm. a. The structural fi-ame shall be considered to be the columns and the girders, beams, trusses and spandrels having direct connections to the columns and bracing members designed to carry gravity loads. The members of floor or roof panels which have no connection to the columns shall be considered secondary members and not a part of the structural frame. b. Fire -resistance ratings of the structural frame and bearing walls are permitted to be reduced by 1 hour where supporting one floor or one roof only. I I c. 1. Exceptin Factory -Industrial (F-1), Hazardous (H), Institutional (1), Mercantile (M).and Moderate -Hazard Storage (S-1) occupancies, fire protection of struc- tural members shall not be required, including protection of roof framing and decking where every part of the roof construction is 20 feet or more above any floor immediately below. 2. In Type I and II construction, fire -retardant -treated wood shall be allowed in buildings including girders and trusses as part of the roof construction when the building is: i. Two stories or less in height; ii. Type II construction over two stories; or iii. Type I construction over two stories and the vertical distance from the upper floor to the roof is 20 feet or more. d. Group B and M occupancies of Type 11 or III construction five or more stories in height shall be required to have a minimum 2-hour fire -resistance rating for the I I floor construction located over the basement. e. Not less than the fire -resistance raring required by other sections of this code. f. Not less than the fire -resistance rating based on fire separation distance (see Table 602). g. For Group A, B, E, F and R occupancies and parking garages, the required fire -resistance ratings for the structural frame, floor and roof construction, including supporting beams and joists, shall be permitted to be reduced by 1-hour where the building is protected throughout with an approved automatic sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1, but the fire resistance rating shall not be less than 1-hour. h. For unsprinklered Group E,occupancies of Type, II-B, III-B, IV or V-B construction, the floor constriction located immediately above useable space in basements shall have, a fire -resistance rating of not less than 1-hour. TABLE 602 FIRE -RESISTANCE RATING REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTERIOR WALLS BASED ON FIRE SEPARATION DISTANCEa FIRE SEPARATION DISTANCE (feet) TYPE.OF CONSTRUCTION GROUP H GROUP F-11 M, S-1 GROUP A, B, E, F-2, I, Rb, S-2,.0 I -A, I-B, III -A, III-13, IV 3 3 3 < 5c Others 3. 2 1 >_ 5 I -A, I-B, III -A, III-B, IV 3 2 2 < 10 Others 2 1 1 >_ 10 I -A, I-B, III -A, III-13, IV 2 2 2 < 20 IIB, VB 1 0 0 Others 1 I 1 > 20 I -A, I-13, III -A, III-B, IV I 1 I 5 30 Others 1 0 1 0 >_ 30 All 0 0 1 0 For Sl: I foot =304.8 min. a. Load -bearing exterior walls shall also comply with the fire -resistance rating requirements of Table 601. b. Group R-3 and Group U when used as accessory to Group R-3, as applicable in Section 101.2 shall not be required to have a fire -resistance rating where the fire separation distance is 3 feet or more. c. See Section 503.2 for parry walls. . .. ...... - vWlvo1 r1V1..I lum 602.4.6 Partitions. Partitions shall be of solid wood con- struction formed by not less than two layers of 1-inch (25 mm) matched boards or laminated construction 4 inches (102 mm) thick, or of 1-hour fire -resistance -rated construc- tion. 602.4.7 Exterior structural members. Where a horizontal separation of 20 feet (6096 mm) or more is provided, wood columns and arches conforming to heavy timber sizes shall be permitted to be used externally. 602.5 Type V. Type V construction is that type of construction in which the structural elements, exterior walls and interior walls are of any materials permitted by this code. SECTION 603 COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL IN TYPE I AND II CONSTRUCTION 603.1 Allowable materials. Combustible materials shall be permitted in buildings of Type I or II construction in the follow- ing applications and in accordance with Sections 603.1.1 through 603.1.3: Fire -retardant -treated wood shall be permitted in: 1.1. Nonbearing partitions where the required fire -re- sistance rating is 2 hours or less. 1.2. Nonbearing exterior walls where no fire rating is required. 1.3. Roof construction as permitted in Table 601, Note c, Item 3. 2. Thermal and acoustical insulation, other than foam plastics, having a flame spread index of not more than 25. Exceptions: 1. Insulation placed between two layers of noncombustible materials without an inter- vening airspace shall be allowed to have a flame spread index of not more than 100. 2. Insulation installed between a finished floor and solid decking without intervening air- space shall be allowed to have a flame spread index of not more than 200. 3. Foam plastics in accordance with Chapter 26, 4. Roof coverings that have an A, B or C classification. 5. Interior floor finish and interior finish, trim and mill- work such as doors, door frames, window sashes and frames. 6. Where not installed over 15 feet (4572 mm) above grade, show windows, nailing or furring strips, wooden bulkheads below show windows, their frames, aprons and show cases. 7. Finished flooring applied directly to the floor slab or to wood sleepers that are firestopped in accordance with Section 717.2.7. 8. Partitions dividing portions of stores, offices or similar places occupied by one tenant only and which do not es- tablish a corridor serving an occupant load of 30 or more shall be permitted to be constructed of fire -retar- dant -treated wood, 1-hour fire -resistance -rated con- struction or of wood panels or similar light construction up to 6 feet (1829 mm) in height. 9. Platforms as permitted in Section 410. 10. Combustible exterior wall coverings, balconies, bay or oriel windows, or similar appendages in accordance with Chapter 14. 11. Blocking such as for handrails, millwork, cabinets, and window and door frames. 12. Light -transmitting plastics as permitted by Chapter 26. 13. Mastics and caulking materials applied to provide flex- ible seals between components of exterior wall con- struction. 14. Exterior plastic veneer installed in accordance with Section 2605.2. 15. Nailing or furring strips as permitted by Section 803.4. 16. Heavy timber as permitted by Note c, Item 2, to Table 601 and Sections 602.4.7 and 1406.3. 17. Aggregates, component materials and admixtures as permitted by Section 703.2.2. 18. Sprayed cementitious an mineral fiber fire -resis- tance -rated materials installed to comply with Section 1 19. Materials used to protect penetrations in fire -resis- tance -rated assemblies in accordance with Section 712. 20. Materials used to protect joints in fire -resistance -rated assemblies in accordance with Section 713. 21. Materials allowed in the concealed spaces of buildings of Type I and II construction in accordance with Section 717.5. 22. Materials exposed within plenums complying with Section 602 of the Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 603.1.1 Ducts. The use of nonmetallic ducts shall be permit- ted when installed in accordance with the limitations of the Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 603.1.2 Piping. The use of combustible piping materials shall be permitted when installed in accordance with the limitations of the Florida Building Code, Mechanical and the Florida Building Code, Plumbing. 603.1.3 Electrical. The use of electrical wiring methods with combustible insulation, tubing, raceways and related components shall be permitted when installed in accordance with the limitations of Chapter 27 of the Florida Building Code, Building. 6.2 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE - BUILDING FIXTURES, FAUCETS AND FIXTURE FITTINGS TABLE 403.1—continued MINIMUM NUMBER OF REQUIRED PLUMBING FIXTURES fRaa Cartinne Ann 9 onrl Ana 41 WATER CLOSETS DRINIQNG (URINALS SEE SECTION FOUNTAIN 419.2) LAVATORIES (SEE BATHTUBS/ SECTION NO. CLASSIFICATION OCCUPANCY DESCRIPTION MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE SHOWERS 410.1) OTHER 1 per 75 Coliseums, arenas, for the first 1 per 40 for the skating rinks, pools 1,500 and 1 per first 1,500 and A-4 and tennis courts for 120 for the 1 per 60 for the I per 200 1 per 150 — 1 per 1,000 1 service sink indoor sporting remainder remainder ex - events and activities exceeding ceeding 1,500 1,500 Stadiums, 1 per 75 for the 1 per 40 for the amusement parks, first 1,500 and first 1,500 and A-5 bleachers and grandstands for 1 per 120 for the remainder 1 per 60 for the remainder 1 per 200 1 per 150 — 1 per 1,000 P 1 service sink outdoor spotting exceeding exceeding events and activities 1,500 1,500 2 Business (see Sec- Buildings for - tions 403.2, 403.4 the transaction of and 403.6) business, professional ser- vices, other services 1 per 25 for the first 50 and 1 per I per 40 for the first 50 B involving 50 for the remainder exceeding and 1 per 80 for the — 1 per 100 merchandise, office 50 remainder exceeding 50 buildings, banks, light industrial and uses 3 Educational E/D Educational facilities I per 50 I per 50 — 1 per 100 1 service sink 4 Factory and Structures in which industrial occupants are en- F-I and F-2 gaged in work fabri- cating, assembly or I per 100 1 per 100 P (see Section 411) 1 per 400 I service sink processing of prod- ucts or materials 5 Institutional I-1 Residential care 1 per 10 1 per 10 1 per 8 1 per 100 1 service sink Hospitals, ambulatory nursing 1 per room ` 1 per room ` 1 per 15 1 per 100 I service sink home patientsb per floor Employees, other 1-2 thanresidential1 care per 25 1 per 35 — 1 per 100 — Visitors, other than residential care per 1 75 P per 1 100 p — 1 per 500 — 1-3 Prisonsb 1 per cell 1 per cell I per 15 1 per 100 1 service sink Reformitories, de- 1-3 tention centers, and correctional center? 1 per 15 1 per 15 1 per 15 1 per 100 1 service sink (continued) 4.2 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE — PLUMBING Answers To Plan Review Response A-1 11B A-2 B A-3 Identified A-4 Complied A-5 A-6 See Attached A-7 Revised A-8 Revised A-9 Revised A-10 Revised A-11 Revised A-12 Revised A-13 See Attached A-14 See Attached M-1 Revised M-2 Revised M-3 Revised M-4 Revised P-1 Revised P-2 Revised P-3 See Attached P-4 Water In Break Room P-5 Is In Warehouse Door Hardware F—Series Flair Lever Flair Lever (Passage) Flair Lever (Keylock) A / *. .> 3 Flair Lever (Privacy) 1 CJ411/11� Flair Lever (Single Dummy) Answers To Plan Review Response A-1 1113 A-2 B A-3 Identified A-4 Complied A-5 A-6 See Attached A-7 Revised A-8 Revised A-9 Revised A-10 Revised A-11 Revised A-12 Revised A-13 See Attached A-14 See Attached M-1 Revised M-2 Revised M-3 Revised M-4 Revised P-1 Revised P-2 Revised P-3 See Attached P-4 Water In Break Room P-5 Is In Warehouse Door Hardware F—Series Flair Lever Flair Lever (Passage) } 10 Flair Lever (Keylock) PLANS FYjpr® CITY OF SANFO D Flair Lever (Privacy) 6 CA� Flair Lever (Single Dummy) Answers To Plan Review Response A-1 1113 A-2 B A-3 Identified A-4 Complied A-5 A-6 See Attached A-7 Revised A-8 Revised A-9 Revised A-10 Revised A-11 Revised A-12 Revised A-13 See Attached A-14 See Attached M-1 Revised M-2 Revised M-3 Revised M-4 Revised P-1 Revised P-2 Revised P-3 See Attached P-4 Water In Break Room P-5 Is In Warehouse Door Hardware F-Series Flair Lever Flair Lever (Passage) .ram Flair Lever (Keylock) Flair Lever (Privacy) Flair Lever (Single Dummy) City of Sanford Building Division 300 N. Park Ave Sanford, Florida 32771 Phone: 407-330-5656 Fax: 407-328-3859 PLAN REVIEW RESPONSE Date: December 28, 2006 Contact Person: John Schneeman Contact Phone Number: 407-324-8516 Contact Fax Number: 407-324-9244 Contact E-mail Address: Reference Number: Project Description: Tenant improvement / Interior alteration Job Address: 531 Codisco Way The following is a list of the areas of the submitted plans that contained violations of the codes adopted by the City of Sanford and enforced by the Building Division. The violations noted must be addressed before the plans can be approved. Changes must be submitted on the original submitted format. Changes to construction documents that require an Architect or Engineer's seal must be submitted with the appropriate seal. ARCHITECTURAL A-1 Provide the 2004 Florida Building Code construction type of the building. Identify if it is have a sprinkler system. (Note that this review is based on the structure having a sprinkler system. New comments maybe required if this is not the case.) A-2 Provide the 2004 Florida Building Code occupancy use groups. A-3 Identify the use of all rooms or spaces. Identify existing spaces that have not been changed. A-4 Provide a door schedule, including a hardware schedule. Unable to verify if proper maneuvering clearances are provided at the doors. Unable to verify which doors are intended to be rated. A-5 The plans indicate that a new stock room area is to be constructed. The plans indicate that it will be of combustible material. Assuming that the building is intended to be a construction type of II-B (Converting 2001 FBC of IV to II-B) combustible construction will not be allowed. FBC Table 601 and section 603.1. A-6 The main level corridor serves an occupant load exceeding 50. Two exits are required. The second exit shall not pass through the warehouse. The corridor shall not have a dead end exceeding 50-feet. See also section 1013.2 for adjoining room restrictions. FBC 1014.1, 1016.3, 1013.2, and 1013.3. A-7 The 2nd floor corridor has a dead end exceeding 50-feet to the elevator. FBC 1016.3. A-8 The plans are unclear but from a conversation with the contractor an opening is to be at the end of the walkway on the 2nd floor between the offices labeled Dorothy and Wes. This creates a dead end condition since exiting shall not be through the warehouse from the main space. FBC 1013.2, 1013.3, and 1016.3. A-9 The office supplies/storage exceeds 100 square feet and is an incidental use. The walls shall comply with FBC 302.1.1.1 see also FBC 710 for smoke partitions. -I- r i A-10 The break room as shown (without the counters or other equipment) has an occupant exceeding 50. Two exits are required. The second exit shall not pass through the warehouse. FBC 1004.1, 1014.1, 1013.2. A-11 The plans appear to show a possible storage room over the stairs accessed from Bobs office. The opening at the stairs shall have a guard to prevent a fall into the stairs. FBC 1012.1. A-12 Demonstrate that the restrooms on the main level are accessible. FBC 11-4.16. A-13 The plans as shown for the restrooms on the second floor do not meet accessibility requirements. Since the locations have changed the exception to use FBC Plumbing section 404.4.3 does not apply. FBC 11-4.16. A-14 The plans do not demonstrate that the vertical wheel chair lift is compliant with FBC 11- 4.11. Provide the documentation that demonstrates compliance. STRUCTURAL S-1 The plans indicate that a new stock room is to be constructed the plans do not indicate the design loads. FBC 1603.1.1, 1607.3 S-2 Provide footing sizing or justify that the slab is. adequate for support the of the new stock room. MECHANICAL M-1 The equipment schedule is incomplete. Provide CFM of the equipment. Identify the out door air in the schedule. Identify duct detectors when required. The phase rating of the units is inconsistent from the plan and the schedule. M-2 The walls surrounding the office supplies/ storage are required to be smoke partitions. The duct work penetrating the walls shall be protected by smoke dampers. FBC 710.7. M-3 The plans do not demonstrate how the outdoor air is to be provided to the units. M-4 Minimum outdoor air shall comply with FMC 403. PLUMBING P-1 Provide plumbing plans with isometrics of the drainage and venting systems, provide pipe sizing. P-2 Show the water heater location. P-3 Based on the occupant load of the warehouse and the office area the minimum fixture requirements are not meet. FPC Table 403.1. P-4 Drinking fountains shall be provided. FPC Table 403.1 P-5 A service sink shall be provided. FPC 403.1 Any error or omission in this plan review shall not be construed to grant approval of any violation of any of the adopted codes or municipal ordinances of this jurisdiction. Please direct any questions you may have to Wayne Thorne at (407) 330-5686 or fax to (407) 328-3859. You may also contact me by E-mail at thornew@ci.sanford.fl.us. -2- I Introduction I The Tracker Version 12 building The modem enables off -site. automation system.(BAS) is a heating, connections over standard phone lines. ` ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) It enables remote operation of the energy management system for small- Tracker BAS and provides the means to to medium -size buildings. It provides deliver alarms and messages to pagers. reliable, centralized control for HVAC The Ethernet card enables the Tracker. equipment, managing it for optimal controller to reside on an Ethernet/IP comfort and efficiency. network. A Tracker PC Workstation on The Tracker Version 12 BAS includes a the network has access to all Tracker controller (Figure 1) with.a liquid crystal controllers on the network. If multiple display (LCD) touch screen. The Tracker Tracker workstations and controllers BAS also includes optional Windows- reside on the network, you have the based software that can be installed on capability to selectively route alarms and a PC workstation: diagnostic messages to specified The Tracker Version 12 BAS is Tracker PC Workstations. Lon Mark® compliant. It communicates Both the touch screen and the PC with supported devices over a Trane provide an easy -to -use visual interface. Comm5 link. -The Comm5 link is a The interfaces enable an operator to set communication link that implements up and change HVAC operating LonTalk an open, industry -standard parameters and collect and display protocol. building information. Both the controller and the Tracker PC Workstation (in its recommended hardware configuration) provide modems or optional. Ethernet cards for remote access. ) touch screen TM ®.The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies: Comfort Manager, Precedent, ReliaTel, TCM, Tracer, Tracker, Trane, VariTrac, VariTrane, and Voyager from Trane; LonMark, LonTalk, and Neuron from Echelon; Windows from Microsoft. © 2003 American Standard Inc. BAS-PRC010-EN w TRAW i Features The Tracker Version 12 BAS offers the ,,r • .�_ ,.. �.: Ex. "Features exclusive to the PC a ` installer and operator features that software ensure its ease of use. The optional Tracker PC software offers Tracker BAS .features all the features of the Tracker controller Both the controller and the PC software and the.following features that are not of the Tracker BAS offer these features: available.at he controller: • Intuitive, menu -driven user interface Dial -in connection t • 365-day scheduling and 10 schedules • Backup and restore capability. i • Capability of including all equipment e Standard graphicsand HTML and devices in one schedule graphical interface ! • Temporary schedule override • Binary output programming capability • Easy -to -administer security system 'Operator -defined custom alarms with two levels of access capability Automatic daylight savings time • Printer support changeover •Connection to controllers over shared • Error and alarm messaging Ethernet/IP connection ' • Setpoint viewing and editing e E-mail forwarding of alarms and • Trend data collection messages i •Report generation • Standard timed override (after hours) E • Optimal start usage report • Standard daily, monthly, and yearly Features exclusive t0 the energy reports Controller Note: The Tracker PC software is not Several features of the Tracker BAS are needed to "set up and operate a typical exclusive to the controller. building. • Auto -configuration E. e Pager notification for error and alarm i messages • LCD touch screen ! Real-time receipt of alarm messages from networked controllers T E� System description R l The Tracker Version 12 BAS is reliable Tracker applications and can be easily installed, operated, The Tracker system goes well beyond and serviced. It simplifies the work of accurate temperature control. It the building operator and the installing provides centralized scheduling and contractor. control for multiple RTUs and split Tracker system devices systems. It provides multiple -zone In addition to the Tracker controller and control when paired with a VariTrac system. And it provides control for the optional Tracker PC Workstation, a multiple VariTrac systems. Tracker system consists of the interconnected devices on the Comm5 The Tracker BAS is packaged and link. delivered for use in four major Currently, all equipment that makes up a applications: comprehensive Tracker system is • Multiple constant -volume rooftop and available from Trane. In addition to a split single -zone system Tracker BAS, a Tracker system can • Changeover bypass system include the following Trane HVAC • Variable air volume system l components: • Water -source heat pump system • Voyager constant -volume rooftop units (RTUs) • Precedent constant -volume RTUs with ReliaTel controls • VariTrac central control panels (CCPs) i Voyager III variable air volume (VAV) RTU (with CCP) • Tracer loop controller (TLC) • Tracer ZN510 and ZN511 zone controllers, ZN517 unitary controller, and ZN524 water -source heat pump (WSHP) controllers • Tracer MP503 1/0 modules The Tracer 1/0 modules in a. Tracker system are used to monitor and control building equipment such as lights, exhaust fans, ventilation fans, and humidity control equipment The components of the Tracker network are connected in a daisy chain (Figure 2 t on page 4) configuration. Communication wire is twisted (shielded) pair wire. 5 F r E• 1 I Multiple constant -Volume Connecting multiple unit controllers to Trane rooftop and Spilt the Tracker BAS enables the installer and operator to: I Single -zone System • Save installation time and materials The Tracker BAS is capable of controlling costs by reducing the amount of wire multiple constant -volume Trane rooftop used and by requiring only a and split single -zone systems (Figure 2 thermistor in each area rather than a on page 7). The Trane unitary controller programmable zone sensor enables non-Trane HVAC systems to be .Schedule all devices from one o easily integrated into the Tracker location, rather than requiring that system. each device be scheduled - The Tracker BAS communicates with independently the unit controllers on the Comm5` •Monitor alarms from one location network and controls them to temperature. setpoints and operating parameters determined by the operator. With established communications, the Tracker BAS receives alarms I j automatically. , 6 BAS-PRC010-EN 7 %F r, Changeover bypass system The Tracker controller provides The Tracker BAS is capable of centralized scheduling and access to supervising and scheduling a VariTrac CCP alarms. Each CCP monitors its zone "vote" VAV system. To do this, Trane VariTrac sensors and allows each zone to changeover bypass zoning systems are its needs, which are determined by the introduced into the Tracker system. schedule and its setpoints. Based on that data, the CCP sets the operating A Tracker controller is connected to one mode (heat or cool) of .the HVAC or more VariTrac CCPs (Figure 3 on equipment: page 9). Each CCP is connected to one In,addition, the CCP also maintains a RTU, bypass dampers, and up to 24 zone dampers. operator -defined static pressure in the ductwork by controlling a bypass ;. f I I damper: i 8 BAS-PRC010-EN T Figure 3: Example changeover bypass system Tracker PC Workstation (optional) e Tracker controller, 5-n- ---------- Dial -in, direct, or Ethernet/IP connection E e— VariTrac CCP e- VariTrac CCP Voyager BTU Voyager BTU I Bypass Bypass damper damper i VariTrac VariTrac VariTrac VariTrac I damper damper damper damper ' O O E `O 0 Zone Zone Zone Zone sensor sensor sensor sensor BAS-PRC010-EN 9 i , rRME* 0 i i Variable air volume system applied, p pp ied, the VariTrac When is E The Tracker BAS is capable of CCP, like the Tracker BAS, auto- supervising and scheduling a system configures all devices and equipment to comprised of a VariTrac CCP and a factory default operating conditions and. Voyager III VAV RTU. In this application, activates the equipment. The VariTrac the Tracker controller uses the CCP to CCP automatically determines if the coordinate the RTU and its VAV boxes connected system is a changeover (Figure 4 on page 11). A Tracker bypass or VAV system and controls it controller can be connected to one or appropriately without operator or installer programming. When the CCP is more CCPs. Each CCP is connected to connected to the Tracker BAS, the CCP one Trane Voyager III variable air volume RTU. The Tracker controller provides and Tracker controllers begin to share I centralized scheduling and access to information. CCP alarms. This configuration.can include the following Trane equipment: • Tracker BAS • VariTrac CCP • Voyager III 27.5-ton to 50-ton RTU • VariTrac VAV boxes (not shown) • VariTrane VAV boxes Since these components are designed to work together, they offer the advantage of "plug and play" ease of installation. The VAV configuration offers I these additional advantages: II • Central location of major equipment and controls III I Inexpensive temperature control for a large number of zones • Simultaneous accommodation of heating and cooling, eliminating the heat/cool contention of the changeover bypass. system • Energy savings through the use of modulating fans and the isolation of unoccupied areas • Flexibility that enables easy, low cost I zoning changes o -10 BAS—PRCOI O—EN 1 T i Figure 4: Example combination VAV system and changeover bypass system Tracker PC Workstation 41 Tracker (optional) controller H Dial in, direct, or Ethernet/IP connection e— VariTrac CCP VariTrac CCP e x Voyager III VAV RTU Voyager RTU Bypass damper ariTrane VAV . O O a ampe VAV VariTrac VariTrac d � damper damper damper damper O O O O Zone Zone Zone Zone sensor sensor sensor sensor _ VAV system Changeover bypass system BAS-PRC010-EN 11 � I Water -source heat pump In addition, the Tracker BAS provides S StefYl tested and proven optimization routines Y that can be enabled. The routines - The Tracker BAS is capable of provide loop optimization, pre -cooling, coordinating the operation of and pre -heating. For efficiency, the components of a water -source heat routines take advantage of low outside pump (WSHP) system (Figure 5 on air temperatures. page 13). When a Tracker BAS is integrated into a WSHP system, it The following components must be. s provides centralized scheduling and: present for the integrated WSHP control. Also,: it can perform tasks such system to operate: as logging alarms, collecting trend data, • Tracker model WSHP i and generating reports. • Tracer loop controller (compressors on The Tracker BAS communicates directly the individual heat pumps will not i to a Tracer loop controller (TLC). The TLC operate unless a TLC is on the o manages and optimizes the operation of communication link reporting water pumps, valves, boilers, and cooling flow and water temperature)' towers for the WSHP system. The — • Up to 100 Tracer ZN510, ZN511, Tracker BAS communicates with up to ZN524; or ZN517 controllers; or i 100 daisy -chained WSHP controllers. LonTalk communication interface for j Voyager (LCI-V), or LonTalk ' communication interface for ReliaTel I I l (LCI-R). 12 BAS-PRC010-EN TAMWE i Figure 5: Example water -source heat pump system. Tracker PC Workstation Tracker controller (optional) Version 11 or 12 \ ' _ Dial -in, direct, or Ethernet/IP connection Communication link i wire o Tracer loop 0000:: Communication link >o - controller wire (daisy chain) Tracer ZN511 q— Water -source Water -source Non-Trane or heat pump heat pump generic water - (with Tracer (with Tracer source ZN524) ZN510) heat pump Pump i E Pum p Zone Zone Zone. sensor sensor sensor i I Cooling Tower Boiler s BAS-PRCO10-EN 13 Connection capacities l 1 The Tracker Version 12 BAS is available Table 1 shows the maximum number of in five models. Each model is devices with which the new and old distinguished by its approvals and by the Tracker controllers can communicate. number and type of devices that it can communicate with and control. Table.l: Tracker communication capacities f Tracker 11.0 WSHP 100 100 0 4 0 0 0 0 1 105 Version 12.0 11-12 Tracker 10.0- 12 12 12 5 4 0 0 0 0 0 21 Version 12.0 24 24 24 10 4 0 0 0 0 0 38 10-12 Tracker 6.0-6.5. Stat 4 0 0 0 0 4 1 0 2 0, 6 Version 1- Stat 7 0 0 0 0 7 2 0 4 0 7 6 Stat 16 0 0 0 0 12 2 0 8 0 16 5.0- Stat 4 0 0 0 0 4 1 2, 2 0 6 5.12 Stat 7 0 0 0 0 7 2 2 4 0 7 Stat 16 0 0 0 0 12 2 8 4 0 16 4.0-4.2 . CM 0 0 0 0 12 2. 8 0 0 16 S7 0 0 0 0 7 2 2 0 0 7 3.0 CM 0 0 0 0 12 2 8 0 0 16 CV 0 0 0 0 12 2 0 0 0 16 2.1-2.5 CM 0 0 0 0 12 1 12 0 0 16 CV 0 0 0 0 12 1 0 0 0 16 1.3-2.0 CM 0 0 0 0 12 1 12 0 0 16 Note 1: The BTUs communicating with a Tracker Version 10 or greater controller directly must be constant volume only. To interface a Tracker controller with a Voyager III variable air volume (VAV) RTU having a variable frequency drive or inlet guide vanes you must use a CCP to coordinate the Voyager and the VAV boxes. The Tracker controller can then interface with up to five (model 12) or 10 (model 24) CCPs controlling one Voyager III each. Note 2: The Tracker water -source heat pump IWSHP) models must detect and coordinate with a TLC to insure water flow before individual water - source heat pump compressors are allowed on. Note 3: The Tracker model 12 can communicate with a maximum of 21 devices: any combination of up to 12 SCCs, five CCPs, and four 1/0 controllers. Each Voyager and Precedent RTU must have a Trane unit controller with a Comm5 interface card. The Precedent RTU must be equipped with a ReliaTel unit controller. Each CCP provides control of one RTU and up to 24 VariTrac zones or 32 delivered VAV zones. Note 4: The Tracker model 24 can communicate with a maximum of 38 devices each: any combination of up to 24 SCCs, 10 CCPs, and four 1/0 controllers. Each Voyager and Precedent RTU must have a Trane unit controller with a Comm5 interface card. The Precedent RTU must be equipped with a ReliaTel unit controller. Each CCP provides control of one RTU and up to 24 VariTrac zones or 32 delivered VAV zones. i 14 BAS-PRC010-EN i I a YRAMFEO f Supported device descriptions i Voyager and Precedent controller and a Comm5 communication rOOftO units interface card. The.Comm6 card enables p Ithe unit controller to communicate over Rnth thp. \/nvAnAr An(i PracariPnt RTI JS - I n TolL —+... rL Tkn T—Lor \Inrcinn.. Voyager RTU 16 BAS-PRC010-EN i Tracer loop controller and water -source heat pump system The Tracker model WSHP requires a Tracer loop controller (TLC) to enable SCC compressor operation. It also requires water -source heat pumps (WSHPs). The TLC is a configurable direct digital controller that monitors and controls WSHP systems. It controls and optimizes the boiler, cooling tower, valves, pumps, and individual WSHPs (Figure 8). Figure 8: Water -source heat pumps (horizontal and vertical) s Using the TLC with the Tracker model WSHP provides time -saving advantages, equipment -saving alarms, and easy -to - use standard applications. Note: See TLC documentation for input and output descriptions. Trane WSHPs are available in several sizes and can be purchased with factory - installed, Tracer ZN controls. The WSHP communication link is daisy -chained to the Tracker model WSHP. The Tracker model WSHP with its TLC can coordinate.up to.100 Trane WSHPs. It is designed for easy field installation, and commissioning. The system has . centralized diagnostic capabilities, proven loop optimization and control, automatic system configuration, cooling tower control, and, automatic recovery routines that prevent nuisance alarm calls. BAS-PRC010-EN 17 18 BAS-PRC0107EN TRAME Tracer ZN524 Water -Source Table 1 shows the maximum number of heat pump controller Tracer ZN524 WSHP controllers with which the Tracker controllers can The Tracer ZN524 is a full -featured, communicate. Table 4 shows the Tracer factory -installed, DDC WSHP controller ZN524 1/0 capacities. (Figure 7). It communicates on the Comm5 link and is configured to Figure 10: Tracer ZN524 . support: • Single speed flan • Up to two compressors PI • Electric heat • Waterside economizing • Dehumidification T� •.= It is purchased as a card with no 0 enclosure. Features of the Tracer ZN524 h `' include random start, manual output test, automatic heat and cool determination, occupied and unoccupied modes, smart reset, peer -to -peer communications; active dehumidification, waterside economizing electric/boilerless heat. Table 4: Tracer ZN524 1/0 capacities • Low temperature detector • 'Fan Zone space temperature (freezestat) Reversing valve Local setpoint • Condensate overflow Compressor 1 •. Fan input mode • Occupancy/generic Compressor 2 Leaving water temperature • Fan status Two -position damper actuator Discharge air temperature • Reheat/electric reheat Entering water temperature • Isolation valve 1 Outside air temperature • Isolation valve 2 Relative humidity • Waterside economizer T E• 0 I Tracer ZN517 unitaryDevices. controlled by the Tracer ZN517 COCItC011eC unitary controller include electro- mechanically controlled 2-heat/2-cool The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller (2H/2C) or 4-cool (4C) rooftop units, heat (Figure 11) is a stand-alone HVAC pumps, and split systems. The Tracer controller. When connected to a Tracker ZN517 controls temperature and other controller, the Tracer ZN517 unitary comfort -related conditions. Connecting controller becomes a communicating a Tracker controller to it enables an LonMark®-compliant device with an operator to schedule, route alarms, and SCC profile. The Tracker controller, monitor the entire system.. through the Tracer ZN517, can then communicate with and control the Table 1 shows the maximum number of equipment. Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers with which the Tracker controllers can ; Figure 11: Tracer ZN517 communicate. Table 5 shows the Tracer ZN517.1/0 capacities, f n Table 5: Tracer ZN517-1/0 capacities Imo$ fs'%.. mputa IMBinary s r Bmaryzoutputs : Analog inputs • Enable/Disable or Occupancy Supply fan Space temperature from Trane thermistor • Status: Fan or Generic Cool 1/Compressor 1 Setpoint input from Trane zone sensor(0-1K Q • Cool 2/Compressor 2 Discharge air temperature from Trane thermistor • Heat 1/Reversing Valve/Coo13- Universal input from an outside air temperature/ • Heat 2/Auxiliary Heat/Cool 4 generic temperature Trane thermistor, RH, or CO2 • Exhaust Fan sensor • Economizer Open/Close Note: Each output is rated fora maximum of 1 A at 24 Vac. One normally open (Form A) relay contact will be provided. 24 Vac will be wired in common to one side of all relay contacts. 20 BAS-PRC010-EN 9 T E* Tracer MP503 1/0 module The Tracer MP503 provides four The Tracer MP503 input/output module universal inputs and four binary outputs. (Figure 12) accepts electrical signals The universal inputs can receive and from a variety of sensors. Also, it interpret binary (on/off), and analog controls the state of binary outputs by (range) values. Connecting to the energizing and de -energizing relays. module enables the Tracker controller to Changing the state of a relay enables monitor Trane temperature, relative the 1/0 module to turn a device on or off. humidity'(RH), and CO2 sensors. Figure 12 Tracer MP503 Using the Tracker PC software, the binary outputs can be programmed to energize and de -energize the relays in i 4 response to system conditions and E �tJ schedules. I Table.1. shows the maximum number of t Tracer MP503 1/0 modules with which 9 zsH _ the Tracker controllers can «; communicate. Table 6 shows the Tracer MP503 1/0 module capacities. a _ Table 6: Tracer MP503 1/0 capacities • Thermistor (1OK Slat 77°F [25°CD Each output is rated for a maximum of 1 A at 24 Vac. One normally open • Trane CO2 sensor (0 to 10 Vdc) (Form A) relay contact will be provided. 24 Vac will be wired in common to • Trane relative humidity (RH) sensor (4 to 20 mA) one side of all relay contacts. Binary input BAS-PRC010-EN 21 i L, i y Comm5 communication I i The Tracker Version 12 BAS controller is Note: Ancillary sensors (such as a Comm5 device. Comm5 is the fifth temperature and humidity sensors) that generation Trane communication are hard -wired to the terminals on the ' architecture. It implements LonTalk, an Tracker, CCP, and 1/0 module are open, industry -standard protocol. standard resistive -type sensors and do The RTUs, CCPs, unitary controllers, and not communicate using LonTalk. They I/O controllers that the Tracker controller only provide analog or binary inputs and communicates with reside on a LonTalk outputs. FTT-1 OA network. They provide data LonTalk devices from other using LonMarkO standard network manufacturers will be tested for variable types (SNVTs, pronounced sniv- compatibility with the Tracker BAS. its) and configuration properties. Devices that are compatible will be ' The HVAC equipment controllers approved for inclusion in the Tracker i employ SCC profiles, as defined by system. Necessary support I LonMarkO Interoperability Association. documentation for approved devices will E Table 7 shows the devices with which be released, when completed. the Tracker controller can communicate and the LonMarko profiles that the devices use. t Table 7: Comm5 network devices secs: secs: Voyager RTU (with a LonTalk communication Generic (65.00) with unit type HVT_ROOFTOP interface [LCI] card) Generic (85.00) with unit type HVT_GENERIC - Precedent RTU (with a ReliaTel LCI [RLCID Generic(85.00) with unit type HVT_HEAT_PUMP Tracer ZN517 unitary controller New VariTrac CCP Custom profile (82.06) Tracer MP503 1/0 module Custom profile (82.08) Tracer loop controller Custom profile (82.01) 22 BAS-PRC010-EN i x T E' ' / \ The module is designed to provide Main module Display module ample room to insert wire into the terminals. The termination screws are fully exposed and are more than 2 in. (5 The termination module contains the cm) from the sides of the module. termination board, which accepts all When wiring is complete, the shipping electrical connections for the controller. container can be slipped back over the The main module contains the main module to protect it from construction logic board. The display module contains debris until the installer is ready to the touch screen, which enables the. complete the installation. operator to interact with the controller. Install the termination module The first step in the Tracker installation procedure is to select a location and mount the termination module on a wall (Figure 14). Figure 14: Installed termination module BAS-PRC010-EN 23 Legend = Transformer Twisted pair, shielded wire S _ — Earth ground per Trane specifications _ Thermistor device per =Shield termination = Shield ground Trane specifications Termination resistor T = Contact points _ Figure note i Note 1: All customer wiring must be in accordance with national, state, and local electrical codes. Note 2: Trane recommends a dedicated transformer for 24 Vac power. Note 3: Alarm relay circuit must not exceed 24 Vac, 1 A. Note 4: Do not apply voltage to the priority shutdown or meter inputs. Note 5: See product literature for Comm5 wire connection details. i 24 BAS-PRC010-EN BAS-PRC010-EN 25 a- � a eration An operator can set up and change Tracker controller operation Pressing a function button opens the HVAC operating parameters and collect The LCD touch screen, combined with function. Once open, buttons on the ; ` and display building information at either an intuitive menu -driven user interface, userinterface' screens enable the the Tracker controller or the PC provides access to the Tracker system operator to navigate to specific data ` workstation. Each location provides from the controller. display and data entry screens. access to n easy -to -use user interface. For example, to view status, the Using the controller user interface operator presses the View function , The user interface Home screen 'button. On the Building Information (Figure 18) is the entry point to the screen that displays (Figure`19) is a Tracker system. The screen displays five button for each building area or piece of function buttons: View, Alarm, equipment in the building.,Each button I Schedule, After Hours, and Advanced.. shows current status (such as,, w temperature, status of an analog input, or state of a binary output). Figure78: Controller Home screen 3 26 BAS-PRC010-EN Subsequent selections enable the PC software operation PC operator support operator to navigate to screens that A personal computer running Tracker PC Beyond its ease of use, the PC software provide additional detail. For example, software provides local (direct user interface provides operator support the operator has only to press the connection) or remote (dial -in or LAN) that is similar to that of the controller. In appropriate area or equipment button at access to the Tracker controller. addition: the Building Information screen and a • It provides online help, which contains screen with more detail displays. From The PC operator can access all functions p p. the Building Information screen; the that the controller operator can access. all the procedures that can be operator can navigate to any status in In addition, the PC operator has access ; performed with the user interface. one to three steps. to functions that are not available to the • It provides printer support, which controller operator: Binary Output enables the operator to print operating Controller operator support Programming, Custom Alarming, and procedures. Beyond its ease of use, the user Print. The Tracker PC software CD case interface provides additional operator contains printed installation instructions ( Using the PC user interface f support: - for the PC software." t,also contains The user interface Home screen • It informs the operator of changes (Figure 20), which displays in the instructions omhow to access the online ! that are about to be made and asks for workspace area, is the entry point to the ` help. The Tracker CD contains an confirmation before making those electronic copy of ` all printed user Tracker system from the PC software. changes. documentation. • Its alarm buttons; when pressed, can A tree displays to the left of, the display instructions and notes on how workspace area. The tree shows all to best handle the problem. devices in the Comm5 network. I Its service and alarm messages help Clicking a function button or menu item to protect HVAC equipment. They opens the function. Once inside, enable the operator to ward off future buttons, lists, and tabs enable the problems and correct current operator to navigate to specific data 9 problems, so tenant comfort can be display screens and data entry screens. maintained. For example, to view the status of an j A printed user guide containing all the RTU, the operator clicks the device on procedures that can be performed with the tree. The selected device then the user interface is provided with the displays in the workspace area Tracker controller. There is also an (Figure 21). electronic copy of the userguide on the Tabs at the top of the workspace area Tracker PC software CD. enable the operator to easily access and view the parameter settings and current status of the selected device. I BAS-PRC010 EN 27 i 28 BAS-PRC010-EN ' Scheduling ` |naddition, the Tracker BAScan beset ` schedule means that changes tuthe Runningabui|dingaue�ioiont�uu bui|dingschedule aenulonger adm* ' upto0van�easchedule based onthe possiblen � HyAC means '=-- -'--scheduling i labor-intensiveef�x1 j of occupancy nuo�.The heu�ng , only when needed Most often, the screen Figure ^2"''"`=" �~^ and000ingno�mimm�xd�oamame ' ' need is ' the ~~~ fmmthe oomm||oruser i�e�aoe. ` amoma�oa|�m�uo�dto�andby \ building,"' ' "" "=~" yet, "the occupancy °' Figure 23shows ascheduling screen ' settings when the area is not occupied specific areas b nofthoui|ding, frnn nthePCsoftwaouaerintedaoe and t0000upiodoe�inguvyhenpoop|e � - Tho�aoko BAS�mp� scheduling. h � simplifies � B«i|di»g«u«unamocan oaoi�ov*rhde ` amdateo�d isnolonger necessary tocreate a unoccupied areas to provideoomfort for ' ' schedule each separate occupancy --' predetermined lengths ~' time by device. --,--- HVACdovooTh oanome�'a' pressing ) schedule and attach several devices sensor or by using theTracker controller <membendtoit. From 1to10schedules or PC user '^'"''a^". � may bocreated. Grouping devices inu Figure 22:Controller scheduling screen ' ' � ` m Figure 23:PCsoftware scheduling screen � � uAs-Pnc010-Ew sm � } ontroller specifications Power requirements Analog input 24 Vac nominal (19-30 Vac) T.hermistor: 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 40 VA minimum 10KW at 77°F. (25°C) Class 2 transformer required From —50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C) Operating environment Binary inputs Temperature; Utility pulse meter From 32°F to 122°F (0-50°C) User -supplied dry contacts only Humidity: Tracker -supplied voltage: 12 Vdc From 10% to 90% relative humidity, nominal (10-14 Vdc), 12 mA nominal non -condensing (10-14 mA) Storage environment Priority shutdown User -supplied dry contacts only Temperature: Tracker -supplied voltage: 12 Vdc From —40°F to 1850F (-40°C to 85°C) nominal (10-14 Vdc), 12 mA nominal Humidity: (10-14 mA) From 5% to 95% relative humidity, Binary output non -condensing Alarm relay Cabinet Tracker -supplied relay NEMA 1 I Single -pole single -throw (SPST) dry resin enc osure Plenum rated contact rated at 24 Vac, 1 A maximum Mounting Memory backup ' Flat wall surface with a conduit box that At power loss, the Tracker controller E is either: backs up memory and stores all data for Recessed, 2 in. x 4 in: (5 cm x 10 cm) seven days; after seven days, alarms are Recessed, 4 in. x 4 in. (10 cm x 10 not retained cm) Approvals Dimensions UL and C-UL listed: I See Figure 24 on page 31 for a depiction 916,. Energy management equipment of the controller dimensions: Flammability rating: Height: 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) UL 94-5V (UL flammability rating for Width: 10.25 in. (26.04 cm) plenum use) Depth: 2.75 in. (6.99 cm) FCC: FCC Part 15, Class A, CFR 47 Minimum clearances cE: Top: 12 in. (30 cm) Approvals for Models 12, 24, and Bottom: 12 in. (30 cm) WSHP Left: 12 in. (30 cm) Right: 12 in. (30 cm) Front: 36 in. (91 cm) Weight 2.5 lb. (1.13 kg) i 30 BAS-PRC010-EN eAgElk TRAMF i i Figure 24: Controller dimensions RION ) Top view 10.25 in. 2.75 in. (26.04 cm) (6.99 cm) g i 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) Side view Front view FI ' Bottom view Figure 25: Controller minimum clearances - T y 12 in. (30 cm) 12 in. ®� 12 in. 36 in. . (30 cm) (30 cm) (91 cm) Front Back 12 in. 54 in. l Distance (30 cm) (1.4 m) to floor BAS-PRC010-EN 31 I 1 I i E k i = /' ® �A�I'11 1- LoNMARK" Federal Supply Schedule SPONSOR TJMNEe Literature Order Number BAS-PRC010-EN File Number PL-ES-BAS-000-PRC010-0503 Supersedes BAS-PRC010-EN November 2002 Trane Stocking Location Inland A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to For more information, contact your local Trane change design and specifications without notice. Only qualified technicians should perform the office or e-mail us at comfortC@trane.com installation and servicing of equipment referred to in this publication. Mechanical Specifications - 8. Minimum local heating position pump controller for a VariTrac Variable Air Volume setpoint",when enabled (0- system. Changeover/Bypass Units 100%°). Factory Default: disabled B' Outputs: Binary outputs - Central Control Panel (optional relay board) contacts *hot water or electric reheat dnly `, rated at 0.5 A; 30VAC, 12 VA pilot duty. System Communications C. Inputs. Binary inputs are < The Unit Control Module sends In addition to the above setpoints, provided for occupied/unoccupied and receives data from a the following 'status information and priority shutdown. Each VariTrac Central Control Panel can be obtained at the Central input requires; should the via twisted wire pair serial Control Panel (if equipped with function be desired, an isolated, ` communications. The Central the operator display) or Tracker: ungrounded, remote contact. Control Panel issues override 1. Active cooling temperature The contacts must be capable of commands to the Unit Control setpoint. passing 15 mA of DC current. Module. Override commands 2: Active heating temperature D. Dimensions: 8.67 inches include: setpoint. (220mm) high, 10.24 inches 3. Current damper position: (260mm) wide, 2.61-inches 1. Drive damper to minimum 4. Current zone temperature. (66mm) deep in a.plastic position - Heat outputs are - 5. Unit reheat type; enclosure. - enabled. enabled/disabled. E. Power: 20 to 30 VAC,>30 VA, 2. Drive damper fully open - Heat 6. Auxiliary. Air Temperature - dedicated external'transformer outputs are disabled. Available only if the unit has an required. 3. Drive damper fully closed - auxiliary, temperature sensor. F. Operating Temperature Heat outputs are disabled: Range: 32-120F (1-49C) 4. Drive damper to maximum Sequence of Operation G. Operating Humidity, Range: position - Heat outputs are The Unit Control Module 10-90% non -condensing enabled for hot water reheat, and continuously monitors the zone disabled for: staged electric:. temperature against its setpoint reheat. and varies the primary airflow as Functions 5. Disable unit reheat (hot water required to meet zone setpoints. A. System control. Thecentral and staged electric reheat only). " Airflow is limited by minimum and control panel scansthe VariTrac maximum position setpoints. unit control modules to determine UCM Setpoints the deviations from temperature ' The following unit setpoints The Central Control Panel setpoint, time of deviation, time reside in the Unit Control Module. broadcasts the supply air from last changeover and number in nonvolatile memory. These temperature to the Unit Control of'unit'control modules requiring setpoints are editable from the Modules, which then changes the heating or cooling. Based upon Central Control Panel or the control action to cooling or this information, the system Tracker via the communications heating as appropriate. When hot heat/cool mode is selected. The " link. water reheat is present, remote central control panel also heat will remain enabled when monitors the system air 1. Occupied cooling temperature even when the Unit Control temperature to determine setpoint 30E-100F (-1C-37C) Module is in heating control capacity staging and to ensure Factory Default: 74F (23C) action. When staged electric that high and low temperature 2. Occupied heating temperature reheat is present, remote heat limits are not violated. setpoint 20E-100F (-6C-37C) will be disabled when the Unit Factory Default: 71 F (21 C) Control Module is in heating System temperature control is 3. Unoccupied cooling control action. accomplished by switching. relays. temperature setpoint 30E-100F (- to sequence either the heat pump 1 C-37C) Factory Default: 85F Hot water reheat and electric or air conditioning unit; (29C)' reheat is energized with on/off, alternatively, system temperature 4. Unoccupied heating staged outputs. A normally control may be -accomplished ' temperature setpoint 20E-100F (- closed hot water valve is required through a communications link 6C-37C) Factory Default: 60F for hot water reheat. Both reheat when a Voyager or other Reliatel 05C) configurations can energize up to control equipped unit is used. 5. Minimum position setpoint (0- three stages of heat. 100%). 10% for packed stock. The central control panel also ! 6. Maximum position setpoint (0- General controls system static air 100%). 100% for packed stock. A. Program options: Each central pressure to the design pressure ' 7. Minimum heating position control panel is individually by opening and closing the setpoint" (0-100%). 10% for configurable, as eitheran air bypass damper. Bypass damper packed stock. conditioner controller or heat Trane Submittal control is accomplished via a 4. Auxiliary heat communications link. 5. Reversing valve 6. Outside air, heat/cool, or ICS The systems sixth binary output can be configured to disable D. Grouping: Groups can provide outside air ventilation during the greater flexibility for multiple unoccupied mode, to reflect the tenant buildings. The central system heat/cool status, or to be control panel can have up to four controlled by an ICS system. groups of zones. Overrides may be applied to groups B. Control options: The following control options are selectable at the central control panel: Energy saver mode: Energy saver mode releases all VariTrac dampers from their minimum position settings when the system is in active operation, allowing zone dampers receiving undesirable supply air temperature to completely shut off, preventing the overheating or overcooling of the space with the unwanted air: Ventilation mode: Ventilation mode allows enhanced ventilation by the central control panel by driving all zone dampers to four times their cooling minimum, limited by their maximum position when the - system air handler is operating in a fan only mode. 6 ! Priority shutdown: When the supply air temperature sensor of the central control panel has failed, the central control panel automatically disables the fan, and all stages of heating and cooling. C. Air conditioning unit control., When configured as a 2 heat/2 cool controller, the central control panel binary outputs are designated as follows: 1. Fan 2. Cool 1 3. Cool 2 4. Heat 1 5. Heat 2 6. Outside air, heat/cool, or ICS C. Heat pump control: When . configured as a heat pump controller, the binary outputs are designated as follows: 1. Fan 2. Compressor 1 3. Compressor 2 Trane Submittal O O o0o 0 ® 0 MI 2.71 [69mm] o® ®o —3.66 [93mm]—---2.96 [75mm]— Back View Mounting Trane Submittal 4.92 [125mm] L__ Field Wiring -Variable Air Volume Changeover/Bypass Units Central Control Panel Wiring Termination Board TB1 TB1 See Note 1 , � 1 �24 24 Vac V See Note 2. _ Line Voltage - �2 A 3 f �4 NU 5 OS S ' ]PH 6 RIB 7 RID See Note 3 n .. U 8 1N J C See Note 3 9 C C' 10 1CLIp To Voyager Comm4 link 11 J M C A and UCM's r 12, 13 1�IC tomm5 14JMS SeeNote 4 Tracker 70 15 Comm5 UCM LEGEND 0 Transformer Twisted pair, shielded wire per Trane specifications Earth ground " TContact points Shield ground Note 1: All customer wiring must be in accordance with national, state, and local electrical codes. Note 2: Trane requires a dedicated transformer for 24 Vac power. Note 3: Do not apply voltage to the priority shutdown or unoccupy. Note 4: See product literature for.Comm5 wire connection details. Trane Submittal ------------- Submittal The Trane Company A Division of American Standard Inc.. 1 Tracker 12, Tracker 24 Submittal: Mechanical Specs Simple Building Control The Tracker Version 10 building automation system (BAS) is a heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) energy management system for small- to medium -size buildings. It provides `reliable, centralized control for HVAC equipment, managing it for optimal comfort and efficiency. The Tracker BAS includes a controller with a liquid crystal display (LCD) touch screen. The Tracker BAS also includes optional Windows -based software that can be installed on a PC workstation. The Tracker BAS is LonMark® compliant. It communicates with supported devices over a Trane Comm5 link. The Trane Comm5 link is a communication link that implements LonTalk and a LonTalk FTT-10A network. LonTalk is an open, industry- standard protocol. Both the controller and the PC PC (in its recommended hardware configuration) provide a modem. The modem enables off - site connections over standard phone lines. It enables remote operation of the Tracker BAS and provides the means to deliver alarms and messages to pagers. Both the touch screen and the PC provide an easy -to -use visual interface. The interfaces enable an operator to set up and change HVAC operating parameters and collect and display building information. The Tracker BAS is a reliable and easy -to -install, operate, and service building management system. It simplifies the work of the building operator and the installing contractor. System components Currently, all equipment that makes up a comprehensive Tracker system is available from Trane. In addition to a Tracker BAS, a Tracker system can include the following Trane HVAC components: • Trane Voyager constant -volume rooftop units (BTUs). •Trane Precedent constant - volume RTUs with ReliaTel controls • Trane VariTrac central control panels (CCPs) • Trane Voyager III variable air volume (VAV) RTU (with CCP) • Trane Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers - used to control and incorporate non-Trane equipment into the system • Trane Tracer MP503 1/0 modules The Tracer MP503 1/0 modules in a Tracker system are used to monitor and control building equipment such as lights, exhaust fans, ventilation fans, and humidity control equipment The components of the Tracker network are connected in a daisy chain or star configuration. Features Both the controller and the PC software of the Tracker BAS offer these features: • Intuitive LCD touch screen user interface • 365-day scheduling and 10 schedules • Capability of including all equipment and devices in one schedule Temporary schedule override Easy -to -administer security system with two levels of access • Automatic daylight savings time changeover Error and alarm messaging Setpoint viewing and editing Auto configuration When Trane Comm5 devices are used as a system and power is applied to the controller, the Tracker BAS automatically configures itself. It is no longer necessary to program the building management system. During auto configuration, the controller: • Discovers all devices on the communication link • Loads all devices into a non - erasable memory database • Turns to On or Occupied all discovered HVAC equipment except the binary output relays of the Tracer MP503 1/0 module, which remain de -energized (Off) After auto configuration, the building is under the control of the Tracker controller and its factory defaults. At this point, the controller can run the building with no further involvement of personnel. The installer or operator can choose, now or later, to replace the device IDs (Neuron IDs set at the factory) with descriptive names and provide a building schedule. Features exclusive to the controller Auto -configuration Pager notification for error and alarm messages • LCD touch screen Features exclusive to the PC software Dial -in connection Backup and restore capability Standard graphics and HTML graphical interface • Binary output programming capability • Operator -defined custom alarms capability • Printer support Note: The Tracker PC software is not needed to set up and operate a typical building. The Tracker BAS is available in three models. Each model is distinguished by its approvals and by the number and type of devices that it can communicate with and control. Models/Capacities Tracker 12: 12 SCC (Space Comfort Controllers as defined by LonMark) + 5 CCP (VariTrac Central Control Panels) + 4 ZN503 (input/Output Modules) C:IDOCUMENTSAND SETTINGSIFEDCYIMYDOCUMENTSIPRODUCTITRACKER& VERITRACISUBMITTALSIMACKERBMTK SUBMITTAL.DOC Trane Submittal R i Tracker 24: 24 SCC (Space Comfort Controllers as defined by LonMark) + 10 CCP (VariTrac Central Control Panels) + 4 ZN503 (Input/Output Modules). Tracker 241: : 24 SCC (Space Comfort Controllers as defined by Tracker 12, Tracker 24 Mechanical Specs LonMark) + 10 CCP (VariTrac Central Control Panels) + 4 ZN503 (Input/Output Modules) + CE qualification for international markets . Tracer ZN517 unitary controller The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller is a standalone HVAC controller. When connected to a Tracker controller, the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller becomes a communicating LonMarkO- compliant device with an SCC profile. The Tracker controller, through the Tracer ZN517, can then communicate with and control the equipment. Devices controlled by the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller include electro-mechanically controlled 2H/2C or 4C rooftop units, heat pumps, and split systems. The Tracer ZN517 controls temperature and other comfort - related conditions. Connecting a Tracker controller to it enables an operator to schedule, route alarms, and monitor the entire system. Tracer ZN517 unitary controller 1/0 capacities Binary inputs - Enable/Disable or Occupancy - Status: Fan or Generic Analog Inputs Space Temperature Setpoint input Discharge air temperature Universal input (thermistor, 4- 20mA) • Outdoor air temperature Binary outputs Supply fan Cool 1/Compressor 1 bas Cool 2/Compressor 2 Heat 1/Reversing Valve/Coo13 Heat 2/Auxiliary Heat/Cool 4 Exhaust Fan/Generic/Occupancy • Economizer Open/Close Tracer ZN517 Features • Minimum on/off timer: to protect equipment from duty cycling • Fan. status: to protect equipment from overheating Economizing Timed override Manual output test button Filter maintenance alarm: when used with a Tracker Discharge air tempering Demand control ventilation using CO2 Note: Each output is rated for a maximum of 1 Amp at 24 Vac. One normally open (Form A) relay contact will be provided. 24 Vac will be wired in common to one side of all relay contacts. Tracer MP503 1/0 module The Tracer MP503 input/output module accepts electrical signals from a variety of sensors. It also controls the state of binary outputs by energizing and de - energizing relays. Changing the state of a relay enables the 1/0 module to turn a device on or off. Using the Tracker PC software, the binary outputs can be programmed to energize and de - energize the relays in response to system conditions and schedules. The module has universal inputs that can receive and interpret binary (on/off), and analog (range) values. Connecting to the module enables the Tracker controller to monitor Trane temperature, relative humidity (RH), and CO2 sensors. Tracer MP503 1/0 module 1/0 capacities Universal inputs (4) - Thermistor (10K W at 770F . [25°C]) - Trane CO2 sensor (0 to 10 Vdc) - Trane relative humidity (RH) sensor (4 to 20 mA) - Binary input Binary outputs (4) Each output is rated for a maximum of 1 Amp at 24 Vac. One normally open (Form A) relay contact will be provided. 24 Vac will be wired in common to one side of all relay contacts Communication The Tracker (BMTK) controller is a Comm5 device. Comm5 is the fifth generation Trane communication architecture. It implements LonTalk, an open, industry -standard protocol. The RTUs, CCPs, unitary controllers, and 1/0 controllers that the Tracker controller communicates with reside on a LonTalk FTT-10A network. They provide data using LonMarkO standard network variable types (SNVTs, pronounced Sniv-its) and configuration properties. The HVAC equipment controllers employ SCC profiles, as defined by LonMarkO lnteroperability Association. Ancillary sensors (such as temperature and humidity sensors) that are,hard- wired to the terminals on the Tracker; CCP; and 1/0 module are standard resistive type sensors and do not communicate using LonTalk. They only provide analog or binary inputs and outputs. LonTalk devices from other manufacturers will be tested for compatibility with the Tracker BAS. Devices that are compatible will be approved for inclusion in the Tracker system. Necessary support documentation for approved devices will be released, when completed. The Tracker controller is designed for easy installation. Its 3-module assembly enables the. termination module to be mounted on a wall, and the main module and display module to be stored for their protection until the site is ready for the controller to be fully assembled. 3-module definition The termination module contains the termination board, which FLD = Furnished by Trane / Installed by Others Trane Submittal accepts all electrical connections for the controller. The main module contains the main logic board. The display module contains the touch screen, which enables the operator to interact with the controller. Tracker 12, Tracker 24 Mechanical Specs Connect the PC workstation If the site requires the optional PC software, the installer connects the RJ-11 (modem connection) or RJ-12 ,(direct connection) cable to the appropriate connector on the underside of the controller. Install the optional PC software ` To install the optional PC software, .the installer inserts the Tracker CD into the PC CD-ROM drive and follows the self - prompting installation wizard. An operator can set up and change HVAC operating parameters and collect and display building information at either the Tracker controller or the PC workstation. Each location provides access to an easy -to - use user interface. Tracker controller operation LCD touch screen The LCD touch screen, combined with an intuitive menu -driven user interface, provides access to the Tracker system from the controller. Using the controlleruser interface The Tracker BAS goes well beyond accurate temperature control. It provides centralized scheduling and control for multiple BTUs and split systems. It provides multiple -zone control when paired with a VariTrac system. And it provides control for multiple VariTrac systems. The Tracker BAS is capable of controlling multiple constant - volume Trane rooftop and split single -zone systems. The Trane unitary controller enables non- Trane HVAC systems to be easily integrated into the Tracker system. bas The Tracker BAS communicates with the unit controllers on the Comm5 network and controls them to temperature setpoints and operating parameters determined by the operator. Once communicating, the Tracker BAS receives alarms automatically. Connecting multiple unit controllers to the Tracker BAS enables the installer and operator to: Save installation time and materials costs by reducing the amount of wire used and by requiring only a thermistor in each area rather than a programmable zone sensor Schedule all devices from one location, rather than requiring that each device be scheduled independently Monitor alarms from one location Rooftop VAV and Changeover bypass operation The Tracker BAS is capable of ,supervising and scheduling a VariTrac VAV system. To do this, Trane VariTrac changeover bypass zoning systems or VariTrac VAV Rooftop system are introduced into the Tracker system. A Tracker controller is connected to one or more VariTrac CCPs. Each CCP is connected to one Trane Voyager RTU. The Tracker controller provides centralized scheduling and access to CCP alarms.. Each CCP monitors its zone sensors and allows each zone to "vote" its needs, which are determined by the schedule and its setpoints. Based on that data, the CCP sets the operating mode (heat or cool) of the HVAC equipment. In addition, the CCP maintains a operator -defined static pressure in the ductwork by controlling a bypass damper or VAV (variable air volume) in the HVAC unit. If controlling a VAV HVAC unit the CCP will control either VFD (variable frequency drive) fans or inlet guide vanes. Power requirements 24 Vac nominal (19-30 Vac) 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 40 VA minimum,Class 2 transformer required Operating environment Temperature: 320F to 120°F (0- 49-C) Humidity: 10% to 90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage environment Temperature 40°F to 200°F (- 40°C to 93°C) Humidity: 5%to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing Cabinet NEMA 1 resin enclosure Plenum rated Mounting Flat wall surface or with a conduit box that is either: Recessed, 2 in. x 4 in. (5 cm x 10 cm) Recessed, 4 in. x 4 in. (10 cm x 10 cm) Dimensions Height: 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) Width: 10.25 in. (26.04 cm) Depth: 2.75 in. (6.99 cm) Minimum clearances Top: 12 in. Bottom: 12 in. Left: 12 in. Right: 12 in. Front: 36 in. Weight 2.5 lb. (1.13 kg) Analog input - Outside air temp. Thermistor: 10K ohm at 770F (25-C) From -50OF to 200OF (-46°C to 93°C) Binary inputs. Utility pulse meter: User -supplied dry contacts only Tracker -supplied voltage: 12 Vdc nominal (10-14 Vdc), 12 mA nominal (10-14 mA) Priority shutdown: User -supplied dry contacts only Tracker -supplied voltage: 12 Vdc nominal (10-14 Vdc), 12 mA nominal (10-14 mA) Binary output Alarm relay: Tracker -supplied relay, Single -pole single -throw (SPST) dry contact rated at 24 Vac, 1 A maximum FLD = Furnished by Trane / Installed by Others Trane Submittal _. J bas Memory backup Note 2:Trane recommends a At power loss, the Tracker Approvals dedicated transformer for 24 Vac controller backs up memory and U.L.:Models 12, 24, and 24i power. stores all data for seven days; FCC:Models 12, 24, and 24i Note 3:Alarm relay circuit must after seven days, trends and C.E.:Model 24i not exceed 24 Vac, 1 A. alarms are not retained Note 4:Do not apply voltage to ` Notes: the priority shutdown or meter Note 1:All customer` wiring must inputs. Tracker 12, Tracker 24 be in accordance with national, Note 5:See product literature for Mechanical Specs state, and local electrical codes. Comm5 wire connection details. FLD = Furnished by Trane / Installed by Others Trane Submittal 2TTA3060-SUB-104.00 NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. 5 Ton Split System Cooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3060A 1d EIS -It AREA A-10 BE AX 1RICirO r0R Al LEA31 SZS IE 1EPI ABOYE UMII. UNn S- I BE 11AC[0 BO RWr RUR Orr RA1[R WLS .1 /OUR GIRECILI . 0RI1. AR0 SMOCLO BE AT LEA31 10IIZ.1 FROM CALL AMP RLL SURRWR0INU SMR16BrR3 OR 1. sID[3. O1MER T. ME UNR131-11B. r FF`'1 Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz® 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 23 10 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 40 15 Compressor CLIMATUFF1Rt-SCROLL LIMATUFFtRI-SCROLL RL Amps - LR Amps 17.3 - 123 7.7 - 49.5 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 1.2 0.6 Fan HP 1/5 1/5 Fan Dia (inches) 27.6 27.6 Coil Spine Fin TM Spine Fin TM Refrigerant R-22 8/11-LB/OZ 8/11-LB/OZ Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas ® 1-1/8 1-1/8 Line Size - (in.) O.D. Liquid ® 3/8 3/8 Dimensions HxWxD (Crated)46.4x35.lx38.7 46.405.108.7 Weight - Shipping 292 293 Weight - Net 256 257 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES 0 Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program which is based on ARI Standard 210/240. OR Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers or fuses. OR Standard line lengths- 60'. Standardlift = 60' Suction and Liquid line. For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-0r. (Sde- noles latest revision) C ® L us MODELS I BASE I FIG. I A I B I C I D I E I F I G I H I J K 2TTA3060A 1 4 1 1 1045 (41-1/8) 946 (37-1/4) 870 (34-1/4) 1-1/8 3/8 1 152 (6) 1 98 (3-7/8) 219 (8-5/8) 86 (3-3/8) 508 (20) From Dwg. 21 D153074 Rev. 10 A -weighted Sound Power Level rdB(All MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB (A)] A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL d6 - [dB(A 63 1 125 1 250 500 1 1000 2000 4000 1 8000 2TTA3060A 79 53.6 1 57.5 1 63.6 73.3 1 73.1 71.3 63.1 1 55.9 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved Mechanical Specification Options General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 Duratuff"m base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The Climatur compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The Climatur compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. `� S�GIEO ♦049igsC -tom. Sr4N0AA�-:Yry�,m Condenser Coil The Spine FinTA° coil shall be continuously wrapped,, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —1 WE . fvr.E.,,.� ',s ,.Y.+i apt. e.�• �i�k B4tC2 d,a s "pm .;,:r a&.. +rc ,:.;9u.-,., 1 Trane A business of American Standard Companies Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change www.trane.com- design and specifications without notice. II 5 Ton Convertible Air Handier 2/4TEC3F60l31 OOOA - 21.00 DISCHARGE OPENING I II I SEE FIG.I 6 fIG.2/ HEATER N.O. F F 5.76 TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW 1: 0 0_I.001 r�B,D1-1 r2.D1. 1.00- BOTTOM VIEW 2/4TEC3F60A-SUB-1 D ARLFUX I.I1 HEATER ■ CIRCUIT TT 2 BREAKER 1.38 J ® ®• _.. FIG. I � 2.00 GAS UNE SEE TABLE 110UID IINE SEE TABLC 2. 81 3//-I/ TAPERED PIPE THREAD D 3.48 5.13 3. 87 +I FILTER G I ACCESS VERTICAL IPFLOW 1.64-I I.64 1.64 .88 FIG. 2 MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO COMBUSTIBLE SERVICE MATERIAL CLEARANCE IN EOUIREDI IRECOMME NDEDI S [FRONT 0' 21KDUC1 0'1DUCTI"R THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OUTLET DUCT THEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE INSTALLED EXCEPT MODELS BATHTRI/05. 1408. AND 1410 AAE APPROVED FOR 0' PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLON CONFIGURATION ONLT ON TYE'P MODELS. FICA 1 FIG. 2 MODEL NO. J K J K L 2/4TEC3F48, 60 12.02 21.22 11.02 20.22 31.15 R22 R22 R-410A R-410A MODEL NO. A B C D E F G H Flow Control Gas Line Liq. Line Gas Line Liq. Line BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE 2/4TEC3F60B 57.90 23.50 21.50 30.47 4.65 6.77 3.62 1.89 TXV/NB 1-1/8 3/8 7/8 3/8 © 2006 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved' PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 2/4TEC3F60131000A RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ 208-230/1/60 RATINGS O See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. • 3 -14 (3-16, 4TEC) Face Area (sq. ft.) 6.19 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXV - NonBleed Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN — Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In.) 11 X 10 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 4 CFM vs. in. w.g. O See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — HP. 1 -1 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1050 Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1/60 F.L. Amps 7.6 FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended High Velocity No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 22 - 1 in. Horizontal Applications Filter Fumished? No Recommended Size O See Note REFRIGERANT R=22 R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 1-1/8 7/8 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS HxWxD Crated (In.) 59-1/2 x 26 x 23-1/2 Uncrated See Outline Drawing© WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs.) 170 /155 O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. O 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 © The cabinet for this unit is made of two pieces, making it easier to assemble in attics or tight applications. © Torque S ec for TXV = Tighten 1/6 turn passed finger tight ® 0 C(9)US NOTES: Vertical: With filter, no horizontal drip tray,Small apex baffle. Sub- tract 0.06" W.G. for downflow. Horizontal: As shipped but without filter. Subtract 0.05" W.G. for horizontal left. Airflow Performance 2/4TEC3F60B: Wet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.w.g.) AIRFLOW (CFM) VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED-H M-LO Low HI MED-H M-LO Low HI MED-H M-LO Low HI MED-H M-LO Low 0 2163 2018 1901 1831 2129 1988 1893 1820 2107 1963 1840 1774 2085 1956 1837 1777 0.1 2132 1974 1852 1796 2091 1954 1833 1769 2063 1927 1810 1743 2049 1912 1797 1729 0.2 2088 1936 1811 1754 2049 1915 1790 1722 2028 1889 1773 1706 2011 1870 1756 1683 0.3 2044 1901 1775 1709 2008 1 1874 1756 1678 1995 1851 1735 1663 1973 1830 1716 1638 0.4 2004 1867 1741 1663 1970 1835 1723 1634 1962 1814 1698 1617 1934 1793 1678 1593 0.5 1972 1832 1707 1617 1935 1797 1687 1590 1925 1778 1662 1569 1896 1757 1641 1548 0.6 1941 1797 1672 1572 1899 1761 1646 1542 1883 1743 1628 1520 1855 1721 1606 1501 0.7 1902 1760 1635 1526 1858 1725 1602 1489 1834 1710 1595 1473 1812 1685 1570 1450 0.8 1841 1721 1594 1475 1803 1684 1556 1427 1779 1678 1559 1429 1761 1648 1531 1392 0.9 1735 1683 1549 1416 1722 1636 1516 1354 1719 1648 1518 1389 1699 1606 1484 1326 NOTES: With filter, no horizontal drip tray Small apex baffle Subtract 0.06" W.G. for downflow As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05" W.G. for horizontal left SEE AIR FLOW RESISTANCE TABLE FOR PRESSURE LOSS WITH SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER. PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS AIRFLOW CFM 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 14 1 �, 700 0.01 0.02 0.02 � ` x 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 x° 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05�� =, 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 1500 1 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 1700 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1900 -0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.23 2000 1 0.14 0.17 1 0.20 0.23 1 0.26 HEATER RACKS HEATER MODEL NO. NO. OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 BAYHTR1/3410 2 BAYHTR1/3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 2/4TEC3F60B WIRING DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit ") 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Number Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater of Model No. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection NONE 1/1 N/A WA N/A 9.5 15 N/A N/A N/A 9.5 15 BAYHTR1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 164001 20 35 35 3.60 12300 17.3 31 35 BAYHTR1408 +++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 50 50 5.76 19700 27.7 44 45 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 60 60 7.20 24600 34.6 53 60 BAYHTR1415 +++ 2/1 15.36 52400 40/24 60'/30 60`/30 11.53 39300 34,6/20.8 53`/26 60`/30 BAYHTR1415BRK with Single Circuit 1l1 15.36 52400 64 90 90 11.53 39300 55.4 79 80 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 1 9.60 32800 34.6 43 1 45 7.20 124600 30.0 37 40 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 44.7 56 60 11.53 39300 39.7 50 50 BAYHTR1419 000 2/1 19.20 65500 32/48 50`/60 50`160 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 44'/52 45'/60 BAYHTR1419 BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 19.2 65500 80 110 110 14.42 49200 69.3 96 100 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B NOTES: ` Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) +++ = 000, BRK, PDC 000 = pigtails, BRK = contains circuit breakers, PDC = contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. Air Handler Unit Model Position Application HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTR 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 1425' = 1 or 3 4.80KW 7.68KW 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20KW 24.98KW Vertical . A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Upflow Heat Pump L L L L ML - Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - 2/4TEC3F60 Downflow Heat Pump L L L ML MH - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Left Heat Pump L L L ML ML - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Right Heat Pump L L L ML L - Mechanical Specifications General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 "R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the vertical upflow configuration and converts to horizontal right just by laying the unit on its side. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. It's Hard To Stop A pane."" The Trane Company A business of American Standard, Inc. 6200 Troup Highway . Tyler, TX 75707 Refrigerant Circuits —The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by a factory installed non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil —Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan = Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug- in control.wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. Pt,F,EO TO ARI P,%5%9T0ARI G� 5S 4E , _ 'OS U � Z7 �EO�vnfEN M EOEivtaE� .,. �... S ���STANDAa����� Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. 6 Ton Split System NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. Condensing Unit 3 Phase ■ i2.2 IilalO vOL I�GE za a nIFal DIA. rc.0 WI tt.z BOX DIA. FOR IX ELECTRIC BON BOiipX FOR POWER TAIL POWER SUPP LIOUID LINE SF PVI(E VALVE.— E' D. FEMALE BNAiE CONNECTION WITH I/9' SAE PLAN PAESSUR[ TAP FITTING. �Iry ff•'I�YWL��If �pFl� FIG. I G AS LINE Ill TURN BALL Sf AVICE YAIVE. 'D' I.D. FEMALE ARMED CONNECTION NI'IT SAC FLARE PRESSURE TAP FITTING. I IOUID LINE SERVICE VALVE. 'E' I.D. FLXALE BARBED CONXECIIOX wITN 114' SAE FLARE FPR[SaUAE TAP FITTING. H AS LINE SERVICE VALVE. rj 'D' LD. FEMALE 6AAlf0 CDNNI[1I DX WI1H/A' SA[ FLAB[ J PRESSURE TAP FITTING. FIG. 2 MODELS BASE FIG. A B C I D I E I F GM(8-5/8)E 2TTA0072A 4 1 1045 946 870 1-1/B 3/8 152 98(41-1/8) (37-1/4) (34-1/4) (6) (3-7/8 From Dwg. 21 D,153074 Rev. 5 © 2002 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved 2TTA0072A - Outdoor Unit jO 2TTA0072A3000AA 2TTA0072A4000AA General Data SOUND RATING (DECIBELS) 881 81 POWER CONNS.—V/PWHZV 200i230/3/60 460/3/60. MIN. BRCH. CIR'.AMPACITY 26 14 BR. CIR. MAX. (AMPS) 45 20 PROT. RTG, f MIN. (AMPS) 40 20 COMPRESSOR CLIMATUFF®- SCROLL CLIMATUFF0-SCROLL NO. USED - NO.SPEEDS 1-1 1-1 VOLTSIPH/HZ 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 R.L.AMPS (2) - L.R.AMPS 19.8-156 10.5-75 FACTORY INSTALLED START COMPONENTS ® NO NO INSULATION/SOUND BLANKET NO NO COMPRESSOR HEAT YES YES OUTDOOR FAN —TYPE PROPELLER PROPELLER DIA: (IN.) - NO. USED 27.6 -1 27.6 -1 TYPE DRIVE - NO. SPEEDS DIRECT -1 DIRECT -1 CFM @ 0.0 IN. W.G.:4 4225 4225 NO. MOTORS - HP. 1 - 1/6 1 - 1/6 MOTOR SPEED R.P.M. 825 825 VOLTS/PH/HZ 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 F.L. AMPS 1.4 0.7 OUTDOOR COIL —TYPE SPINE FINT"" SPINE FIN"' ROWS -.FP,I, . 1- 24 1 - 24 FACE.AREA (SO. FT.) 27.87 27.87 TUBE SIZE (IN.) 318 3/8 REFRIGERANT R-22 R-22 (O.D. UNIT) NP CHRIS. O 10/00-LB/OZ 10/00-LB/OZ FACTORY SUPPLIED i YES YES LINE SIZE - IN. O.D. GAS © 1-1/8 1-1/8 LINE SIZE - IN. O.D. LIQ. © 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS H X W X D H X W X D OUTDOOR UNIT CRATED (IN.) 46.4 X 35.1 X 38.7 46.4 X 35.1 X 38.7 UNCRATED SEE OUTLINE DWG. SEE OUTLINE DWG. WEIGHT SHIPPING (LBS.) 297 297 NET (LBS.) 261 261 �- CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE UNITARY AIR -CONDITIONER EQUIPMENT.CERTIFICATION PROGRAM WHICH IS BASED ON A.R.I. STANDARD 210/240, J RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.R.. STANDARD 270/SECTION 5.3.6. Q) CALCULATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE. ONLY USE -HACRCIRCUIT BREAKERS ORFUSES. O STANDARD AIR - DRY COIL -OUTDOOR (5) THIS VALUE APPROXIMATE. FOR MORE PRECISE VALUE SEE UNIT NAMEPLATEAND SERVICE INSTRUCTION. -4� MAX. LINEAR LENGTH: 60 FT WITH RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR - 60 FT WITH SCROLL. MAX, LIFT- SUCTION 60 FT; MAX LIFT - LIQUID 60 FT. FOR GREATER LENGTH REFER TO REFRIGERANT PIPING SOFTWARE PUB. NO. 32- 3312-0'. (*denotes latest revision). - C) THE VALUE SHOWN FOR COMPRESSOR RLAON THE UNIT NAMEPLATEAND ON THIS SPECIFICATION SHEET IS USED TO COMPUTE MINIMUM BRANCH CIRCUITAMPACITYAND MAXIMUM FUSE SIZE. THE VALUE SHOWN IS THE BRANCH CIRCUIT SELECTION CURRENT. O NO MEANS NO START COMPONENTS. YES MEANS QUICK START KIT COMPONENTS. PTC MEANS POSITIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT STARTER. F R 1 2TTA0072A$/4 With Cooling Coils TXA061C5 TXC061C5 TXH063P3-A TXH063P3-B EXPANSION TYPE TXV-B TXV-B TXV-NB TXV-NB RATINGS (COOLING) O BTUH (TOTAL) 66000 66000 70000 70000 BTUH (SENSIBLE) 44900 44900 51900 51100 INDOOR AIRFLOW (CFM) 1800 1800 2225 2100 SYSTEM POWER (KW) 6.63 6.63 6.93 6.86 ERR/SEER (BTU/WATT-HR.) 9.95/11.05 9.95/11.05 10,10/11.50 10.20/11.65 Notes: O Certified in accordance with A.R.I. Standard 210/240. 2 2TTA0072-SUB-100.00 a 2TTA0072A3/4 With Air Handlers i TWE060A TWE060C15-CID15-A TWE063P13 TWE065E13 TWE090A TWG060A15 EXPANSION TYPE TXV-B TXV-B TXV-NB TXV-NB TXV-NB TXV-B RATINGS (COOLING) O BTUH(TOTAL) 66000 66000 69000 . 69000 71000 66000 BTUH.(SENSIBLE) 47100 46200 51100 51400 51900 46500 INDOOR AIRFLOW (CFM) 2225 2000 2200 2225 2400 2050 SYSTEM POWER (KW) 6.70 6.84 7.11 7.08 6.73 6.84 ERR/SEER (BTU/WATT-HR.) 9.85/10.95 9.65/10.85 9.70/10.95 9.75/11.05 10.55/12.05 9.65/10.90 Notes: O Certified in accordance with A.R.I. Standard 210/240. 2TTA0072-SUB-100.00 E �3 Trane A business of American Standard Companies www.frane.com General The 2TTA0 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.F. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint.. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 DuraTuffTm base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The ClimatufP compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The Climatufl® compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. ` TpED oqq qsc %'wigc. a 1yF STalloaeatiD Condenser Coil The Spine Fin TM coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion. resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 3/8 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover) - Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10°F. Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. r.8 F YA :.TWE065E-SUB-1 TAG: ® e 3 -,5Ton Convertible 1.14 _12.02 1 1.64 11.02 : T EM 13F ° o 21 .00 23.72 DISCHARGE 22.72 a DISCHARGE e OPENING OPENING DISCHARGE � O OPENING ° (SEE FIG.1 0 - - ° 4 d FIG.2) o HEATER K.O. 1.14 1.64 B P o 1 v e o o J _IT E F 5.76 , TOP VIEW FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 I .88' X 1.381, 5.15 HEATER AIRFLOW REVERSIBLE 2 41 DUCT FLANGES P (SEE FIG. I.- CIRCUIT 8 FIG.21 � 2.56 BREAKER h 2.12 I I I 0 2.00 0 GAS LINE SEE TABLE I UOUID LINE - I SEE TABLE A 2.81 3/4-14 TAPERED PIPE THREAD D R� 3.48 5.23 SIDEVIEW _ 3.87 FILTER FG ACCESS 1.00 �{� 18.07 2.01 II VFRTI(_AI. I IPFI (11A/ MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO - SERVICE COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCE MATERIAL (RECOMMEN- REQUIRED DED SIDES 0" 2- FRONT 01, 21" BACK 0" 0" INLET DUCT 0. V OUTLET DUCT 1- -I- FOR THE FIRST 3 FT: OF OUTLET DUCT WHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE INSTALLED. EXCEPT MODELS BAYHTR1405,1408, AND 1410'ARE APPROVED FOR 0' PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY. MODEL NO. A I B- C D E F G H I Flow Gas Line 'Liq. Line Control BRAZE BRAZE TWE065E13F 62.75 ! 26 24 27.12 5.90 8.02 3.24 1.48 TXV/NB ; 1-1/8 3/8' 2001 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved; i PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL TWE065E13F RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ. 200-230/1/60 RATINGS O See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL - Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. 4 —14 Face Area (sq. ft.) 7.33 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXVNB Drain Conn. Size (in:) (D 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System INDOOR FAN — Type Centrifugal Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Diameter -Width (In.) 10 x 10 Refer totheSplit. System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for No. Used 1 performance data. Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 16 O 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) CFM vs. in. w.g. See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1 — 1 O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on Motor Speed R.P.M. VARIABLE airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1/60 Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 300 F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 7.0 High Velocity Filter: Face'area (Sq. Ft.) _, CFM I500, FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended High Velocity No. -Size -Thickness 1- 20 x 25 x 1 in. C us QP Horizontal Applications Filter Furnished? No Recommended Size O See Note O 'REFRIGERANT (R-22) Ref. Line Connections Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 1-1/8 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 62-1/2 x 28-1/2 x 23-1/2 Uncrated See Outline Drawinq WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs) 218 / 196 TWE65E WIRING DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit *) 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Number Heater of Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Amps per Circuit Overload Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Model No. Circuits Amps per Circuit Overload /Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection KW BTUH KW BTUH 240 240 240 BAYHTR1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 34 35 3.60 12300 17.3 30 30 BAYHTR1408 +++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 49 50 5.77 19700 27.7 43 45 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 59 60 7.20 24600 34.7 52 60 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK 2/1 15.36 52400 44/20 59*/30 60*/30 ' 11.53 39300 38.2/17.3 52*/26 60*/30 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 38.2 55 60 11.53 39300 33 49 50 BAYHTR1419 BRK 2/1 1 19.2 65500 32/48 : 49*/60 50*/60 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 43*/52 45*/60 BAYHTR1425 BRK 3/1 124.96185200 44/40/20 55/59*/25 60/60*/25 18.73 63900 38.1/34.6/17.3 48/50*/22 50/60*/25 NOTES: *Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) +++ = 000, BRK, PDC 000 = pigtails, BRK = contains circuit breakers, PDC = contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. SEE AIR FLOW RESISTANCE TABLE FOR PRESSURE LOSS WITH SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER'. TWE065E AIR HANDLER AIRFLOW (CFM) VS. EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE WITH FILTER OUTDOOR AIRFLOW DIP SWITCH SETTING EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE UNIT SIZE SETTING ,i 0.1 0.2 0:3 0:5 0.7 0.9 ° . (TONS) �. �, .. _. a� _ . LOWQRCFM 1030 1030 1030 1015 1000 975 (350 CFM/TON) RAW ,, watts 135 160 185 235 285 325 NORMAL tON wm CFM 1170 1170 1170 1170 1170 1170 3.0 400 CFM/TON watts 195 225 255 315 375 435 HIGH E CFM s., 1320 1325 1340 1370 1375 1365 450 CFM/TON „ ,,, , "?: , �,t watts 255 295 330 - 405 480 545 LOW t�N CFM 1195 1195 1195 1195 1195 1195 350 CFM/TON ��_,,, s� ;. .. ,.. .._ watts 210 240 320 340 385 440 3.5 NORMAL CFM 1380 1405 1425 1440 1440 1425 400 CFM/TON) ` •, �.,A � E ,,,,s watts 290 345 390 450 515 580 HIGH CFM 1620 1620 1630 1645 1625 1590 450 cFM/TON , ' Qt € ` :: ,: watts 420 455 465 565 636 695 LOW 4F O 1365 1385 1405 1430 1450 1440 350 CFM/TON) h , .. wafts 265 315 _ 365 450 505 575 4.0 NORMAL CFM 1630 1640 1650 1650 1640 1620 400 CFM/TON , �� �0 watts 435 470 505 575 640 700 HIGH a �N CFM 1860 1860 1860 1860 1850 1710 450 CFM/TON , �_,F ��� watts 570 620 680 785 825 830 LOW = £ CFM 1830 ' 1810 1810 1830 1795 1740 (350 CFM/TON I., watts 530 565 605 730 790 805 5.0 '* NORMAL F R CFM OE 2080 2075 2065 2010 1890 1750 (400 CFM/TON) DOFF 4, ! ,..... „... �watts 800, 855- 895 925 905 870 HIGH t� CFM FF C7E1 2275 2225 2170, 2035 1880 1750 450 CFM/TON „_ `. watts 1015 1005 995 955 900 840 NOTES: 1. " Factory setting 2. At continuous Fan Setting: Airflow values are approximately 50% of listed value. 3. For Variable Speed: low speed airflows are approximately 30% of listed values. 4. With wet coil, filter in place. No heater installed. TWE065E AIR HANDLER AIRFLOW WITH AUXILIARY HEAT (CFM) INf`aS ff SELECTION NOMINAL AIRFLOW O`P HIGH 1800 CFM E", MED-HIGH 1500 CFM Oil, 7 (NF &Or .. ...:. , MED-LOW 1200 CFM. F� m„ ON LOW 900 CFM NUMBER OF RACKS NUMBER OF -RACKS AIR 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 AIR 1 1 2 1 3 4 5 FLOW FLOW AIR PRESSURE DROP AIR PRESSURE DROP CFM INCHES W.G. CFM INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 9 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 700 0.01 0.02 0.02 a �' tt�„ • 1500 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 �r ,... 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 £" 1700 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 ',;', 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.68 1900 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.23 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 2000 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for 2. Heater model numbers may have additional,. approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters suffix digits: HEATER RACKS HEATER MODEL NO. - NO.OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 SAYHTR1/3410 2 BAYHTRI/3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 BAYHTR1425 5 MINIMUM AIRFLOW HEATER MODEL NUMBERBAYHTR--- WITH AUXILIARY HEAT 1405 4.80kw 1408 7.68kw 1410 410 1415 15 1419 19.20kw 1425 24.96kw MODEL APPLICATION g 15 NUMBER NUMBER OF HEATER RACKS 1 2 2 3 4 5 A/C or Elec. Furnace 900 900 900 1200 1200 1200 TWE065E Heat Pump 1500* 1500* 1500* 1800* 1800 1800 *For upflow position only, minimum setting is 1200 Mechanical General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fang motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. The "F" model indicates an "Air-rite"model with 4.2 "R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of TWE-E Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the right hand horizontal configuration and converts to vertical upflow just by standing the unit on end. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall ,be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. Since The Trane Company has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice Technical Literature - Printed in U.S.A. The Trane Company Unitary Products Group 6200 Troup Highway Tyler, TX 75707-9010 - An American -Standard Company Specifications Refrigerant Circuits — The TWE-E units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled by a factoryinstalled non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil — Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan — Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage terminal connections, fan contactor, and plug in module foraccessory electric heat control shall be included. TWE-E models also include check valves. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug-in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. TAG: NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. uXA[sie L4o[roM Alf lusttiD ei ran ABOr[ YAn YAII .11 D[ IUCCO 50 RW! AYA Orf PAPA T L .Dt POOP DI A[LA(r OA LAIN. AND NTT BC AT l[Asl sOs II2'1 ATT PAII AAD ALL sYLLWXDlA4 sNPtlOAFPY 01 tAp 5 10[s. OAX[A Aq fIDFs YYR[f IAICI[D. T- 2TTA3042-SUB-102.00 3-1/2 Ton Split System Cooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3042A Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz® 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 13 7 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 20 15 Compressor CLIMATUFF(R) CLIMATUFF1Rf RL Amps - LR Amps 9.6 - 86.6 5.1 - 43.1 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 1.4 0.7 Fan HP 1/6 1/6 Fan Dia (inches) 27.6 27.6 Coil Spine Fin TIA Spine Fin TM Refrigerant R-22 6/13-LB/OZ 6/13-LB/OZ Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas ® 7/8 7/8 Line Size - (in.) O.D. Liquid O 3/8 3/8 Dimensions HxWxD (Crated) 38.4x35.1x38.7 38.4x35.1x38.7 Weight - Shipping 245 246 Weight - Net 211 213 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES 7H6tWIO CIA( S(Arif( rAln. AAA[[. /A- TA[ ITAA(M(ssYAC [AP "M.� . As ux[ uArrt[ uw[. AA1 [n J i°P'[xs Nt X xli"ii .sA[ rlu[ FIG. 2 OO Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program which is based on ARI Standard 210/240. OO Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers or fuses. OD Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift - 60' Suction and Liquid line. For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-01. ([de- notes latest revision) c ® L us MODELS BASE FIG. I A I B I C I D E F I G I H I J K 2TTA3042A 4 1 1 841 (33-1/8) 1 946 (37-1/4) 1 870 (34-1/4) 1 7/8 3/8 152 (6) 1 98 (3-7/8) 1 219 (8-5/8) 1 86 (3-3/8) 508 (20) From Dwg. 21 D153074 Rev. 10 A-weiahted Sound Power Level rdB(A)1 MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB(A)] A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL dB - dB A 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 2TTA3042A 79 46 60.6 70.4 72.9 72.4 69.5 60.9 51.2 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved' Trane A business of American Standard Companies; www.trane.com Mechanical Specification OptionI General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 Duratuff1m base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The Climatuff0 compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatufP compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. ^nras 9��SrANOPP�2o Rs'r. Condenser Coil The Spine Fin' coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10°F. •�¢_.. ». n-- "�._n of ,. eat,3c�c9� _ "�,•hiY •+3 :.ts'r�::.., .., ..-... •_� '.'a-tF%%�$% is��?•�;..7a .?2.v:1.it�d��a" �4 r, A�.� 1 Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. 88' X 1.38•- AEVERSIBLE DUCT FLANGES (SEE FIG. I A FIG.2) 3-1/2 Ton Convertible Air Handler 2/4TEC3F42A1000A •- 21.00 DISCHARGE OPENING (SEE TIG.I d FIG.2) HEATER N.O. GAS LINE - E F SEE TABLE 5 16 I LIQUID LINE - SEE TABLE TOP VIEW CIRCUIT BREAKER 2/4TEC3F42A-SUB-1 B IL 78-1 3/4-14 TAPERED 4 4/ PIPE THREAD 5. 75 HEATER 114 2.41 p rA 2.56 � R 3.48 5.23 2. 12 E-� 3.87 -1 A 4 IT 1 .38 �° ® ®° FILTER G ACCESS 2.00 VERTICAL UPFLOW FIG. i A L SIDE VIEW �I.00 1 r 18,07 -1 r I.00 1 C OP67ING 1. 00 3-- BOTTOM VIEW IE MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO COMBUSi18LE SERVICE MATERIAL CLEARANCE (REQUIRED) (RECOMMENDED) SIDES 0' 2" FRONT 0' 21- BACK 0' 0' INLET DUCT 0' 1• OUTLET DUCT I•' I' FOR THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OUTLET DUCT WHEN ELEC TA IC HEATERS ARf INSTALLED AND EXCEPT MODELS BAYHTRI405, 1408, AND "I,ARE APPAOVEO FOR 0' PLENUM AND CLEARANCE I THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY ON 2/4TEC-MODELS. FIG 1 FIG 2 MODEL NO. J K J K L 2/4TEC3F42 12.02 21.22 11.02 20.22 rVa N-11 1.64 .88 FIG. 2 MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO SERVICE COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCE MATERIAL (RECOMMEN- REQUIRED DED SIDES 0" 2" FRONT 0" 21" BACK 0" 0" INLET DUCT 0" 1" OUTLET DUCT 1'- *1 -FOR THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OUTLET DUCT WHEN ELECTRIC H EATERS ARE INSTALLED. EXCEPTMODELS BAYHTR1405,1408, AND 1410 ARE APPROVED FOR 0' PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY. Flow R22 R22 R-010A R-41OA MODEL NO. A B C D E F G H Control Gas Line Liq. Line Gas Line Liq. Line BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE 2/4TEC3F42A1 51.75 23.50 21.50 18.33 4.65 6.77 3.62 1.89 1 TXV/NB 1 7/8 3/8 3/4 3/8 © 2006 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved' PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 2/4TEC3F42A1000A RATED VOLTSIPH/HZ. 208-230/1/60 RATINGS O See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL —Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. 3 - 14.0 Face Area (sq. ft.) 5.04 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXV - NonBleed O Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN — Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In.) 10 X 10 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 3 CFM vs. in. w.g. O See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1 - 1/2 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1075 Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1/60 F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 3.3 - 7.8 FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended Throwaway No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 20 - 1 in. Horizontal Applications Filter Furnished? No Recommended Size O See Note O REFRIGERANT (R-22) RR=22 R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 7/8 3/4 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 53 1/4 x 26 x 23-1/2 Uncrated WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs) 165 / 150 O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. O 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 OO Torque Spec for TXV = Tighten 1/6 turn passed finger tight Airflow PerbTriance 2/4TEC31742A Vet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.wg) AlRFLCW (CFM) VERTICAL HOFJZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED LO HI NED LO HI NM LO HI MD LO 0 1869 1690 1435 1723 1435 1100 1793 1533 1309 1721 1400 1100 0.1 1715 1542 1316 1640 1367 1079 1721 1522 1277 1665 1389 1095 0.2 1609 1449 1 1237 1561 1317 1060 1651 1471 1237 1600 1350 1068 0.3 1529 1380 1177 1485 1274 1032 1578 1400 1190 1527 1294 1030 0.4 1458 1314 1123 1409 1227 991 1500 1322 1139 1449 1231 987 0.5 1395 1240 1064 1332 1170 939 1417 1245 1085 1367 1164 940 0.6 1303 1158 1 1000 1251 1099 884 1329 1170 1026 1284 1094 889 0.7 1210 1078 932 1165 1015 838 1237 1092 963 1200 1019 826 0.8 1109 1018 870 1071 921 820 1145 1000 895 1117 931 740 0.9 1009 1010 829 968 825 854 1057 878 819 1034 820 617 NOTES: Wth filter, no horizontal drip tray Small apex baffle Subtract 0.05"' W.G. for dor tw As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05"'W.G. for horizontal left NOTES: Vertical: With filter, no horizontal drip tray,Small apex baffle. Subtract 0.06" W.G. for Horizontal: As shipped but without filter. Subtract 0.05" W.G. for horizon- tal left. SLL AN FLUVV KLSIti IANUL IAbLL FUK HKLSJUKL LU55 VVI I H SUF'F'LLMLN IAKY HLAI LK. PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS AIRFLOW CFM 1 2. 3 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 x 700 0.01 0.02 0.02€ &� € 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 l 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 1500 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 1700 0.10 1 0.11 0.14 1 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1900 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 1 0.23 1 2000 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 HEATER RACKS . HEATER MODEL NQ NO. OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 BAYHTR1/3410 2 BAYHTR1/3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 2/4TEC3F42P WIRING DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit 1) Number 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Heater of Circuit- Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Model No. s/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection BAYHTR1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 29 30 3.60 12300 17.3 26 30 BAYHTR1408 +++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 44 45 5.76 19700 27.7 39 40 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 54 60 7.20 24600 34.6 47 50 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK 2/1 15.36 52400 40/24 54*/30 60*/30 11.53 39300 34.6/20.8 47*/26 50*/30 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 41 51 60 11.53 39300 35.9 45 45 BAYHTR1419 BRK 2/1 19.20 65500 32/48 44*/60 45*/60 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 39*/52 40*/60 NOTES: * Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) +++ = 000, BRK, PDC 000 = pigtails, BRK = contains circuit breakers, PDC = contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. Air Handler Unit Model Position Application HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTIR 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 1425 * = 1 or 3 4.80KW 7.68KW 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20KW 24.98KW Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Upflow Heat Pump L L L M H - Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - 2TEC3F42 Downflow Heat Pump L L L H H - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Left Heat Pump L L L H H - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Right Heat Pump L L L H H - Mechanical Specifications General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 "R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the right hand horizontal configuration and converts to vertical upflow just by standing the unit on end. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. It's H6.rd To Stop A 23-.—'" The Trane Company 6200 Troup Highway Tyler, TX 75707-9010 An American -Standard Company Refrigerant Circuits — The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by a factory installed non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil — Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. The 2/4TEC3F models also include check valves. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug- in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. �401 llt- NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. SEAYI(E [EEVVCAf.11'r vu rR[rvnn K LRUL m !I.[ It/AI DIA. Na[��_ LW ralw[ ze.N mIIDI vIA. N.D. "" Ell I1101 01A. NDLl IA CC- eaR evnOX ror u[(IAI[u D.0 SUPYLI 1I0V10 ll`E S[KYI(E (orxi2iia. nro °Pi�[SA[ H T IIARE .113UR1 "I I1111 x6. I F J G Iq DIS(NAASL AREA SNWLD 51 ABAA[SAAI(1(D EW Ai L(ASi SIN IS I1[tl OVE UN1i UNIT SIgULo BL IIAC[D So Am RUX aI RAtu W[S .1 r N DI KC(ll1 Dx RNII. AKD SNDULD BE Al LEA51 305 I12'I VAN NALL AND All SUKKOI 10 SXADIDFRI 01 1F SIDES. D1RED 1. SIDES UXR[31R KILO. r A 2TTA3048-SUB-103.00 4 Ton Split System Cooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3048A Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz® 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 16 9 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 25 15 Compressor CLIMATUFF(R) CLIMATUFFIR> RL Amps - LR Amps 11.6 - 100.1 6.4 - 49.8 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 1.4 0.7 Fan HP 1/6 1/6 Fan Dia (inches) 27.6 27.6 Coil Spine Fin TM Spine Fin TI Refrigerant R-22 8/14-LB/OZ 8/14-LB/OZ Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas O 1-1/8 1-1/8 Line Size - (in.) O.D. Liquid O 3/8 3/8 Dimensions HxWxD (Crated) 46.4x35.lx38.7 46.4x35.lx38.7 Weight - Shipping 303 305 Weight - Net 267 269 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES WID LIKE SERVICE VALVE. •i• I.D. IExuE - SA[ "ARE0 Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program INI-R[ IAPI[I111XS,which is based on ARI Standard 2101240. O Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers or fuses. OA Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift - 60' Suction and Liquid line. H F For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-0t. (tde- notes latest revision) FIG 1 .1.I.E.ICNAL[ AS LINE SCAVt([ "I". G AAAI[D J P PSSDACDIAr I`N 113- SAL MAKE _ cos lIN[ A IVRX DAtI sun([ Y LYIi 'D' II.DLA[II E'st (Alit ll(SIW 011N N sA[ M. 2 C ® L US MODELS BASE FIG. I A I B I C I D I E I F I G I H I J I K 2TTA3048A 4 1 1 1045 (41-1/8) 946 (37-1/4) 1 870 (34-1/4) 1 1-1/8 1 3/8 1 152 (6) 1 98 (3-7/8) 1 219 (8-5/8) 1 86 (3-3/8) 1 508 (20) From Dwg.21D153074 Rev. 10 A-weiahted Sound Power Level rdB(All MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB(A)l A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL d6 - d6 A 63 1 125 250 500 1 1000 2000 1 4000 8000 2TTA3048A 79 49.3 1 57.7 71 72.2 1 72.7 1 70.5 1 63.7 1 53.7 © 2006 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved S iRAWE° Trane A business of American Standard Companies www..trane.com A Mom® v. p General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115'F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 Duratuff m base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The Climatur compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The Climatur compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. PQ 3 �aSTAN�PR�ry '�w'M.. �cm«N""b Condenser Coil The Spine FinTM' coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40*F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30*F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10°F. L"_� L, � ,s .,+ 'e^s':..u.. ,:w:F t 'i`Y:t2'•' = - -a � n . �.^:�Fg3V,t '.,"? 4 . "+w 1..,�,t:d�°R �^ zhe o . e. _.Ca�Bi 1 Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. E I 2ATECY48A-SUB-1 B TAG: A., 4 Tr%n COnver obi Air Handler 2/4TEC31=43AI 000A AFFLOW 21 .00 Q CIRCUIT DISCHARGE BPEANER " OPENING ISEE FIG.I A FIG.21 1.14 ��HE�TER K.O. B GAS LINE E F SEE TABLE OGLiBRGE e 5 76 �— i IT LIQUID LINE SEE TABLE TOP VIEW 2.81 3/4-14. TAPERED PIPE THREAD .8EV % 138, 5.75 HEATER " REVERSIBLE- 2 /1 D 1.14 DUCT FLANGES. (SEE FIG. I d FFG.2f _ 2:56 5.23 3. 48 2. T 2 —7--f FILTER G ACCESS 2.00 VERTICAL UPFLOW FIG. I 1.64— J A 1.64 v e. L N v �J s" e DMCHAR SIDE VIEW' .I . 0 0 — r 18.07� �.2.01 100 RETURN C OPENNG v e® 1.64 .88 owl FIG. 2 BOTTOM VIEW MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO SERVICE COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCE MATERIAL (RECOMMENDED) (REOUIRED) SIDES 0' 2" FRONT 0' 21: BACK 0' 0 INLET DUCT 0' 1' OUTLET DUCT I" I' FOR THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OUTLET DUCT WHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE INSTALLED E'CEPT MODELS BAYHTR1405, 1408, AND 1410 ARE APPROV E DFOR 0" PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY ON 2/4TEC _MODELS. FIG 1 FIG 2 MODEL NO. J K J. K L 2/4TEC3F48, 60 12.02 21.22 11.02 20.22 31.15 MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO SERVICE COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCE MATERIAL (RECOMMEN- REQUIRED DED SIDES 0" 2"' FRONT 0" 21" BACK 0" 0" INLET DUCT 0" 1,, OUTLET DUCT 1— FOR THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OUTLET DUCT WHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE I NSTALLED. E XC EPT MOD E LS DAYHTR1405,1408, AND 1410 ARE APPROVED FOR O" PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY. 2R27 R 410A R,410A MODEL NO. A B C D E F G H Flow jGaRs.L�lneLIq. Line Gas Line Llq. Line Control BRAZE BRAZE `BRAZE 2/4TEC3F48A1 57.90 23.50 21.50 30.47 4.65 12 6.77 3.62 1.89 TXV/NB f 1-1/8 3/8 M 3/8 2006 American, Standard Inc. All rights reserved' I PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 2/4TEC3F48A1000A RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ. 208-230/1/60 RATINGS (D See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. 3 -1,4 (3-16, 4TEC) Face Area (sq. ft.) 6.19 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXV - NonBleed Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN — Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In.) 11 X 10 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 3 CFM vs. in. w.g. O See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1-1/2 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1000 Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1 /60 F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 2.7 - 4.5 FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended Throwaway No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 20 -1 in. Horizontal Applications Filter Furnished? No Recommended Size O See Note O REFRIGERANT R_22 R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 1-1/8 7/8 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 59-1/2 x 26 x 23-1/2 Uncrated See Outline Drawing WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs.) 166 /151 O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. ® 314" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM 1300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 O The cabinet for this unit is made of two pieces, making it easier to install in attics or tight applications. O Torque Spec for TXV = Tighten 116 turn passed finger tight Airflow Performance 2/4TEC3F48A: Wet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.w.g.) AIRFLOW (CFM) VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO 0 1945 1768 1617 1810 1618 1478 1959 1745 1582 1768 1562 1440 0.1 1880 1712 1583 1762 1574 1428 1910 1722 1612 1750 1606 1430 0.2 1824 1659 1532 1710 1526 1382 1860 1683 1582 1714 1577 1390 0.3 1770 1606 1474 1654 1476 1333 1810 1636 1524 1664 1511 1336 0.4 1712 1551 1415 1595 1421 1278 1758 1584 1457 1606 1436 1275 0.5 1647 1490 1358 1532 1360 1212 1700 1529 1394 1542 1365 1213 0.6 1571 1419 1296 1462 1290 1134 1636 1470 1336 1471 1300 1146 0.7 1485 1337 1219 1383 1206 1044 1561 1402 1274 1392 1228 1068 0.8 1391 1238 1113 1291 1101 945 1471 1319 1190 1300 1127 966 0.9 1293 1120 1 955 1 1180 970 840 1363 1212 1056 1 1190 959 821 NOTES: With filter, no horizontal drip tray Small apex baffle Subtract 0.06"" W.G. for downflow As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05"" W.G. for horizontal left SEE AIR FLOW RESISTANCE TABLE FOR PRESSURE LOSS WITH SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER. 4 PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS AIRFLOW CFM 1 2 3 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 700 0.01 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.04 h;£ 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 w, 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0m. 0.13 1500 0,08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12' 0.15 0.17 1700 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1900 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0:23 - 2000 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 HEATER RAICKS HEATER MODEL NO. NO. OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 BAYHTR1/3410 2 BAYHTR1/3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 214TEC3F48A WIRING DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit `) Number 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Healer of Model NO. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit . Ampacity. Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection NONE 1/1 WA N/A N/A 3.4 15 N/A N/A N/A 3.4 15 BAYHTR1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 28 30 3.60 12300 17.3 25 25 BAYHTR1408 +++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 43 45 5.76 19700 27.7 38 40 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 53 60 7.20 24600 34.6 47 50 BAYHTR1415 +++ 211 15.36 52400 40124 53*/30 60*/30 11.53 39300 34.6120.8 47'926 50*/30 BAYHTR1415 BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 15.36 52400 64 90 90 11.53 39300 55.4 79 80 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140A BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30.0 37 40 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 38.2 51 60 11.53 39300 33.'1 44 45 BAYHTR1419 000 2/1 19:20 65500 32/48 43*/60 45*/60 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 38*/52 40*/60 BAYHTR1419 BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 19.2 65500 80 110 110 14.42 49200 69.3 96 100 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140A NOTES: * Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) 000, BRK, PDC 000 =pigtails, BRK =contains circuit breakers, PDC =contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local ElectricatCodes. HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTR: Air Handler Unit 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 1425 * _ 1 or 3 Model Position Application 4.60KW 7.68KW 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20KW 24.98KW Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - Upflow Heat Pump L L L L M - ! Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L N/A - 2TEC3F48 Downflow Heat Pump L L L L NIA - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L Left, Heat Pump . L L L L L - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L - „Right Heat Pump L L L L L - Mechanical Specifications General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 `R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the right hand horizontal configuration and converts to vertical upflow just by standing the unit on end. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. AV It's H.,d T. Stop A n.—'" The Trane Company 6200 Troup Highway Tyler, TX 75707-9010 An American -Standard Company Refrigerant Circuits — The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by a factory installed non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil — Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan — Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. The 2/4TEC3F models also include check valves. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug- in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. 2TTA3036-SUB-101.00 NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. 3 Ton Split SystemCooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3036A SE AV K[ E f1R1'A, AN touxi tt[ PEA PR[VAIL IN K 1D� 22.E ""A o. DIAyo. uADE 1KKE- 2s.A DIlm M, I.o..nA tt.t IAAD11011. NIDA Ix CUX1A01 eo+ amla ro-. ITAI i LICUI DDLIx[xSMIK.E1I[ALVC.� coxx¢non .Iix IAa sAH rLARE PAf SSURE TAP fMTlC 46. I F J G TOP DISCRAIDE AREA I-LD RE URFES iR It I[u IOR Ai l[A51 ISIA IS ![ElY ABOVE UIIII. NI RAOYLD A[ IALf- So AU11 AUx IDII LD K T L x0r POUR DIA) F A UR 11. Axp SNOU!0 BE AT LEAST SOS 111'1 . .ALL AID ALL O1xER ITID IDES AEAY IR C11 opts. [R no sIo[s uxxtslA¢rzD. T Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz® 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 13 7 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 20 15 Compressor CLIMATUFFIRt-SCROLL LIMATUFFtRI-SCR( RL Amps - LR Amps 9.6 - 63 4.9 - 31 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 1.4 0.7 Fan HP 1/6 1/6 Fan Dia (inches) 23 23 Coil Spine Fin TM Spine Fin TM Refrigerant R-22 6/05-LB/OZ 6/05-LB/OZ Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas ® 7/8 7/8 Line Size - (in.) O.D. Liquid O 3/8 ` 3/8 Dimensions HxWxD (Crated)38x30.1x33. 38x30.1x33 Weight - Shipping 216 219 Weight - Net 189 192 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES �MID OLIIEMAL[ DAIIEDLVE. COxRtxriox . R I/ SAC ILIAC PAESSAAE 1. f111ixp. H F FIG. 1 G AS uxt Suv¢[ VALVE. 'o- o. ExALE BAITED J PRESSURE 1 xA IHITIND [ ts[lux[ Er 11"SAu¢ l.DxiEAl f�xttlllvpExiAxVDSAE FlG. 2 1 c. O1 Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program which is based on ARI Standard 210f240. OO Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers or fuses. OO Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift - 60' Suction and Liquid line. For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-01. (tde- notes latest revision) ® C o Us MODELS BASE FIG. I A I B I C I D E I F I G I H I J I K 2TTA3036A 3 2 1 832 (32-3/4) 1 829 (32-5/8) 1 756 (29-3/4) 1 7/8 3/8 1 137 (5-3/8) 1 86 (3-3/8) 1 210 (8-1/4) 1 79 (3-1/8) 508 (20) From Dwg. 21 D153074 Rev.10 A-weiahted Sound Power Level rdSIA11 MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB(A)] A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL dB - [dB(A 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 2TTA3036A 76 44.8 60.5 61.4 69.2 72.1 65.2 57.3 51.3 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved Trane Abusiness of American Standard Companies www.trane.com Mechanical f i,e.eP ♦..''di a Specification pp General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 DuratuffTm base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The ClimatufP compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatufP compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. ` Z�nco.oaniq F .�.,r.rvero.. a 6 Condenser Coil The Spine Fin TM coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10OF. 0,. - �z.`..'s s¢ -' _-°€n :.'. k`"d'?:..: K'#as VI per, .-4" 1 Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the fight to change design and specifications without notice. 3 TonConvertible Air Handler 2/4TE`C3F36B1000A DISCHARGE OPENING I SEE FIG.I d FIG.2) HEATER N.O. BB 1 �E F TOP VIEW' DUCT FL MG (SEE FIG. I HEATER d FIG.2l REVERSIBLE 7. 58 f SIDE VIEW I 1.DD r 18._07-1 rZ.01 P RETum E EOPENINGI s 6 I BOTTOM VIEW 2.00 GAS LINE SEE TABLE LIOUID LINE SEE TABLE I 2/4TEC3F36A-SUB-1 D ANFLON CIACUII �,® ® .88 00, BREAKER 1.38 L�J . FIG. 1 FIG. 2 LTHREAD L �rll�ACCESS VERTICAL W MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO COMBUSTIBLE SERVICE MATERIAL CLFARANCE (REWIRED I IRE COMMENDED) SIDES 0' FRONT 0' 21' BACK 0' 0' INLET DUCT :0' I• OUTLET DUCT I'. I I' FOR THE FIRSi 3 FT. OF OUTLET. DUCT WHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE INSTALLED EXCEPT MODELS BAYHTR1405. 11D8. AND I110 ARE ,APPROVED FOR 0' PLENUM AND DUCT C LEAAAXCE IN THE UPFLOW CONFIGURATION ONLY ON TWE-P MODELS. FIG 2 MODEL NO. L1,2.02 t19.22 J K L 2/4TECY18, 24, 30, 36 11.02 18.22 n/a R22 R22 R-410A . R-410A MODEL NO. A B C D E F G H Flow Gas Line Liq. Line Gas Line Liq. Line Control BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE 2/4TEC3F36B 45 21.50 19.50 17.57 3.65 5.77 3.62 1.89 TXV/NB 7/8 3/8 3/4 3/8 2006 American Standard Inc.,AII rights reserved i PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS ODEL 16B100 0/1 /60 RATINGS W See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. 3 - 14.0 Face Area (sq. ft.) 3.67 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXV - NonBleed Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT ,CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN — Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In) 10 X 7 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 3 CFM vs. in. w.g. O See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1 -1/3 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1080 Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1/60 F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 2.2 - 5.3 FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended Throwaway No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 20 - 1 in. Horizontal Applications Filter Furnished? No Recommended Size O See Note O REFRIGERANT R_22 R-410A' Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 7/8 3/4 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 46 1/2 x 24 x 23-1/2 Uncrated WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs) 135 / 125 O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. ® 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 ® Torque Spec for TXV - Tighten 1/6 turn passed finger tight Airflow Performance 2/4TEC3F36B: Wet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.w.g.) AIRFLOW (CFM) VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO 0 1484 1282 1077 1402 1200 963 1402 1265 1069 1349 1165 947 0.1 1412 1268 1082 1352 1166 948 1350 1228 1048 1298 1131 915 0.2 1344 1226 1055 1292 1130 924 1289 118.0 1015 1243 1090 890 0.3 1277 1171 1013 1227 1089 893 1225 1127 976 1185 1047 866 0.4 1209 1110 965 1163 1040 856 1163 1073 933 1127 1001 836 0.5 1139 1049 915 1098 982 814 1104 101,9 887 1066 958 795 0.6 1065 987 862 1031 915 764 1043 962 835 1001 898 743 0.7 988 916 799 957 839 703 977 897 771 929 829 677 0.8 907 827 713 870 757 624 894 815 689 846 736 599 0.9. 823 702 584 760 671 521 783 707 579 745 609 513 NOTES: With filter, no horizontal drip tray Small apex baffle Subtract 0.06" W.G. for downflow As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05"" W.G. for horizontal left PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS IRFLOW CFM 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 700 0.01 0.02 0.02 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 1 0.06 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 1 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 1500 0.08 - 0.09 0.11 0:13 0.15 1600 ' 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 1760 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.23 HH 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 a -•ate s` �1• ®' Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air. Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 2/4TEC3F36B WIRING DATA Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit 1) Number 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater of Model No: Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload '. Amps per Circuit Overload KW BT.UH KW BTUH Phase Circuit, Ampacity protection Circuit Ampacity Protection BAYHTR1405+++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 28 30 3.60 12300 17.3 24 25 BAYHTR1408+++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 43 45 5.76, 19700 27.7 37 40 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 53 60 7.20 24600 34.6 46 50 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 15.36 52400 64 90 90 11.53 39300 55.4 79 80 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 40 50 50 11.53 39300 34.9 44 45 BAYHTR1419BRK with Single, Circuit 1/1 19.2 65500 80 110 110 14.42 49200 69.3 96 100 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B NOTES: Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) ... = 000, PDC 000 = pigtails, PDC= contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes: HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTR Air Handier Unit 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 Model Position Application 4.80KW, 7.68KW 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20K Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L Upflow Heat Pump L L L H H Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L 2/4TEC3F36 Downflow Heat Pump L L L H H Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L L Left Heat Pump L L L H H Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L' ' ` L L L Right Heat Pump L L L H H Mechanical Specifications General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 "R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the vertical upflow configuration and converts to horizontal right just by laying the unit on its side. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. It's Hard To Stop A Rane.'M The Trane Company A business of American Standard, Inc. 6200 Troup Highway Tyler, TX 75707 Refrigerant Circuits — The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by a factoryinstalled non - bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil — Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan — Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options; and plug-in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. "F\ED TO 4R/q U�PS1F\ED T04R/,FS <PPP ., qF 9c0�' ; eP? h qq COo FO��PME�.s ' YiPME� O Q 99�SrANDARD!LQ 9A�S ANDAR�2,. ..h Trane has a policy of continuous product product data improvement and it reserves the right to change I I A I I Tag: All dimensions are in inches. TOP DISCHARGE AREA SHOULD BE UNRESTRICTED FOR 100•/2540 MINIMUM. UNIT SHOULD BE PLACED SO ROOF RUN-OFF WATER DOES NOT POUR DIRECTLY ON UNIT.. k� 1I33/l�� ,DIAMETER HOLE ITSmm (GH VOLTAGE) 7/8• DIAMETER HOLE 0, (CONTROL WIRING) I I/4• LIFTING HOLE DIA. HOLE— TrTSmn (4 PLACES) _5 gmm (SUCTION) n DIA. KNOCKOUT ENTRY FOR HOTGAS BYPASS (OPTIONAL Rlrrl ACCESSORY) DISCHARGE. L I ME 7/g -D I A. HOLE—� Z£.T.'fmm (L IOUID) CLEARANCE PERI (NOTE 1) 7(�6• DIA. IS ri-r (GUYS Service Access #1 I TI.F.V- I I \ II I NTING HOLES 4T.A3mm 4 PLACES) 7'/2 Ton Split System Cooling Single Compressor TTA09®A NOTES: J. MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR PROPER OPERATION IS 36'/914.4mm FROM WALLS, SHRUBBERY, PRIVACY FENCES, ETC. MINIMUM CLEARANCE BETWEEN ADJACENT UNITS IS 72'/1828.8mm. 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE GIVEN IN INCH/MILLIMETERS. 3. ALL MASSES (WEIGHT) ARE GIVEN IN I POUNDS-FORCE/KILOGRAMS. ONTROL 1 3/I6 ACCESS IDA. 38mm OMPRESSOR, PRESSURE TAPS, - AND SERVICE VALVE ACCESS. - RECOMMENDEDSERVICE CLEARANCE I OOTPRINT (BOLT DOWN PATTERN). 301- APPROXIMATE CORNER TOTAL TOTAL I T-(N ) UNIT WEIGHT SHIPPING WEIGHT MODEL • ♦I i2 i3 i4 TTAOTSA-F 83. Ib 6LJ �- l�l� 379Ib �8 �kq TTA 090A-P 9 37 6�9 ZTTY 132� l37 Table 1 Unit Wiring #2 Unit Minimum Circuit Maximum Fuse Size or Unit Operating Ampacity Maximum Circuit Breaker' Model No. Voltage Range TTA09OA3 187-253 34.5 50 TTA090A4 414-506 18.1 25 TTA09OAK 342-418 21.0 30 TTA090AW 518-632 14.5 20 Note: 1. Electrical characteristics reflect nameplate values and are calculated in accordance with UL and ARI specifications. Values are system rated. 2. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. Table 2 Unit and Corner Weights (lbs) Shipping Net Corner Weights Maximum Maximum 1 2 3 4 370 326 105 83 61 77 Table 3 Accessory Weights (lbs) Accessory Net Rubber -In -Shear 2 Steel Spring Isolators 12 Anti -Short Cycle Timer 1 Coil.Guard 8 Low Ambient 23 Thermostat 1 # 3 Table 4 General Data s I on Single Compressor TTA090A3, A4,AW Cooling Performance' Gross Cooling Capacity Matched Air Handler 92,000 Condensing Unit Only2 92,000 ARI Net Cooling Capacity' 89.000 EER' Matched Air Handler 10.3 Condensing Unit Only 11.6 Integrated Part Load Value' - System KW/Condensing Unit KW 8.6117.90 k Compressor No./Type 1(rrane 3-139 Scroll ' No. Motors/Hp 1/7.50 Motor RPM 3450- Sound Rating (BELS)6 8.8 System Data' No. Refrigerant Circuits 1 Suction Line (in.) OD 1 3/8 Liquid Line (in.) OD 1/2 Outdoor Coil -Type Plate Fin Tube Size (in.) O.D. .375 Face Area (sq ft) 19.25 Rows/FPI 2/18 Outdoor Fan -Type Propeller No. Used/Diameter (in.) 1/26 Drive Type/No. Speeds Direct/1 CFM 5,670 No. Motors/HP 1/.50 Motor RPM 1,100 Refrigerant Charge (Field Supplied) (Lbs of R-22)' 16.0 NOTES: --1..Cooling Performance is rated at 95'F ambient, 80"F entering dry bulb, 67'F entering wet bulb. Gross capacity does not include the effect of fan motor heat. ARI capacity is net and includes the effect of fan motor heat. Certified in accordance with the Unitary Large ..Equipment certification program, which is based on -. ARI Standard 340/360-93. - - 2. Condensing Unit Only Gross Cooling Capacity rated at 45OF saturated suction temperature and at 95°F - ambient. 3. ARI Net Cooling Capacity is calculated with matched blower coil and 25 ft. of 1 3/8", W OD interconnecting tubing. 4. EER is rated. at ARI conditions and in accordance with. DOE test procedures. - 5. Integrated Part Load Value is based on ARI Standard 210. Units are rated at 80°F ambient, 80°F entering dry bulb, and 67'F entering wet bulb at ARI rated cfm. 6. Sound shown is tested in accordance with ARI - Standard 270. 7. System Data based on maximum linear length 80 ft. Maximum lift: suction 60 ft., liquid 60 ft. For greater lengths, refer to refrigerant piping applications manual. B. Refrigerant (operating) charge is for condensing unit (all circuits) with matching blower coils and 25 ft. of interconnecting refrigerant lines. All units are shipped with a small holding charge, only. Table 5 Gross Cooling Capacities (MBh) - T/2Ton TTA090A'Condensing Unit Only Outdoor Temperature Suction Reference Temperature (F) in Degrees (F) 30 35 40 45 50 55 Head press PSIG 166 171 177 182 189 19 65 Cap. Btuh/1000 82.0 90.1 98.6 107.3 116.3 125.4 Unit KW 5.45 5.59 5.74 5.91 6.09 6.29 Head press PSIG 190 196 202 208 214 221 75 Cap. Btuh/1000 78.4 86.1 94.1 102.3 110.8 119.5 Unit KW - 5.97 6.12 6.29 6.47 6.66 6.86 -Fle-acT-p-ress PSIG 217223 229 236 242 250 85 Cap. Btuh/1000 74.4 81.7 89.2 97.1 1052 113.5 Unit KW 6.60 6.76 6.94 7.13 7.33 7.54 Head press PSIG 247253 259 266 273 281 95 Cap. Btuh/1000 70.1 77.0 84.2 91.6 99.3 107.3 Unit KW 7.35 7.52 7.71 7.90 8.10 8.31 Head press PSIG 279 285. 292 299 307 31 105 Cap. Btuh/1000 65.4 72.0 78.8 85.9 93.3 100.9 Unit KW 8.21 8.39 8.57 8.77 8.97 9.17 -Head press PSIG 313 320 327 335 343 351 115 Cap. Btuh/1000 60.5 66.7 73.2 80.0 87.0 94.3 Unit KW 9.17 9.35 9.54 9.73 9.92 10.12 Performance data calculated at 15° F subcooling and 15° F superheat and does not include capacity loss due to refrigerant lines. - Table 6 Capacity Curves Condensing Unit Only r. �. \I� n�o y•e'dMMORRO•�'e �'�r4NCP{A�• �!)MLR'A� Table 7 Electrical Characteristics - Motors - 60 Cycle Compressor Motor Condenser Fan Motor Unit Amps Amps Model No. No. Volts Phase RLA(ea) LRA(ea) No. Volts Phase FLA(ea) LRA(ea) TTA090A3 1 208-230 3 25.1 182.0 1 208-230 1 3.1 8.1 7'/2 TTA090A4 1 460 3 13.2 94.9 1 460 1 1.6 3.7 TTA090AW 1 575 3 10.6 70.0 1 575 1 1.2 3.0 NOTE: 1. Electrical characteristics reflect nameplate values and are calculated in accordance with UL and ARI specifications. Values are system rated. 2 I I r Table 8 Gross Cooling Capacities (MBh) 71/2Ton TTA090A Condensing Unit with 71/2 Ton TWE090A Air Handier a AmbientTemperature 85 95 105 115 i Enter. i pry Entering Wet Bulb CFM Bulb 61 67 73 61 67 73 61 67 73 61 67 73 Airflow (F) MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC`MBH SHC MBH SHC 00 75 -85.0 6.9 93.8 56.6 103: 38.1 81.8 65.3 3 55.2 99.j Jb.d 78.3 63.5 86.4 53.6 95.2 35.3 _ 4. 61.7 82.3 52.0 90.7 33T 80 85.4 77.9 94.1 64.4 103.2 49.8 82.3 76.4 90.5 62.9 99.4 48.3 78.9 74.7 86.7 61.2 95.2 '46.8' 75.3 72.8 82.5 59.3 ` 90.8 45.1 85 87.1 " 87.1 94.2 75.3 103.4 61.2 84.5 84.5 90.7 73.7 99.6 59.7 81.6 81.6 86.8 72.0 95.4 58.2 78.4 78:4 ; 82.7 70.2 91.0 56.5 90 91.5 91.5 94.6 86.4 103.6 72.5 88.8 88.8 91.3 84.9 90.6 70.9 85.8 85.8 87.6 83.2 95.5 69.3 82.5 82.5 83.7 81.5 -91.1 67.5 3000 75 86.7 69.9 95.5 ST9 104.9 38.8 83.3 68.3 91.9. 53.3 100.9 37.5 79.7 66.5 87.9 51:7 96.6 35.9 7 .8 64.6 83.6 49.9 92.0 34.3 80 87.3 82.0 95.7 67.2,104.9 51.4 84.1 80.4 92.0 65.5 100.9 49.9 80.6 78.7 88.0 '63.8 96.7 48.3 77.0 76.9 -83.8 61.9 92.1 46.7 85 89.9 89.9 95.9 79.0 105.1 63.8 87.2 87.2 92.2 77.4 101.1 62.3 84.1 84.1 88.3 75.7 96.9 60.8 80.8 80.8 84.2 73.992.4 59.1 90 94.5 94.5 96.6 91.2 105.2 75.9 91.6 91.6 93.1 89.7 101.2 74.3 88.4 88.4 89.4 88.0 97.0 72.7 85.0 85.0 85.1 85.1 92.5 70.9 3300 75 88.1 72.7 96.9 56.6 106.2 39.5 84.6 71.1 93.1 55.1 102.1 38.0 80.9 69.3 89.1 53.4 97.7 36.4 76.9 67.4 84.7 51.7 93.0 34.7 80 88.9 85.9 97.0 69.7 106.3 52.9 85.7 84.3 93.3 68.1 102.2 51.4 81.8 81.8 89.2 66.3 97.9 46.8 78.4 78.4 84.9 64.5. 93.2 48.2 85 92.4 92.4 97.3 82.6 106.5 66.3 89.5 89.5 93.6 81.0 102.4 64.8 86.3 86.3: 89.6 79.3 .98.1 63.2 82.8 82.8 85.4 77.4 93.3 61:3 90 97.0 97.0 98.4 95.9.106.6 79.2 94.0 94.0 94.9 94.3 102.6 77.6 90.8 90.8 90.8 90.8 98.2 75.9 87.2 87.2 ' 87.3 87.3 93.6 74.2 00 75 89.2 76.598.0 58.3 107.440.0 .8 73.8 94.2 b6.7103.238.5 82.0 72.0 90.1 55.1 98.7 36.90.0 85.6 53.3 93.9 35.2 80 90.5 89.7 98.2, 72.2 107.5 54.3 86.8 86.8 94.4 70.5 103.3 52.8 83.6 83.6 90.3 68.8 98.9 51.2 80.1 80.1 85.9 66.9' 94.2 49.6 85 94.5 94.5 98.5 86.0 107.7 68.6 91.5 91.5 ,94.8 84.4 103.5 67.2 88.2 88.2 90.8 82:7 99.0 65.3 84.6 84.6 86.5 80.8 94.3 63.5 90 99.3 99.3 99.3 99.3 107.8 82A 1 96.2 96.2 96.3 96.3 103.7 80.8 92.8 92.8 92.9 92.9 99.3 79.1, 89.2 89.2 89.2 " 89.2 94.6 773 Equal MBH and SHC values constitute dry coil condition. Total Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) shown to the left is not applicable. In this case the Sensible Heat Capacity (SHC) is the total capacity. - - - All capacities shown are gross andhave not considered indoor fan heat. To obtain net cooling capacities subtract indoor fan heat. MBH = Total Gross Cooling Capacity - SHC = Sensible Heat Capacity Table 8 Gross Cooling Capacities (MBh) 71/2Ton TTA090A Condensing Unit with 10Ton TWE120A Air Handler AmbientTemperature 85 95 105 115 Enter. Dry Entering Wet Bulb CFM Bulb 61 67 73 61 67 73 61 67 - 73 61 67 73 Airflow (FI MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH "SHC MBH SHC MBH' SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC MBH SHC 80 91.4 86.7 100.2 70.8 1091 54.0 88.1 85.1 96.4 69.3 105.7 52.5 84.4 83.3 92.3 67.4 101.4' 50.9 80..3 80.3 87.9, 65.5 96.7 49.2 85 94.5 94.5 100.3 83.5 109.9 67.2 91.6 91.6 96.6 81.9 105.9 65.7 88.4 88.4 92.5 80.1 101.6 64.1 84.9 84.9 88.2 78.3 97.0 62.4 90 99.2 99.2 101.0 96.5 110.1 80.3 96.2 96.2 97.5 95.0 106.0 78.6 92.9 92.9 93.6 93.3 101.7 76.9 89.4 89.4 89.6 89.6 97.1 75.1 80 93.1 90.9 101.6 73.7 111.2 55.6 89.7 89.3 97.7 71.9 107.1 54.1 85.9 85.9 93.5 70.1 102.6 52.5. 82.3 82.3 89.1 .68.2 97.9 50.8 85 97.0 97.0 101.7 87.3 111.4 69.8 94.0 94.0 98.0 85.7 107.2 68.3 90.7 90.7 93.9 83.9 102.9 66.7 87A 87.1 89.5 82.0 98.1 65.1 90 101.8 101.8 102.8 101.5 111.4 83.6 98.8 98.8 98.9 98.9 107.3 82.1 95.4 95.4 95.5 95.5 103.0 80.4, 91.8 91.8 91.9 91.9 98.3 78.6 3700 75 93.4- 79.8 102.6 61.3 112.2 41.8 89.8 78.0 98.7 59.7 108.0 40.3 85.8 76.1 94.4 58.0 103.4 38.7' 81.5 74.1 89.9 56.2 98.5 37.0 80 94:2 94.2 102.7 76.2 112.4 57.1 91.2 91.2 98.8 74.5 109.2 55.6 87.8 87.8 94.6 72.7 103.7 54.0 84.2 84.2 90.1 70.8 98.9 52.3 85 99.2 99.2 103.0 91.0 112.6 72.3 96.1 96.1 99.2 89.4 108.4 70.8 92.7 92.7 95.1 87.6 103.9 69.3 89.0 89.0 90.7 85.7 99.0 67.2 90 104.2 104.2'104.3 104.3 112.7 87.0 101.0 101.0 101.1 101.1 108.5 85.4 97.6 97.6 97.6 97.6 104.0 83.8 93.8 93.8 93.9 93.9 99.3 82.0 T000 - 75 94.5 82.6 103.6 63.0 113.2 42.3 90.8 80.8 99.7 .61.4 108.9 40.7 86.8 78.9 95.3 59.7 104.2 39.2 82.5 76.9 90.7 57.9 99:3 37.5 80 96.1 96.1 103.8 78.7 113.4 58.5 . "93.0 93.0 99.8 77.1 109.1 57.0 89.5 89.5 95.5 75.3 104.6 55.5 85.8 85.8 90:9 73.3 99.7 53.8 85 101.2 101.2104.2 94.5 113.6 74.8 98.0 98.0 100.4 92.9 109.2 73.0 94.5 94.5 96.2 91.1 104.7 71.3 90.7 90.7 91.8 89.3 99.9 69.5. 90 106.3 106.3 106.4106.4 113.7 90.3 103.0 103.0 103.1 103.1 109.4 88.7 99.5 99.5 99.6 99.6 105.0 870 195.6 95.6 95.7 95.7 100.2 85.3 - Equal MBH and SHC values constitute dry coil condition. Total Gross Cooling Capacity (MBh) shown to the left is not applicable. In this case the Sensible Heat Capacity (SHC) is the total capacity. All capacities shown are gross and have not. considered indoor fan heal To obtain net cooling capacities subtract indoor fan heal MBH = Total Gross Cooling Capacity SHC = Sensible Heat Capacity - 3 p ec anica peciff9catIonS General Condenser Coil Low Ambient Operation Units shall be assembled on heavy Coils shall be internally finned or Standard units shall startand operate ` gauge steel mounting/lifting rails and smooth bore 3/8" copper tubes to approximately 50OF when matched shall be weather proofed. Units shall mechanically bonded to configured with air handlers and coils. Optional include hermetic scroll compressors, aluminum plate fin as standard. Factory head pressure control accessory ' ' plate fin condenser coils, fans and pressure and leak tested to 420, psig air permits operation to 0°F- motors, controls and holding charge of pressure. Metal grilles with PVC coating nitrogen. Operating range shall be for coil protection is optional Zone Sensor between 1159F and 50°F in cooling as standard from the factory. Units shall Condenser Fan And Motor This field installed control shall be provided to interface with the Micro be UL 1995 listed, certified and rated in Direct -drive, statically and dynamically balanced propeller fan with aluminum; equipped units and shall be available in accordance with ARI Standard 340/360 or 365. blades and electro-coated steel hubs ' either manual, automatic her programmable with night setback, with Casing_ shall be used in draw -through vertical discharge position: Either permanently system malfunction lights, or remote ' Unit casing shall be constructed of 18 lubricated totally enclosed or open sensor options. gauge zinc coated heavy gauge, construction motor shall be provided Thermostat galvanized steel Exterior surfaces shall and shall have built in current and Two stage heating and cooling be cleaned, phosphatized and finished thermal overload protection. Motor operation or one stage heating and with a weather -resistant baked enamel shall have be either ball or sleeve cooling hall be available for field ' finish: Units surface shallbetested 500 .bearing type. installation in either manual or hours in salt spray test. Units shall have Controls automatic changeover. Automatic I removable end panels which allow P Condensing units shall be completely Programmable electronic with night access to all major components and factory wired with necessary controls ' setback shall also be available., controls.. and contactor pressure lugs or terminal - Refrigeration System block for power wiring. Unit shall Units shall have a single refrigeration provide an external location for i circuit. Each refrigeration circuit has an mounting a fused disconnect device. I integral subcooling circuit. A refrigeration filter drier shall be A choice of microprocessor or electro- provided as standard.The units shall mechanical controls shall be available. have both aliquid line and suction gas , The 24-volt electro-mechanical control' line service valve with gauge port: circuit shall include control transformer Units shall have one direct -drive and contactor pressure lugs for power wiring. Units shall have single point ' hermetic scroll compressor with centrifugal oil pump providing positive Power entry as standard. lubrication to moving parts. Motor shall The microprocessor controls shall be suction -gas-cooled and shall have a voltage utilization range of plus or provide for all 24-volt control functions. j minus 10 percent of unit nameplate The resident control algorithms shall' make all heating, cooling and/or voltage. Crankcase heater, discharge ventilating decisions in response to line thermostat, internal temperature and current -sensitive motor overloads electronic signals from sensors shall be included for maximum , measuring indoor and outdoor temperatures.The control algorithm a . protection. Scroll type compressor shall provide inherently low vibration and maintains accurate temperature. noise by having no suction and control, minimizes drift from set point; and provides better building comfort. A discharge valves. External high and low centralized microprocessor shall pressure cutout devices shall be provided. Evaporator defrost control provide anti short cycle timing and time provided in indoor blower coil shall delay between compressors to provide a higher level of machine protection. prevent compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting compressor Time delay timers shall be provided to e operation when low evaporator coil help prevent compressors in dual temperatures are encountered. compressor units from simultaneous start-up.An anti -short cycle timer shall e be available as an optional accessory. l Mechanical Specifications ACCESSORIES FACTORY INSTALLED ACCESSORIES Low Ambient Head Pressure Control - Black Epoxy Coated Condenser Coil - Shall modulate the RPM of unit This option is designed to provide outdoor fan motor in response to corrosion protection of air cooled outdoor ambient temperature and condenser coils for seacoast discharge line pressure. Accessory application. The black epoxy coil provides unit cooling operation to protection is -a factory applied outdoor temperatures of OF. thermoset vinyl coating, bonded to Vibration Isolation Packages - Shall normal aluminum fin stock. The uniform thickness of the bonded vinyl reduce transmission of noise and layer exhibits excellent corrosion vibration to building structures, v protection in salt spray tests performed equipment and adjacent spaces. in accordance with ASTM B177 Packages shall be available in either neoprene -in -shear or spring -flex types. Hot Gas Bypass Kit — Shall be available to provide capacity modulation. Time Delay Relay —Shall prevent compressors in dual compressor unit from coming on line simultaneously. Timer shall be 24-volt, 60 cycle, with four minute timing period. Anti-Short-CycleTimer - Shall prevent rapid on -off compressor cycling in light load conditions by not allowing compressor to operate for 5-7 minutes upon shutdown. Shall consist of a solid state timing device, 24-volt, 60 cycle with either 5 or 7 w minute fixed -off timing period. Condenser Coil Guard = Metal grille with PVC coating shall be provided to s g a alleviate coil damage. i l rary Product Literature _ Product Section Unitary ' Product Split System Cooling Model TTA090A — 7-1/2 Ton American Standard Inc. has a policy o/ continuous product Literature Type - - Submittal - " and product data improvement and reserves the right to ' change design and specifications without notice. Sequence _ 206.11 Date " October03 Technical Literature Printed in USA File No. PL-UN-S/S-TTA090-SQ-206.1 t 10/0/03 ©2003 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved Supersedes PL-UN-S/S-TTA090-SQ-206.10 7/03 s 5 i 0 l J DITPY."ES - ' CONTROL em .cuss PAMCL _ Oic:l[PN WT v��1 KNMANW I, y- 1.> OA 1 ]I.n11Y LOW VDLTAM DITIANCE 3iW A _ _ _e OA KINOO(Dul 21].37M HIGH TVDLTADE - SLUED pIrRANCC WE CONNECPVCTION PIPC DRAIN LCON"M"'A CD61nKNATON - - - K -' . (SEE NOTE 2 i ]) (SEE NOTE Q --.T FLR i nT. . A FIELD Tc Oi - F (WN DOs) - - - - - G gWCKOOT-PoP'r OD. SUC� " " F,DU:, C D. CWNETON .. - F WN IssrANa FaR ' DLTLA PDAOVK ' f� FILIER - 7 '1• ACCESS - - Ii 1 rtUALE SCRm P. PPE MAN CONNECTOI VERTCK CONMRATON .. .. (SFE. NOTE 2 Y ]) NOTES: - I: LENGTH. 1IO7N. AND III DIMENSIONS DO NOT INCLUDE I/2'. ACCESS PANEL DEPTH. - ' 2. REMOVABLE DRAIN PAN AND ATTACHED DRAIN CONNECTION WAY RE INSTALLED ON EITHER END OF UNIT - IN EITHER THE VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION. PLASTIC DRAIN PAN ACCESS PLATE ON THE T BE SLIDE OUT OF UNIT FOR CLEANING UNIT OPPOSITEMUST NON REMOYDRAIPTo MUST BEDRAINNCONNECALLED AN AN BACK UNIT. -3. IF PERIOPLADIC DRAIN PAN CLEANING IS REQUIRED, ALLOW ROOM FORPARTIAL REMOVAL OF PAN ON DRAIN IF CONNECTION END OF uNli. Air Handier Dimensions (in.) A B C D E F G H J K Q S V W Y AA 54 47-1/2 25 11-3/4 22-3/8 22 — 17-3/4 4 45-1/4 38-1/8 I 1/2 — 15 1.3/8 2 Table 1 Unit Wiring Unit Minimum Maximum Fuse Unit Operating Circuit Size or Maximum ' Model No. Voltage Range Ampacity Circuit Breaker' TWE090Al 187-253 8 15 TWE090AT 187-253 7 15 TWE090A32 414-506 4 15 TWE090AW 518-632 4 15 ote: 1. When wired for 208-230 volt. 2. When wired for 460 volt. 3. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. Table 2 Unit and Corner Weights (Ibs)' Shipping Net Corner Weights - Vertical Corner Weights - Horizontal Maximum (Ibs) Maximum (Ibs) #1 #2 #3 #4 A B C D 388 315 79 79 79 79 73 81 84 77 Note: 1. If application requires steam or hot water heating coils, field supplied isolators must be utilized. I l012' z55.7M1� 4 N.O. RETURN AIR OPENING 16 1/8" cal i 4, 31.75f M • 2 �1 73.03 41 3/4" 3�4" 6 5/8, (TYP.) RETURN AIR OPENING %a DIA 451/8' OF KO. VERTICAL - HORIZONTAL RETURN O�NNOCKOUTS (TP) OR HORIZONTAL — VERTICAL RETURN FOR HORIZONTAL SUSPENSION 6 7/8" FILTER _[7 ACCESS PANEL 16 1/4" RETURN AIR OPENING PANELS 2 73.03 (TYP') RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL — VERTICAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL — HORIZONTAL RETURN Q I i i �o 'O O O 4 VERTICAL VERTICAL (VERTICAL —RETURN) (HORIZONTAL —RETURN) 00 — 00 \ \� HORIZONTAL Q HORIZONTAL (HORIZONTAL —RETURN) (VERTICAL —RETURN) 2 NI NZ N4 N3 VERTICAL A B 1 I Air Flow Horizontal i i Table 3 General Data I 'z on Single Circuit TWE090A1,A3',AW System Data No. Refrigerant Circuits 1 Suction Line (in.) OD 1-3/8 Liquid Line (in.) OD 1/2 i Indoor Coil —Type Plate Fin Tube Size (in.) O.D. .375 Face Area (sq tt) 8.1 Rows/FPI 3/12 Refrigerant Control Expansion Valve Drain Connection Size (in.) 1 PVC Indoor Fan —Type Centrifugal No. Used 1 Diameter x Width (in.) 15 x 15 Drive Type/No. Speeds Belt/Adjustable CFM 3000 No. Motors/HP 1 Motor RPM Standard/Oversized 1.50/2.00 ' Motor RPM 1725 Motor Frame Size 56H Filters Type/Furnished Throwaway/Yes (No.) Size Recommended (3) 16 x 25x 1 ARI certified and tested with variouscondensing units per ARI r Standard 210/240 or 340/360 certification program. i Note: 1. Ships wired for 208-230/3/60. Field convertible to 460/3/60. Ci o us I i L I Table 4 Electrical Characteristics — Motors 60 Cycle Standard Evaporator Fan Motor Oversized Evaporator Fan Motor Unit Amps Amps Model No. No. Volts Phase RLA LRA No. Volts Phase FLA LRA TWE090Al 1 208-230 1 6.2 33.0 1 208-230 1 7.7 57.4 TWE090AT 1 208-230/460 3 5.0/2.5 34.3/17.0 1 208-230/460 3 6.0/3.4 49.0/27.5 TWE090AW 1 575 3 3.1 15.0 1 575 3 2.6 17.5 I Note: - 1. Ships wired for 200-230/3/60. Field convertible to 460/3/60. Table 5 Standard Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position i Unit. 5 Turns 4 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns 1 Turn Model No. Open Open Open Open Open Closed TWE09OAl 726 787 847 908 968 1029 Note: 1. Factory setting is 4.5 turns open. 3 3 i ° Table 6 Unit Wiring With Electric Heat (Single Point Connection) Maximum Fuse I Heater Heater To Use Unit Control Minimum or HACR Circuit Model No. KW Rating' With Unit Power Supply Stages Circuit Ampacity2 Breaker Sizez•6' BAYHTRL106A 4.33/5.76 1 34/38 35/40 BAYHTRL112A 8.65/11.52 TWE09OA1 208-230/1/60 1 80/683 60/70 __- ' BAYHTRL117A 12.98/17.28 Y 86/98 90/100 BAYHTRL123A 17.30/23.04 2 112/1283 125/150 BAYHTRL129A 21.65/28.80 2 138/1583 150/175 BAYHTRL305A ' 3.75/5.00 1 20/22 25/25 BAYHTRL310A 7.45/9.96 TWE09OA3 208-230/3/60 1 33/37 35/40 50/60 BAYHTRL315A 11.25/14.96 1 46/52 BAYHTRL325A 18.71/24.92 2 72/823 80/90 BAYHTRL335A 26.20/34.88 2 97/1124. 100/1255 BAYHTRL405A 5.00 1 11 15 BAYHTRL410A 9.96 TWE090A35 460/3/60 1 19 20 BAYHTRL415A 14.96 1 26 30 BAYHTRL425A 24.92 2 41 45 BAYHTRL435A 34.88 2 56 60 BAYHTRLW05A 5.00 1 11 15 BAYHTRLW10A 9.96 TWE090A31 575/3/60 1 17 20 25 BAYHTRLW15A 14.96 1 23 40 BAYHTRLW25A 24.92 2 36 BAYHTRLW35A 34.88 2 48 50 2. Any power supply and circuits must be wired and NOTES: protected in accordance with local codes. - " 1. KW ratings. are at: 208/240V for 208-230V air handlers 3. Field wire must be rated at least 75 C. 480V for 460V air handlers 4. Field wire must be rated at least 90 Ci : - 600V for 575V air handlers 5. With motor field converted to 460V. " Voltage 2 The HACR circuit breaker is for U.S.A. installations. 6. For other than rated voltage, capacity =(.Rated Voltage) xRatedCapacity. only. Table 7 Evaporator Fan Performance External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) - . .20" .30' ' .40" 50" .60" .70" .80" .90" 1.00" i .10" BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP CFM RPM i Table 8 Low Static Fan Drive Kit 1.5 HP standard Motor - - and Field Supplied .- Low Static Drive' 1.5 HP Standard Motor and Low Static Drive Kit 1.5 HP Standard Motor &Sheaves Motor Sheave Nominal 2400 429 475 .51 522 .58 569 .65 615 .71 662 _78 708 .84 755 .91 783 :98 811 1.05 Turns RPM .45 2550 453 .48 496 .55 539 .61 582 .68 626 .74 669 .81 712 .87 756 .94 785"1.00 814 1.08 I0 733 2700 476 .52 516 .58 556 .65 596 .71 636 .77 .676 .83 716 .90 758 .96 787 1.02 816 1.11 p 1 690 2850 500 .55 537 .62 573 .68 610 .74 646 .80 683 ".86 720 .92 759 .99 788 1.05 819 1.14 2 647 3000 524 .59 557 .65 590 .71 624 .77 657 .83 690 ` .89 723 .95 760 1.01 790 1.07, 821 1.17 3 604 3150 546 .62 577 .68 609 .75 640 .81 672 .87 703 .94 735 1.00 768 1.07 798 1.15 829 1.25 4 561 3300 568 .65 598 .72 628 :79 657 .85 687 .92 717 .99 " 746 1.05 776 „1.12 SOZ 1.22 837 1,33 5 518 3450 589 .67 618 .75 647 .83 676 .91 705 .99 733 1.07 762 1.15 791 1.23 820 1.33 849 1.42 3600 611 .69 639 .79 666 .88 694 .97 722 ' 1.06 750 1.16 778 1.25 806 1.34 834 1.43 862 1.51 Data inc u es pressure rop ue owe coi an i er. s - - - Fan motor heat (MBh) = 3.15 X BHP. , Trane's factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment, are definite purpose. motors, specifically designed and tested to operate reliably and continuously at all cataloged conditions. Using the full horsepower range of our fan motors as shown in our tabular data will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure.. our product's warranty will not be affected. - NOTE: . - 1. Field. Supplied Low Static Drive (use Table 9) - - - Table 9 Field Supplied Low Static Fan Drive' Table 7 (Continued) @ Motor Sheave Nominal External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) oTurns Open RPM_ 1.10" 1.20" 1.30" 1.40" 1.501, 1.60" 1.70" CFM RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM 'BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP € _ 0 598 I 1 - - 563 1.5 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves - - 2 528 2400 840 1.11 868 1.18 896 '1.25 924 1:32 952 1.39 890 1.46 1009 .1.52 1037 1.59 I I 3 493 2550 843 1.15 872 1.23 '901 1.31 930 1.38 959 1.46 988 1.54 1016 1.61 1045 1.69 I 4 458 2700 846 1.19 876 1.28 905 1.36 935 1.45 1 995 1.62 1024 1.70 1054 1.79 5 422 2850 849 1.23 880 1.33 910 1.42 941 1.51 971, 1.60 1002 1.70 1032 1.79 1063 1.88 3000 853 1.27 884 1.37 915 1.48 946 1.58 978 1.68 1009 1.78 1040 1.88 1071 1.98 NOTE: 3150 860 1.35 1 1. 922 1.56 958 1.66 984 1.76 1014 1.86 1044 1.94 - - ` 1. Field supplied components required:2.01- Blower Sheave: Fixed Pitch (9.8 inch Pitch 3300 868 1.43 898 1:54 929 1.64 959 1:74 990 1.85 1020 1.95 1049 _ Diameter), 3450 879 1.52 908 1.61 937 1.71 966 1.80 995 1.90 1025 2.00 - - - - Blower Sheave: 1.00 inch Bore, Single `'-" 3600 890 1.60 918 1.69 945 1.78 973 1.67 1001 1:96 - - - - - - Groove, "A" Belt. 2 HP Oversized Motor & Sheaves - Belt: A55 - - 4 F-.. 8 s i Table 11 Accessory Weights (Ibs) Accessory Net 1i1 Hot Water Coll Steam Coil 126 Electric Heat Minimum 27 Maximum 45 Discharge Plenum and Grille Hydronic Heat 78 No Heat 73 Electric Heat 123 Return Air Grille 5 Rubber -in -Shear Isolator Floor Mount 2 Suspended Mount. 6 Steel Spring Isolator Floor Mount 12 Suspended Mount 6 Control Transformer 4 Subbase 19 Oversized Motor 48 Table 12 Static Pressure Drop Through Accessories (inches of water column)' Electric Heaters (KW) Hydronic Coils Discharge Return Plenum Hot CFM Grille and Grille 5-10 15-20 25-30 35-50 Steam Water. 2400 .08 27 .03 .06 .08 .12 .38 .23. 3000 .13 .40 .06 .12 .17 .23 .50 .33 3600 .18 .58 .08 .16 .24 .32 .66 .44 Notes: 1. Return air filter ESP included in Fan Performance Table data. 2. At louver opening angle of 42 degrees. For ESP at other angle openings, see accessory Installer's Guide. Table 13 Oversized Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position Table 14 Discharge Plenum and Grille Assembly Throw Distance (Ft.) Louver Angle Deflection Position CFM Straight 20° 40° 55° 2400 52 43 35 29 2700 55 48 38 31 3000 58 53 42 32 3300 62 57 46 35 3600 66 60 50 37 Throw distance values are based on a terminal velocity of 75 FPM. Throw distance values at other terminal velocities may be established by multiplying throw distances in table above by throw factor: Terminal Velocity Throw Factor 50 FPM x 1.50 100 FPM x .75 150 FPM x .50 Unit 5 Turns 4 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns 1 Turn Model No. Open Open Open Open Open Closed TWE090A1 845 915 986 1056 1127 1197 TWE090A3, AW 847 908 968 1029 1089 1150 Table 15 Auxiliary Electric Heat Capacity Stage 1 Stage 2 Total No. Unit Total of KW BTUH KW BTUH KW BTUH Model No. KW Stages Input Output Input Output Input Output 5.76 1 5.76 19,659 - - 5.76 19,659 TWE090Al 11.52 1 11.52 39,318 - - 11.52 39,318 17.28 1 17.28 58,977 - - 17.28 58,977 23.04 2 11.52 39,318 11.52 39,318 23.04 78,636 5.00 1 5.00 17,065 - - 5.00 17,065 TWE090A3, AW 9.96 1 9.96 33,993 - - 9.96 33,993 14.96 1 14.96 51,058 - - 14.96 51,058 24.92 2 14.96 51,058 9.96 33,993 24.92 85,051 TWE09OAl 28.80 2 17.28 58,977 11.52 39,318 28.80 98,295 TWE090A3, AW 34.88 2 19.92 67,987 14.96 51,058 34.88 119,045 Heaters are rated at 240v, 480v and 600 v. For other than rated voltage, capacity = (. Voltage Rated voltage 2 x Rated Capacity. Table 16 Electric Heat Discharge Plenum and Grille Airflow (CFM) Unit Electric Heater Airflow(CFM) Model No. Model No. Minimum Maximum TWE09OAl BAYHTRL117A 3000 3600 BAYHTRL123A 3375 3600 TWE090A3 BAYHTRL315A 2625 3600 BAYHTRL325A 3000 3600 TWE090A3' BAYHTRL415A 2625 3600 BAYHTRL425A 2625 3600 1, When used for 460 volt. 7 E i Table 17 - Steam Heating Coil Capacity -Air Handler Steam Pressure (PSIG 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 25 PSI Entering Unit Airflow Air Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Tons Model No. CFM Temp. F LAT' MBh2 Lb/Hr' LAT MBhz Lb/Hr' LAT' MBh' Lb/Hr' LAT' MBhz Lb/Hr' LAT MBh' Lb/Hr' 40 102 162 168 106 171 177 110 182 191 114 192 203 120 208 222, 2400 60 115 144 149 119 152 158 123 164 172 127 174 184 133 190 203 80 129 126 130 132 134 140 136 146 153 140 155 164 146 171 183 40 95 178 183 97 187 194 101 200 209 105, 210 222 110 228 244 71/2 TWE090A 3000 60 109 158 163 111 167 174 115 180 188 119 190 201 124 208 222 80 122 138 143 125 147 153 129 .160 168 132 170 180 138 188 201 40 89 191 197 91 201 208 95 215 225 98 226 239 103 245 262 3600 60 103 170 175 106 180 187 110 193 203 112 205 216 117 224 239 80 118 149 154 121 158 164 124 172 180 127 183 194 132 202 216 Type NS Coil, 1 Row, V OD, SF Fins, 132 Fins Per Foot. NOTES: 1. - LAT - Leaving Air Temperature (F) 2. MBh Capacity: BTUIHPJ1000 3. Cond. Lb/Hr - Condensate pound per hour. Table 18 Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity Entering Water Temperature 180 200 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBh2 LAT' GPM' MBh' LAT' GPM'MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBh2 LAT' GPM' MBhz LAT' GPM' MBhz LAT' j 40 17.0 165.9 104 10.4 152.3 98 7.1 139.2 93 20.0 194.8 115 12.4 181.2 110 8.6 168.2 105 2400 60 14.2 138.4 113 8.5 125.2 108 5.7 112.5 103 17.2 167.1 124 10.6 153.9 119 7.2 141.2 114 40 19.3 187.9 98 11.7 171.9 93 8.0 156.5 88 22.7 220.9 108 14.0 204.9 103 9.7 189.6 98 3000 60 16.1 156.7 108 9.6 141.1 103 6.4 126.3 991 9.5 189.4 118 11.9 173.9 113 8.2 159.0 109 8 40 21.2 207.3 93 12.9 189.1 88 8.8 171.6 84 25.1 244.0 102 15.5 225.7 981 0.7:208.4 93 3600 60 17.7 172.7 104 10.6 155.0 100 7.1 138.3 95 21.5 209.1 113 13.1 191.4 109 9.0 174.4 105 80 14.2 138.2 115 8.3 121.2 111 5.4 105.4 107 17.9 174.3 125 10.8 157.1 120 7.2 140.9 116 - Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8' OD, PH Fins, 125 Fins per fool - - - a NOTES: 1. GPM - Gallons per minute 2. LAT - Leaving Air Temperature (°F) - 3. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 i Table 18 (Continued) Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity I Entering Water Temperature 210 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBhz LAT' GPM' MBh2 LAT' GPM' MBhz LAT' 40 21.6 209.2 120 13.4 195.7 115 9.4 182.7 110 2400 60 18.7 181.5 130 11.6 168.3 125 8.0 155.6 120 139 97 141 0 134 861 28.6 129 i 80 19 9 153.2 40 24.5 237.4 113 . 15.2 221.5 108 10.6 206.2 103 3000 60 21.2 205.8 123 13.1 190.3 118 9.0 175.4 114 134 109 15192 129 74 1447 194 I Rn 180 1744 40 27.1 262.3 107 16.8 244.1 102 11.7 226.8 98 - 3600 60 23.4 227.3 118 14.4 209.6 114 9.9 192.6 109 . 80 198 1924 1 2.r. 82 158 7 121 - - Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8' OD, PH Fins, 125 Fins per foot. - NOTES: 1. GPM - Gallons per minute 2. LAT - Leaving Air Temperature (°F) - 3. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 - Table 19 Hot Water Heating Coil -Water Side Pressure Drop Gallons per Minute (GPM) 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 _ 2 4 6 Pressure -Drop (Ft. of Water) - - .06 .11 .16 .23 .30 .39 .48 .58 .70 .82 .95 1.09 1.24 1.40 1.57 - - I General available as an option for high static Air handler units shall be completely factory application. All indoor fan motors meet the assembled including coil, condensate drain U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT). pan, fan motor, filters, and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in Controls either vertical or horizontal configuration. Magnetic evaporator fan contactor, low Units shall be tested and certified in voltage terminal strip, check valve, and accordance with. ARl standard 210/240 or single point power entry shall be included. 340/360. Units shall be UL listed and All necessary controls shall be factory - labeled in accordance with UL 465/1995 for installed and wired. Evaporator defrost indoor blower coil units. control shall be included to prevent compressor slugging by temporarily Casing interrupting compressor operation when low Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc evaporator coil temperatures are encoun- coated heavy gauge, galvanized steel. tered. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather - resistant baked enamel finish. Casing shall be completely insulated with cleanable, foil faced, fire -retardant, permanent, odorless, glass fiber material. All insulation edges shall be either captured or sealed. Knockouts shall be provided for unit electrical power and refrigerant piping connections. Captive screws shall be standard on all access panels. Refrigerant System The TWE090A, single refrigeration circuit, shall be controlled by a factory installed thermal expansion valve. Evaporator Coil Configured aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8" internally enhanced copper tubing and factory pressure and leak tested at 375 psig. Coil is arranged for draw -through airflow and shall provide a double sloped condensate drain pan constructed of PVC plastic. The drain pan shall be removable for. cleaning. The condensate drain pan can be installed in any of four positions allowing for vertical or horizontal application and providing external connections on either side of the unit. Evaporator Fan Double inlet, double width, forward curved; centrifugal -type fan with adjustable belt drive shall be standard. Thermal overload protection shall be standard on motor. Fan. and motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Oversized motors shall be Since The Trane Company has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Technical Literature Printed in USA The Trane Company 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 http.,Ilwwwtrane.com O American Standard Inc. 2001 Filters One inch, throw -away filters shall be standard on TWE090A model air handlers. Filters shall be accessible from the side coil access panel. Filter rack can be field converted to two inch capability. Accessories Hydronic Heat Coils — One row steam and two row hot water coils shall be available for mounting on the discharge outlet of the air handler. Coils shall be shipped completely factory assembled within a heavy gauge sheet metal casing, finished with enamel to match the blower coil unit. Hydronic coils shall have provision for left handed piping connections. Coils shall be applied in either vertical or horizontal airflow configuration. Electric Heaters — UL and CSA approved electric heat modules shall be available for installation directly on fan discharge. Electric heaters shall be available in a wide range of capacities with one or two stage control, single -point electric power connection and terminal strip connections. Electric heater elements shall be con- structed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements internally wye connected on 480/ 600 volt, three phase and delta connected on 208/240 volt, three phase. Each 208/240 volt heater shall have pilot duty with secondary backup fuse links for automatic reset of high limit controls. Each 480/600 volt heater shall have automatic line break high limit controls. E Discharge Plenums and Grilles — Accessory discharge plenums shall be available for vertical, free discharge applications. Plenums shall be constructed of heavy -gauge, zinc.coated, galvanized steel finished with baked enamel to match the air handler unit. Grilles shall be satin finished aluminum and have four-way adjustable louvers. Return Air Grilles —Accessory return air grille shall be provided for vertical front, free return applications. Grilles shall be installed in place of the front lower side panel Grille shall be satin finished aluminum with non- adjustable louvers. Mounting Subbases - This accessory is available for vertical floor mount configura- tions. Subbase shall be constructed of heavy gauge, zinc coated galvanized steel with baked enamel finish to match air handler unit. Subbase is required in the vertical air flow application for condensate drain trapping and when isolators are required. Vibration Isolators — Accessory shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration to building structures, equipment, and adjacent spaces. Packages shall be available in either neoprene -in shear or spring -flex types in floor or suspended mountings'. Oversized Motors — Field installed oversized motors shall be available for high static pressure applications. Control Options Standard Indoor Thermostats— Two stage heating and cooling operation or one stage heating.and cooling thermostats shall be available in either manual or automatic changeover. Programmable Electronic Night Setback Thermostat — This option shall provide heating setback and cooling setup with 7- day programming capability. Library Product Literature Product Section Unitary Product Split System Air Handler Model TWE090A — 7'/2 Ton Literature Type Submittal Sequence 201.09 Date October, 2001 File No. PL-UN-S/S-TWE090-SO-201.09 10/01 Supersedes TWE090-SQ-201.08 C - TAG: NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. SEA"CE ELEL SAICAL AM P[PPR 1111,lIx 2B.H II ?2.t A . BOx011p LIQUID LINT RATE He[z TOP DISCNAADE AREA S-ID BE A." uisu�ii� axsuou a at h".1v so[aoor RUN OFF WA TEA DO NOT POUR OIREEILA ON UAI1. Ali SNDUID DE Al 11.1 ITS III'1 IN. MALL AAD ALL SO AWNDIAS SHRUBBERY ON 1. SIDEB. OTHER INO SIDES UNRESTRICTED. T_ 2TTA3030-SUB-100.00 2-1/2 Ton Split System Cooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3030A Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz0 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 9 5 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 15 15 Compressor CLIMATUFF(R) CLIMATUFF(R) RL Amps - LR Amps 6.8 - 54.9 3.4 - 28 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 0.7 0.4 Fan HP 1/8 1/8 Fan Dia (inches) 23 23 Coil Spine Fin TIA Spine Fin TM Refrigerant R-22 5/08-LB/OZ 5/08-LB/OZ Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas O 3/4 3/4 Line Size - (in.) O.D. Liquid ® 5/16 5/16 Dimensions HxWxD (Crated) 38x30.1x33 38x30.1x33 Weight - Shipping 225 225 Weight - Net 197 197 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES IWID LIRE "-It vALI[. 'E' D. rEMAI[ BAAI[D COXX[CRIOX W11N IAA S+E rLAP.[ PA[BSUAE TAP E1111X0. H F G As iIn[ s[Av¢E vuv[. 'D' D. [1ALC BRAICD J fel SiUA[ TAP ENiii ND. S+[ "INS FIG. 2 (D Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program which is based on ARI Standard 2101240. (D Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers orfuses. O Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift - 60' Suction and Liquid line. For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-01. (lde- notes latest revision) Milk C us MODELS BASE FIG. I A I B I C I D E I F I G I H I J I K 2TTA3030A 3 2 1 832 (32-3/4) 1 829 (32-5/8) 1 756 (29-3/4) 1 3/4 5/16 1 137 (5-3/8) 1 86 (3-3/8) 1 210 (8-1/4) 1 79 (3-1/8) 1 508 (20) From Dwg. 21 D153074 Rev. 10 A-weiahted Sound Power Level rdB(All MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB(A)] A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL dB - dB A 63 125 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 4000 8000 2TTA3030A 78 45.8 56.9 61.7 1 68.5 1 71.4 1 70.3 61.2 54.2 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved Aft qu TRANE' Trane A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com Mechanical Specification Options General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 DuratuffTm base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The Climatur compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatufP compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. S\PEO TOggTq - 4 �.s9H ow.es'.ryoy' SrANOPP� �bs... Condenser Coil The Spine Fin TM coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 550F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling ,(manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10°F. s f 's w`'•i__ I'..: -a^off --::t_.} .e ..p. ,W rt..5t'.. K-' Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the fight to change design and specifications without notice. 11, 2-1/2 Ton Convertible Air Handler 2ATEC31730131000A DISCHARGE OPENING I.I/ 11EE FIG.I A FIG.2l HEATER N.O. B1 1 IE F 5.T6 I� TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW �.oDle.ot—.{ �z.ol Loo REMN c aPseND 00 _]7— BOTTOM VIEW HEATER 2 r� 2.00 GA$ LIME SEE TABLE UOUID LIRE SEE TABLE LE I D 2/4TEC3F30A-SUB-1 D K OLSCFIARGE ape" AMIX I.I/ CIRCUIT T ORE AVER 1.38 J L •® ®e FIG. 1 KE I.6 T BB � FIG. 2 MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE TO COMBUSTIBLE SERVICE MATERIAL CLEARANCE I REOUIRED/" IRECONMENDEDI SIDES 0• 2'� FRONT, D 21' BACK 0' 0' INLET DUCT 0• 1' OUTLET DUCT I'. I' FOR THE FIRST 3 FT. OF OU iLEi DUCT RHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS APE INSTALLED E KCEPT MODELS IT AT" 1105. I/INW AND 111D ARE APPROVED FOR o' PLENUM AND DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFL011 CONFIGURATION ONLY OX T�EP MODELS. FIG 1 FIG 2 MODEL NO. J K J K L. 2/4TEC31`18, 24, 30, 36 12.02 19.22 11.02 18.22 n/a R22 R22 R-410A R-410A MODEL NO. A B C D E F G H Flow Gas Line Liq. Line Gas Line Liq. Line Control BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE BRAZE 2/4TEC3F30B 45 21.50 19.50 17.57 3.65 5.77 3.62 1.89 TXV/NB 3/4 5/16 3/4 5/16 © 2006 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 2/4TEC3F30B1000A RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ. 208-230/1/60 RATINGS O See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows — F.P.I. 3 - 14 Face Area (sq. ft.) 3.67 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXVNB O Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN - Type Centrifugal Diameter -Width (In.) 9 X 8 No. Used 1 Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 3 CFM vs. in. w.g. O See Fan Performance Table No. Motors — H.P. 1 -1/3 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1075 Volts/Ph/Hz 200-230/1 /60 F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 2.1 - 4.6 FILTER Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended Throwaway No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 20 - 1 in. Horizontal Applications Filter Furnished? No Recommended Size O See Note O REFRIGERANT R_22 R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 3/4 3/4 Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Liq. 5/16 5/16 DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 46 1/2 x 24 x 23-1/2 Uncrated See Outline Drawing WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.) / Net (Lbs) 135 / 125 O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for performance data. O 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: Low Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 O Torque Spec for TXV = Tighten 1/6 turn passed finger tight NOTES: Vertical: With filter, no horizontal drip tray,Small apex baffle. Subtract 0.06" W.G. for downflow. Horizontal: As shipped but without filter. Subtract 0.05" W.G. for horizontal left. Airflow Performance 2/4TEC3F30B: Wet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.w.g.) AIRFLOW (CFM) VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO 0 1252 998 813 1188 911 728 1225 1038 871 1198 917 745 0.1 1169 992 835 1138 893 718 1169 1001 855 1143 893 724 0.2 1099 954 822 1079 855 700 1108 952 823 1086 861 705 0.3 1031 896 786 1012 807 673 1041 896 783 1022 819 679 0.4 956 829 735 938 756 635 966 835 736 950 767 641 0.5 869 755 670 857 698 586 879 765 680 865 705 587 0.6 769 672 590 765 628 522 780 682 610 766 629 517 0.7 659 569 486 660 532 440 666 574 515 650 536 433 0.8 542 432 342 536 390 338 533 427 382 517 421 341 0.9 429 239 141 387 177 210 380 223 193 366 279 247 NOTES: With filter, no horizontal drip tray � Small apex baffle Subtract 0.06" W.G. for downflow As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05"" W.G. for horizontal left SEE AIR FLOW RESISTANCE TABLE FOR PRESSURE LOSS WITH SUPPLEMENTARY HEATER. PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS AIRFLOW CFM 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 700 0.01 0.02 0.02 800 1 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 1 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 1 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 1500 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 1700 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1900 1 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.23 2000 1 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 HEATER RACKS HEATER MODEL NO. ' NO. OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1. BAYHTR1408 2 BAYHTR1 /3410 2 BAYHTR1/3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 2/4TEC3F30B WIRING DATA Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit 1) Number 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater of Model No. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity. Protection Circuit Ampacity 'Protection BAYHTR1405+++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 28 30 3.60 12300 17.3 24 25 BAYHTR1408+++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 43 45 5.76 19700 27.7 37 40 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 53 60 7.20 24600 34.6 46 50 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 15.36 52400 64 90 90 11.53 39300 55.4 79 80 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 39.9 50 50 11.53 39300 34.8 44 45 NOTES: Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps +++ = 000, PDC 000 = pigtails, PDC= contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. Air Handler Unit Model Position Application HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTR 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 1425 ` = 1 or 3 4.80KW 7.68KW 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20KW 24.98KW Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - Upflow Heat Pump L L L M - - Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - 2/4TEC3F30 Downflow Heat Pump L L L M - - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - Left Heat Pump L L L M - - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - Right Heat Pump L -1' L L M - - Mechanical Specifications General — Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 "R" value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the vertical upflow configuration and converts to horizontal right just by laying the unit on its side. No tools required. Simple coil rotation provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. Refrigerant Circuits —The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by a factory installed non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil —Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan — Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug- in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. It's Hard To Stop A Bane.'" The Trane Company r) C U@ L ub A business of American Standard, Inc. 0 6200 Troup Highway Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change Tyler, TX 75707 design and specifications without notice. I 2E WTATCW,� WIL- NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. 2TTA3060-SUBA 04.00 5Ton Split System Cooling — 3 Phase 2TTA3060A Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz® 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 Min CirAmpacity 23 10 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 40 15 Compressor CLIMATUFF(R)-SCROLL LIMATUFF(R)-SCROLL RL Amps - LR Amps 17.3 - 123 7.7 - 49.5 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 1.2 0.6 Fan HP 1/5 1/5 Fan Dia (inches) 27.6 27.6 Coil Spine Fin TM Spine FinTM 1. DISCxAA4A AA(A 1-0 B1 ",xl oA "` EIAS1 15rA A, rt(„ Refrigerant R-22 8/11-LB/OZ 8/11-LB/OZ ADeMai :niii wis iml° - D AE01, ce uiA. AAD',D 1u RAsr ou�$lRA5Mo. ru° i°. AXD Line Size - (in.) O.D. Gas O 1-1/8 1-1/8 O1xEA 1A0 SIDES 0AE(1r ICiED. r L• p Q 3/8 3/8 ne Slze - (In.)-0. . Llquld Dimensions HxWxD (Crated)46.4x35.1x38.7 46.4x35.1x38.7 Weight - Shipping 292 293 Weight - Net 256 257 Start Components NO NO Sound Enclosure NO NO Compressor Sump Heat YES YES WID LIA( SEAV IC[ YA(Y(. , 4• L0. rfNAl[ AAAEte O Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program PP(SNRE°IAAIr�II Ivry SA[ rIAPI which is based on ARI Standard 210/240. OO Calculated in accordance with N.E.C. Use only HACR circuit breakers or (uses. H 0Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift 60' Suction and Liquid line. F_ For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-0r. ('de- notes latest revision) ,As uAE uev rcc vEv(, G r 'D LD. rtxAEE DAa(o �— r veiisuer iA? n,n.,sAl rtAAE FlG. 2 MODELS BASE FIG. A B C D E F G H J K 2TTA3060A 4 1 1045 (41-1/8) 946 (37-1/4) 870 (34-1/4) 1-1/8 3/8 152 (6) 98 (3-7/8) 219 (8-5/8) 86 (3-3/8) 508 (20) From Dwg. 21 D153074 Rev. 10 MODEL SOUND POWER LEVEL [dB A ] A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL dB - [dB(A 63 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 8000 2TTA3060A 79 53.6 1 57.5 1 63.6 1 73.3 1 73.1 1 71.3 1 63.1 1 55.9 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved J Trane A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com Mechan'llcal is an Opt. General The 2TTA3 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified'. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 DuratuffTm base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The Climatur compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatufP compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. � "1 0 TO 44 4 rpj is h 4grS%9N�PP�ti �ee�E'a;u� Condenser Coil The ISpine Fin rm coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 5/16 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to WE The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling: Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambientlockout from 46 to—10.°17. Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to changer design and specifications without notice. 1 All dimensions are in PFEsME MAIN N.- ORIZDNTAL Cw ITGUR TdI (SEE Na. 2 R n 2GWY PPIE NCO AO PTC TERTCKU004—ERATON I- NO. 2R1) — DUCT RAN' oar A- DLPTH PAR m �R wA RNDIXDar ->E]1pl Aia sNacirowKR pmr Ww6 2 ,wiEAAIEn KNr�iAMYI 2. LOW —A2 ENIR"E C.A. —OUT �ENr WILE _ � � nD. FELD CONNECTON (.. ENDR) RNOEROOT FOR cTON FIELD DDNN CTn DOTAL nos) NOTES: I. LENGTH, WD1H. AND IIEIGN1 014ENSIONS 00 NOT INCLUDE 1/2' ACCESS PANEL DEPTH. 2. REMOVABLE GRAIN PAN AND ATTACHED DRAIN CONNECTION NAY BE INSTALLED ON EITHER END OF UNIT IN EITHER THE VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL CONFIGURATION. PLASTIC DRAIN PAN ACCESS PLATE ON THE END OF UNIT OPPOSITE DRAIN CONNECTION. MUST BE REMOVED TO SLIDE DRAIN PAN OUT OF UNIT FOR CLEANING ACCESS PLATE MUST BE RE -INSTALLED AFTER SLIDING DRAIN PAN BALK INTO UNIT. S IF PERIODIC DRAIN PAN CLEANING IS RECURRED, ALLOW ROOM FOR PARTIAL REMOVAL OF PAN ON DRAIN CONNECTION END OF UNIT. TWE120SQ206-10 10 Ton Dual Circuit Convertible Air ® Handler Air Handler Dimensions (in.) A B C D E F G H J K Q S V W Y AA 54 63-1/2 25 19-3/4 22-3/8 22 20-118 16 2-1/8 45-1/4 38-1/8 3/8 18-3A 14 1-1/8 2-1/8 Table 1 Unit Wiring Unit Minimum Maximum Fuse Unit Operating Circuit Size or Maximum Model No. Voltage Range Ampacity Circuit Breaker' TWE120131 187-253 11 15 TWE120B31 187-253 8 15 TWE120832 414-506 5 15 TWE120BW 518-632 4 15 Note. 1. When wired for 208-230 volt. 2. When wired for 460 volt. 3. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC. Table 2 Unit and Corner Weights (Ibs)' Shipping Net Corner Weights -Vertical Corner Weights -Horizontal Maximum (Ibs) Maximum (Ibs) #1 #2 #3 #4 A B C D 439 392 98 98 98 98 95 101 101 95 Note: 1. If application requires steam or hot water heating coils, field supplied isolators must be utilized Table 3 General Data 22 23MM DIA. (4) KNOCKOUTS FOR HORIZONTAL SUSPENSION FI L TE ACCE PANE PANEL RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL — HORIZONTAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL — VERTICAL RETURN RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL — VERTICAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL RETURN 4 4 I i I I ) °o o 4 VERTICAL VERTICAL (VERTICAL —RETURN) (HORIZONTAL_ RETURN) -1 3/4" Dual Circuit TWE120131 TWE120B3',BW iMMNo. Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 Suction Line (in.) OD 1 1/8 1 1/8 Liquid Line (in.) OD 3/8 3/8 Indoor Coil — Type Plate Fin Plate Fin Tube Size (in.) O.D. .375 .375 Face Area (sq ft) 11.2 11.2 Rows/FPI 4/12 4/12 Refrigerant Control Expansion Valve Expansion Valve Drain Connection Size (in.) 1PVC 1 PVC Indoor Fan — Type Centrifugal Centrifugal No. Used 1 1 Diameter x Width (in.) 15 x 15 15 x 15 Drive Type/No. Speeds Belt/Adjustable Belt/Adjustable CFM 4000 4000 No. Motors/HP 1 1 Motor RPM Standard/Oversized 2.00/— 2.00/3.00 Motor RPM 1725 1725 Motor Frame Size 56HZ 56HZ Filters Type/Furnished Throwaway/Yes Throwaway/Yes (No.) Size Recommended (4) 16 x 25 x 1 (4) 16 x 25 x 1 ARI tested and certified with various condensing units per ARI Standard 210/ 240 or 340/360 certification program. Note: 1. Ships wired for 208-230/3/60. Field convdertible to 460/3/60. #1 #2 #4 #3 VERTICAL C 0 D Air Flow Horizontal � � 1 O � HORIZONTAL (HORIZONTAL —RETURN) 00 — O 1 O � Q HORIZONTAL (VERTICAL —RETURN) 2 Table4 Electrical Characteristics —Motors —60Cycle Unit Model No. Standard Evaporator Fan Motor Amps No. Volts Phase RLA LRA No. Oversized Evaporator Fan Motor Amps Volts Phase FLA LRA TWE12061 1 208-230 1 8.3 57.4 — — — — — TWE120B3' 1 208-230/460 3 6.0/3.4 49.0/27.5 1 208-230/460 3 9.414.6 74.9/39.3 TWE120SW 1 575 3 2.6 17.5 1 575 3 5.4 37.3 Note: 1. Ships wired for 200-230/3/60. Field convertible to 460/3/60. Table 5 Standard Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position Unit 5 Turns 4 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns 1 Turn Model No. Open Open Open Open Open Closed TWE120B' 702 760 819 877 936 994 TWE120B3,AW2 710 761 812 863 913 964 Notes: 1. Factory setting is 4. 0 turns open. 2. Factory setting is 4.5 turns open. Table 6 Unit Wiring With Electric Heat (Single Point Connection) — 10 Ton Air Handlers Maximum Fuse Heater Heater To Use Unit Control Minimum or HACR Circuit Model No. KW Rating' With Unit PowerSupply Stages Circuit Ampacity2 BreakerSize2,e BAYHTRL106A 4.33/5.76 1 31/41 40/45 BAYHTRL112A 8.65/11.52 TWE120B1 208-230/1/60 1 631733 70/80 BAYHTRL117A 12.98/17.28 1 99/101 90/110 BAYHTRL123A 17.30/23.04 2 115/1313 125/150 BAYHTRL129A 21.65/28.80 2 141/1613 150/175 BAYHTRL305A 3.75/5.00 1 21/23 25/25 BAYHTRL310A 7.45/9.96 TWE120B3 208 230/3/60 1 34/38 35/40 BAYHTRL315A 11.25/14.96 1 47/53 50/60 BAYHTRL325A 18.71/24.92 2 73/833 80/90 BAYHTRL335A 26.20/34.88 2 98/1134 100/125 BAYHTRL405A 5.00 1 12 15 BAYHTRL410A 9.96 TWE120B35 460/3/60 1 20 20 BAYHTRL415A 14.96 1 27 30 BAYHTRL425A 24.92 2 42 45 BAYHTRL435A 34.88 2 57 60 BAYHTRLW05A 5.00 1 10 15 BAYHTRLW10A 9.96 TWE120BW 575/3/60 1 16 20 BAYHTRLW15A 14.96 1 22 25 BAYHTRLW25A 24.92 2 35 35 BAYHTRLW35A 34.88 2 47 50 NOTES: 1. KW ratings are at: 208/240V for 208-230V air handlers 480V for 460V air handlers 600V for 575V air/handlers 1 Voltage 2 Forotherthanrated voltage, capacity =` atedVoltage ) x Rated Capacity. 2. Any power supply and circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local codes. 3. Field wire must be rated at least 75 C. 4. Field' wire must be rated at least 90 C. 5. With motor field converted to 460V. 6. The HACR circuit breaker is for U.S.A. installations only. 3 Table 7 Evaporator Fan Performance TWE12061 CFM External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) 10" .20" .30" .40" .50" .60" .70" .80" .90" 1.00" 1.20" 1.40" 1.60" RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 2 HP Standard Motor & Field Supplied Low Static Drive' 2 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves 3200 - - - 570 .67 603 .75 636 .83 670 .91 703 1.00 736 1.08 756 1.14 784 1.20 838 1.32 890 1.49 942 1.66 3400 - 560 .71 592 .79 623 .88 652 .95 685 1.04 716 1.12 743 1.18 762 1.24 790 1.30 844 1.43 895 1.59 948 1.80 3600 557 .77 583 .84 613 .92 643 1.01 667 1.07 700 1.16 730 1.23 750 1.27 768 1.34 797 1.41 850 1.55 900 1.69 954 1.94 3800 579 0.94 605 1.01 634 1.09 663 1.18 683 1.24 710 1.29 738 1.37 762 1.42 785 1.49 813 1.56 861 1.72 911 1.87 - - 4000 602 1.11 628 1.17 656 1.26 683 1.35 698 1.40 720 1.43 747 1.50 773 1.58 801 1.64 829 1.71 872 1.89 922 2.04 - - 4200 626 1.23 651 1.31 677 1.40 703 1.48 714 1.53 741 1.59 765 1.66 790 1.72 815 1.81 841 1.90 888 2.08 - - - - 4400 649 1.36 674 1.45 698 1.53 723 1.62 729 1.65 761 1.76 784 1.81 807 1.87 830 1.98 852 2.09 - - - - - - 4600 669 1.52 692 1.62 714 1.69 735 1.77 747 1.82 782 1.92 798 1.99 815 2.06 - - - - - - - - - - 4800 689 1.69 711 1.79 729 1.85 746 1.92 764 1.98 802 2.09 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - NOTE: 1. Field supplied low static drive (see Table 7A) Data includes pressure drop due to wet coil and 1' filter. Fan motor heat (MBh) = 3.15 X BHP. Trane's factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment, are definite purpose motors, specifically designed and tested to operate reliably and continuously at all cataloged conditions. Using the full horsepower range of our fan motors as shown in our tabular data will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Our product's warranty will not be affected. Table 7A Field Supplied Low Static Fan Drive TWE120131 t Motor Sheave Nominal Turns Open RPM 0 745 1 706 2 666 3 627 4 588 5 549 Note: 1. Field supplied components required: Blower Sheave: Fixed Pitch (8.8 inch Pitch Diameter), 1.0 inch Bore, Single Groove, "A" Belt. Belt: A54 4 L. -- - ..... --- - Table 8 Evaporator Fan Performance TWE120B3, BW External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) .10" .20" .30" .40" .50" .60" .70" .80" .90" 1.00" 1.20" CFM RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM RPM RPM RPM 2 HP Standard Motor & Field Supplied Low Static Drive 2 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves 3200 - - - - 570 .67 603 .75 636 .83 670 .91 703 1.00 736 1.08 756 1.14 784 1.20 838 1.32 3400 560 .71 592 .79 623 .88 652 .95 685 1.04 716 1.12 743 1.18 762 1.24 790 1.30 844 1.43 3600 557 .77 583 .84 613 .92 643 1.01 667 1.07 700 1.16 1 730 1.23 750 1.27 768 1.34 797 1.41 850 1.55 3800 579 .94 605 1.01 634 1.09 663 1.18 683 1.24 710 1.29 738 1.37 762 1.42 785 1.49 813 1.56 861 1.72 4000 602 1.11 628 1.17 656 1.26 683 1.36 698 1.40 720 1.43 747 1.50 773 1.58 801 1.64 829 1.71 872 1.89 4200 626 1.23 651 1.31 677 1.40 703 1.48 714 1.53 741 1.59 765 1.66 790 1.72 815 1.81 841 1.90 888 2.08 4400 649 1.36 674 1.45 698 1.53 1 723 1.62 729 1.65 761 1.76 784 1.81 807 1.87 830 1.98 852 2.09 904 2.27 4700 669 1.52 792 1.62 714 1.69 735 1.77 747 1.82 782 1.92 798 1.99 815 2.06 1 837 2.18 862 2.29 922 2.45 4800 689 1.69 711 1.79 729 1.85 746 1.92 764 1.98 802 2.09 1 812 2.17 822 2.24 844 2.39 872 2.48 939 2.64 3 HP Oversized Motor and Sheaves NOTE: 1. Field supplied low static drive (see Table 8A). Data includes pressure drop due to wet coil and 1" filter. Fan motor heat (MBh) = 3.15 X BHP. Trane's factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment, are definite purpose motors, specifically designed and tested to operate reliably and contin uously at all cataloged conditions. Using the full horsepower range of our fan motors as shown in our tabular data will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motor failure. Our product's warranty will not be affected. Table 8 (Continued) Evaporator Fan Performance TWE120B3,AW CFM 1.40" RPM BHP External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) 1.60" 1.80" 2.00" 2.20" RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 2.40" RPM BHP 2 HP Standard Motor & Sheaves 3 HP Oversized Motor & Sheaves 3200 890 1.49 942 1.66 1001 1.84 1051 2.03 1106 2.24 1162 2.44 3400 895 1.59 948 1.80 1009 1.98 1057 2.17 1111 2.37 1165 2.57 3600 900 1.69 954 1.94 1016 2.13 1065 2.31 1115 2.51 1167 2.70 3800 911 1.87 959 2.15 1024 2.35 1070 2.54 1120 2.73 1169 2.92 4000 922 2.04 1965 2.36 1031 2.57 1077 2.76 1124 2.95 - - 4200 941 2.29 984 2.54 1039 2.73 1083 2.91 1129 3.10 - - 4400 960 2.53 1003 2.71 1047 2.89 1090 3.06 - - - - 4600 979 2.67 1020 2.86 1061 3.06 - - - - - - 4800 997 2.80 1036 3.02 - - - - - - - - Table 8A Field supplied Low Static Fart Drive Motor Sheave Nominal Turns Open RPM 0 745 1 706 2 666 3 627 4 588 5 549 NOTE: 1. Field supplied components required: Blower Sheave: Fixed Pitch (8.8 inch Pitch Diameter), 1.0 inch Bore, Single Groove, "A" Belt. Belt: A54 5 All dimensions are in inches. Subbase Steam Coil 1 3/8" DIA. FOR I. NPT RETURN Hot Water Coil See Yew 8 63 1 /2" \ f 25" T VGE 3 1/2" DIA. HOLE FOR 2 1/2" NPT (INT) SUPPLY 3 I/7' DIA. HOLE FOR 2 1/2- NPT (INT) RETURN 6" T aGE r .I All dimensions are in inches. Electric Heat Coil Discharge Plenum and Grille Hydronic Coil Discharge Plenum and Grille A 63 1 /2 / 25" 25 � Table 9 Discharge Plenum and Grille Dimensions Model No. For Use With A BAYPLNM016 No Heat 28" BAYPLNM026 Electric Heat 29" (TMP) DK HOLES RN AS TOP 14 3/4" 7 Table 10 Accessory Weights (Ibs) Accessory Net Hot Water Coil 159 Steam Coil 142 Electric Heat Minimum 27 Maximum 45 Discharge Plenum and Grille Hydronic Heat 97 No Heat 92 Electric Heat 156 Return Air Grille 7 Rubber -in -Shear Isolator Floor Mount 2 Suspended Mount 7 Steel Spring Isolator Floor Mount 12 Suspended Mount 6 Control Transformer 4 Subbase 23 Oversized Motor 50 Table 11 Static Pressure Drop Through Accessories (inches of water column)' Electric Heaters (KW) Hydronic Coils Discharge Return Plenum Hot CFM Grille and Grille 5-10 15-20 25-30 35-50 Steam Water 3 .07 .4 .19 .26 .4 .4 4000 .11 .66 .10 .20 .30 .40 .59 .56 4800 .15 .95 .14 .28 .42 .57 .76 .75 Notes: 1. Return air filter ESP included in Fan Performance Table data. 2. At louver opening angle of 42 degrees. For ESP at other angle openings, see accessory Installer's Guide. Table 12 Oversized Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position Unit 5 Turns Model No. Open TW E12061 878 TWE120133, BW1 915 TWE12063, BW2 733 NOTES: 1. High static motorwith 6-1 /2"fan sheave 2. High static motor with B' fa n sheave. 4 Turns Open 3 Turns Open 2 Turns 1 Turn Open Open Closed 941 1004 1066 1129 1192 969 1023 1077 1131 1185 776 819 863 906 949 Table 13 Discharge Plenum and Grille Assembly Throw Distance (Ft.) Louver Angle Deflection Position CFM Straight 20° 40' 55° 3200 56 46 38 30 3600 62 51 42 33 4000 66 57 47 35 4400 71 62 52 38 4800 76 67 56 42 Throw distance values are based on a terminal velocity of 75 FPM. Throw distance values at other terminal velocities may be established by multiplying throw distances in table above by throw factor: Terminal Velocity Throw Factor 50 FPM x 1.50 100 FPM x .75 150 FPM x .50 Table 14 Auxiliary Electric Heat Capacity Stage 1 Stage 2 Total No. Unit Total of KW BTUH KW BTUH KW BTUH Model No. KW Stages Input Output Input Output Input Output 5.76 1 5.76 19,659 - - 5.76 19,659 TWE12061 11.52 1 11.52 39,318 - - 11.52 39,318 17.28 1 17.28 58,977 - - 17.28 58,977 23.04 2 11.52 39,318 11.52 39,318 23.04 78,636 5.00 1 5.00 17,065 - - 5.00 17,065 TWE120B3,BW 9.96 1 9.96 33,993 - - 9.96 33,993 14.96 1 14.96 51,058 - - 14.96 51,058 24.92 2 14.96 51,058 9.96 33,993 24.92 85,051 TWE120B1 28.80 2 17.28 58,977 11.52 39,318 28.80 98,295 TWE12063,13W 34.88 2 19.92 67,987 14.96 51,058 34.88 119,045 Voltage 2 Heaters are rated at 240v, 480v and 600v. For other than rated voltage, capacity= ( Rated Voltag x Rated Capacity. Table 16 - Steam Heating Coil Capacity -Air Handler Steam Pressure_ SIG Entering 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 25 PSI Unit Airflow Air Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Tons Model No (CFM) Temp (F) LAT' MBhz Lb/Hr' LAT' MBhz WHO LAT' MBhz WHO LAT' MBh2 Lb/Hr' LAT' MBh2 WHO 40 99 203 210 102 214 222 106 229 240 109 241 254 115 261 279 3200 60 112 181 187 115 191 199 119 206 216 123 218 230 129 238 255 80 126 158 164 129 169 175 133 183 192 136 195 206 142 215 230 40 91 222 229 94 234 243 98 250 262 101 264 278 106 286 306 10 TWE120B 4000 60 106 198 204 108 209 217 112 225 236 115 239 252 120 261 279 80 120 173 179 123 184 192 126 200 210 129 214 226 134 236 252 40 86 239 246 88 251 261 92 269 282 94 284 299 99 307 329 4800 60 101 212 219 103 225 233 107 242 254 109 257 271 114 280 300 80 116 186 192 118 198 206 121 215 226 124 230 243 129 253 271 Type NS Coil, 1 Row, 1' OD, SF Fins, 132 Fins Per Foot NOTES: 1. LAT - Leaving Air Temperature (F) 2, MBh Capacity: BTU/HR/1000 3. Cond. Lb/Hr - Condensate pound per hour. Table 16 Electric Heat Discharge Plenum and Grille Airflow (CFM) Unit Electric Heater Airflow(CFM) Model No. Model No. Minimum Maximum TWE12061 BAYHTRL117A 3500 4800 BAYHTRL123A 4000 4800 TWE12063 BAYHTRL315A 4000 4800 BAYHTRL325A 3500 4800 TWE120B3' BAYHTRL415A 3500 4800 BAYHTRL425A 3500 4800 1, When wired for 460volt. 9 i I Table 17 Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity Entering Water Temperature 180 200 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 40 24.5 239.1 109 14.3 210.0 100 9.1 178.7 91 29.3 284.7 122 17.6 256.8 114 11.7 228.6 106 3200 60 20.2 197.3 117 11.5 168.4 108 6.9 134.8 99 25.0 242.6 130 14.7 215.2 122 9.6 186.9 114 80 15.9 155.6 125 8.6 126.1 116 4.0 78.7 103 20.6 200.6 138 11.9 173.6 130 7.4 144.3 122 40 27.8 271.7 103 16.2 237.5 95 10.3 201.9 86 33.4 324.1 115 19.9 291.0 107 13.3` 258.2 99 4000 60 22.9 223.8 112 13.0 190.3 104 7.8 153.3 95 28.4 275.8 124 16.7 243.6 116 10.8 211.0 109 80 18.1 176.2 121 9.7 142.6 113 5.0 97.3 102 23.4 227.7 132 13.4 196.2 125 8.4 163.2 118 40 30.7 300.0 98 17.8 261.3 90 11.3 221.7 82 36.9 358.3 109 22.0 320.7 102 14.6 283.7 94 4800 60 25.3 246.9 107 14.3 209.1 100 8.6 168.9 92 31.4 304.7 118 18.4 268.1 111 11.9 231.6 104 80 19.9 194.0 117 10.7 156.7 110 5.6 110.2 101 25.9 251.3 128 14.8 215.6 121 9.2 179.4 114 Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8" OD, PH Fins, 167 Fins per foot NOTES: 1. GPM -Gal Ions per minute 2. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 3. LAT- Leaving Air Temperature (°F) Table 17 (Continued) Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity Entering Water Temperature 210 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT' GPM'MBhz LAT' 40 31.7 307.4 129 19.2 279.9 121 13.0 252.6 113 3200 60 27.4 265.1 136 16.4 238.2 129 10.9 211.0 121 80 23.0 223.0 144 13.5 196.5 137 8.7 169.1 129 40 36.1 350.2 121 21.8 317.6 113 14.7 285.5 106 4000 60 31.1 301.7 130 18.5 269.9 122 12.3 238.2 115 80 26.1 253.4 138 15.3 222.3 131 9.8 190.8 124 40 40.0 387.4 114 24.1 350.3 107 16.2 313.9 100 4800 60 34.4 333.6 124 20.4 297.3 117 13.5 261.7 110 80 28.9 279.9 134 16.8 244.6 127 10.8 209.5 120_ Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8" OD, PH Fins, 167 Fins per foot NOTES: 1. GPM -Gallons perminute 2. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 3. LAT- Leaving AirTemperature (°F) Table 18 Hot Water Heating Coil -Water Side Pressure Drop at 180 Gallons per Minute (GPM) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 Pressure Drop (Ft. of Water) - - - .06 .09 .13 .17 .22 .27 .33 .39 .46 .54 .62 .70 .79 .89 .99 Table 18 (Contd.) Hot Water Heating Coil - Water Side Pressure Drop Gallons per Minute (GPM) 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 Pressure Drop (Ft of Water) 1,10 1.21 1.32 1.44 1.57 1.70 1.84 U General Units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, conden- sate drain pan, fan motor, filters, and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in either vertical or horizontal configuration. Units shall be tested and certified in accordance with ARI standard 210/240 or 340/360 certification program. Units shall be UL listed and labeled in accordance with UL 465/1995 for indoor blower coil units. Casing Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather -resistant baked enamel finish. Casing shall be completely insulated with cleanable, foil faced, fire -retardant, permanent, odorless, glass fiber material. All insulation edges shall be either captured or sealed. Knockouts shall be provided for unit electrical power and refrigerant piping connections. Captive screws shall be standard on all access panels. Refrigerant System The TWE1206, dual refrigeration circuits, shall be controlled by a factory installed thermal expansion valve. Evaporator Coil Configured aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8" internally enhanced copper tubing and factory pressure and leak tested at 375 psig. Coil is arranged for draw - through airflow and shall provide a double sloped condensate drain pan constructed of PVC plastic. The drain pan shall be removable for cleaning. The condensate drain pan can be installed in any of four positions allowing for vertical or horizontal application and providing external connections on either side of the unit. Evaporator Fan Double inlet, double width, forward curved, centrifugal -type fan with adjustable belt drive shall be stan- dard. Thermal overload protection shall be standard on motor. Fan and MechanicaO motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Oversized motors shall be available as an option for high static application. Controls Magnetic evaporator fan contactor, low voltage terminal strip, check valve, and single point power entry shall be included. All necessary controls shall be factory -installed and wired. Evaporator defrost control shall be included to prevent compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting compressor operation when low evaporator coil temperatures are encountered. All indoor fan motors meet the U.S. Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT). Filters One inch, throw -away filters shall be standard on TWE120B model air handlers. Filters shall be accessible from the side coil access panel. Filter rack can be field converted to two inch capability. Accessories Hydronic Heat Coils — One row steam and two row hot water coils shall be available for mounting on the discharge outlet of the air handler. Coils shall be shipped completely factory assembled within a heavy gauge sheet metal casing, finished with enamel to match the blower coil unit. Coils shall be applied in either vertical or horizontal airflow configura- tion. Electric Heaters — UL and CSA approved electric heat modules shall be available for installation directly on fan discharge. Electric heaters shall be available in a wide range of capacities with one or two stage control, single -point electric power connection and terminal strip connec- tions. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements internally wye connected on 480/600 volt, three phase and delta connected on 208/ 240 volt, three phase. Each 208/240 volt heater shall have pilot duty with secondary backup fuse links for automatic reset of high limit controls. Each 480/600 volt heater shall have automatic line break high limit controls. Discharge Plenums and Grilles — Accessory discharge plenums shall be available for vertical, free dis- charge applications. Plenums shall be constructed of heavy -gauge, zinc coated, galvanized steel finished with baked enamel to match the air handler unit. Grilles shall be satin finished aluminum and have four-way adjustable louvers. Return Air Grilles — Accessory return air grille shall be provided for vertical front, free return applications. Grilles shall be installed in place of the front lower side panel. Grille shall be satin finished aluminum with non-adjust- able louvers. Mounting Subbases —Accessory available for vertical floor mount configurations. Subbase shall be constructed of heavy gauge, zinc coated, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish to match air handler unit. Subbase is required in the vertical air flow application for conden- sate drain trapping and when isola- tors are required. Vibration Isolators — This accessory shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration to building structures, equipment, and adjacent spaces. Packages shall be available in either neoprene -in shear or spring -flex types in floor or suspended, mountings. Oversized Motors — Field installed oversized motors shall be available for high static pressure applications. Control Options Standard Indoor Thermostats— Two stage heating and cooling operation or one stage heating and cooling thermostats shall be available in either manual or automatic changeover. Programmable Electronic Night Setback Thermostat — This option shall provide heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day program- ming capability. 11 Since The Trane Company has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Technical Literature Printed in USA The Trane Company 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. —' Clarksville, TN 37040 www.trane.com O 2001 American Standard Inc. 12 Library Product Literature Product Section Unitary. Product Split System Air Handler Model TWE120B — 10 Ton Literature Type Submittal Sequence 206.10 Date October 2001 File No. PL-UN-S/S-TWE120-SQ-206.10 10/01 Supersedes TWE120-SQ-206.09 9/01 NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. SERVICE ILEC IRICAL AN PEA PR[VAIL Ix 22,2 IBnleL/MBDI IVAO[ — -1A E AOO. 11 II1CCi1.1 0%IIDDA. BOX BOTTOM FOR [ILECIR REACH SUPP uomD unE s[RVD[ E' L0. [ENALE BRAlE C LO..['1DX SAREPlVP IE'. I SIAi E XG. 2TTA0072-SUS-100.00 6 Ton Split System Condensing Unit - 3 Phase 2A0072A Outdoor Unit&D 2TTA0072A3000AA 2TTA0072A4000AA C , General Data SOUND RATING (DECIBELS) (D 81 81 POWER CONNS. — V/PH/HZ O 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 MIN. BIRCH. CIR. AMPACITY 26 14 BR. CIR: MAX. (AMPS) 45 20 PROT. RTG. } MIN. (AMPS) 40 20 ®iRBoso RUN Doi °x UNIT. w00 COMPRESSOR CLIMATUFF0- SCROLL CLIMATUFF0- SCROLL AND AS L SU ROEUND- SHLEAST RUBBERY ONI 1N0 SIDES AND NO. USED - NO. SPEEDS mxEA TM vD[s UxxtslRlcr[D. VOLTS/PH/HZ 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 _.._.._.._.._..—..—.—..—..—.._� R.L. AMPSO- L.R.AMPS 19.8-156 10.5-75 FACTORY INSTALLED START COMPONENTS O NO NO II I� I I juts, I� �Iry INSULATION/SOUND BLANKET NO NO COMPRESSOR HEAT YES YES OUTDOOR FAN —TYPE PROPELLER PROPELLER DIA. (IN.) - NO. USED 27.6 -1 27.6 -1 TYPE DRIVE - NO. SPEEDS DIRECT -1 DIRECT -1 CFM @ 0.0IN. W.G.O 4225 4225 NO. MOTORS- HP. 1- 1/6 1- 1/6 MOTOR SPEED R.P.M. 825 825 VOLTS/PH/HZ 200/230/3/60 460/3/60 F.L. AMPS 1.4 0.7 OUTDOOR COIL —TYPE SPINE FINTM SPINE FINTM ROWS - F.P.I. 1- 24 1 - 24 FACE AREA (SQ. FT.) 27.87 27.87' TUBE SIZE (IN.) 3/8 3/8 045 FIG. 1 REFRIGERANT R-22 I R-22 J (O.D. UNIT) NP CHRG. (D10/00-LB/OZ 10/00-LB/OZ G I D If NAL[ eAu[o oexi►iionENnev it°sA[ FACTORY SUPPLIED YES YES FLARE PRESSURE PAP FIT11114. LINE S12E - IN. O.D. GAS © 1-1/8 1-1/8 LINE SIZE - IN. O.D. LIQ. © 3/8 3/8 DIMENSIONS H X IN X D H X W X D LIQUID uNE SERVICE EAIV[. E' LD. rtNAIE BAAiED OUTDOOR UNIT CRATED (IN.) 46.4 X 35.1 X 38.7 46.4 X 35.1 X 38.7 canlCaZox NI1H 11°- SAEHARE PAESSUPE IAP lli11n4. UNCRATED SEE OUTLINE DWG. SEE OUTLINE DWG. WEIGHT SHIPPING (LBS.) 297 " 297 NET (LBS.) 261 261 O CERTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE UNITARY AIR -CONDITIONER EQUIPMENT CERTIRCATION PROGRAM As IINE siRvuE vu vE. 'D'-I.D. WHICH IS BASED ONA.R.I. STANDARD 210Y140. [ENAIE BAAiCD Coxxanox xllx uN• SAE HARE � RATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.R.I. STANDARD 270/SECTION 5.3.6. PAEssuAE uP rLJnxD. FIG. 2 0 CALCULATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE. ONLY USE HACR CIRCUIT BREAKERS OR FUSES. © STANDARD AIR • DRY COIL -..OUTDOOR O THIS VALUE APPROXIMATE. FOR MORE PRECISE VALUE SEE UNIT NAMEPLATE AND SERVICE INSTRUCTION. MAX. LINEAR LENGTH: 60 FT WITH RECIPROCATING _COMPRESSOR -60 FT WITH SCROLL. MAX. LIFT - SUCTION 60 FT; MAX LIFT -LIQUID 60 FT. FOR GREATER LENGTH REFER TO REFRIGERANT PIPING SOFTWARE PUB. NO.32- A I B C D E F G H J. K 3312-0'. ('denotes latest revision). " O THE VALUE SHOWN FOR COMPRESSOR FLA ON THE UNIT NAMEPLATE AND ON THIS SPECIFICATION SHEET IS 946 870 152 98 219 86 508 USED TO COMPUTE MINIMUM BRANCH CIRCUIT AMPACITY AND MAXIMUM FUSE SIZE. THE VALUE SHOWN IS THE -1/8) (37-114) (34-1/4) 1-1/8 3/8 (6) (3-7/8) (8-5/8) (33/8) (20) BRANCH CIRCUIT SELECTION CURRENT. : © NO MEANS NO START COMPONENTS, YES MEANS QUICK START KIT COMPONENTS. From DWg.21 D153074 Rev. 5 PTC MEANS POSITIVE TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT STARTER. MODELS 1BASEIRG.1 2 4TTA0072A 1 1 (41 2002 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved t,FYEOXTOq GF'P H 45 � Ic 3 p pRC A tl ,S Q 1, -9 1 99ASrANDAPDryo 7 } i� S f a 2TTA0072A3/4 With Cooling Coils TXA061C5 TXCO61C5 TXH063P3-A TXH063P3-B EXPANSION TYPE TXV-B TXV-B TXV-NB TXV-NB RATINGS (COOLING) O BTUH(TOTAL) . 66000 66000 70000 70000 BTUH (SENSIBLE) 44900 44900 51900 51100 INDOOR AIRFLOW (CFM). 1800 1800 2225 2100 SYSTEM POWER (KW) 6.63 6.63 6.93 6.86 ERR/SEER (BTUMATT-HR.) 9.95/11.05 9.95/11.05 10.10/11.50 10.20/11.65 Notes: O Certified in accordance with A.R.I. Standard 210/240. 2 2TTA0072-SUB-100.00 I 2TTA0072A3/4 With Air Handlers TWE060A TWE060C15-C/D15-A TWE063P13 TWE065E13 TWE090A TWG060A15 EXPANSION TYPE TXV-B TXV-B TXV-NB TXV-NB TXV-NB TXV-B RATINGS (COOLING) O BTUH (TOTAL) 66000 66000 69000 69000 71000 66000 BTUH..(SENSIBLE) 47100 46200 51100 51400 51900 46500 INDOOR AIRFLOW (CFM) 2225 2000 2200 2225 2400 2050 SYSTEM POWER (KW) 6.70 6.84 7.11 7.08 6.73 6.84 ERR/SEER (BTU/WATT-HR.) 9.85/10.95 9.65/10.85 9.70/10.95 9.75/11.05 10.55/12.05 9.65/10.90 Notes: O Certified in accordance with A.R.I. Standard 210/240. 2TTA0072-SUB-100.00 3i 0 1 TRWE 11 Trane A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com General The 2TTA0 shall be fully charged from the factory for matched indoor section and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must be designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 115°F. Cooling capacities shall be matched with a wide selection of air handlers and' furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be designed for outdoor application. Casing Unit casing is constructed of heavy gauge, galvanized steel and painted with a weather -resistant powder paint. Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 DuraTuffTm base. Refrigerant Controls Refrigeration system controls include condenser fan and compressor contactor. High and low pressure controls are inherent to the compressor. Another standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Compressor The ClimatuffO compressor features internal over temperature and pressure protector, total dipped hermetic motor and thermostatically controlled sump heater. Other features include: roto lock suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatufP compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. ` ZtpEO iOgq�gsC ^e? s p Wayi E Condenser Coil The Spine Fin TM coil shall be continuously wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- num with minimum brazed joints. This coil is 3/8 inch O.D. seamless aluminum glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds of pressure per square inch. The outdoor coil provides low airflow resistance and efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro- tected on all four sides by louvered panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Low Ambient Cooling As manufactured, this unit has a cooling capability to 55°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control permits operation to 40°F. The addition of an evaporator defrost control with TXV permits low ambient cooling to 30oF. Accessories Thermostats — Heating/Cooling (manual and automatic changeover). Sub -base to match thermostat and locking thermostat cover. Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low Ambient Cooling. Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental heat outdoor ambient lockout from 46 to —10°F. Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. i E= • �sa..ifA., l-A All dimensions are in inches. 2a' 54.Omm DRAIN CONNECTION FOR HORIZONTAL 25 1/$' I� CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 & 3) 41.3mm tW" j. 298.5mm 2 RENOVAL IN FOR FILTER 56 1 4' (BOTH ENDS) gln• 49 1/8' / 241,3mm 15 1/2' 19 1/2' n 2 -- —DIA SPLIT Ivy 22.2mm BUSHINGS FOR 66.7mm 3/.8mm T%V BULBS I• --- 25.4mm FEMALE SCHED 40 PVC PIPE DRAIN CONNECTION VER'CAL CONFIGURATION (SEE NOTE 2 h 3) 1• 25.425.4mm 16,g 409.6mm DUCT OPENING 1 5/8' (OUTSIDE) r. . 22.2mm DIA KNOCKOUT (HEATER CONTROL AND SINGLE POWER ENTRY WIRES) 22.2mm DIA BUSHING LOW VOLTAGE ENTRANCE d TT-7 PANEL DEPTH (EALLLPANELS. SE SEE NOTE I ) n 22.2mm DIA KNOCKOUT HIGH VOLTAGE ENTRANCE n KNOCKOUT FOR 127mm LIQUID COPPER COQNFIELD CONNNECTIOTIO N (BOTH ENDS) W' KNOCKOUT FOR x.9mm O.D. COPPER SUCTION LINE FIELD CONNECTION (BOTH ENDS) .00 1 HORIZONTAL (HORIZONTAL —RETURN) ' j'; 1 31i i it tlt E.I. 15 7on Dual Circuit Convertible /far Handger 7WE180B 4 I ) •o \\ •o 0 \ 0 \^ 0 e VERTICAL VERTICAL (VERTICAL —RETURN) (HORIZONTAL —RETURN) Notes: 1. Length, width, and height dimensions do not include Yz" access panel depth. 2. Removable drain pan and attached drain connection may be installed on either end of unit in either the vertical or horizontal configuration. Plastic drain pan access plate on the end of unit opposite drain connection must be removed to slide drain pan back into unit. 3. If periodic drain pan cleaning is required. allow room for partial removal of pan on drain connection end of unit. Table 1 Unit 00 1 Q HORIZONTAL (VERTICAL —RETURN) Unit Minimum Maximum Fuse Unit Operating Circuit Size or Maximum Model No. Voltage Range Ampacity Circuit Breaker' TWE180B3 187-253 12 20 TWE180134 414-506 6 15 TWE180BW 518-632 5 15 Note: 1. HACR type circuit breaker per NEC Table 2 Unit and Corner Weights (lbs)T Shipping Net Corner Weights - Vertical Corner Weights - Horizontal - Maximum (Ibs) Maximum (Ibs) #1 #2 #3 #4 A B C D 754 692 173 173 173 173 156 174 190 170 Note: 1. If application requires steam or hot water heating coils, field supplied isolators must be utilized. 2DIA (4) 2.2mm KNOCKOUTS FILTER ACCESS PANEL ACCESS PANEL 11V2" 292.1mm OF KNOCKOUT h 91/2" 241.3mm i 2 7/8" � 35" 3 3/8" 3 3/4" 73 7/8" DUCT OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL — HORIZONTALS RETURN OR HORIZONTAL — VERTICAL RETURN 18" DUCT OPENING 2 7/8"-� 35" �35---13 5/8" 3 3/4" 73 7/8" DUCT OPENING RETURN AIR OPENING VERTICAL — VERTICAL RETURN OR HORIZONTAL — HORIZONTAL RETURN Table3l General Data to Ion Dual Circuit TWE18OB3,B4,BW System Data No. Refrigerant Circuits 2 Suction Line (in.) OD 1 3/8 Liquid Line (in.) OD 1/2 Indoor Coil — Type Plate Fin Tube Size (in.) O.D. .375 Face Area (sq ft) 16.3 Rows/FPI 3/12 Refrigerant Control Expansion Valve Drain Connection Size (in.) 1 PVC Indoor Fan — Type Centrifugal No. Used 2 Diameter x Width (in.) 15 x 15 Drive Type/No. Speeds Belt/Adjustable CFM 6000 No. Motors/HP 1 Motor RPM Standard/Oversized 3.00/5.00 Motor . RPM 1750/1735 Motor Frame Size 145T Filters Type/Furnished ThrowawayNes (No.) Size Recommended (8) 15 x 20 x 2 i ARI tested and certified with various condensing units per ARI Standard 210/240 or 340/360 certification program. C Y &US VERTICAL R C ® T * U Air Flow Horizontal Table4 Electrical Characteristics —Motors —60 Cycle Standard Evaporator Motor Oversized Evaporator Fan Motor Unit Amps Amps Model No. No. Volts Phase RLA LRA No. Volts Phase FLA LRA TWE18OB3 1 208-230 3 9.4 74.9 1 208-230 3 14.4 98.0 TWE180B4 1 460 3 4.6 39.3 1 460 3 6.7 47.0 TWE180BW 1 575 3 3.4 24.6 1 575 3 5.4 37.3 Table 5 Standard Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position Unit 6 Turns 5 Turns 4 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns 1 Turn _ Model No. Open Open Open Open Open Open Closed TWE18063,B4,BW 760 795 831 866 902 937 — Note: 1. Factory setting is 4.5 turns open. 2 R Table 6 Unit Wiring With Electric Heat (Single Point Connection) Maximum Fuse Heater Heater To Use Unit Control Minimum or HACR Circuit Model No. KWRating' With Unit PowerSupply Stages CircuitAmpacityz BreakerSizez,4 BAYHTRM310A 7.50/10.00 208-230/3/60 1 38/42 40/45 BAYHTRM320A 14.96/19.92 TWE180B3 1 64l72 70/80 BAYHTRM330A 22.50/29.92 2 90/102 90/110 BAYHTRM350A 37.42/49.84 2 142/1623 150/175 BAYHTRM410A 10.00 1 460/3/60 21 25 BAYHTRM420A 19.92 TWE180B4 1 36 40 BAYHTRM430A 29.92 2 51 60 BAYHTRM450A 49.84 2 81 90 BAYHTRMW10A 10.00 1 575/3/60 17 20 BAYHTRMW20A 19.92 TWE180BW 1 30 30 BAYHTRMW30A 29.92 2 42 45 BAYHTRMW50A 49.84 2 67 70 NOTES: 1. KW ratings are at: 208/240V for 208-230V air handlers 480V for 460V air handlers 600V for 575V air handlers Voltage 2 Forotherthan ratedvoltage, capacity= ( Rated Voltage x Rated Capacity. 2. Any power supply and circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local codes. 3. Field wire must be rated at least 90 C. 4. The HACR circuit breaker is for U.S.A. installations only. Table 7 Evaporator Fan Performance External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) .10" .20" .30" C' .50" l .70" .80" .90" 1.00" 1.20" CRvI RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM RPM RPM RPM 4500 637 1.40 662 4800 642 1.42 667 5100 647 1.45 672 5400 i 652 1.47 677 5700 653 1.48 679 6000 655 1.49 681 6300 658 1.51 687 6600 663 1.54 693 6900 670 1.62 700 7200 677 1.70 707 3 HP Standard Motor & Field Supplied Low Static Drive' 1.44 687 1.49 701 1.53 717 1.58 732 1.63 1.51 692 1.54 706 1.63 722 1.64 737 1.65 1.52 697 1.57 713 1.66 726 1.68 740 1.70 1.54 702 1.60 719 1.69 730 1.72 742 1.75 1.56 706 1.67 725 1.75 741 1.80 758 1.84 1.59 709 1.74 731 1.80 752 1.87 774 1.94 1.63 716 1.79 741 1.89 765 1.98 792 2.09 1.68 723 1.84 750 1.97 778 2.09 811 2.24 1.77 735 1.98 767 2.15 799 2.29 832 2.44 1.86 747 2.12 1 785 2.33 819 2.49 853 2.65 3 HIP Standard Motor & Sheaves 747 1.64 754 1.65 782 1.67 817 1.76 873 1.96 752 1.66 767 1.68 795 1.73 831 1.82 887 2.02 761 1.72 783 1.77 811 1.85 843 1.96 900 2.19 769 1.78 798 1.87 827 1.98 856 2.09 914 2.37 786 1.92 815 2.02 843 2.14 872 2.27 932 2.57 803 2.05 831 2.17 860 2.29 889 2.44 950 2.78 823 2.22 853 2.35 883 2.49 913 2.64 974 2.96 843 2.39 875 2.53 906 2.69 936 2.84 997 3.15 865 2.61 900 2.79 934 2.98 967 3.16 1019 3.48 888 2.83 926 3.05 963 3.27 997 3.49 1041 3.81 5 HP Oversized Motor & Sheaves NOTE: 1. Field supplied low static drive (see Table 7A). Data includes pressure drop due to wet coil and 1 " filter. Fan motor heat (MBh) = 3.15 X BHP. Trane's factory supplied motors, in commercial equipment, are definite purpose motors, specifically designed and tested to operate reliably and continuously at all cataloged conditions. Using the full horsepower range of our fan motors as shown in ourtabular data will not result in nuisance tripping or premature motorfailure. Our product's warranty will not be affected. Table7A Field Supplied Low Static Fan Drive' Motor Sheave Nominal Turns Open RPM 0 776 1 748 2 720 3 692 4 663 5 635 6 607 NOTE: 1. Field supplied components required: Moto Sheave: Variable Pitch (4.3-5.5 inch Diameter) 1.125 inch Bore, Single Groove, "B" Belt. Blower Sheave: Fixed Pitch (8.8 inch Pitch Diameter), 1.0 inch Bore, Single Groove, "A" Belt. Belt: B64 (with Heat Pump) B67 (with Condensing Unit) Table 7 (Continued) Evaporator Fan Performance CFM 1.40" RPM BHP External Static Pressure (Inches of Water Gauge) 1.60" 1.80" 2.00" 2.20" 2,40" RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP RPM BHP 3 HP Standard Motor and Sheaves 5 HP Oversized Motor & Sheaves 4500 929 2.19 986 2.46 1035 2.74 1084 3.01 1132 3.28 - - 4800 943 2.29 999 2.56 1046 2.83 1095 3.11 1143 3.38 - - 5100 957 2.48 1012 2.76 1058 3.04 1105 3.31 1152 , 3.57 - - 5400 972 2.67 1024 2.96 1070 3.24 1116 3.51 - - - - 5700 990 2.89 1038 3.18 1083 3.46 1127 3.74 - - - - 6000 1008 3.11 1052 3.39 1096 3.68 1138 3.96 - - - - 6300 1025 3.30 1069 3.61 1113 3.92 1152 4.21 - - - - 6600 1042 3.49 1087 3.83 1130 4.16 F - - - - - - 6900 1063 3.81 1107 4.15 1146 4.49 - - - - - - 7200 1085 4.14 1127 4.47 - - - - - - - - 3 All dimensions are in inches. Subbase Steam Coil 1 3/8" DIA. FOR 1" NPT RETURN 2 1/2" DI FOR i (INT) Hot Water Coil See Yew 8 See Vie s" 79 1 /2" �27 5/8" GE 3 1/2" DIA. HOLE FOR 2 1/2" NPT (INT) SUPPLY 3 1/2" DIA. HOLE FOR 2 1/2 NPT (INT) RETURN T JGE 4 All dimensions are in inches. Electric Heat Coil REAM PI Electric Heat Or No Heat Dis Plenum and Grille 79 1 /2"\\ X11 3/4" Hydronic Coil Discharge Plenum and Grille 1 /2' 3 KNOCKOUTS FOR 1/2. 1 k 1 1/2- DIA. CONDUIT POWER SUPPLY ENTRY Table 8 Accessory Weights (Ibs) Accessory Net Hot Water Coil 198 Steam Coil 220 Electric Heat Minimum 79 Maximum 100 Discharge Plenum and Grille Hydronic Heat/No Heat 124 Electric Heat 230 Return Air Grille 10 Rubber -in -Shear Isolator Floor Mount 2 Suspended Mount 7 Steel Spring Isolator Floor Mount 12 Suspended Mount 6 Subbase 27 Oversized Motor 80 Table 9 Static Pressure Drop Through Accessories (inches of water column)' Electric Heaters (KW) Hydronic Coils Discharge Return Plenum Hot CFM Grille and Grille 5-10 15-20 25-30 35-50 Steam Water - 4800 .09 .23 .03 .03 .06 .08 .46 .38 6000 .15 .34 .06 .06 .12 .17 .64 .54 7200 .20 .49 .08 .08 .16 .24 .82 .72 Notes: 1. Return air filter ESP included in Fan Performance Table data. 2. At louver opening angle of 42 degrees. For ESP at other angle openings, see accessory Installer's Guide. 5 Table 11 Discharge Plenum and Grille Assembly Throw Distance (Ft.) Louver Angle Deflection Position CFM Straight 20° 40° 55° 4900 47 38 32 25 5400 52 44 37 29 6000 57 49 41 32 6600 61 53 43 34 7200 65 57 46 35 Throw distance values are based on a terminal velocity of 75 FPM. Throw distance values at other terminal velocities may be established by multiplying throw distances in table above by throw factor: Terminal Velocity Throw Factor 50 FPM x 1.50 100 FPM x .75 150 FPM x .50 Table 10 Oversized Motor Sheave/Fan Speed (RPM) Sheave Position Unit 6 Turns 5 Turns 4 Turns 3 Turns 2 Turns 1 Turn Model No. Open Open Open Open Open Open Closed TWE180133,13W 946 981 1016 1052 1087 1122 1157 Table 12 Auxiliary Electric Heat Capacity Stage 1 Stage 2 Total No. Unit Total of KW BTUH KW BTUH KW BTUH Model No. KW Stages Input Output Input Output Input Output 10.00 1 10.00 34,130 — — 10.00 34,130 TWE180B3,B4,BW 19.92 1 19.92 67,987 — — 19.92 67,987 29.92 2 19.92 67,987 10.00 34,130 29.92 102,117 49.84 2 29.92 102,117 19.92 67,987 49.84 170,104 Heaters are rated at240v, 480v and 600v. Forotherthan ratedvoltage, capacity= ( RatedVOltag�2xRatedCapacity. Table 13 Steam Heating Coil Capacity — Air Handler Steam Pressure (PSIG) 2 PSI 5 PSI 10 PSI 15 PSI 25 PSI Entering Unit Airflow Air Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Cond. Tons Model No (CFM) Temp (F) LAT' MBhz WHO LAT' MBh' Lb/Hr' LAT' MBhz Lb/Hr' LAT' MBhz Lb/Hr' LAT' MBhz Lb/Hr' 40 97 295 304 100 310 322 104 332 348 107 350 369 113 379 406 4800 60 110 262 271 113 278 288 117 299 313 121 317 334 126 346 370 80 124 230 237 127 245 254 131 266 279 134 284 299 140 313 334 40 90 322 332 92 339 352 96 363 380 99 383 404 104 415 444 15 TWE180B 6000 60 104 287 296 107 303 315 110 327 343 113 347 366 118 379 405 80 119 251 259 121 268 278 125 291 305 128 310 328 133 342 366 40 84 346 356 87 364 378 90 390 408 93 411 434 97 446 477 7200 60 99 308 318 102 326 338 105 351 368 108 373 393 112 407 435 80 115 270 278 117 287 .299 120 313 327 123 334 352 127 368 394 Type NS Coil, 1 Row, 1' CO, SF Fins, 132 Fins Per Foot. NOTES: 1. LAT — Leaving Air Temperature (F) 2. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR/1000 3. Cond. Lb/Hr — Condensate pound per hour. Table 14 Electric Heat Discharge Plenum and Grille Airflow (CFM) Unit Electric Heater Airflow(CFM) Model No. Model No. Minimum Maximum TWE180B3 BAYHTRM330A 5250 7200 TWE18064 BAYHTRM430A 5250 7200 0 F Table 15 Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity Entering Water Temperature 180 200 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM'MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBh2LAT3 GPM' MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBh2 LAT3 40 35.2 343.9 106 21.2 310.3 100 14.1 276.3 93 41.8 406.0 118 25.6 373.4 112 17.5 341.0 105 4800 60 29.3 285.7 115 17.2 252.7 108 11.2 218.5 102 35.8 347.5 127 21.6 315.4 121 14.6 283.4 114 80 23.3 227.7 124 13.3 195.0 117 8.2 159.9 111 29.8 289.1 135 17.7 257.6 129 11.6 225.7 123 7.5 461.4 111 29.0 423.0 105 19.8 385.0 99 40 40.0 390.3 100 23.9 350.8 94 15.9 311.4 884 6000 60 33.3 323.9 110 19.5 285.3 104 12.6 246.2 98 40.6 394.6 121 24.5 356.9 115 16.4 319.6 109 80 26.4 257.7 120 15.0 219.9 114 9.2 180.5 108 1 33.8 327.9 130 19.9 291.0 125 13.1 254.3 119 52.5 510.4 105 32.0 466.7 100 21.8 423.8 94 40 44.2 431.3 95 26.4 386.5 89 17.5 342.1 84 7200 60 36.6 357.6 106 21.4 313.9 100 13.8 270.6 95 44.9 436.3 116 27.0 393.5 110 18.0 351.4 105 80 29.1 284.2 116 16.5 241.6 111 10.1 198.3 105 1 37.3 362.2 126 22.0 320.5 121 14.3 279.5 116 Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8" OD, PH Fins, 151 Fins per foot. NOTES: 1. G PM - Gallons per min ute 2. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 3. LAT - Leaving Air Temperatu re ff) - Table 15 (Continued) Hot Water Heating Coil Capacity Entering Water Temperature 210 Water Temperature Drop (F) Air Entering 20 30 40 Flow Air (CFM) Temp. (F) GPM' MBh2 LAT3 GPM' MBhz LAT3 GPM' MBh2 LAT3 40 45.1 437.0 124 27.8 404.7 118 19.2 372.9 112 4800 60 39.0 378.3 133 23.8 346.6 127 16.2 315.2 120 80 33.0 319.8 141 19.8 288.6 135 13.3 257.5 129 40 51.3 496.8 116 31.5 458.9 110 21.7 421.5 105 6000 60 44.4 429.9 126 27.0 392.6 120 18.3 355.8 115 80 37.5 363.0 136 22.4 326.5 130 14.9 290.3 125 40 56.7 549.8 110 34.8 506.7 105 23.9 464.3 99 8000 60 49.1 475.5 121 29.8 433.1 115 20.2 391.5 110 80 41.4 401.3 131 24.7 359.8 126 16.4 319.0 121 ._.. Type W Coil, 2 Row, 5/8" OD, PH Fins, 151 Fins per foot. NOTES: 1. GPM -Gallons per minute 2. MBh Capacity: BTU/HR X 1000 3. LAT-Leaving Air Temperature (°F) Table 16 Hot Water Heating Coil - Water Side Pressure Drop Gallons per Minute (GPM) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 Pressure Drop (Ft. of Water) - - - - .11 .15 .20 .26 .32 .39 .47 .55 .64 .73 .83 .94 1.05 1.17 1.29 1.42 Table 16 (Contd.) Hot Water Heating Coil -Water Side Pressure Drop Gallons per Minute (GPM) 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 Pressure Drop (Ft. of Water) 1.56 1.70 1.85 2.00 2.16 2.33 2.50 2.67. 2.86 3.04 3.24 3.44 3.64 3.85 4.07 - - - 7 -7 General Units shall be completely factory assembled including coil, conden- sate drain pan, fan motor, filters, and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in either vertical or horizontal configuration. Units shall be tested and certified in accordance with ARI standard 210/240 or 340/360 certification program. Units shall be UL listed and labeled in accordance with UL 465/1995 for indoor blower coil units. Casing Unit casing shall be constructed of zinc coated, heavy gauge, galvanized steel. Exterior surfaces shall be cleaned, phosphatized, and finished with a weather -resistant baked enamel finish. Casing shall be completely insulated with cleanable, foil faced, fire -retardant, permanent, odorless, glass fiber material. All insulation edges shall be either captured or sealed. Knockouts shall be provided for unit electrical power and refrigerant piping connections. Captive screws shall be standard on all access panels. Refrigerant System The TWE180B units shall have dual refrigeration circuits. Each refrigera- tion is controlled by a factory installed thermal expansion valve. Evaporator Coil Configured aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8" internally enhanced copper tubing and factory pressure and leak tested at 375 psig. Coil is arranged for draw - through airflow and shall provide a double sloped condensate drain pan constructed of PVC plastic. The drain pan shall be removable for cleaning. The condensate drain pan can be installed in any of four positions allowing for vertical or horizontal application and providing external connections on either side of the unit. Evaporator Fan Double inlet, double width, forwarc curved, centrifugal -type fan with adjustable belt drive shall be stan- dard. Thermal overload protection Since The Trane Company has a policy of continuous product amd product data improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Technical Literature Printed in USA !� The Trane Company 2701 Wilma Rudolph Blvd. Clarksville, TN 37040 http✓lwww.trane.com OAmerican Standard Inc. 2001 Mechanical Specifications shall be standard on motor. Fan and motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Oversized motors shall be available as an option for high static application. All indoor fan motors meet the U.S. energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT). Controls Magnetic evaporator fan contactor, low voltage terminal strip, check valve, and single point power entry shall be included. All necessary controls shall be factory -installed and wired. Evaporator defrost control shall be included to prevent compressor slugging by temporarily interrupting compressor operation when low evaporator coil temperatures are encountered. Filters Two inch, throw -away filters shall be standard on TWE180B model air handlers. Filters shall be accessible from the side coil access panel. Filter rack can be field converted to two inch capability. Accessories Hydronic Heat Coils — One row steam and two row hot water coils shall be available for mounting on the discharge outlet of the air handler. Coils shall be shipped completely factory assembled within a heavy gauge sheet metal casing, finished with enamel to match the blower coil unit. Coils shall be applied in either vertical or horizontal airflow configura- tion. Electric Heaters — UL and CSA approved electric heat modules shall be available for installation directly on fan discharge. Electric heaters shall be available in a wide range of capacities with one or two stage control, single -point electric power connection and terminal strip connec- tions. Electric heater elements shall be constructed of heavy-duty nickel chromium elements internally wye connected on 480/600 volt, three phase and delta connected on 208/ 240 volt, three phase. Each 208/240 volt heater shall have pilot duty with secondary backup fuse links for automatic reset of high limit controls. Each 480/600 volt heater shall have automatic line break high limit controls. Discharge Plenums and Grilles — Accessory discharge plenums shall be available for vertical, free dis- charge applications. Plenums shall be constructed of heavy -gauge, zinc coated, galvanized steel finished with baked enamel to match the air handler unit. Grilles shall be satin finished aluminum and have four-way adjustable louvers. Return Air Grilles — Accessory return air grille shall be provided for vertical front, free return applications. Grilles shall be installed in place of the front lower side panel. Grille shall be satin finished aluminum with non-adjust- able louvers. Mounting Subbases —Accessory available for vertical floor mount configurations. Subbase shall be constructed of heavy gauge, zinc coated, galvanized steel with baked enamel finish to match air handler unit. Subbase is required in the vertical air flow application for conden- sate drain trapping and when isola- tors are required. Vibration Isolators — This accessory shall reduce transmission of noise and vibration to building structures, equipment, and adjacent spaces. Packages shall be available in either neoprene -in shear or spring -flex types in floor or suspended mountings. Oversized Motors — Field installed oversized motors shall be available for high static pressure applications. Control Options Standard Indoor Thermostats— Two stage heating and cooling operation or one stage heating and cooling thermostats shall be available in either manual or automatic changeover. Programmable Electronic Night Setback Thermostat — This option shall provide heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day program- ming capability. Library Product Literature Product Section Unitary Product Split System Air Handler Model TWE180B — 15 Ton Literature Type Submittal Sequence 203.06 Date May 2001 File No. PL-UN-S/S-TWE180-SQ-203.06 5/01 Supersedes TWE180-SQ-203.05 8 NOTE: All dimensions are in mm/inches. SERVICE ELECTRICAL A [ CD.," NE Cl PEP AEVAILIN 2 Ton Split System Cooling - 1 Phase 2TTB3024A Model No.@ Electrical Data V/Ph/Hz 2 20.0/230/1/60 Min CirAmpacity 12 Max Fuse Size (Amps) 20 Compressor CLIMATUFF -lR1 C RL Amps - LR Amps 8 7 - 57 8 Outdoor Fan FL Amps 0.9 Fan HP 1/8 Fan Dia (inches) 19 Coil S inn ;:in TM TOP DISCHARGE AREA SHOULD BE p UxA[51AICt[O FOA Ai LFASt 152A 15 rEEll Refrigerant R-22 AeOv[ UXIt UXIi SHOULD 0E PIAC[D 50 A.1 AUR-OFF WATER DOES NOT POUR DIRECILT ON UXIT. 5/02-LB/OZ AND SHOULD DE At LEAST 305 I12-A FR011 WALL AND ALL 5VAADUMAG SHR000EA1 ON IIO5IDE$. Line Size- (in.) O.D. Gas 3 3/4 OTHER INO SIDS UNRESTRICTED. r Line Size - (in) O D Liquid O K ELECTRICAL SE AV IC[ PANEL 151II 22.2 I118I DIA OLE IN Vol1A6[ 2A.R ILIIRI DIA. N.D. RITN V 22.2 IilOt DIA NoL[ IN CONIAJL 0DA aom. FON Cl[t 1RICAL - POWER SUPPLI LIDVID LIKE SF RVICE VALVE. Axu[S 1nx. A H FLAN[CTIOX lAAf PA[551AE TAPF F FiIiE ING. J�— \ FIG. I U _ G `-LA5 L F e IUAX BALL S(PV ([ VAI V[ 'D' ' I.O. F[NAIf 00.A2[D CDNX[CIION 1 IN 15' SA[ (l RR[ PAE55URI IAP F II X6. • 5/16 Dimensions H x W x D (Crated) 37.2 x 26.7 x 30 Weight - Shipping 195 Weight - Net 175 Start Components YES Sound Enclosure NO Compressor Sump Heat NO A IOUID LINE SERVICE VALVE. ON Certified in accordance with the Unitary Air -Conditioner equipment certification program E. LD. FEMALEN eI1A' SAAu°AE iIAAI which is based on ARI Standard 2101240. CONNECT ION WII PRESSURE TAr rM IND. OR Calculated in accordance with N.E.C.'Use only HACK circuit breakers or fuses. O Standard line lengths - 60'. Standard lift - 60' Suction and Liquid line. -� For Greater lengths and lifts refer to refrigerant piping software Pub# 32-3312-01. (tde- H notes latest revision) F 'Al LIn[ SExv¢[ vAlv[. G •D LD. FEMME DRA2[D PA[55UA[Ji A� FHRTIA4.SAE rLAA[ _ FIG. 2 c ®L us MODELS BASE FIG. A B C D E F G H J K 2TTB3024A 2 2 832 (32-3/4) 724 (28-1/2) 651 (25-5/8) 3/4 5/16 137 (5-3/8) 65 (2-5/8) 210 (8-1/4) 57 (2-1/4) 457 (18) From Dwg.21D153074 Rev. 10 A -weighted Sound Power Level [dB(A)l POWER LEVEL MODEL dB A A -WEIGHTED FULL OCTAVE SOUND POWER LEVEL d6 - dB A 63 1 125 1 1250 1 500 1 1000 2000 4000 1 8000 2TTB3024A1 78 50.9[ ' 55.9[ 63.21 71.2, 72 70.5 64.3 , 56.8 © 2005 American Standard Inc. All Rights Reserved i f Trane A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com; Mechanical: Specification OPoa, IMMUMM - ax General Condenser Coil The 2TTB3 shall be fully, charged from The Spine Fin TM coil shall be continuously the factory for matched indoor section wrapped, corrosion resistant all alumi- and up to 15 feet of piping. This unit must num with minimum brazed joints. This ' be designed to operate at outdoor coil is 3/8 inch O.D. seamless aluminum ambient temperatures as high as. 115T glued to a continuous aluminum fin. Coils Cooling capacities shall be matched with are lab tested to withstand 2,000 pounds a wide selection of air handlers and of pressure per square inch. The outdoor furnace coils that are A.R.I. certified. The coil provides low airflow resistance and unit shall be UL listed. Exterior must be efficient heat transfer. The coil is pro - designed for outdoor application. tected on all four sides by louvered Casing panels and has a 5 year limited warranty. Unit casing is constructed of heavy Low Ambient Cooling gauge, galvanized steel and painted with As manufactured, this unit has a cooling a weather -resistant powder paint. capability to'55°F.The addition of an Corrosion and weatherproof CMBP-G30 evaporator defrost control permits DuratuffTm base. operation to 40`F. The addition of an Refrigerant Controls evaporator defrost control with TXV Refrigeration system controls include permits low ambient cooling to 30°F. condenser fan and compressor contactor. Accessories High and low pressure controls are Thermostats= Heating/Cooling inherent to the compressor. Another (manual and automatic changeover). standard feature is the liquid line dryer. Sub -base to match thermostat and Compressor locking thermostat cover. The ClimatuP compressor features . Evaporator Defrost Control — See Low internal over temperature and pressure Ambient Cooling. protector, total dipped hermetic motor, Outdoor Thermostat — Supplemental and thermostatically controlled sump heat outdoor ambient lockout from heater. Other features include: roto lock 46 to —10°F. suction and discharge refrigeration connections, centrifugal oil pump, and low vibration and noise. The ClimatuM compressor is standard with a 5 year limited warranty. vq�s>arvone���� � Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. 1 1 TAG: L i.un %.#unVurtsuou Air Handler 2/4TEC3F24 I O0® DISCHARGE OPENING 1 SEE flG.l d FIG.2T HEATER K.O. E F TOP VIEW SIDE VIEW 118.07-1 r 2. 01 I:oD FREPLIFIN C OPBOA3 1, 00_]7 BOTTOM VIEW 2ATECY24-SUB-1 D I.14 1 —+ 1.64 A D6CF1AWLiE. ape" 1.64— AIEL011 HEATER � L T C IACUIT :® ®^ .88J ® ®� 2 BREAKER I.38 r FIG. 1 FIG. 2 2.OD GAS LINE SEE TABLE "OUT LINE SEE TABLE 2.81 311"1.1 TAPERED PIPE THREAD D 23 3.87 FILTER G ACCESS VERTICAL UPFLOW MINIMUM UNIT CLEARANCE TABLE i0 SERVICE COMBUSTIBLE CLEARANCE MATERIAL 1 PEOUIREDI ((RECOMMENDED) SIDES 01 Z.. FRONT 1, 21' BACK 0' 0' INLET DUCT 0. 1. OUTLET DUCT I'. I' FOR THE FIRST 3 IT. OF OUTLET DUCT NHEN ELECTRIC HEATERS ARE INSTALLED EXCEPT MODELS BATHTRI 108. I108. AND 1410 ARE APPROVED 1. 0- PLENUM AMD DUCT CLEARANCE IN THE UPFLON CONFIGURATION ONLY ON TWE-P MODELS. FIG 1 FIG 2 MODEL NO. J K J K L 2/4TEC31`18, 24, 30, 36 12.02 19.22 11.02 18.22 n/a 2/4TEC3F24 43 21.50 1.9.50 15. © 2006 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved) PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 2/4TEC3F24B1000A RATED VOLTS/PH/HZ. 1 208-230/1/60 RATINGS O See O.D. Specifications INDOOR COIL — Type Plate Fin Rows - F.P.I. 3 - 14 Face Area (sq. ft.) 3.21 Tube Size (in.) 3/8 - Copper Refrigerant Control TXVNB Drain Conn. Size (in.) ® 3/4 NPT DUCT CONNECTIONS See Outline Drawing INDOOR FAN —Type Centrifugal O These Air Handlers are A.R.I. certified with various Split System Diameter -Width (In.) 9 X 8 Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps (ARI STANDARD 210/240). No. Used 1 Refer totheSplit System Outdoor Unit Product Data Guides for Drive - No. Speeds Direct - 3 performance data. CFM vs� in. w.g. O. See Fan Performance Table ® 3/4" Male Plastic Pipe (Ref.: ASTM 1785-76) No. Motors — H.P. 1 - 1/4 Motor Speed R.P.M. 1075 O Minimum filter size for horizontal applications will be based on Volts/Ph/Hz '- 200-230/1/60 airflow selection and will be calculated as follows: F.L. Amps - L.R. Amps 1.55 - 2.6 Low Velocity. Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM /300 High Velocity Filter: Face area (Sq. Ft.) = CFM / 500 FILTER ©Torque Spec for TXV = Tighten 1/6 turn passed finger tight Vertical Applications Filter Furnished? Yes Type Recommended Throwaway No. -Size -Thickness 1 - 20 X 20 - 1 in. Horizontal Applications C ®� U.S Filter Fumished? No RecommendedSize O See Note O REFRIGERANT R_22 R-410A Ref. Line Connections Brazed Brazed Coupling or Conn. Size — in. Gas 3/4 5/8 C I' C S' ' L' 5/16 5/16 oup Ing or onn. tze — In. Iq. NOTES: Vertical: With filter, no horizontal drip DIMENSIONS H x W x D Crated (In.) 44 1/2 x 24 x 23-1/2 tray,Small apex baffle. Subtract 0.06" W.G. for. Uncrated See Outline Drawing downflow. WEIGHT Shipping (Lbs.)/ Net (Lbs) 121/111 Horizontal: As shipped but without filter. Subtract 0.05" W.G. for horizontal left. Airflow Performance 2/4TEC3F24B: Wet coil, No Heaters EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE (in.w.g.) AIRFLOW (CFM) VERTICAL HORIZONTAL 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS 230 VOLTS 208 VOLTS HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO HI MED LO 0 1134 876 818 1093 781 723 1083 870 813 1050 780 739 0.1 1102 839 789 1073 751 696 1051 831 783 1020 745 697 0.2 1048 798 751 1020 713 1 661 996 783 739 967 703 657 0.3 984 750 705 953 668 618 930 728 687 903 655 614 0.4.' 912 694 649 880 614 567 858 667- 628 833 600 563 0.5 833 622 581 802 548 504 782 597 561 758 533 499 0.6 738 532 496 714 465 425 ' 693 512 479 " 669 452 417 0.7 614 1 416 385 599 358 321 579 406 375 554 349 313 0.8 442 268 240 434 216 184 418 266 236 391 217 182 0.9 197 - - 187 - - 184 - - 156 - - NOTES: With filter, no horizontal drip tray Small apex baffle. Subtract 0.06" W.G. for downflow As shipped except without filter Subtract 0.05"" W.G. for horizontal left btt AIK rLUVV Ktblb IANUt IAb Lt FUK YKtbJUKt LUbb VVI I bUF'YLtIVIt IV IAKT Ht:A1 tK. Lw _ .._ _ .- ....._ _ PRESSURE DROP FOR ELECTRIC HEATERS IN AIR HANDLER MODELS NUMBER OF RACKS AIRFLOW CFM 1 2 1 3 1 4 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHESW.G. 600 0.01 0.02 0.02 700 0.01 0.02 0.02s tE �� 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 -0.04 900 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.05 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 ' 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 1400 0.07 0.08 0.10 0.11 0.13 1500 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 0.15 0.17 1706 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1900 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.21 0.23 2000 0.14 0.17 0.20 0.23 0.26 HEATER RACKS HEATER MODEL NO. NQ OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 BAYHTR1 /3410 2 BAYHTR1 /3415 3 BAYHTR1419 4 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler nameplate for approved combinations of Air Handlers and Heaters 2. Heater model numbers may have additional suffix digits. 2/4TEC3F24B WIRING DATA Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit 1) Number 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Capacity Heater. Minimum Maximum Capacity -. Heater Minimum 'Maximum Heater of Model No. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection BAYHTR1405+++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 27 30 3.60 12300 17.3 24 25 BAYHTR1408+++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 42 45 5.76 19700 27.7 37 40 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 52 60 720 24600 34.6 45 45 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK with Single Circuit 1/1 15.36 52400 64 90 90 11.53 39300 55.4 79 80 Power Source Kit BAYSPEK140B BAYHTR3415 000 1 1/3 tl,5.361524001 39.5 49 50 11.53 39300 34.4 43 45 NOTES: +++ = 000, PDC 000 = pigtails, PDC= contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. HEATER MODEL NUMBER BAYHTR E. Air Handler Unit 1405 1408 *410 *415 1419 1425 * = 1 or 3 Model Position Application 4.80KW 7.68Kw 9.60KW 15.36KW 19.20KW 24.98KW Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - Upflow . Heat Pump L L L M - - F Vertical A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - 2/4TEC3F246 Downflow Heat Pump L L L M - - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - Left Heat Pump L L L M - - Horizontal A/C or Elec. Furnace L L L L - - I Right Heat Pump L L L M - - s i i d Mechanical Specificaffons General —Blower coil units shall be completely factory assembled including coif, condensate drain pan, fan, motor, filters and controls in an insulated casing that can be applied in horizontal or vertical configuration. This is an "Air-Tite" model with 4.2 "R"value insulation and additional sealing systems. This new line of 2/4TEC3F Air handlers provides exclusive compact size combined with simple 6-Way convertibility in sizes up to 5 Tons. The unit ships in the vertical upflow configuration and converts to horizontal right just by laying the unit on its side. No tools required. Simple coil rotation: provides downflow and horizontal left applications. The 6-Way convertibility provides you inventory benefits and service/installation flexibility. The simple conversion provides opposite side access for installation and service. Units shall be UL listed. Casing — Units shall have a rugged sheet metal and steel frame construction and shall be painted with an enamel finish. Casing shall be insulated and knockouts for electrical power and control wiring. AffrM It's Hard To Stop A Tranel The Trane Company A business of American Standard, Inc. 6200 Troup Highway Tyler, TX 75707, s Refrigerant Circuits —The 2/4TEC3F units have a single refrigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit shall be controlled shall be controlled by factory installed non -bleed thermal expansion valve. Coil — Aluminum fin surface shall be mechanically bonded to 3/8 inch OD copper tubing. Coils are factory pressure and leak tested. Fan- Forward curved, dynamically balanced and statically balanced with 3 speed direct drive shall be standard, fan motor bearing shall be permanently lubricated. Controls — Low voltage wire nut connections, fan contactor, and plug in module for accessory electric heat control shall be included. Filters — Filters shall be included as standard, One inch low velocity semi -permanent type (except 5 ton - washable filter). Accessories Electric Heaters — Shall be available in a wide range of capacities and voltages with various staging options, and plug- in control wiring. Heaters shall fit inside the internal compartment. A � S1F1EDyT0 AR/ 6h. 4 E �F1E0 Tp q - 9 �¢3 iZP ¢a `24y E V�vUEN �• Y 9��STANDAPa ry0.oc�✓ 99�STANDAQ�ry�~ Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and it reserves theright to change design . speciticaltions _q TWE049E WIRING DATA CHECK DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit `) 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Number Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater of Model No. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity Protection BAYHTR 1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 16400 20 34 40 3.60 1 12300 17.3 30 30 SAYHTR1408 +++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 49 50 5.76 19700 27.7 43 45 BAYFITR1410+++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 59 60 7.20 24600 34.6 52 60 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK 2/1 15.36 52400 40/24 59'/30 60'/30 11.53 39300 `34.6120.8 52'/26 60'/30 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 38.2 55 60 11.53 39300 33.1 49 50 BAYHTR1419 BRK 2/1 19.2 65500 32/48 49'/60 50'/60 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 43'/52 45'/60 BAYHTR1425 BRK 3/1 24.96 85200 44/40/20 55/59.125 60/60'/25 18.73 163900 38.1/34.6/17,3 48/50'/22 50/60'/25 NOTES: ' Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) +++ = 000, BRK, PDC 000 = pigtails, BRK = contains circuit breakers, PDC = contains. pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply and/or combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. TWE65E WIRING DATA (Indoor Blower Motor Powered from Heater Circuit') 240 VOLT 208 VOLT Number Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Capacity Heater Minimum Maximum Heater of Model No. Circuits/ Amps per Circuit Overload Amps per Circuit Overload KW BTUH KW BTUH Phase Circuit Ampacity Protection Circuit Ampacity, Protection BAYHTR1405 +++ 1/1 4.80 16400 ' 20 34 35 3.60 12300 17.3 30 30 BAYHTR1408+++ 1/1 7.68 26200 32 49 50 5.77 19700 27.7 43 45 BAYHTR1410 +++ 1/1 9.60 32800 40 59 60 7.20 24600 34.7 52 60 BAYHTR3410 000 1/3 9.60 32800 34.6 43 45 7.20 24600 30 37 40 BAYHTR1415 BRK 2/1 15.36 52400 44/20 59'/30 60'/30 11.53 39300 38.2/17.3 52'/26 60730 BAYHTR3415 000 1/3 15.36 52400 38.2 55 60 11.53 39300 33 49 50 BAYHTR1419 BRK 2A 19.2 65500 32/48 49'/60 50'/60 14.42 49200 27.7/41.6 43'/52 45'/60 BAYHTR1425 BRK 3/1 24.96 85200 44/40/20 55/59'/25 60/60'/25 18.73 63900 38.1/34.6/17.3 48/50'/22 50/60'725 NOTES: ' Circuit 1/Circuit 2 (Minimum Circuit Ampacity for Circuit 1 includes Blower Motor Amps) +++ = 000, BRK; PDC 000 = pigtails, BRK = contains circuit breakers, PDC = contains pull disconnect IMPORTANT: Any power supply andror combination power supply, circuit or circuits must be wired and protected in accordance with local Electrical Codes. AIR HANDLER ELECTRIC HEATER PRESSURE DROP NUMBER OF RACKS NUMBER OF RACKS AIR FLOW CFM 1 1 2 3 1 4 1 5 AIR FLOW CFM 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. AIR PRESSURE DROP INCHES W.G. 600 0.01 1 0.02 1 0 02 1400 0.07 0:08 0.10 0.1,1 0.13 700 0.01 0.02 0.02 '� ,,, , W, , ,,, 1500 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13 0.15 800 0.02 0.03 0.03 0.04 1600 0.09 0.10 0.12 :0.15 0.17 900 0.03 0.03. 0.04 0.05 1700 0.10 0.11 0.14 0.17 0.19 1000 0.04 0.04 0.05 0.06 -,, 1800 0.11 0.13 0.16 0.19 0.21 1100 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 1900 0.13 0.15 0.18 0N 1200 0.05 0.06 0.07 ` 0.08 0.09 2000 0.14, 0.17 0.20 0 1300 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.11 Notes: 1. See Product Data or Air Handler Nameplate for approvedcombinations of Air Handlers andHeaters. Pub. No. 22-1655-05-0301 (EN),' i 2. Heater model number may have additional suffix digits: I HEATER RACKS HEATER' MODEL NO. NO. OF RACKS BAYHTR1405 1 BAYHTR1408 2 . BAYHTRI/3410 2 BAYHTRI/3415 S BAYHTR1419 4 BAYHTR1425 51 12: 25 4078391655 DEL AIR NO.822 P004/004 7274666752 • 1F/1.012005 14:00 7274555752 THE METAL SHOP PAGE 05/05 EM dimensions In incheslmm 0 s01 Is tkw, V. rare dat cry .o Now the AWA W. The m&V d,o./n N hwdmtrnd atl p•aa w-wi r. �s rwrtmrtad h �aur•no� Mq U+Ci RAVmtkwY 11 W4 cv^tPy -Ahetaf*-.AW-A Conn•d 14" pn•p+AS Air Performance mcderl A a C D 5 F G 1.1 1blow) FIY. IpQ 7,f� 1' gill �.� iS nu..� g to . j un/' 10' ,'Ir IM 3 241 PV IOQht 7"/ ( / 23 414�/ 3tM " '90 l6 try gr� `In►/ (4 �y yrN 7 r•' 341 ITD 225 1"134 ;175 / 93 A.0 PY 128A 7 M 1 �i ra 4 ��� 6 •�� 8'' •' "1�, 10 :� .. 2 rn• / T 104 2s 211 124 170 22s Ise ;175 ,�Ja7 s.fl PV Isox !i'q 1 13 M S too f 4 rill $ to �/ 7 ro 716 r' 2tS 333 149 17D 225 200 .165 / 76 � 2,0 PV�20ox • `!♦ 1 i `2! 1] 7 ar `lulls is t>1 7 to 14 frlf 3r) 11 �S.Q Yt4 337 200 174 21i ' TOD a 94 PrV 2aox �Jxlra % 2s i3a �s1 61N� / 17C $'r/ 7 u gas " 200 14 t;• ;165 .314 89 %6.0 Sound Fan sound levels are measured an sones. At this time t1wrt art rtc sons level teat snsndams W411 0. through HVI or AMCA dui to ow fact thart remote moulited fan r olse lav®Is art; in proportion co the follov✓Ing; type of duct, I9Vh of duct, fire distance from the intake source and t-ther random (Acton. Until a test method is available, no zountl data can be made avall Ible even though it is g*n*rAliy ec. cepted that remoter moaned venting it usually quleftrr than stwe and (In room' venting. w Trade N#mar _ Power Vant• Ipo Modal ter Pv-100 Naar. lit {400 49tileo i 15 lMrait• Wsrrter _ .17 CPM v Static P►�c%stm• (9P) Ins. WGe 3P 1,70 R�rtti flea, j insgo a i 4" 109 0,135" 100 0.2b" 92 �. 0.37V as G•5•' 70 0.75" 66 1.0" S2 1.25" 33 1.5" I8 Power Valnt- I ON PV-10 % 2680 l i S 64 153 142 130 120 Ili 96 80 63 114 1.85 4- Rawwa'v4,m.:I 2Sx pv.I tax 2745 t r 5 @5 206 190 170 153 13S tic as 62 33 1.77 5- %war Vent- 1 50X f®V. r sox 307S 11 Y .. t 49 439 420 J9S 368 335 295 1416 Ins I b l 2,29 Ptrtaer Venr� si(s(�x pd gQOx a430 I t 5 t R4 544 S 1 S5 4GG 1 f 5 360 2 273 230 a,i p4war V4rt•daih kV�a50x 3(}45 f 0 214 61£1 50, 570 54-0 Silo 45G �390 34t) 297 Ilea !0" ��. .w�o wrcirnwu is im msuiunon ,ype U-ULh'tt•U rr11aR, ❑!glad 05JLr•4. trfl'fOmtwtrcn rrtlnxt. dP nOC InGtU10 tho 0{fc:vof �pp1T [IW1C�0 (•CY4i1[�ivw). Ali prOducEs mdnufAttured by SAP have undergone exteniiva.tests and quality assurance programs to •nsury titian the products tupplacpil meal the, hrt"m inrematlanxl perform?jncc and talgrty standards SOlar 9 PAIAu is an iS09001 rogittared c ?mpany, and hats Onslte ENAC c,rd AMCA, third party accredited twt Iaboruary (ar"ilities. Accessories L CAR ACOP•VeNT S1L M $G 1 S M R vtq Nckdrnfc AnrMbFL rating SCund Platttc louver Vat lablr spear! Filtratkxr Dsmpar cgupling Ativn c,a,r-- — -Rr conceal 5019 V Wpqk .91 == 6293 Powers Ave, JOCIII110"V111t, FL 32211 U00.961.7370 *00.9s7,7479 r^x? <m�aay.tualerp�ofbu�aaas.cpret ® Bert February 2002 BAS-PRC012-EN A ;iu The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller provides digital control that is similar to that of a wall thermostat. It supports the following types of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning (HVAC) equipment: • 2-heat/2-cool rooftop units • 2-heat/2-cool rooftop units with economizer • 4-cool rooftop unit • 4-cool rooftop unit with economizer • 2-stage heat pump with economizer and auxiliary heat • Split systems The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller can operate as part of a Trane Integrated Comfort system (ICS) or as a stand- alone device. When it is part of a Trane ICS, the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller enables a building automation system (BAS) to perform functions such as scheduling, trending, alarming, and remote communication. The Tracer ZN517 communicates with both a Tracker and a Tracer Summit BAS by using a LonTalk Comm5 communication link. The Tracer ZN517 can also communicate with other building control systems that are compliant with the LonMark® Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile. When it is a stand-alone device, the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller can be configured using a Rover service tool through the communication jack of a zone sensor. Binary inputs (isolated contacts) • Enable/disable or occupancy: This input enables/disables the equipment or puts occupied equipment into standby mode if no presence is detected in the zone that is being con- trolled. • Fan status or generic: Configured as generic, this input does not affect operation of the equipment; it can be used by a BAS for alarming or monitor- ing Analog inputs • Space temperature (Trane thermistor) • Setpoint input (Trane zone sensor, 0-1 kQ) • Discharge air temperature (Trane ther- mistor) • Universal input (thermistor, 4-20 mA) • Outdoor air temperature (Trane thermistor) Binary outputs • Supply fan • Cool 1/compressor 1 • Cool 2/compressor 2 • Heat 1/reversing valve/cool 3 • Heat 2/auxiliary heat/cool 4 • Economizer open • Economizer close TM ® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective com- panies: Integrated Comfort, Rover, Tracer, Tracker, and Tracer Summit from Trane; and LonTalk and LonMark from the Echelon Corporation. © 2002 American Standard Inc. BAS-PRC012-EN Easy installation The controller can be installed in existing Trane and competitive HVAC equipment without major wiring changes, and clearly labeled screw terminals ensure that wires are connected quickly and accurately. A compact enclosure design simplifies installation in minimal space. Automatic heat/cool mode determination The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller automatically determines whether heating or cooling is needed to maintain comfort levels, without the need to manually adjust unit controls. The controller measures the zone temperature and setpoint temperature, then uses a proportional/integral algorithm to maintain zone temperature at the setpoint. Discharge air tempering The function of discharge air tempering is to provide heating capacity to prevent the zone temperature from falling and causing occupant discomfort. Discharge air tempering is initiated if ventilation air, brought in through the air handler/ rooftop unit, causes the discharge air temperature to fall to 10°F (5.6°C) below the occupied heating setpoint. The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller will initiate discharge air tempering to slightly warm the air before it reaches the space. Demand control ventilation Increasing/decreasing the amount of outdoor air based on CO2 levels is referred to as demand control ventilation. The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller modulates the economizer position in direct response to the CO2 level, controlling the volume of outside air. The allowable CO2 threshold is user defined. Features Occupied and unoccupied operation The occupancy input works with a motion (occupancy) sensor or time clock. A communicated value from a building automation system through the Comm5 link can also be used. The input allows the controllers to use unoccupied (setback) temperature setpoints. Continuous fan or fan -cycling operation Fan operation can be configured to either run continuously at a given speed or cycle on and off automatically. Equipment protection • Minimum on/off timer: Extends compressor life by preventing equip- ment from duty cycling. • Low -temperature detection: Pre- vents compressor operation during abnormal conditions. • Fan status: The controller monitors fan status to protect equipment from overheating. If fan or airflow is not detected when needed, this input does not affect operation. Economizing If outdoor air conditions are suitable for cooling the zone, the Tracer ZN517 will modulate both the outdoor air damper and return air damper (between the active minimum damper position and 100%) to provide economizing or free cooling. Timed override The timed override function for after hours operation allows users to request unit operation by the touch of a button on the unit zone sensor. Additionally, users can press the CANCEL button at any time to place the unit back into unoccupied mode. Manual output test The controller Test button is pressed in sequence to activate all binary outputs. The test is used to verify that outputs are operating properly. Filter maintenance Filter maintenance status is based on the cumulative hours of operation of the unit fan. The controller has timers that can be reset. When the time limit expires, the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller sends a message to the BAS indicating that unit maintenance is recommended. Peer -to -peer communication Multiple controllers can share data if they are bound together. Shared data can include setpoints, zone temperature, mode, and fan status. Applications having more than one unit serving a single large zone can benefit from this feature, which prevents multiple units from simultaneously heating and cooling. Interoperability The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller conforms to the LonMark SCC profile and communicates using the LonTalk protocol. This allows the controller to work with other control systems that support LonTalk and the SCC profile. BAS-PRC012-EN t�. Dimensions and specifications Figure 2: Tracer ZN517 unitary controller dimensions 6 5/16 in. (160 mm) Dee 5 % in. (137 mm) o p eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeo 0 5 5/8 in. (143 mm) Dimensions (See Figure 2) Height: 5 3/8 in. (137 mm) Width: 6 7/8 in. (175 mm) Depth: 2 in. (51 mm) Power Supply: 19-30 Vac (24 Vac nominal) at 50/60 Hz Consumption: 10 VA plus 12 VA (maximum) per binary output Operating environment Temperature: From -40 to 160°F [-40 to 70°C] Relative humidity: From 5 to 90% non -condensing Storage environment Temperature: From -40 to 185OF [-40 to 85°C] Relative humidity: From 5 to 95% non -condensing Agency listings/compliance CE—Immunity: EN 50082-1 CE—Emissions: EN 61000-3-2 EN 61000-3-3 EN 50081-1 EN 55011, Class B UL and C-UL listed: 916 Energy management system UL 94-5V (UL flammability rating for plenum use) FCC Part 15, Class A, CFR 47 LonMark° Space Comfort Controller (SCC) profile 4 BAS-PRC012-EN I Network architecture RIMMMMIM ME The Tracer ZN517 can communicate with ZN517 unitary controllers on a Tracker both a Tracker BAS and a Tracker Summit BAS network (left side) and on a Tracer BAS. Figure 3 shows Tracer Summit BAS network (right side). Figure 3: Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers on BAS networks Tracker BAS network Tracer Summit BAS network Tracker PC Workstation �— Tracker controller Comm5 (LonTalk) link Comm5 (LonTalk) link Comm5 (LonTalk) link /Thermostat wire r (multi -conductor)) : Mike AEN al ZN517 Generic 2H/2C rooftop unit .Thermostat wire mot— (multi -conductor)) ®— ®®® 0 0 ZN517 Generic 4C rooftop unit Thermostat wire (multi -conductor)) I ZN517 Generic heat pump Building control unit (BCU) Comm5 (LonTalk) link Comm5 (LonTalk) link Comm5 (LonTalk) link Tracer Summit PC Workstation Z -w as f -Thermostat wire (multi -conductor)) ZN517 Generic 2H/2C rooftop unit Thermostat wire r--f(multi-conductor)) o ® o P-3 L ZN517 Generic 4C rooftop unit Thermostat wire (multi -conductor)) � I4LIMIN ,ZN517 Generic heat pump BAS-PRC012-EN 5 r° TRANE' A variety of zone sensors are available for use with Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers. Table 1 describes the features of a few of the zone sensors that can be used with Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers. Contact your Trane sales office for information about other compatible zone sensors. Figure 4 shows two types of Trane zone sensors. Table 1: Some Trane zone sensor options for the ZN517 unitary controller Timed override BAS order Zone buttons Comm number jack Setpoint Temperature thumbwheel sensor On Cancel 4190 1086 x x x 4190 1087 x 4190 1088 x x x x 4190 1089 x x 4190 1090 x x x x x 4190 1094 x x x 4190 7015 x (stainless steel wall plate) Figure 4: Two types of Trane zone sensors 4� r� w, zi4 i+ t' p Ex 6 BAS-PRC012-EN Wiring diagram Figure 5 shows a general wiring diagram for the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Figure 5: Tracer ZN517 wiring diagram 24 Vac H----------------; output Binary outputs 24 Vac N-------------- 0'0 ele0000000000000 0 0 AC�POWFJt��0 ` DECanoYQBtI �� HVAC uNrr a J.` J LED ULn1;�.L� Trsoer'ZN517 coma LBWARV I ANALOG INPUM ZONE 8EN SEMAM Cow A B A B8N- D �10 N1 I AMI -0�T- ZN pID 8ET lID 0 0 o aaaa00000000000�e� o 0 Comm5 I Binary In - inputs --------- J � -------------- Analog Inputs -� i 1 --�'----- y Comm5 ° ° OT Trane zone sensor BAS-P RC012-E N 7 i Literature Order Number BAS-PRC012-EN File Number PL-ES-BAS-000-PRC012-0202 Supersedes The Trane Company An American Standard Company Stocking Location www.trano.com For more information contact New La Crosse your local district office or Since The Trane Company has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement, it e-mail us at comfort@trane.com reserves the right to change design and specifications without notice. j I TJNNE I i I I 6 I I VariTrac Central Control Panel Installation Manual This manual and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and shall not be used or reproduced in whole or in part, except as ` intended, without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Since Trane .has a policy of continuous product improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Use of the software contained in this package is provided under a software license agreement. Unauthorized use of the software or related materials discussed in this manual can result in civil damages and criminal penalties. The terms of this license are included with the compact disk.; Please read them thoroughly. Trane has tested the system described in this manual However,Trane does not guarantee that the system contains no errors. Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any person of such revision or change. Trane may have patents or pending patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document,Trane does not imply giving license to these patents. i The following are trademarks or registered trademarks ofTrane: Reliatel, Tracker,Trane, VariTrac, VariTrane, and Voyager. Printed in the U.S.A. 2002 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved. T Contents About This Manual ........... .... ........................ 1. Contents ................... ............................ ......... .. ............ ............... 1 Compliance Information...... ..... Specifications . ......... ................ ,: ......... ........ .................. ............... 1 VariTrac Changeover Bypass System .................................... Overview....................................................... ....:... ......... :..:.......... 1 Getting Started ... .................... ......... ........: ........ ......... ,.............. 1. Installing and Configuring the System ......... Troubleshooting . ......... .................. ................................................ 1 Delivered VAV System .................... .......... ........ ......... ... ............... 1 Overview..` ......... ............................. ........: ......... .......................... 1 iGetting Started ... .................. ........:......... ......... ......... ............... 1 Installing and Configuring the System ................................................ 1 - Naming Conventions ............... ........... ......... ......... ......... ......... ............... 2 Cautionary Statements ... ......... .................. ......... ......... ........ ............... 2 ! Related Literature FCC Information ................................................ 3 VariTrac and Delivered VAV Radio andTelevision Interference........................ 3 VariTrac Changeover -Bypass System ................ 5 Overview.... .................... ......... .................. ......... ....................................... 5 Central Control Panel .................... .................. ,................. .............. 5 Unit Control Module (UCM) .............................................................. 5 VariTrac Damper ................... .......... ,........ ........................... .............. 5 Communicating Sensor/Bypass Damper Control ..................................... 6 VariTrac Bypass Damper .................... ................... ..:...... _............... 6 Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control .............................................. 6 AuxiliaryTemperature Sensor ................. ......... ........: ......... ............... 6 ZoneTemperature Sensors ............. ......... .............................................. 6 CO2Sensor ...................................... ......... ........: ......... ............... 7 Occupancy Sensor .......................... .................. ........: ......... .,............. 7 Operator Display (optional) . .................... .................. .......................... 7 Service Model Number Description .................... ......... ......... ............... 7 Specifications................................................... 9 VariTrac Central Control Panel ............................................... ......... .............. 9 Operator Display VAV-SVN03A-EN i TRANE' UCM Damper Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly RelayBoard Binary Outputs........................................................................11 WireSpecifications...........................................................................................11 Getting Started ............................................... 13 Unpack and Inspect the Components............................................................. 13 Mountthe Wiring Base..................................................................................... 14 Mounting Requirements ...................... .................................. :................... 14 Location................................... ............................... ......... ............. 14 Operating Environment....................................................................... 14 Clearances SecureTermination Module Wall................................................................15 Secure Term ination Module to Conduit Box .............................................. 16 i Install VariTrac CCP Relay Board............................................................... h6 WireAC Power.................................................................................................. 17 CCP Field Wiring........................................................................:................ 17 ACPower Wiring................................................................................ 18 AC Power Checkout ........................................................................... 18 BinarylnputWiring.......................................................................................... 18 Priority Shutdown Input Wiring.......................................................... 18 i Occupied/Unoccupied Input Wiring .................................................... 19 OutputWiring ................................................................................................. 19 Install the Bypass Dampers and Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly................................................................... 20 Install Bypass Dampers BypassDamper Wiring.............................................................................. 21 Mount the Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control ................................ 21 ! Connect the Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Wiring ................. 22 Install theVariTrac Dampers............................................................................ 23 ' Connect UCM Wiring Set the UCM DIP Switches ............................... ....... 25 ................................................................... Slaved Dampers ............................. 26 Install the ZoneTemperature Sensors............................................................. 28 iLocation......................................................................................................28 Mounting Standard and Digital ZoneTemperature Sensors ................... 29 WallMount........................................................................................... 29 Junction Box Mount............................................................................ 29 ZoneTemperature Sensor Wiring.............................................................. 30 Communication Link Wiring............................................................................ 32 MountMain Module.................................................................................. 36 Install Operator Display (optional)............................................................ 37 Connecting Modem Devices..................................................................... 38 ff-Affi-Mi"No ld*► TRANE' s I VAV-SVN03A-EN Connecting PC with VariTrac Software to CCP ......................................... 39 Installation Checklist ...................................... 41 Shipment.................................................................................................... 41 UnitLocation............................................................................I.................. 41 ACPower Wiring......................................................:......,.........:................41 Communicating Sensor/Bypass Assembly .............................................. 41 InputWiring................................................................................................ 41 OutputWiring.................................................................::........:..:.............. 41. VariTrac Dampers....................................................................................... 42 ZoneTemperature Sensors........................................................................ 42 UCMWiring................................................................................................ 42 ........................................ Communication Link Wiring.......... .............. ......42 System Start -Up and Checkout ...................... 43 Pre -power -Up Checkout...................................................................................43 Central Control Panel................................................................................. 43 UCM............................................................................................................ 43 Occupied Mode................................................................................... 44 UnoccupiedMode............................................................................... 44 Powering Down the System...................................................................... 44 UCM LEDs........................................................................................:......... 44 Green LED............................................................................................ 45 YellowLED.................::........................................................................ 45 Tests and Troubleshooting .............................. 47 DisplayedFailures................:.....................:.................................:................... 47 Static Sensor Calibration Failure............................................................... 47 Discharge AirTemperature Sensor Failure ............................................... 47 Communication Failure............................................................................. 47 Zone Sensor Failure................................................................................... 48 ZoneSetpoint Failure...........................:.................................................... 48 Auxiliary Sensor Failure............................................................................ 48 Static Pressure SensorTroubleshooting................................................... 48 Zone, Auxiliary and System Temperature Sensor Checkout ................... 48 UCM Local Heat Checkout......................................................................... 50 Central Control Panel Input/Output Test .......................................................... 50 BinarylhputTests....................................................................................... 50 Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Test ........................................... 50 Supply AirTemperature InputTest...................................................... 50 Static Pressure Sensor InputTest....................................................... 51 Binary OutputTest............................................................................... 51 System Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 51 TRANE' Delivered VAV System .................................... 53 Overview..................................... .................................................................. 53 . What is Delivered VAV?............................................................................. 53 What Delivered VAV is Not........................................................................ 53 Central Control Panel................................................................................. 55 Unit Control Module (UCM) .......... .........:......:...................................... 55 VariTraneVAVTerminal Units.................................................................... 55 VariTraneVAVTerminal UnitTypes............................................................55 ' Single Duct Parallel Fan-Powered........................................................................ 55 Series Fan -Powered ........................ 55 AuxiliaryTemperature Sensor............................................................. 56 ZoneTemperature Sensors ........... 56 CO2Sensor......... .............................................. 56 Occupancy Sensor.. ....... ......... .................... .................... ............. �6 OperatorDisplay.................................................................................. 56 ! f Getting Started ............................................... 57 Installing the Central Control Panel .... 57 Install VariTraneVAVTerminal Units................................................................ 57 Connect UCM Wiring....:............................................................................ 57 Set UCM DIP Switches............................................................................... 57 Installing ZoneTemperature Sensors....................................................... 57 Communications Link Wiring.................................................................... 57 Installation Checklist ....................... Shipment...................................................................................:................ 63 UnitLocation.............................................................................................. 63 AC Power Wiring InputWiring................................................................................................ 63` VariTraneTerminal Units .......................... ........... 63 ZoneTemperature Sensors........................................................................ 63 UCMWiring................................................................................................ 63 Communication Link Wiring...................................................................... 64 Completing Central Control Panel Assembly ................................................. 64 MountMain Module.................................................................................. 64 Install Operator Display Connecting Modem Devices..................................................................... 64 iv VAV-SVN03A-EN TRANE' I I About This Manual Contents TI This manual describes the steps required to install and configure VariTraC Changeover Bypass Zoning and Delivered VAV Systems. Sections in this manual are highlighted below: Compliance Information Information about FCC approval and possible radio and telephone interfer ence, and the CE compliance statement.. j Specifications Technical specifications forVariTrac Central Control Panel unit and system components. l VariTrac Changeover Bypass System Overview p A brief description of a typical VariTrac changeover bypass system. Getting Started Pre -installation and setup information. ! Installing and Configuring the System i ! Installation and configuration information, including an installation check- e list. Troubleshooting i General troubleshooting guidelines for common problems. I Deliverer! VAV System I Overview I A brief description of a typical delivered VAV system. Getting Started Pre -installation and setup information. Installing and Configuring the System Installation and configuration information, including an installation check- list. i VAV-SVN03A-EN l TAWE6 About This Manual Naming Conventions ` The following is a list of naming conventions used in this manual: • CCP: Refers to the system Central Control Panel • VariTrac: Refers to the CCP used in a pressure dependent bypass zoning system • Delivered VAV: Refers to the CCP used with a Commercial Voyager VAV rooftop unit and VariTrane pressure independent VAV boxes • VAV: Variable air volume Cautionary Statements The following cautionary statements signal procedures or conditions that require particular attention. AWARNING a Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could i result in serious injury or death. a i ACAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. i CAUTION �. Indicates a situation in which property -damage -only accidents could occur. It is also used to alert against unsafe practices. IMPORTANT s Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to operate improperly, but will not likely result in I potential for damage. R Related Literature VAV-SVX01B-EN: UCM 4.0 and Wireless VAV Communication VAV-SLB006-EN: Zone Occupancy Sensor VAV-SLB007-EN: Digital Display Zone Sensor VAV-SLB008-EN: Zone and Duct CO2 Sensor VAV-SVP01A-EN: VariTrac Operator's Guide 2 VAV-SVN03A-EN i TRINE' FCC Information VariTrac and Delivered VAS/ Radio and Television Interference VariTrac and Delivered VAV generate, use, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, interference to radio and television reception may occur. VariTrac and Delivered VAV are tested and comply with the limits for Class A computing devices in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC rules, to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a commercial installation. There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If interference does occur, consult a radio or television technician for suggestions to correct the problem. Also, the booklet How to Identify and Resolve Radio -TV Interference Problems is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. Order stock #004-000-00345-4. VAV-SVN03A-EN Manufacturer's Name: Trane Manufacturer's Address: 4833 White Bear Parkway Saint Paul, Minnesota 55110 USA The manufacturer hereby declares that the product: Product Name: VariTrac CCP Controller Product Number: X13650940010; X13650942010 Product Option: Operator Display Conforms to the following standards or other normative documents: Electromagnetic Emission: EN 50081-1:1998 (by Council Directive 89/336/EEC) Radiated EN55022: 1998 Class B limit Conducted EN55022: 1998 Class B limit - Electromagnetic Immunity: EN61326-1:1997 +Al: 1998 EN61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge ±8 kV air discharge EN61000-4-3 3 V/m EN61000-4-4 ±1 kV EN61000-4-5 ±1 kV EN61000-4-6 3 V EN61000-4-8 30 A/m EN61000-4-11 1 cycle/100% When and where issued Electromagnetic Emission: 4/3/2001 Bounheng Saycocie Electromagnetic Immunity: 4/17/2001 Design/Compliance Engineer Saint Paul, Minnesota USA Mark of Compliance European Contact Societe Trane (Epinal, France) 1, rue des Ameriques, B.P. 6 F-88191 Golbey Cedex, France Phone: (33) 329.31.73.00 Fax: (33) 329.81.24.98 This document validates CE conformity of the VariTrac CCP controller. 4 VAV-SV NO3A-E N TRINE" VariTrac Changeover -Bypass System Overview VariTrac Changeover -bypass VAV is a comfort system solution designed for light commercial applications. As the name implies, these systems deliver a varying volume of air to multiple zones, each with its own thermostat, while still utilizing a unitary machine with a constant volume fan. Changeover - bypass VAV combines the comfort benefits of VAV with the cost effective- ness and simplicity of packaged unitary equipment. Central Control Panel The VariTrac Central Control Panel is the central source of communications and decision making between the individual zones and the air conditioning unit. Connections to the central control panel are: • 24 Vac power binary inputs for an occupied/unoccupied signal and external priority shutdown signal (optional) • ICS communication bus to theTrane building automation system (op- tional) • UCM communication bus to the zone dampers and communicating sensor/bypass damper control and TraneVoyager'"/Reliatel'° rooftop unit • binary outputs to heating, cooling, and fan of non -Voyager or Reliatel rooftop units Unit Control Module (UCM) A unit control module is mounted to each individual zone damper. Inputs and outputs consist of the twisted shielded pair communication link, zone temperature sensor, optional CO2 and occupancy sensors, 24 Vac power, damper motor control, and local heat outputs. Local heat may be duct or space mounted, and can be staged electric, pulse -width modulating electric, and modulating or staged two -position hot water. VariTrac Damper Each VariTrac damper consists of an integrated 24 Vac actuator and control box that encloses the UCM circuit board.The damper is designed to operate in static pressures up to 1.75 inches wg. VariTrac dampers are referred to by their dimensions: • round damper sizes are 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, and 16 inches.The dampers con- sists of an 18 gage galvanized steel frame with a round damper blade assembly. VAV-SVN03A-EN 5 • MAME VariTrac Changeover -Bypass System j rectangular damper sizes are 8 x 12, 8 x 14, 8 x 16, 10 x 16, 10 x 20, and 14 x 16 inches.The damper consists of a 16 gage galvanized steel frame and opposed blade damper assembly. Communicating Sensor/Bypass Damper Control The communicating sensor/bypass damper assembly is a bypass damper and communicating sensor/bypass control that resides on the same bus as the VariTrac dampers and Voyage r/Reliatel rooftop unit. VariTrac Bypass Damper Bypass dampers are non -communicating VariTrac dampers which include an integrated actuator with a pre -wired interconnect cable that plugs into the communicating sensor/bypass control. • round bypass damper sizes are 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches.The damper con- sists of an 18 gage galvanized steel frame with a round damper blade assembly. The round bypass damper operates in duct static pressures up to 1.75 inches wg. • rectangular bypass damper sizes are 14 x 12, 16 x 16, 20 x 20, and 30 x 20 i I inches.The damper consists of a 13 gage galvanized steel frame and i opposed blade damper assembly.The rectangular bypass damper oper- ates in duct static pressures up to 2.00 inches wg. Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control The Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control is composed of an integrated UCM board, static pressure, and discharge air temperature sensors. It 3 directly controls the bypass damper and communicates duct conditions to the central control panel. The static pressure sensor measures duct static pressure and positions the bypass damper(s) to maintain the static pressure setpoint. The discharge air temperature sensor allows the CCP to determine the heat/ cool action of each individual UCM and cycles the heating and cooling stages to maintain the discharge air temperature. Discharge air temperature setpoints are also edited through the operator display or PC software. AuxiliaeyTemperature Sensor The auxiliary temperature sensor allows the operator to monitor air temperature leaving a reheat device or measure duct temperature for automatic operation of a standalone UCM. ZoneTemperature Sensors Five zone temperature sensor configurations are available: • sensor only • sensor with adjustable setpoint and communications jack • sensor with night setback override button, cancel button, and communica- tions jack • sensor with adjustable setpoint, night setback override button, cancel button, and communications jack 6 VAV-SVN03A-EN TRANWO CO2 Sensor • sensor with digital display, adjustable setpoint, night setpoint override button, cancel button, and communications jack CO2 Sensor A CO2 sensor may be connected to the UCM damper control to sense CO2 levels in the space.This signal is communicated to the CCP for demand ventilation calculation and control. Occupancy Sensor A normally open occupancy sensor contact may be connected to the UCM damper control binary input to indicate zone occupancy. Operator Display (optional) A 1/4VGA monochrome LCD touch screen display is available for the CCP. This display provides setup, diagnostic, and seven-day scheduling functions, to the system. Service Model Number Description Service model numbers determine product characteristics and are used when ordering replacement parts. Each digit signifies product characteris- ticsSee .Figure 1. Figure 1: Service Model Number Description VA DA06 BYP 1 Product Type LInventory Number VA = VariTrac Product families D = Damper R = Rectangular Damper Damper Control A = Development Sequence BYPS = Bypass Control BYR = Rectangular Bypass Control CHGR = Changeover Control - Damper Size ELEC = 3 Stage, Primary Heat Disabled Control DA06 = 6" Damper NCHW = 1 Stage, Primary Heat Enabled - DA08 = 8" Damper DA10 =10" Damper DA12 = 12" Damper DA14 = 14" Damper DA16 = 16" Damper RA0812 = 8" x 12" Zone Damper RA0814 = 8" x 14" Zone Damper RA0816 = 8" x 16" Zone Damper RA1016 = 10" x 16" Zone Damper - RA1020 = 10" x 20" Zone Damper RA1418 = 14" x 18" Zone Damper RA1412 = 14" x 12" Bypass Damper RA1616 = 16" x 16" Bypass Damper RA2020 = 20" x 20" Bypass Damper RA3020 = 30" x 20" Bypass Damper VAV-SVN03A-EN 7 8 VAV-SVN03A-EN i r i TRM/E' specifications VariTrac Central Control Panel 20-30 Vac; 60 Hz, single phase, 30 VA Power Requirements minimum Class 2 transformer required Operating Environment 320F to.122°F, 10 to 90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage Environment -40°F to 185°F, 5 to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing Cabinet NEMA 1 resin enclosure, plenum rated Mount directly on wall surface or Mounting mount on recessed 4 in. x 4 in. conduit box. Dimensions 8.75 in. high x 10.25 in. wide x 2.75 in. deep. Weight 1.5 pounds Communication link wiring must be Level. 4 22 AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper Communication Link Wiring conductors. Maximum total wire length is 3500 feet. Wire must meet Trane specifications. See "Communication Link Wire Specifications." Voltage (provided by VariTrac CCP): 10 to 14 Vdc Binary Input Current (provided by VariTrac CCP): 10 to 14 mA Note: Only "dry" contacts may be attached to binary inputs. UL Approval The VariTrac Central Control Panel is UL approved. Upon a power loss, all operator - Memory Backup edited data stored in the VariTrac Central Control Panel is maintained permanently. VAV-SVN03A-EN 9 TRAME` Operator Display, Power Requirements The operator display is powered by the CCP. 320Fto 1220F Operating Environment 10 to 90% relative humidity, non - condensing -40oF to 185°F Storage Environment 5 to 95% relative humidity, non - condensing Cabinet NEMA 1 resin enclosure, plenum rated Mounting Plugs directly onto VariTrac CCP Dimensions 8.75 in. high x 10.25 in. wide x 1.5 in. deep. Weight 3 pounds UCIVI Damper 20 to 30 Vac, 60 Hz, single phase, 10 Power Requirements VA Minimum (plus load of optional heat outputs) Class 2 transformer required 32°F to 120OF Operating Environment 10 to 90% relative humidity, non - condensing -50°F to 200OF Storage Environment 5 to 95% relative humidity, non - condensing Control Box NEMA 1 metal enclosure, plenum rated Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22 AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper Communication Link Wiring conductors. Maximum total wire length is 3500 feet. Wire must meet Trane specifications. See Table 1: "Communication Link Wire Specifications." 10 VAV-SVN03A-EN r TAMEO Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly 20 to 30 Vac, 60 Hz, single phase, 15 Power Requirements VA minimum. Class 2 transformer required 32°F to 120°F Operating Environment 10 to 90% relative humidity, non - condensing -50°F to 200°F Storage Environment 5 to 95% relative humidity, non - condensing Control Box NEMA 1 metal enclosure, plenum rated Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22 AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper Communication Link Wiring conductors. Maximum total wire length is 3500 feet. Wire must meet Trane specifications. See Table 1: "Communication Link Wire Specifications." Relay Board Binary Outputs Voltage provided: 24Vac from air conditioning unit Current: 10VA maximum Wire Specifications Shielded Level 4 communication wire is now recommended for all commu- nication link wiring on the newVariTrac CCP. This is the same wire which is recommended for theTracker Version 10 Comm5 communication link. The term "Level 4" is used to specify a particular performance of communi- cation wire and is normally associated with LonTalk". Level 4 wire is differ- ent from Category IV (four) wire and CategoryV (five) wire.The specification information for Level 4 wire can be found in the "LonWorksT" FTT-10A Free TopologyTransceiver User's Guide" at www.echelon.com. Shielded Level 4 communication wire can be purchased from two qualified suppliers: Windy City Wire and Connect -Air. VAV-SVN03A-EN 11 TRAMEO Specifications Table 1: Communication LinkWire Specifications 22 AWG Conductors, Shielded, Level 4 Plenum CMP Rated Number of Cond: 1 pr. Jacket Color: light blue Specification Cond. Strand: 7/30 Nom. Jacket thick. inch: 0.009" Nom. Jacket thick. wall in: 0.015" Nom OD inch: 0.176" Weight per MFT. 22 Insulation Premium grade color coded polymer • Premium grade natural polymer alloy (plenum) • Premium grade SR PVC (non -plenum) Jacket • Suitable for use from 0° C to +75' C • Suggested rating of 300V Shield Overall polyester supported aluminum foil, plus a stranded tinned copper drain wire to facilitate grounding Packaging 1000 ft. (305m); pay -out cartons 1000 ft. (305m) spools or reels Application All cables are compatible with applications that incorporate LonWorksitechnology Industry Listed by UL as Type CM, CMP, CUP and/or PLTC cables Approvals for use in NEC Article 800 and/or 725 installation Note: Comm4 link limits for 3500 feet (daisy chain), 35 devices new VariTrac CCP 12 VAV-SVN03A-EN TRINE' Getting Started Familiarize yourself with the system components and preview the installation procedures before installing and configuring theVariTrac system. Installation and configuring procedures appear in suggested order of performance: • Unpack and inspect the components • Mount the wiring base • Wire AC power • Binary input wiring • Output wiring • Install communicating sensor/bypass damper control • Install bypass damper(s) and connect to communicating sensor/bypass control assembly • Install VariTrac dampers • Connect UCM wiring • Set UCM DIP switches • Install slaved dampers (if used) • Install zone temperature sensors • Communication link wiring • Mount main module • Install operator display (optional) • Connecting modem devices IMPORTANT The CCP is designed to work with UCM III and IV VariTrac damper and VariTrane VAV controllers produced beginning January 1995. If any other dampers are used (especially on a retrofit job), please consult the factory to confirm VariTrac Central Control Panel compatibility prior to installa- tion. Unpack and Inspect the Components Inspect components for damage. Match each component to the packing list to ensure that nothing was lost during shipment. Make sure that the litera- ture is not lost or discarded with the packing material. Visually inspect the central control panel for damage. All components are thoroughly inspected before leaving the factory. Any claims for damage incurred in shipping must be filed with the carrier. VAV-SVN03A-EN 13 e Z E® 9 Getting Started f Mount the Wiring Base Figure 3:Termination module conduit access and mounting holes i Conduit access Conduit connector (three places) Holes for mounting on a 2 in. x 4 in. I conduit box horizontally a (left and right) 9 Two holes for mounting on a wall o ® o (one on each side) �m I o Termination board Holes for mounting on a 2 in. x 4 in. / conduit box vertically Holes for mounting on a (top and bottom) ` 4 in. x 4 in. conduit box Jamb nut (four corners) (attaches to conduit connector) Mounting Requirements Location TheVariTrac Central Control Panel should be mounted at a convenient level and located where it will be easily accessible. If possible, locate the CCP near the controlled equipment to reduce wiring cost. Operating Environment The VariTrac Central Control Panel is designed for indoor use only. It should be located in a dust -free and corrosive -free environment, and within a range of 32° to 120°F, and 10 to 90 percent humidity (non -condensing). Clearances Mount the VariTrac Central Control Panel on any vertical flat surface.The CCP is approximately 8.75 inches high, 10.25 inches wide and 2.75 inches deep. 14 VAV-SVN03A-EN 6 TRAKE` Secure Termination Module to Wall _--' The VariTrac Central Control Panel should be easily accessible for making wiring connections and for servicing. Provide two inches of clearance on the left and right sides, and sufficient clearance above the unit to make conduit connections. Sufficient space should be available in front of the unit to making wiring connections and perform maintenance. Figure 4: Dimensions forVariTrac Central Control Panel Components Top view 10.25 in. 2.75 in. (26.04 cm) (6.99 cm) 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) Front view Side view Bottom view Secure Termination Module to Wall 1 Mark the location of the two mounting holes on the wall. 2 Set the termination module aside and drill mounting holes. 3 Secure the termination module to the wall with the supplied hardware WO x 1 in. screw with plastic anchor). VAV-SVN03A-EN 15 Getting Started Secure Termination Module to Conduit Box 1 Remove the screws from the conduit box. 2 Line up the conduit box screw holes on the termination module (Figure 3) with the screw holes on the conduit box. 3 Install the screws. NOTE: When mounting the termination module to a 4 in. x 4 in. conduit box, remove the plastic cover over the box for easier access.. Do not attempt to break away excess plastic. Use a hack saw blade and carefully cut away the plastic. Install VariTrac CCP Relay Board 1 Separate the main module and front panel from the termination module. 2 Remove the relay board from its packaging. 3 Orient the relay board so that its 20-pin socket connector faces left (see Figure 5). 4 Slide the left edge of the board underneath the catches on the left side. 5 Rotate the board to the catches on the right side. 6 Snap the board into place by pressing on the terminal block or on the right side of the board. Figure 5: Installing Optional Relay Board 16 Wire AC Power Wire AC Power CCP Field Wiring Field wiring to the VariTrac Central Control Panel includes: • AC power wiring • binary input wiring • communication link wiring • binary output wiring (requires optional relay board) These procedures are detailed in the following sections. Refer to Figure 6 for wiring connections.' Figure 6: Field Wiring Termination Board TB2 Legend . = Transformer = Figure note Termination resistor Twisted pair, shielded wire per Trane specifications E = Shield termination 1 = Contact points T =C = Earth ground Shield ground Figure Notes 1 All customer wiring must be in acordance with national, state, and local electrical codes. 2 Trane recommends a dedicated transformer for 24 Vac power. 3 Do not apply voltage to the priority shutdown and occupancy inputs. 4 Example of Comm5 communication link wiring. See product -specific literature for Comm5 wire connection details. VAV-SVN03A-EN 17 C r Getting Started AC Power Wiring A dedicated 24Vac, 30 VA Class 2 transformer is required to power the VariTrac Central Control Panel. TheVariTrac Central Control Panel requires 3-wire service with a nominal voltage of 24Vac and a utilization range of 20 to 30Vac. All wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code and local codes. The 24Vac Line can enter the VariTrac Central Control Panel cabinet through the 4 in. x 4 in. knockout or through the knockouts in the top of the panel. Figure 3 shows the 24Vac conduit entry holes. Connect the 24Vac power wires toT132-1 and TB2-2 and the ground wire from the circuit breaker panel ground toT132-3 as shown in Figure 6. Use copper conductor wire only. AC Power Checkout After the 24Vac connections have been made atT132, apply AC power by closing the circuit breaker for the Class 2 transformer. Measure the voltages atT132. The voltage between: • T132-1 andT62-2 should be 20 to 30 Vac. • T132-1 andTB2-3 (ground) should be 20 to 30 Vac. • T132-2 andT62-3 (ground) should be 20 to 30 Vac. IMPORTANT -- The 24 Vac power supplies must not be used to power any devices other than the VariTrac Central Control Panel. This could result in malfunction of the VariTrac Central Control Panel due to electrical noise. ®WARNING To prevent death or injuries from electrical shock, disconnect external power to the VariTrac Central Control Panel before making power connec- tions. AWARNING When measurements are made with power on, use care to prevent injuries or death from electrical shock. Binary Input Wiring Use 18-22 AWG twisted pair copper conductor wire for binary input wiring. Wire run should be limited to less than 1,000 feet to avoid electrical noise problems. Refer to Figure 6 for proper connection of binary inputs. Priority Shutdown Input Wiring This input closes the connection betweenT62-6 andTB2-7. The most likely source of this input is a building management system or fire control panel, but any other device allowing a dry contact connection may be used. When the connection is open, the VariTrac Central Control Panel operates normally. When the connection is closed, the CCP goes into priority shutdown. 18 VAV-SVN03A-EN Occupied/Unoccupied Input Wiring Occupied/Unoccupied Input Wiring This input closes the connection betweenTB2-8 andTB2-9.This is most likely from an external time clock, but any other device allowing a dry contact connection may be used. When the connection is open, the VariTrac Central Control Panel operates in the occupied mode. When the connection is closed, the CCP operates in the unoccupied mode. ®CAUTION Do not run binary input wires and AC power wires together in the same conduit or wire bundles. ®CAUTION Controlling the binary inputs on multiple VariTrac Central Control Panels from a single contact closure is not permitted. Output Wiring Use only copper conductors for output wiring.The recommended wire size is 16-22 AWG. Do not run output wires in the same conduit or wire bundle with any AC power wires other than VariTrac Central Control Panel 24Vac power. Output wires should enter the cabinet through the conduit entry holes shown in figure 3. Output wiring connections at the VariTrac Central Control Panel are shown in Figure 7. The wire from the air conditioning unit to the CCP consists of one wire from each stage of heating, cooling, the supply fan, and the leg of the 24Vac power source at the air conditioning unit. 24Vac power single transformer systems terminate power at Rh and Rc (TB1-1 andTB1-2).Two transformer systems terminate the heating transformer at Rh (TB1-2) and the cooling transformer atRc (TB1-1). The remaining wires are terminated per the diagram in Figure 7. Binary output relay contacts are rated at 24Vac, 1 amp 24VA pilot duty. IMPORTANT All output wiring must comply with applicable electrical codes. Metal conduit may be required by local codes. IMPORTANT Output wires run in the same conduit or wire bundle with any AC power wires other than VariTrac Central Control Panel 24 Vac power could cause the VariTrac Central Control Panel to malfunction due to electrical noise. VAV-SVN03A-EN 19 I I T Ee l Getting Started Figure 7: Binary Output Wiring for Optional Relay Board Termination Board TB1 2H/2C 24 V* FAN C1 C2 I Htl Ht2 Ht. Pump 24 V* FAN COMP! I COMP2 I 'EM HT C/O ® , MIN- CL `24 Vac from the rooftop unit. For single transformer systems, connect Rc to Rh. For two transformer systems, connect the cooling transformer to RC and the heating transformer to Rh. Install the Bypass Dampers and. Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly Install Bypass Dampers Bypass damper(s) should be located before the first zone runs out from the supply air duct. VariTrac dampers or supply duct branches should be installed downstream of bypass dampers.The distance between bypass dampers and the communicating sensor/bypass control should be two to three equivalent duct diameters. In a ducted return system, bypass dampers will be ducted directly to the return air duct. In systems with plenum return, bypass damper(s) should be ducted into the return air riser. Confirm that sufficient relief or exhaust exists to prevent return plenum pressurization. See Figure 8. IMPORTANT The use of a relief fan or backdraft damper is strongly recommended in the return air system. This will prevent bypassed air from pressurizing the return air duct system and spilling out of return grills into conditioned space, especially when the unit is in economizer mode. 20 VAV-SVN03A-EN T I Bypass Damper Wiring r Bypass Damper Wiring The interconnect cable is pre -wired to the bypass damper and may be lengthened if necessary. IMPORTANT Mounting screws must be located towards the ends of the damper when hanging straps are used to avoid interference with the rotating damper. A label attached to the dampers indicates the acceptable areas for mounting screws. IMPORTANT The bypass damper must be positioned to orient the drive shaft horizon- tally. Failure to do this may result in drive train malfunction (see Figure 11). f IMPORTANT It is important to note the airflow direction when installing dampers. A label for this is present on each damper assembly. Mount the Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control E Figure 8: Mounting the Bypass Damper Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly 1. Avoid high pressure turns and transitions 2. Use hard duct 3. Mount communicating Sensor/Bypass Controller 2-3 duct diameters upstream of bypass damper The communicating sensor/bypass control is located between the supply fan and the bypass damper in the least turbulent location possible. It is recommended that the distance between the control and the nearest up- stream transition be two to three equivalent duct diameters. VAV-SVN03A-EN TRAME9 Getting Started If the supply duct branches out at the riser, install the control in the largest supply duct. A two-inch hole is required to insert the temperature and static pressure sensor. Use the supplied gasket to seal off air leaks. Secure the sensor to. the duct with a minimum of three sheet metal screws. IMPORTANT The sensor assembly should be mounted on the side of the duct to keep the pressure transducer in a vertical orientation. Do not install horizontally on the top or bottom of a duct. Connect the Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Wiring The pre -wired interconnect cable plugs into the actuator connector inside the control.The cable is designed to connect in one orientation only. Refer to the diagram and connect as follows: 1 Plug the red actuator connector brom the BYPS damper onto the master, damper UCM socket (ACT) as shown in Figure 9. 2 If two bypass dampers are used, connect.the second bypass damper's red actuator plus to the spare connector socket pigtailed on the first` BYPS damper cable assembly. 3 If cable assembly needs to be extended, cut and splice additional wire on the BYPS damper end of the cable. Figure 9: Wiring the Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control Close 0 en To NEC Class 2 Hot 24V Tra nsfo rm er Actuator Load 8 VA (without actuator). Step 2 SPARE W-HOT CONNECTOR BK-OPEN - R - CLOS E r--------------------------' ! Static - .. Pressure Port ACT AIP IG 0124V - r�,� -1 Female plug end of bypass RE ,�J sensor assembly cable Address DDC/UCM J3 HI°H!I Male plug end located on Switch Control Board v, DDC/UCM control board sasses � + - + - + - Pressure &n_n ma_a_Q0fl YEL CRN �D�DmDg]m Transducer - IJ IJ lJ 4, IDNEGN0 SETA/CO2 GNO Air Supply y z ; Temp Sensor DDC/UCM Control Board Step 1 -i z! 6, 0i Shielded Twisted Pair Communications Wiring 22 VAV-SVN03A-EN T/A/E° i Install the VariTrac Dampers Install the VariTrac Dampers A sketch of basic damper installation is shown in Figure 10.The damper may be connected with hard duct or flex duct at either end. If two bypass dampers are installed, a pigtail socket is provided on the cable so the second damper can be plugged into the LICK IMPORTANT Mounting screws must be located towards the ends of the damper when hanging straps are used to avoid interference with the rotating damper. A label attached to the dampers indicates the acceptable areas for mounting screws. IMPORTANT It is important to note airflow direction when installing the damper. A label for this is present on each damper assembly. IMPORTANT The control box on each damper must be positioned to orient the drive shaft horizontally. Failure to do this may result in drive train malfunction. (See Figure 11.) Figure 10: VariTrac Damper Installation IMPORTANT: Mounting screws must be Hard or Flex / 3' away from damper Duct ♦ bend to avoid interference with rotating damper. Attach unit to hard duct using a minimum or four - sheet metal screws l- / Hard or Flex Duct Attach unit to hard duct using - - a minimum of four Attach flex duct to unit using - - sheet metal screws self locking plastic tie strap located 1/4' past the - cnmp. Hard or Flex Duct Attach unit to hard duct using/ a minimum or four sheet metal screws Attach unit to hard duct using a minimum of four sheet metal screws VAV-SVN03A-EN 23 E Getting Started Figure 11: Proper Damper Mounting Positions -------------------- E -------- ---------- a - ---------------- CAUTION: Dampers must always be installed with the drive shaft horizontal. ----------------------- ----------- I -------- I ----------------- Connect UCM Wiring Connect the power to terminalsTB1-1 (24V) andTB1-2 (ground). 24 Vac is required to power the UCM control. 20 Vac to 28 Vac is acceptable. Use 18 to 20 AWG for power wiring. The power consumption for an auto -changeover cooling -only UCM (model CHGR) is 10VA. Local heat outputs are rated at 10VA maximum for each output.To determine the total UCM power requirements, add the power consumption of local heat to the circuit board power. ®CAUTION Use wires with copper conductors only. The use of aluminum or other. types of wire may result in overheating and equipment damage. ®CAUTION Connecting a shared UCM power supply with reversed polarity will cause damage to the UCM,TC1, and central control panel. ACAUTION When powering multiple UCMs from one transformer, polarity must be maintained. TerminalTB1-1 is designated positive (+) and TerminalTB1-2 is negative (-) to unit casing ground. IMPORTANT UCM control box cover must be replaced after field wiring to prevent electromagnetic interference. 24 VAV-SVN03A-EN Set the UCM DIP Switches Figure 12: UCM Wiring DAMPER TO 24V — ACTUATOR TRANSFORMER (TB,-,) 24VAC - WIRING _ 1 sip I�I CR CO rAC ) 240C ! - TU (TB1-2) GNO ' Y NOT CONNECTED OPTIONAL FIELD INSTALLED .� W N I 1 .00CUPANCY SENSOR _t' O a- O _ — — = I I U - -i Y I I 1 m m O_ I TO JI,- ST D ST HEALER STAGE - 70 ,RO - 2'— coNrC,T NA) I I 1 I TO Ja- LT Sro. 24yA I r------ NAx/COR. _ J ' I..TD JB - _NOT I — — — — OPTIONAL FIELD NSTAum - I ACT BIP ND lay ELECTRIC HEATER - n- �j �j - J1 0 ooI 10 �LJ-� ADDRESS D.D.C,\U.C.M. LJ J3 (robo�T - YP,AG I SW)TCH CONTROL BOARD �W BK (CLOSES yE „O o ,A�� ►LAX Iaaaaae I a OPTIONAL TIE NSTALLm - +N M+� N+� N M 'n a, I PROPORTIONAL JAR VALIE _- I - I I(.,j��1 Lj�j 1 I��j 1 j��1 1 1 I I I I I �y Q N I I ED I GO I ED j ,0. YEL GRN 1O�In�,�� 7 m c i m E R m m m m m r r r ZONE CND SET A/COIr(�(D --- 1 1 1 1 ON OFT D.D.C.\U.C.MTDAe--- 12A VMAc _ I 6 I -tee--31T7- - W-6 T63-2 I2VA -1 F OPTIONAL FIELD MED CONTROL BOX ON -OFT 1TAT[q VALVE -1 - - ---- ---) SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR - 5 4 3 2 1 r— — - - COMMUNICATIONS - zoN[ NSIX+ ... RING 'M/. �AOI zlat[ sLOIMsa4 _( I RCNOTE IA10 I I - REiIOIE RI. I CCa0 . NOTE: ©I gNSOtt cNo - I. ,. - FACTORY WIRING ;orn6N0. n¢D II la•nONAi Fl¢D _ A ___ ____ FIELD WIRING I WT I NStIo" ZWC lEN50R INSTALLED ZONE 5ENs0R ' TIONAL FIELD INSTALLED '-- OPTIONAL OR ALTERNATE WIRING - - — - - CO2 SENSOR I 2 1/0Qu1CK CONNECT REWIRED FOR ALL FIELD CONNECTIONS. <a ZONE SENSOR TERMINALS 4 AND 5 REQUIRE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR WIRING FOR COMMUNICATIONS JACK EQUIPPED ZONE SENSOR OPTION. - M3-5 163-6 QNO ADDITIONAL HIRING REQUIRED FOR NIGHT SETBACK OVERRIDE (ON/CANCEL). QCONNECT RED AND GREEN *RES TOGETHER ON OCCUPANCY SENSOR AND THEN TO I I THE 24VAC HOT ON THE TRANSFORMER. - I 6 I © AS SHIPPED, THE AUX INPUT IS CONFIGURED AS AN AUX TEMPERATURE INPUT, THE AUX TEMPERATURE IOPDON,u rlµD INSTALLCD INPUT CAN BE RECONFIGURED AS A CO2 SENSOR INPUT NA THE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE. _ L - AMP NCR Q7. 5 TERMINAL NOT TO BE USED WITH THIS APPLICATION- Q IF UNIT MOUNTED TRANFORMER IS NOT PROVIDED, POLARITY FROM UNIT TO UNIT MUST BE MAINTAINED TO PREVENT PERMANENT DAMAGE TO CONTROL BOARD. IF ONE LEG OF 24VAC SUPPLY IS GROUNDED, THEN GROUND. LEG MUST BE CONNECTED TO TBI-2. Q SHIELDS OF COMMUNICATIONS WIRING SHOULD BE TIED TOGETHER AND INSULATED. Set the UCM DIP Switches Each device connected to the VariTrac Central Control Panel must a unique address. No two devices (of the same type) can have the same address. Table 2 lists the address settings for UCM DIP switches connected to the VariTrac Central Control Panel IMPORTANT The UCM located in the communicating sensor/bypass control must always be addressed as #33. VAV-SVN03A-EN 25 _ TR/IdVE' Getting Started Table 2: DIP Switch Settings for UCM Damper Addresses UCM Number DIP Switch Settings 1 2 3 4 5 6 01 ON ON ON ON ON 02 ON ON ON ON ON 03 ON ON ON ON 04 ON ON ON ON ON 05 ON ON ON ON 06 07 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 08 09 10 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 11 12 13 14 15 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 16 ON 17 ON ON ON ON 18 ON ON ON 19 20 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 21 22 ON :: ON ON only. ON ON ON ON 23 ON ON 24 ON ON ON used for Delivered VAV Addresses 25-32 25 ON O O ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O N ON ON 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control only 33 ON I ON ON I ON = Off ON 1 o� Example of Address #5 Slaved Dampers In some applications it may be desirable to control an additional damper from a single UCM.The slaved damper does not require a UCM circuit board. For this reason a model BYPS damper is paralleled directly to the 26 VAV-SVN03A-EN Slaved Dampers outputs of the UCM controlling the primary damper, by using the BYPS damper cable assembly shipped with the BYPS damper. Refer to diagram and connect as follows: 1 Disconnect the red actuator plug from the master damper UCM. 2 Plug the red actuator connector from the BYPS damper onto the master damper UCM socket (ACT) as shown in Figure 13. 3 Reconnect the master damper actuator's red connector to the spare connector socket pigtailed on the BYPS damper cable assembly. 4 If cable assembly needs to be extended, cut and splice additional wire on the BYPS damper end of the cable. Figure 13: Wiring for Slaved Damper To NEC Class 2 24VTransformer Load 8 VA (without actuator) Step 3 SPARE W—HOT CONNECTOR. BK—GPEN R-CLOSE T eps& 2----------- _24VAC ACT 1111' !GN➢ 124V Address DDC/UCM Switch Control Board (� 98088� 11 1 + - + - + - YEL GRN M m o�a�m-� ❑ ❑ t5�w�oMo�`om ~ ��� Z NE GN➢ SETA/CG2 GN[ zi zi Oi Oj Shielded Twisted Pair Communications Wiring VAV-SVN03A-EN Female plug end of bypass sensor assembly cable Male plug end located on \ DDC/UCM control board r DDC/UCM Control Board Steps 1 &2 27 r- T/MII/E' Getting Started Install the Zone Temperature Sensors Five types of zone temperature sensors are available. The sensors are shown below in Figure 14: • sensor with night setback override button, cancel button, and comm.unica tions jack • sensor with adjustable setpoint, night setback override button, cancel button, and communications jack • sensor with adjustable setpoint and communications jack • sensor with night setback override button, cancel button, and communica- tions jack • sensor only • sensor with digital display, adjustable setpoint, night setpoint override button, cancel button, and communications jack. Figure 14: Zone Sensor Options Location Proper temperature sensor location is crucial to occupant comfort.The sensor should be placed in the most critical area of the zone where there is free circulation of air. It should be mounted on a flat interior surface approximately 54 inches from the floor, or as specified by the project plans and specifications. Avoid locating sensors in the following places: • areas of direct sunlight • areas blanketed by air from diffusers or subject to drafts • surfaces with unconditioned areas behind them (such as an outside wall or the wall of a storeroom) 28 VAV-SVN03A-EN Mounting Standard and Digital Zone Temperature Sensors • areas near heat sources like equipment (appliances, computers, copiers, etc.) or concealed pipes or chimneys • dead spots behind doors, draperies, or in corners. Mounting Standard and Digital ZoneTemperature Sensors Zone temperature sensors consist of two basic pieces: the base and cover. Externally adjustable versions have an external adjustment knob.To remove the sensor cover from the base: 1 Note the position of the adjustment knob (if present). 2 Use a small screwdriver to gently pry the adjustment knob from the cover. 3 Before mounting a zone temperature sensor, remove zone sensor cover by easing the tip of a small screwdriver between the base and the cover. Gently lift the top of the screwdriver up. Do not force. Follow these steps to replace the zone temperature sensor cover and (if present) adjustment knob after mounting: 1 Align the cover with the sides of the base. 2 Press the cover toward the wall until it snaps into place. 3 Align the knob to the position noted prior to its removal. 4 Push the stem through the cover hole until the stem sits firmly in setpoint potentiometer. 5 Turn the knob to assure that it rotates freely through the entire range of temperature settings. Wall Mount With the cover removed, feed the control wires through the rectangular opening in the base. Follow these steps if mounting the sensor to a wall: 1 Assuring that the base is level, position the back of the base over the wire entry in the wall 2 Mark the centers of the two oblong mounting holes, then set aside the base. 3 Drill a 3/16 in. diameter hole approximately 1 in. deep at the marked locations. 4 Insert plastic anchors into the holes until they are firmly seated. 5 Feed the control wires through the base and fasten the base to the wall with the supplied mounting screws. 6 Connect the control wires to the proper terminals on the temperature sensor (See Figure 15). 7 Replace the sensor cover. Junction Box Mount 1 With the cover removed, feed the control wires through the rectangular opening in the base. VAV-SVN03A-EN 29 r Getting Started 30 2 Using two #6-32 screws, fasten,the base to the junction box's threaded mounting holes. 3 Connect the control wires to the proper terminals on the temperature sensor (See Figure 15). 4 Replace the sensor cover. ZoneTernperature Sensor Wiring A zone temperature sensor designed specifically for UCM damper control must control each unit. Field wiring for the zone temperature sensors must meet local code. If local codes require enclosed conductors, the zone tem- perature sensor wires should be installed in conduit Do not route zone temperature sensor wires in conduit with 24V or any other high power conducting wires. Different numbers of conductors are required based on the zone temperature sensor used.The following table lists the options and number of wires required. Table 3: Zone Sensor Options Number of Zone Sensor Option Required Wires' Sensor only 2 Sensor with adjustable setpoint 3 Sensor with night setback override 2 and cancel buttons Sensor with adjustable setpoint and night setback override and cancel 3 buttons Sensor with LCD display and adjustable setpoint and night 52 setback override and cancel buttons 1. Some sensors have a communication jack available as an option. If these jacks are used, they must be wired to the UCM using a separate two -conductor, shielded cable that meets the specification for communication link wiring. Tape back the shield of the communication link (if used) at the zone temperature sensor and splice the other end into the adjoining communication link shield. The communication jacks do not need to be wired for the system to operate properly. VAV-SVN03A-EN 2. 3 wires are required for sensor connection. 2 wires are required for 24 Vac power connection. For wire lengths less than 75 feet, an 18 gage, 5 conductor cable may be used. For wire lengths greater than 75 feet use 18 gage, 2 conductor cable for the power wiring (T81-T81), and 18 gage, 3 conductor cable for signal wiring (TB2-TB3). Figure 15: ZoneTemperature Sensor. Controller Wiring Terminal Connection Chart Sensor T1314 UCM T634 Field Wire Color Code 1 ;:1 2 2 3 3 4 (+) + 5 (-) P -- Figure Notes 1 Shield must be spliced with other communication. link shields. 2 Shield must be cut back and taped at sensor. � . ACT .RIIP G 2 V LJ-'oqx�o� dl o 0 o a 0011 _J BE Address DDC / UCM J3 Switch Control Board e W sasses ° a + - + - + - �n n, m v uO %0 11EL CiZN 4--iG Vrr/ff ul �UHm��° 4�4 ❑ ❑ tiNDU i NIGHT SETBACK i TB1 OVERRIDE OPTION SENSOR 1 i P� TEMPERATURE ® i 10 KQ ® 77F i 2 - - - - - - - - - - - alQ14ALCOMMON WARMER ADJUSTABLE 10 KQ 3 SETPOINT OPTION SETPOINT COOLER ---------------------------------- COMM 1� COMMUNICATIONS i COMMUNICATIONS +(HIGH) JACK yL D 5 COMMUNICATIONS -(LOW) A A (Optional) (Optional) im im Optional Field Mounted Aux. Temp. Sensor VAV-SVN03A-EN 31 I' 7 MAKEO Getting Started Communication Link Wiring TheVariTrac Central Control Panel communication link (TB2-10, 11, and 12) connects the CCP, UCM dampers, communicating sensor/bypass damper control assembly, and Voyager/Reliatel rooftop units. Field wiring for the communication link must meet the following requirements: • All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes. • Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22 AWG twisted, shielded pair wire (meets or exceedsTrane specifications. See wiring specifications sections in this manual for further information). • The maximum total wire length is 3,500 feet for the communication link. At the VariTrac Central Control Panel, the communication link wires must be connected toTerminalsTB2-10 (+) andTB2-11 (—). Refer to Figure 17.This connection is polarity sensitive. IMPORTANT Connections between lengths of link wiring should be soldered and taped. Wire nuts are not acceptable. ®CAUTION Connecting the communication link with reversed polarity will lead to system malfunction and possible equipment damage. " The shield on the communication link wiring must be connected toTB2-12. The shield wire should be spliced with the shield from the next section of communication link wiring at every junction.Tape each splice to prevent any contact between the shield and ground.The shield should be cut and taped back at the end of the link: Communication link wiring cannot pass between buildings. IMPORTANT Improper communication link shield connections will lead to system malfunction. IMPORTANT Improper communication link routing will lead to system malfunction. Connect UCMs on the communication link in a daisy -chain configuration. With this configuration, it is easier to solve communication problems by isolating portions of the communication link. See Figure 16 for an example of a daisy -chain configuration. 32 VAV-SV NO3A-E N Getting Started TJNNEO Figure 17: UCM Communication Link Wiring U 0 P m mFt C CO E 0 O a C CO M U ° o s[Z� N M > w Cl ? pO m N bWl I � 4 C Q m `� a) > is Q N T O Sa a *y a) C E � c� O C 'a m NCO gq N a O Q b' �Y- cOi _� - O r� as E =� z- a E �N 0 c C o $ ° U O U m N 0 cQ G U D C O N C 7 E Y h C C 0 , E o O N O O OI a L N O � > 01 O Y N O UN (O L y N m 9 M N a) O. C z a) a N N _ 00 a) p E C� O U C ' a Z -O C mU (n ` E O N Q W< 0c)0 'u..—N Z�Z h a VAV-SVN03A-EN ° i Voyager Communication Link Wiring i Figure 18: Voyager Communication Link Wiring VariTrac Communications Interface (Comm4) �afz � B FILT N JIS Comm Termination Details for Voyager RTU J2 ................................................. m Voyager (UPC) TRANE RooFTOP uNtT Unit Control Panel U to Jt oN I O Q a: ' TRANE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE 8 - LOCATED BOTTOM CENTER OF RTU CONTROL PANEL HQ°�TMP � J7 _T82 pG� 6 - 6 6 TB1 V D==❑ ..................................:.......... a W (TCI-V) NUL s TA�Pc * ' HEAT 2 CiiND FAN A E ��� s� U (t) TSP I,) T$P ®. py�yR O ® B J9 Figure Notes TO COMMa DEKES 1 All dip switches off. 2 Comm board to non -isolated Comm3 or Comm4 option. VAV-SVN03A-EN 35 Getting Started i' Figure 19: Precedent Communication Link Wiring VariTrac Communications Interface (Comm4) Comm Termination Details for Voyager RTU Trane Communication Interface -Precedent SERIAL COMM. To COMM4 A + DEVICES T91 (TCI-P) Figure Notes 1 All dip switches off. 2 Comm board to non -isolated Comm3 or Comm4 option. J2 J3 J5 J4 )o 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 O 0 Om 0 10 OO ® J8 0000 J6 J7 c, Precedent (UCP) Unit Control Panel Mount Main Module After mounting and wiring the wiring base, attach the main module. NOTE: It is not necessary to turn off 24 Vac power to the wiring base prior to mount- ing and removing the main module. • Verify that all the wires on the wiring base are securely fastened in place. • Carefully line up the alignment pins on the wiring base with the back of the main module (Figure 20). 36 VAV-SVN03A-EN Mounting Main Module Termination module Alignment (four place ain module . IMPORTANT Do not use excessive force when mounting the module. If the module does not snap easily into place, slightly reposition it on the alignment pins. Failure to comply may cause damage to the module. Firmly push the main module onto the wiring base until it snaps into place. If 24Vac is applied, the main module will start.The LEDs on the main module will flash on and off after a few seconds Install Operator Display (optional) An operator display is available to provide monitoring and control of VariTrac systems and UCM zones from one central Iocation.The display provides a'/a VGA touch screen to allow the operator to interface with the system. Temperature and system failure diagnostics and Voyager and Precedent Rooftop unit alarms are indicated on the operator display screen and in PC software. NOTE. It is not necessary to turn off 24 Vac power to the wiring base prior to mount- ing and removing the operator display. After mounting the main module, attach the operator display. • Tilt the top of the operator display about 30 degrees towards you. e VAV-SVN03A-EN 37 i T14?WE° i Getting Started • Align the three tabs on the bottom of the display with the slots in the bottom of the main module. (Figure 21). • Starting with the center tab, insert the tabs into the slots. Figure 21: Install operator display IMPORTANT Do not use excessive force when mounting the module. If the module does not snap easily into place, slightly reposition it on the alignment pins. Failure to comply may cause damage to the module. Push the top of the display module toward the main module until it snaps into place. If 24 Vac is applied, the operator will turn on and display data. Connecting Modern Devices Remote communications may be accomplished through aTrane building management system or with stand-alone modem attached to a single CCP via the RS-232 port. A US Robotics Sportsterlm fax/data external modem is recommended for CCP applications. Modems require hardware and software configurations for use with the CCP Physical connection of the modem to the VariTrac Central Control Panel is shown in Figure 22. 88 VAV-SVN03A-EN VAV-SVN03A-EN Connect RJ-12 to 25-pin male adapter (PN: 35914269) Connecting PC with VariTrac Software to CCP TheVariTrac PC Software provides a graphic user interface forVariTrac and Delivered VAV systems. Advanced status and set-up information are avail- able via a PC serial port connection. Install the PC software on your PC following the instructions provided with the software CD. Connect your PC to the Central Control Panel as shown in Figure 23.The connection is made using a PC serial port adapter and cable: Adapter: DB9 female to RJ12 (PN: 3591 4262) Cable: RJ12 to RJ12 (PN: 3591 4260) 39 I TRAMEO Figure 23:Typical VariTrac Central Control Panel to PC serial port connec- tions Termination module bottom view RJ-12 port (PC direct connection) i 40 RJ-12 port for PC_ direct connection (bottom side) RJ-12 cable (PN: 35914260) Installation Checklist Complete this checklist as the VariTrac Central Control Panel is installed to verify that all recommended procedures are performed.This checklist does not replace the detailed instructions provided in the manual. Read the entire manual carefully to become familiar with the installation procedures before installing the unit. Shipment ❑ InspectVariTrac Central Control Panel for shipping damage. File claim if necessary. ❑ Inspect zone dampers and accessories for shipping damage. File claim if necessary. Unit Location ❑ Install VariTrac Central Control Panel in environment that meets tempera- ture and humidity requirements. ❑ Securely mountVariTrac Central Control Panel on wall at an accessible location with proper clearances. AC Power Wiring ❑ Field installed AC power wiring complies with all applicable codes. ❑ 24Vac line from dedicated Class 2 transformer connected toVariTrac Central Control. Panel atTB2. ❑ Voltage measured atTB2-1 toTB2-2 is 20 to 30 Vac. ❑ Assure that a reliable earth ground has been attached toTB2-3. Communicating Sensor/Bypass Assembly ❑ Bypass damper(s) properly installed between supply/return ductwork per instructions. ❑ Communicating Sensor/Bypass Control mounted and wired to the bypass damper(s). ❑ Communication cable properly terminated at the Communicating Sensor/ Bypass Control and routed back toVariTrac Central Control Panel. Input Wiring ❑ Field installed input wiring complies with all applicable codes. ❑ Optional time clock and priority shutdown inputs terminated atTB2-6 throughTB2-9 per instructions. Output Wiring ❑ Field installed output wiring complies with all applicable codes. If used, relay wiring is terminated atTB1-1 through 11 per instructions. j VAV-SVN03A-EN 41 i Installation Checklist VariTrac Dampers ❑ UCM dampers mounted and secure according to recommendations. Zone Temperature Sensors ❑ Sensors are properly mounted and wired per instructions and in the correct space. UCM Wiring ❑ UCM power is properly wired toTB1-1 andT131-Z NOTE: TB 1-2 is COMMON (case ground) if grounded secondary transformers are being used. Confirm polarity from one UCM to the next if more than one UCM is being powered from a single transformer. ❑ Confirm voltage present between 20 Vac and 28 Vac. ❑ Ensure that the sensor is properly terminated. ❑ If optional local heat is being used, confirm wiring per appropriate diagram. Communication Link Wiring ❑ Field installed communications wiring complies with all applicable codes. ❑ VariTrac Central Control Panel communication link wiring to UCMs is connected atTB2-10,TB2-11, andTB2-12 on the CCP. ❑ Communication link wiring is properly terminated at each zone damper UCM on terminalsTB2-1 throughT132-6. Ensure that polarity (+-) has been maintained through the link. ❑ Communication link wire shields spliced at each device junction and taped to prevent contact with earth ground. 42 VAV-SV NO3A-E N IF TRINE° VAV-SVN03A-EN System Start -Up and Checkout Pre -power -Up Checkout Central Control Panel • Measure the supply voltage to the CCP TB2-1 andTB2-2.The supply voltage should be between 20Vac and 30Vac. • Assure that a reliable ground is attached toT132-3 on the CCP. • Check the UCM communication link to assure that the wire designated (+ is connected to theT132-10 and the wire designated (—) is terminated at tho T132-11. The shield must be connected toTB2-12. AWARNING The following test should not be performed until all people and equipment are clear of the air conditioning unit. If the air handling unit is controlled by the optional field installed relay board, check the operation of the supply fan and heating and cooling stages by jumping the appropriate terminals of the binary output terminal block TB1.This check assures that the wires are properly terminated at the CCP and that the air conditioning unit is operational. UCM • Verify that the damper is installed with the drive shaft horizontal. See the Installation and Wiring section of this manual for more details. • Check to assure that all mounting screws are a minimum of three inches away from the center damper bead if hanging straps are used.This allows full rotation of the damper. • Check the supply voltage atTB1-1 andTB1-2. Polarity is important. Notice thatT61-1 is designated 24V andT131-2 is designated ground to unit casing ground.The acceptable voltage present is 20 Vac to 28 Vac. ACAUTION Connecting a shared UCM power supply with reversed polarity will cause damage.to the UCM,TCI, and Central Control Panel When powering multiple UCMs from one transformer, polarity must be maintained. TerminalTB1-1 is designated 24V and TerminalTB1-2 is GND to unit casing ground. • Verify that communications wiring is terminated atT132-1 (+) andT62-2 H. Polarity is important. • Verify that zone sensor connections are correct as detailed in the Installa- tion and Wiring section of this manual. 43 7_ TAME System Start -Up and Checkout `- Verify that the proper unit address is set on each UCM. Occupied Mode After the system is completely wired and installed it is ready for the initial power -up. Upon power -up the CCP and UCMs will initiate the sequence of events that follows. IMPORTANT For the CCP start-up sequence to begin, it is necessary for one UCM and a communicating sensor/bypass control on the loop to communicate with the CCP. • The CCP prepares for static calibration. • UCMs begin driving closed to perform their calibration reset. • After calibration, the UCMs are driven to maximum position, and the bypass begins to close. • The "zero flow voltage reading is taken with the fan off. • System fan is turned on for approximately 45 seconds. • High flow static sensor voltage is taken and stored in the CCP. • The bypass damper is then driven to 50 percent and released. • The UCMs are released from their MAX flow position. • UCMs are scanned and heating/cooling callers are established. • Fan remains on if edited to occupied fan mode "on" • Fan energizes if occupied fan mode is edited to "auto" and sufficient requests are present. • The control action of each UCM changes as appropriate. • Heating or cooling is staged to maintain the discharge air temperature. Unoccupied Mode Each time the CCP enters the unoccupied mode, a static sensor self - calibration sequence takes place. Powering Down the System CCP power must be disconnected to avoid unnecessary zone tagging and personal injury during service. UCM LEDs Green and yellow LEDs on the circuit board help diagnose communication. or circuit board problems. Conditions indicated by the LEDs are: 44 VAV-SVN03A-EN UCM LEDs i. Green LED ON Normal Operation OFF No 24 Vac power, or defective board BLINKING Defective Board Yellow LED I ON Reversed communication link polarity No communication link activity OFF or defective board SLOW Communication on the link not intended for that UCM BLINK FAST The UCM communicated with the CCP BLINK VAV-SVN03A-EN 45 I 46 VAV-SV N 03A-E N T RAKEO e Tess and Troubleshooting Displayed Failures Static Sensor Calibration Failure If static sensor calibration fails, the CCP uses 0.50 inch wg as the static pressure setpoint. The zone dampers continue to control normally. Failed static sensor calibration may indicate that the position or location of the sensor is not correct. See mounting the communicating sensor/bypass control in this m.anual.The following conditions create a static sensor calibration failure: I+ • No UCMs are communicating • No UCM can be driven to MAX due to group level overrides • Zero static reading was not in the range of 0.15 to 0.45 Vdc • High flow static reading is less than 0.10 Vdc greater than the zero static reading • Fan does not run during the start-up calibration sequence • Design static pressure value is too low • Bypass damper(s) are operating incorrectly Discharge,AirTemperature Sensor Failure If the discharge air temperature sensor fails, the CCP issues a priority ; shutdown command: • All zone dampers drive to maximum • Bypass damper drives to 50 percent • Fan and all stages of heating and cooling are de -energized This failure appears in diagnostics on the operator display and PC software A shorted or open temperature sensor or failed communicating sensor/ bypass control is the cause. Communication Failure If communications fails (no UCMs communicating), the CCP: • De -energizes the fan and all stages of heating and cooling • Drives the bypass to 50 percent Individual UCM communications failures are displayed in diagnostics on the operator display and PC software. Check all wiring connections and polarity. See the CommunicationsTroubleshooting section in this manual for details. VAV-SVN03A-EN 47 T E I Tests and Troubleshooting ' i Zone Sensor Failure If the zone sensor fails, the damper drives to minimum position, and its vote is excluded. Zone Setpoint Failure If a setpoint fails, the UCM automatically uses the edited occupied cooling and heating setpoints. Auxiliary Sensor Failure If the auxiliary sensor circuit opens, the temperature reading on the display screen reads and a diagnostic is be displayed on the operator display and PC software. If the auxiliary sensor is used on a stand alone UCM to establish the control action, the UCM remains in the current control action. Static Pressure Sensor Troubleshooting The static pressure sensor signal enables the CCP to recognize system static and adjust the bypass damper accordingly. If a problem exists with the sensor or its location, the bypass damper controls with default values. If a "failure" persists, perform the following: 7 On the communicating sensor/bypass control UCM, read the voltage across J3-1 (green wire) and J3-3 (red wise). Voltage should be between 4.50 Vdc and 5.50 Vdc. 2 Read the transducer output voltage across J3-1 (green wire) and J3-2 (black wire). Voltage should be between 0.20 Vdc and 0.45 Vdc. Record the zero flow voltage. 3 Wait approximately 4 minutes after power -up for the system fan to start. Read the transducer output voltage again across J3-1 (green wire) and J3-2 (black wire).The.difference between this voltage and the zero flow voltage should be 0.10Vdc minimum. 4 If a defective transducer is suspected, check the output voltage with a low-pressure source and Magnahelic gauge. Record the zero flow volt- age. Connect a low-pressure source and Magnahelic gauge to the "hi" port of the transducer. Input 1 inch of pressure.The voltage should be approximately 0.750Vdc greater than the zero flow voltage.The reading on the voltmeter will include the zero flow voltage. A CAUTION Do not exceed 2 inches of input pressure to avoid damaging the tranducer. Signal change must be 0.10 Vdc minimum or a "AHU air flow" "failed" message will be displayed Zone, Auxiliary and System Temperature Sensor Checkout If temperature is reported to the UCM or CCP seems wrong use the temperature -resistance table (Table 4) to verify the integrity of the adjustable setpoint potentiometer or the sensor. Measure resistance across the terminals the device is connected to, for details of terminal connections see the Installation and Wiring section of this manual. 48 VAV-SV N 03A-E N Zone, Auxiliary and System Temperature Sensor Checkout Table 4:Temperature Resistance Table Thumbwheel Sensor Temp Resistance Resistance -30 241000 -20 170000 -10 121000 0 88000 10 64000 20 47000 30 35000 40 26000 50 - 20000 55 792 16958 56 772 16541 57 753 16135 58 733 15741 59 714 15358 60 694 14962 61 675 14605 62 656 14257 63 636 13918 64 617 13588 65 597 13266 66 578 12652 67 558 12346 68 539 12347 69 519 12056 70 500 11771 71 481, 11493 72 461 11222 73 442 10957 74 422 10698 75 403 10445 76 383 10197 77 364 9695 78 344 9718 79 325 9487 80 306 9260 81 286 9038 82 267 8821 83 247 8608 84 228 8399 85 208 8195 90 - 7300 100 5800 120 3800 130 3000 140 2500 150 2000 175 1300 200 837 VAV-SVN03A-EN 49 Tests andTroubleshooting . 50 UCM Local Heat Checkout Turn the adjustable zone sensor to full heating, or adjust the temperature setpoints at the CCP. IMPORTANT Model DCEA local heat outputs are disabled in the heating control action. Model DCWA local heat outputs are enabled in the heating or cooling control action. To check the local heat outputs: • Disconnect any connections to Terminals J8, J9, J10; or J11, • Place a 500 to 1000 ohm resistor between Terminals common (A) and the terminals 09, J10, or J11) tested.This simulates a load condition across the triacs within the circuit board. • Measure the voltage between J8 (common) and the appropriate output 09, J10, and J11). When the heat is off, the voltage will measure between 0 and 1.5Vac. When heat is on, voltage should read 24Vac. Central Control Panel Input/Output Test Binary InputTests With the system in the occupied mode: • Jump the priority shutdown input (T62-5 andTB2-6) with a wire.The system goes into priority shutdown. • Remove the jumper on the priority shutdown input. Normal system operation is restored. • Jump the uncc input with a wire (T62-6 andTB2-7).The system goes into the unoccupied mode. • Remove the jumper wire from the uncc input.The system will go into the occupied mode. Communicating Sensor/Bypass ControlTest The following defines the procedure necessary to test the supply air temperature and static pressure sensor inputs to the communicating sensor/ bypass sensor control: Supply AirTemperature InputTest • Disconnect the supply air temperature sensor from communicating sensor/bypass control terminalsT133-6 andTB3-7 • System goes into priority shutdown. • Disconnect the static sensor from J3. • System displays static pressure failure. • Input a resistance value between 9.4K and 10.51K across terminalsT133-6 andTB3-7 System returns to normal operation. VAV-SV NO3A-E N _ '-'----- -----' --_-----— '----'-— - ---1 | . . TR`=ME Static Pressure Sensor Input Test � ' Static Pressure Sensor UnputlNns8 ' . ' |norder toperform this test ovoltage between O.25Vdcand O.7Vdcmust bo , ` present atJ3pins 2and 3,Thiovoltage iofrom the pressure transducer in the communicating sensor/bypass control. If system pressure is insufficient . ' ` tocreate atleast .25Vdoapply pressure tothe transducer with an alternate ` pressure source. ���� �� � / ��w~u�m�"wm~~.� Do not over pressurize the transducer. The maximum pressure signal ' should not exceed 2 inchmmHo0' � � When the voltage is between 0.25 Vdc and 0.7 Vdc the static pressure failure ' clears. i -^ mw_��vn-_'v�w^�'«_��-un� -~ ' . �" The relay board binary outputs nnaybernenun||yoortvoUedfn/rnehherthe ope,atordio�|ayorthaPCooftvvaoo� ` ' | Great care nnumtbetaken vvhonnnanua||yoontnoUingthese va|oyo.Thenour� ` NOminimum on -off timers nrsafe guards ineffect during test mode. See the CCPoperator guide for complete description ofthe binary output test. ' �� »��WAR/_NNG �- This test can energize iaexhefan and both stages m�heating and cooling at ~_ the rooftop unit. Before mxar�ng xhiwxemx make sure that all persons, tools, \_~ ' axc' are clear. SystemTroubleshooting | | ^ Contact yourTranorepresentative for problems that cannot beresolved ! ` using these guidelines. �. VAV-SVNO3A-EN 51 ' ' f 52 VAV-SVN03A-EN s Overview What is. Delivered VAV? Delivered VAV is a small tonnage VAV system made up of threeTrane prod- uct families. It is the combination of: s • Voyager Commercial 27 1/2 to 50 tonVAV Packaged Rooftop Unit' • Up to 32 VariTrane VAV boxes with DDC Controls • VariTrac Central Control Panel with Operator Display Delivered VAV will only work with this combination ofTrane products. It will e not support any other types of equipment. The Voyager Commercial 271/2 to 50 ton rooftop unit must be a VAV model with factory installed inlet guide vanes or variable frequency drive, micro- ' - processor controls, and Trane Communications Interface. Delivered VAV will support up to 32 VariTrane VAV boxes with the DDC I controls option. They may be single duct ,boxes or fan powered boxes, and may have a factory installed local heat option if desired. The heart of the system is the VariTrac Central Control Panel with Operator Display. The CCP acts as the communications hub of the system. It is i - responsible for coordinating the actions of the VAV rooftop and the actions i of the VAV boxes with each other to meet the comfort requirements of the zones. i As in any other application, the Voyager Commercial VAV unit runs the supply fan at full constant volume whenever it goes into the heating mode, with all the VAV boxes commanded to maximum flow. For this reason the unit heat is only used for the Morning Warm-up and Daytime Warm-up j modes available on the Voyager Commercial unit. In both of these modes g the VAV boxes are commanded to maximum flow. If individual zone heat- ing is required during normal daytime operation, a local heat source must S be provided at the box. What Delivered VAV is Not Delivered VAV is not changeover -bypass VAV. It is a true pressure indepen- dent VAV system. The fact that we utilize the VariTrac Central Control Panel i as the heart of the system does not make it a VariTrac system. There is no bypass damper in this system. Additionally, Delivered VAV will only work with the combination of the Voyager Commercial VAV unit, VariTrane VAV boxes with DDC controls, and the VariTrac CCP with Operator Display. It will not support any other types of equipment. j VAV-SVN03A-EN 53 a T E" Delivered VAV System 4 e C Figure 24: Delivered VAV System Configuration i N 3 E E 0 U N O J a c O U N VAV-SVN03A-EN e� ® ANEO Central Control Panel 9 Central Control Panel - The VariTrac Central Control Panel is the central source of communications and decision making between the individual zones and the air conditioning unit. Connections to the CCP are: • 24 Vac'power, • binary inputs for an occupied/unoccupied signal and external priority shutdown signal (optional) • ICS communication bus to the building automation system (optional) • UCM communication bus to the VAV boxes andTrane Voyager commercial 271h - 50 ton VAV rooftop unit Unit Control Module (UCM) A unit control module is mounted to each individual VAV terminal unit. Inputs and outputs consist of the twisted shielded pair communication link, zone temperature sensor, optional CO2 and occupancysensors, 24Vac power, damper motor control, and local: heat outputs. Local heat may be duct or space mounted, and can be staged electric pulse -width modulating electric, and modulating or staged two -position hot water. VariTrane VAVTermninal Units ° The function of the VariTrane terminal unit in a VAV control zone is to vary the volumetric airflow rate to the zone. VariTrane units are supplied with microprocessor -based DDC controls. Factory -installed controls are required with all types of terminal units. f VariTrane VAVTermninal Unit Types Single Duct Single duct terminal units control the volumetric flow of supply air to the space to maintain the zone temperature at setpoint.These units are gener ally applied in cooling -only VAV zones that require no heat during occupied hours. Iflocal `zone heat is necessary, it can be provided either remotely (for 3 example, perimeter heat) or by terminal reheat (either electric or hot water coils). i Parallel Fan -Powered i Parallel fan -powered units are commonly used in VAV zones that require some degree of heat during occupied hours when the primary supply air is cool.The terminal unit fan is in parallel with the central unit fan; no primary air from the central fan passes through the terminal unit fan.The terminal { unit fan draws air from the space return plenum. Series Fan -Powered Series fan -powered terminal units are used commonly in VAV zones that not only require heat during occupied hours, but also desire constant air vol- ume delivery.The terminal unit fan is in series with the central fan. Primary air from the central fan always passes through the terminal unit fan. VAV-SVN03A-EN 55 i r Delivered VAV System 4 I The local series fan within the terminal unit operates whenever the unit is in the occupied mode.The volume of air delivered to the VAV zone is constant, but the temperature of the delivered air varies. As the zone requires less cooling, the primary air damper closes. As the primary air damper closes, the air mixture supplied to the zone contains less cool air and more warm plenum air. Remote heat or terminal reheat can provide additional local heating. Auxiliary Temperature Sensor The auxiliary temperature sensor allows the operator to monitor air tem- perature leaving a reheat device or measure duct temperature for automatic operation of a standalone UCM. Zone Temperature Sensors Five zone temperature sensor configurations are available: • sensor only • sensor with adjustable setpoint and communications jack • sensor with night setback override button, cancel button, and communica- tions jack • sensor with adjustable setpoint, night setback override button, cancel button, and communications jack • sensor with digital display, adjustable setpoint, night setpoint override button, cancel button, and communications jack CO2 Sensor A CO2 sensor may be connected to the UCM damper control to. sense CO2 levels in the space.This signal is communicated to the CCP for demand ventilation calculation and control. Occupancy Sensor A normally open occupancy sensor contact may be connected to the UCM damper control binary input to indicate zone occupancy. Operator Display A'/a VGA monochrome LCD touch screen display is installed on the CCP.This display provides setup, diagnostic, and seven-day scheduling functions to the system. 56 VAV-SVN03A-EN _.J r. rRAME" I Getting Started Familiarize yourself with the system components and preview the installa- tion procedures before installing and configuring the Delivered VAV system. Installation and configuring procedures appear in suggested order of. performance: Installing the Central Control Panel Refer to the following installation procedures for the CCP in this manual • Unpacking and inspecting the components • Wiring AC power • Binary input wiring NOTE: Ignore the sections referring to Installation of the CCP Relay Board and Binary Output Wiring. Those sections do not apply to this system. Install VariTrane VAV Terminal Units Refer to the appropriate installation instructions shipped with the VariTrane air terminal devices for proper installation: Connect UCM Wiring Refer to Connect UCM Wiring in this manual, and the appropriate installa- tion instructions shipped with the VariTrane air terminal devices. Set UCM DIP Switches Refer to Set UCM DIP Switches andTable 2 in this manual, and the appropri- ate installation instructions shipped with the VariTrane air terminal devices. Installing ZoneTemperature Sensors Refer to Installing ZoneTemperature Sensors in this manual. Communications Link Wiring TheVariTrac Central Control Panel communication link (T132-10, 11, and 12) connects the CCP, VAV UCMs, and Voyager VAV rooftop unit. Field wiring for the communication link must meet the following requirements: • All wiring must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes. • Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22 AWG twisted, shielded pair wire (meets or exceedsTrane specifications. See wiring specifications sections in this manual for further information). • The maximum total wire length is 3,500 feet for the communication link. VAV-SVN03A-EN 57 77 r E® Getting Started At the VariTrac Central Control Panel, the communication link wires must be connected toTerminalsTB2-10 (+) andTB2-11 (—). Refer to Figure 26.This connection is polarity sensitive. E IMPORTANT i Connections between lengths of link wiring should be soldered and taped. Wire nuts are not acceptable. ®CAUTION Connecting the communication link with reversed polarity will lead to system malfunction and possible equipment damage. The shield on the communication link wiring must be connected toTB2-12. The shield wire should be spliced with the shield from the next section of communication link wiring at every junction.Tape each splice to prevent any contact between the shield and ground.The shield should be cut and taped back at the end of the link. Communication link wiring cannot pass between buildings. IMPORTANT Improper communication link shield connections will lead to system malfunction. IMPORTANT Improper communication link routing will lead to system malfunction. Connect UCMs on the communication link in a daisy -chain configuration. With this configuration, it is easier to solve communication problems by isolating portions of the communication link. See Figure 25 for an example of a daisy -chain configuration. 58 VAV-SVN03A-EN a TRANS' VAV Terminal Unit VAV Terminal Unit VAV Terminal Unit Each Voyager VAV Rooftop requires aTrane communications interface JCO board for connection to the VariTrac Central Control Panel communication link. Refer to theTCl installation manual for more information on connecting a rooftop to the communication link. VAV-SVN03A-EN 59 Figure 26: UCM Communication Link Wiring m ». f0 ..d m '- t0 C w3 ' +Pn I,� •' 3 w , E x A I L U 0 O N U N N a O • O a C c OU O _O -E Y j N C, C 0 m O C. O -O U O p 0 N C- ; OC m M CT d Y N OQ 'N O Q a y N � N O c O .v �a Z-0 0 U 0Eo� U �0- rnN Q 3 e ° o N ZF-Z U 3 N'. 0 1.0 N U ca ? N Q 0 H Q N LL d � J � a 60 I VAV-SVN03A-EN i I. Voyager Communication Link Wiring I ,- Figure 27: Voyager Communication Link Wiring VariTrac Communications 0 0AR ®® eILT Interface (Comm4) TES F J6 w N Comm Termination Details for Voyager RTU ....................................... m Voyager (UPC) J2 TRANE ROOFTOP UNIT Unit Control Panel r, N Li i TRANE COMMUNICATION INTERFACE g - LOCATED BOTTOM CENTER Or - - - - RTU CONTROL PANEL KZPTEP i�K J7 N I TBZ e e 9 6 781 V .. ......... ...... ... ........: ...•1................ r ........ I .. —ICF, VIM �►'.a, i i - (TCI-V) CONO FAN Nul. t TAK SwELDS II�xnTII - HEAT 2 arZZZhp . (1) TV (1) T� SYS ® O ® B J901 �J Figure Notes TO CWMAI - DEVICES 1 All dip switches off. 2 Comm board to non -isolated Comm3 or Comm4 option. VAV-SVN03A-EN 61 Ii T E• Installation Checklist Complete this checklist as the VariTrac Central Control Panel is installed to verify that all recommended procedures are performed.This checklist does not replace the detailed instructions provided in the manual. Read the entire manual carefully to become familiar with the installation procedures before installing the unit. Shipment B ❑ InspectVariTrac Central Control Panel for shipping damage. File claim if necessary. ❑ Inspect VAV terminal units and accessories for shipping damage. File 6 claim if necessary. ` Unit Location F ❑ Install VariTrac Central Control Panel in environment that meets tempera- ture and humidity requirements. ❑ Securely mount VariTrac Central Control Panel on wall at an accessible location with proper clearances. I' AC Power Wiring ❑ Field installed AC power wiring complies with all applicable codes. a ❑ 24Vac line from dedicated Class 2 transformer connected toVariTrac '. Central Control Panel atTB2. ❑ Voltage measured atTB2-1 toTB2-2 is 20 to 30 Vac. ❑ Assure that a reliable earth ground has been attached toTB2-3. Input Wiring ❑ Field installed input wiring complies with all applicable codes. ❑ Optional time clock and priority shutdown inputs terminated atTB2-6 throughT132-9 per instructions. VariTrane Terminal Units ❑ Air terminal units mounted and secure according to recommendations. ZoneTemperature Sensors ❑ Sensors are properly mounted and wired per instructions and in the correct space. UCM Wiring ❑ UCM power is properly wired toTB1-1 andTB1-2. NOTE: TB1-2 is COMMON (case ground) if grounded secondary transformers are being used. Confirm polarity from one UCM to the next if more than one UCM is being powered from a single transformer. VAV-SVN03A-EN 63 E• Installation Checklist ❑ Confirm voltage present between 20 Vac and 28 Vac.. ❑ Ensure that the sensor is properly terminated. ❑ If optional local heat is being used, confirm wiring per appropriate diagram. Communication Link Wiring i ❑ field installed communications wiring complies with all applicable codes. ❑ VariTrac Central Control Panel communication link wiring to VAV UCMs and Voyager VAV rooftop unit is connected atTB2-10,TB2-11, andTB2-12 on the CCP. ❑ Communication link wiring is properly terminated at each zone damper UCM on terminalsTB2-1 throughTB2-6. Ensure that polarity (+ -) has been maintained through the link. ❑ Communication link wire shields spliced at each device junction and taped to prevent contact with earth ground. Completing Central Control Panel Assembly. Mount Main Module Refer to Mount Main Module instructions in this manual. Install Operator Display Refer to Install Operator Display instructions in this manual. The Operator Display is required for the Delivered VAV system to function. Connecting Modem Devices Refer to Connecting Modem Devices instructions in this manual VAV-SV NO3A-E N TAMWEO Literature Order Number VAV-SVN03A-EN File Number SV-AH-VAV-000-SVN03A-EN-0602 Supersedes VADA-IN-2 Trane An American Standard Company Stocking Location La Crosse I www.trane.com For more information contact Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change your local district office or design and specifications without notice. Only qualified technicians should perform the installation and e-mail us at comfort@trane.com servicing ofequipment referred to in this publication. June 2004 i MM 0 2004 American Standard, Inc. All rights reserved VAV-PRC003-EN Contents Introduction.............................................................. 4 ComfortMade Simple.................................................................4 The Changeover Bypass VAV Comfort Advantage ....................... 4 VariTrac Product Enhancements.................................................. 4 Features and Benefits ........................................... 5-12 Overview..................................................................................... 6 Central Control Panel...................................................................7 Optional Operator Display...........................................................7 Communicating Bypass Controller .............................................. 8 Tracker System Integration.......................................................... 8 VariTrac Bypass Dampers............................................................9 VariTrac Zone Dampers............................................................. 10 Unit Control Module.................................................................. 10 ZoneSensors.......................................................................11-12 Application Considerations ................................. 13-24 Introduction............................................................................... 13 Zoning Considerations...............................................................13 Effective Changeover Bypass VAV System Design ................. 14-19 Pressure Dependent vs. Pressure Independent ........................... 20 Local Reheat Capabilities Using VariTrane VAV Units ............ 20-21 Bypass Damper Operation......................................................... 22 Building Pressure Control........................................................... 23 Application Tip Summary ........................................................... 24 Selection Procedures .......................................... 25-29 VariTrac Dampers................................................................ 25-26 Model Number Description....................................................... 27 Service Model Numbers............................................................ 28 Typical Bill of Materials............................................................. 29 Electrical Data and Connections .......................... 30-35 Specifications.................................................... 36-39 Acoustics.......................................................... 40-41 TM ® The following are trademarks or Dimensions and Weights ..................................... 42-47 registered trademarks of their respective companies: Precedent, ReliaTel, Trace, Tracker, Glossary ............................................................ 48-49 VariTrac, VariTrane, Voyager. VAV-PRC003-EN 3 TRANE" Comfort Made Simple Trane has a long history of innovative leadership in variable air volume (VAV) technology. Trane introduced the: • first fan -powered VAV unit • first factory -commissioned DDC controller • first preprogrammed VAV controller designed specifically for VAV applications Trane is now the leading manufacturer of VAV terminal units and VAV-related products in the world. The introduction of VariTracTM in 1989 brought VAV controls expertise into the changeover bypass zoning market. Trane is committed to continuous product improvement and now introduces a new generation of VariTrac controls. This latest generation retains the functionality of the original VariTrac system with exciting new enhancements, utilizing the best of today's technology. Figure 1. The VariTrac CCP maximizes system efficiency and reliability by coordinating the components of the changeover -bypass system Introduction The Changeover Bypass VAV Comfort Advantage Packaged unitary systems offer a popular and cost-effective method of supplying conditioned air to light commercial buildings. These systems commonly have a constant -volume fan with a fixed outside air damper and a single thermostat. While a constant volume system may meet the overall thermal requirements of the space, only a single thermostat is available. This system may be insufficient in multiple - space applications with independent thermal load requirements. Changeover bypass systems use the practicality and cost effectiveness of constant volume unitary components like packaged rooftop units, split systems, or water -source heat pumps, and simply add dampers and a central control panel to coordinate the components. This allows up to 24 individual sensors (thermostats) for independent temperature control. Figure 2. The VariTrac CCP with optional touch -screen interface simplifies system operation with intuitive icon -driven design VariTrac Product Enhancements Selected enhancements of the new VariTrac product are listed below. • A new central control panel (CCP) with improved system temperature and pressure control functions • An optional touch -screen operator display for the CCP with built-in time clock for easier system setup and control • A communicating bypass controller allows duct pressure and duct temperature to communicate to the system via a twisted shielded wire pair, thus eliminating costly "home -run" wiring • The next generation UCM zone controller allows CO2 and occupancy sensor inputs • A digital display zone sensor for simplified occupant control Advanced Control Options Some of the VariTrac intelligent system control features are listed below. • CID Z based demand control ventilation resets the position of the HVAC unit ventilation air damper when zone CO2 levels rise • Zone -based HVAC unit control operates heating and cooling only when zone demand exists • Discharge air control to avoid extreme supply air conditions and maximize equipment life and occupant comfort • A simplified system -balancing process is available via PC software or the touch -screen interface • Global zone temperature setpoint limits simplify startup, commissioning, and operator control VAV-PRC003-EN Features and Benefits Figure 3. VariTrac changeover -bypass VAV system components VanTrac Central Control Panel (CCP) The CCP is the system level controller which coordinates and monitors VariTrac system operation, including HVAC system supply pressure and airflow, heating/cooling mode, supply air temperature, all zone temperatures and setpoints, fan mode, economizer position (when paired with CO2 demand controlled ventilation), time -of -day scheduling, zone grouping logic, system override mode (after hours operation), and much more. HVAC Unit Rooftop VariTrac changeover bypass systems operate with Trane and non-Trane products, including split systems, packaged rooftop units, and water -source heat pumps. These a° systems are generically referred to as HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning) Split System units. When combined with a Trane packaged rooftop with ReliaTelTM controller, F` wiring, installation, and system startup efficiency is maximized by connecting with a simple twisted shielded wire pair. , WSHP 3(AV-PRC003-EN VariTrac Central Control ._.._� screen 4 Bypass Damper w/ Wire and Quick Connect A round or rectangular damper ducted between the HVAC supply and return ducts. It p is easily connected via a "quick -connector" which provides quick and consistent field wiring. The bypass damper is modulated by the CCP to maintain required system static pressure. Communicating Bypass Controller �.; A single enclosure with duct temperature sensor, static pressure sensor, and communicating �. , controller (UCM) which easily mounts on the supply ductwork. The UCM provides power to drive the bypass damper actuator. f, Zone Sensor Zone sensors (sometimes referred to as thermostats) measure space temperature and report it to the zone damper controller (UCM). Five models are available to satisfy varied aesthetic and application preferences. Overview Changeover -bypass VAV is a comfort system developed for light commercial applications. A changeover -bypass VAV system responds to changing cooling or heating requirements by varying the quantity or volume of air delivered to each zone. Each zone has a thermostat for individual comfort control. An HVAC unit delivers a constant volume of air to the system. As the volume of air required by the zone changes, excess supply air is directed to the return duct via a bypass duct and damper. (See Figure 3 for typical system components.) A changeover -bypass VAV system combines the comfort benefits of VAV with the cost effectiveness and simplicity of packaged, constant - volume unitary equipment. Features and Benefits How the System Works A changeover -bypass VAV system commonly consists of an HVAC unit with a constant -volume supply fan, and direct -expansion (DX) cooling. This combined system has the ability to "change" to the heating mode or cooling mode, depending on individual zone comfort requirements. A heating coil or a gas -fired heater and an outside air damper are possible options. A temperature sensor in each zone communicates information to an electronic controller on the VAV terminal unit. The controller then modulates the zone damper open or closed, supplying heating or cooling air to the zone. The HVAC unit delivers a constant volume of supply air to the system. In order to maintain duct static pressure, a bypass duct and damper are required to bypass (detour) air not required in the zones. The VAV terminal unit controller communicates zone temperature information to a central control panel (CCP). The CCP also gathers information from the system, including duct static pressure and supply -air temperature. The CCP determines zone heating or cooling needs using voting (or polling) logic, then requests heating or cooling from the HVAC unit. The CCP directs the HVAC unit to provide ventilation air to high -occupancy areas (demand control ventilation) or free - cooling when the outside air temperature falls below the temperature setpoint (economizer control). Auto Changeover "Auto changeover" refers to the ability of the system to automatically change between the heating and cooling modes. In a changeover -bypass VAV system, the CCP determines whether the HVAC unit should heat or cool by polling the temperature of the individual zones. It then compares the zone temperatures to the space temperature setpoints. If the supply air does not meet the criteria for the heat or cool mode called for, the CCP sends a signal to the HVAC unit to change the system to the opposite mode. VAV-P R C003-E N Central Control Panel The VariTrac central control panel (CCP) serves as the central source of communications and decisionmaking between the individual zones and the HVAC unit. The CCP determines system heating and cooling modes and coordinates the system supply air temperature and static pressure to satisfy building thermal load conditions. Inputs to the CCP include 24VAC power and communication wiring to the zone dampers and bypass control. Binary inputs consist of priority shutdown and occupied/unoccupied modes. Heating, cooling, and the HVAC unit fan on split systems and non-Trane HVAC units can be controlled through binary outputs on an accessory relay board. If a Trane rooftop air conditioner with factory -installed electronic controls is used, the CCP can control heating, cooling, and the fan with a two - wire communication link tied to an interface board mounted in the rooftop. It can also display status information from the electronic controller in the rooftop. (See Figure 4.) Figure 4. A screen representation from the central control panel illustrating system status 17 I 3' System Name: Sales Department writ Operatirg bode: Occupied Operating Status: Cool Supply Air Temperature: 77.6 •F d; PI Bypass Positron SO % Supply Fan on Fan Static Pressure Fan Static Pressure Se4x* t: 1150 in w.g. I Pace 2 of 5 } �� (W )l W l ®® OO Features and Benefits Figure 5. VariTrac central control panel CCP Feature Summary • Communicates with up to 24 VAV unit control modules (UCMs) • Makes optimal heating and cooling decisions based on setpoint and temperature information received from individual zones • Automatically calibrates all dampers, significantly reducing labor-intensive and costly field calibration • Windows -based PC software simplifies setup and control • Provides diagnostic information for all system components via the operator display or PC software • Provides status and diagnostic information for Trane HVAC units equipped with Trane ReliaTel or UCP electronic controls Figure 6. VariTrac central control panel with optional operator display Optional Operator Display The optional operator display is a backlit, liquid crystal display with touch - screen programming capability. The operator can access system and zone status through the display and perform basic setup of zone VAV UCMs and CCP system operating parameters. The display allows an installer to commission a VariTrac system without using a PC. The operator display has a seven-day time clock for stand-alone scheduling capability. Operator Display Feature Summary • Backlit LCD touch -screen display for easy operator interface • Combination of icon- and menu -based navigation provides intuitive operation • Provides a level of control for the daily operator, and a second level for commissioning and service • Three levels of security are available to protect system settings • Seven-day time clock for stand-alone, time -of -day scheduling VAV-PRC003-EN 7 Communicating Bypass Controller The communicating bypass controller is a single control enclosure with the following integrated devices included: • integrated UCM board • static pressure sensor • discharge air temperature sensor The communicating bypass controller directly controls the bypass damper and communicates duct conditions to the central control panel via a simple twisted shielded wire pair. Quick Connect Minimizes field wiring labor and assures wiring consistency Duct Temperature Sensor The supply air temperature sensor allows the CCP to control heating and cooling stages to maintain the supply air temperature. Supply air temperature setpoints can be edited through the operator display or PC software. Static Pressure Sensor Features and Benefits Tracker System Integration The VariTrac system can be fully integrated with the new family of Tracker building controls. A Tracker building management system can manage multiple VariTrac systems from a single control point. Tracker System Summary • Controls up to 10 VariTrac systems from a single Tracker panel for easy building operation • LCD touch -screen operator display or Tracker PC software interface provides single -point building management by a local operator Figure 8. Tracker System Architecture The static pressure sensor measures t duct static pressure and positions the bypass damper(s) to maintain the static Pressure set ointCIV. Figure 7. Communicating bypass controller side view and 3-D view Duct Temperature /Sensor O Static Pressure Sensor g �P • 365-day scheduling function and the flexibility of up to 10 schedules • Assign all systems to a single schedule, if desired, for simplified schedule changes • Exception scheduling feature for easy management of vacations and holidays • Automatically adjusts for daylight savings time and leap year • Remote communications capability via modem for system programming and control i Up to 24 VariTrac or VariTrane Dampers VAV-PRC003-EN VariTrac Bypass Dampers Bypass dampers are non - communicating VariTrac dampers and include an integrated fully -modulating 24 VAC electric actuator. Field wiring errors are reduced with a quick -connect harness that plugs into the communicating bypass controller. Dampers are nominally rated up to 1800-2400 fpm at 1.75" of static pressure, depending on size. For damper performance information, see Table 2. 1 Features and Benefits Round Bypass Damper Summary • Round bypass dampers are available with inlet diameters 6, 8,10, or 12 inches • Heavy gage galvanized steel cylinder with rolled bend for high structural integrity and corrosive resistance • Metal -to -metal blade seal provides tight shutoff for low leakage • Aerodynamic blade design provides a constant torque for stable operation at high velocity • Factory -installed, direct -coupled, fully - modulating 24 VAC actuator • Rated up to 2400 fpm at 1.75" of static pressure Rectangular Bypass Damper Summary • Rectangular bypass dampers are available in sizes 14 x 12,16 x 16, 20 x 20, and 30 x 20 inches • Formed heavy gage galvanized steel frame, mechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel • Air linkage is minimized with an opposed blade design with stainless steel side seals • Damper casing is 16 inches long and constructed of heavy gage galvanized sheet metal with Scleats on the inlet and outlet for easy installation • Blades are six-inch nominal width, heavy gage galvanized steel • A blade rotation stop feature prevents over -rotation of the blades in the fully open position • Factory -installed, direct -coupled, fully - modulating 24 VAC actuator • Rated up to 3000 fpm at 2" of static pressure , i VAV-PRC003-EN 9 VariTrac Zone Dampers VariTrac zone dampers are fully modulating, pressure -dependent VAV devices. The dampers control zone temperature by varying the volume of air flowing into a space. Each VariTrac damper has a control box with a VAV control board and actuator enclosed. The dampers are designed to operate in static pressures up to 1.75 in. wg. Round Zone Damper • Round dampers are available in 6, 8,10, 12,14, and 16 inch diameters • Heavy gage galvanized steel cylinder with rolled bend for high structural integrity and corrosive resistance • Metal -to -metal seal provides tight shutoff • 90' blade rotation for a wide control range and stable operation • Aerodynamic blade design provides constant torque for stable operation at high velocity • Rated up to 2000 fpm at 1.75" of static pressure Rectangular Zone Damper • Rectangular dampers are available in sizes 8 x 12,8 x 14,8 x 16,10 x 16, 10 x 20, and 14 x 18 inches • Heavy gage G90"galvanized steel frame assembled by a mechanical joining process • Single -ply, heavy gage G90 galvanized steel blades • Linkage has high impact ABS gears, and is 3" nominal diameter • Factory -installed 24 VAC direct -coupled actuator • Rated up to 2400 fpm at 2" of static pressure Figure 9. VariTrac rectangular and round zone dampers with UCMs Unit Control Module A unit control module (UCM) is the individual zone controller for the VariTrac air damper and is mounted on each zone damper. The unit controller continually monitors the zone temperature to maintain space temperature. The UCM varies the damper position as needed to meet zone setpoints and communicates current space requirements and system operating modes to the CCP. The UCM can also control local heat. Local heat may be duct- or space - mounted, and can be staged electric, pulse -width modulating electric, and modulating or two -position staged hot water. 10 VAV-P R C003-E N 1 \' i Zone Sensors Figure 10. DDC zone sensors DDC Zone Sensor The direct digital control (DDC) zone sensor is an uncomplicated, reliable electro-mechanical room sensor. No programming is required and most sensors contain an internal communications jack. Models are available with combinations of features such as override (on -cancel) buttons and space -mounted setpoint. Four sensor variations are available: • Sensor only (no communications jack) • Sensor with override buttons • Sensor with temperature setpoint only • Sensor with temperature setpoint and override buttons Features and Benefits �a, Q Figure 11. DDC zone sensor with LCD DDC Zone Sensor with LCD The DDC zone sensor with LCD (liquid crystal display or digital) is compatible with VariTrane VAV and VariTrac controllers. Digital Zone Sensor Summary • Displays setpoint adjustment and space temperature in °F or °C • Simple, two -button control of space setpoint • Setpoint control and room temperature display can be optionally disabled • Includes button for timed override and a cancel feature for after-hours system operation • An easily accessible communications jack is provided for Trane portable edit terminal devices • Nonvolatile memory stores last programmed setpoints • For field balancing, maximum and minimum airflow or position can be overridden from the sensor VAV-PRC003-EN m Figure 12. Wall -mounted CO2 sensor Figure 13. Duct -mounted CO2 sensor CO2 Sensor Wall- and duct -mounted carbon dioxide (CO2) sensors are designed for demand -controlled ventilation zone applications. The sensor is compatible with VariTrane VAV and VarTrac controllers. The Trane CO2 sensors measure carbon dioxide in parts -per - million (ppm) in occupied building spaces. Carbon dioxide measurements are used to identify under -ventilated building zones. Outdoor airflow increases beyond design ventilation rates if the CO2 exceeds specified levels. CO, Zone Sensor Summary • Use with the UCM CO2 input for demand control ventilation • Silicone -based NDIR sensor technology for long-term stability • Measurement range of 2000 ppm CO2 input with an output of 0-10 Vdc • Wall -mount transmitter is compact and aesthetic in appearance • Optional zone return duct -mount transmitter is available Features and Benefits Figure 14. Zone occupancy sensor Zone Occupancy Sensor The energy -saving zone occupancy sensor is ideal for zones having intermittent use during the occupied mode. The sensor sends a signal to the VAV controller upon detection of movement in the coverage area. The VAV system then changes the zone from occupied standby mode to occupied mode. Occupancy Zone Sensor Summary • Compatible with VariTrane VAV and VariTrac controllers • Used with zone damper UCM for controlling the occupied standby function • Ceiling -mount PIR occupancy sensor detects motion over an adjustable range up to 360 degrees • Single detector covers up to 1200 square feet. For areas larger than 1200 square feet, multiple sensors can be wired in parallel • Adjustable time delay avoids nuisance change of state on loss of detection • Adjustable sensitivity • SPDT isolated contacts connect to UCM input Figure 15. Auxiliary temperature sensor Auxiliary Temperature Sensor The auxiliary temperature sensor is used with any UCM damper control. The sensor allows the operator to monitor duct temperature or air temperature leaving a reheat device at the zone damper. This sensor is used for automatic changeover of a UCM damper when not using a CCP. The auxiliary temperature sensor is ideal for remote monitoring and diagnostics from the CCP operator display. Auxiliary Temperature Sensor Summary • Thermistor sensing element 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F • Wiring connection 8 feet,18 awg • Sleeving for wire leads is acrylic #5 awg grade C rated @ 155C 12 VAV-PRC003-EN Introduction The VariTrac system is a changeover - bypass VAV system. One fan supplies either warm air for heating or cool air for cooling. It is typically applied in small buildings which use unitary heating/cooling air conditioners. These buildings need the simplicity and low cost of unitary equipment, but more than one comfort control zone (one zone temperature sensor) for each air conditioner. When is VariTrac a good HVAC system choice? To help answer this question, several important application concepts and considerations are discussed below. Figure 16. System design affects occupancy comfort Least Single Zone Building One thermal and one comfort zone K a d U. r 0 E Thermal Zoned Building 0 U Multiple thermal zones each with one rn comfort zone c Cn T Thermal and d w Comfort Zoned Building Multiple thermal zones each with multiple Most comfort zones Application I. a. � �^ Zoning Considerations Consider the following two questions when evaluating your HVAC system design: Will the building occupants be comfortable? A system designed with a single -zone HVAC unit and one zone sensor provides comfort to occupants near the zone sensor. However, occupants in perimeter areas or interior rooms may be too hot or too cold. Will comfort be consistent from room to room and area by area? A building is normally divided into thermal zones for increased comfort control and energy savings. Each thermal zone should have a dedicated HVAC unit. For optimum comfort, each thermal zone should be further divided into comfort zones. Choosing the number and location of thermal and comfort zones is critical in planning an effective system. Some things to consider in the design process include: • Geographic location • Orientation of the building to the sun • Prevailing winds • Wall construction (glass, insulation, building materials) • Building layout, design, occupancy and occupancy pattern throughout the day and year • Activities in each zone Zoned unitary systems, such as changeover -bypass VAV, divide thermal zones into smaller comfort zones. Each comfort zone has a damper and zone sensor that controls the amount of heated or cooled air delivered to the zone. A central system controller monitors the status of each zone damper and zone sensor. The controller then makes the decision to heat or cool for the HVAC unit. Individual comfort zones served by a common HVAC unit (part of the same thermal zone) can require heating and cooling at the same time. In a changeover -bypass VAV system, the unit alternately provides warm and cool air in an attempt to satisfy the needs of all comfort zones. This is effective if the simultaneous calls for heating and cooling exist for short time periods only. Wide temperature variations may occur if some comfort zones need heating for extended periods of time while others need cooling. Some comfort zones require special consideration because of their use or location. An example is the foyer or reception area of an office building. These areas often have wide variations in thermal load because of glass (relative to other areas of the building) and frequently -opened exterior doors. Another example is an interior storage room with the need for ventilation but little or no heating or cooling. These zones can significantly influence efficient operation and comfort levels throughout the building. Preferably, areas such as these are designed as separate thermal zones with dedicated HVAC units. However, this may be impractical or costly. Instead, use fan -powered variable - volume terminal units, or units with local reheat. VAV-PR C003-E N 13 T/P/WE' Figure 17. Design process steps Step 1. Define Occupant Comfort Needs Involves architect, engineer(s), and building owner Step 2. Define Thermal Zones Involves engineers and contractors Step 3. Determine Comfort Zones Involves engineers, contractors, and building owner Step 4. Size Heating/ Cooling Equipment Involves engineer(s) and contractors Step 5. Size Zone and Bypass Damper Units Involves engineer(s) and contractors Step 6. Design the Duct system Involves engineer(s) and contractors Step 7. Air Diffuser Selection and Placement Involves engineer(s) and contractors Application Effective Changeover Bypass VAV System Design Unitary zoning systems feature low first cost and quick, easy system design and equipment selection. The system is simple, but it is essential that key elements are considered during the design process. This section offers a system design sequence and discusses application considerations that, when followed, help avoid system control and operational instabilities. Suggested design steps for unitary zoning systems are summarized in Figure 17. Step 1. Define occupant comfort needs The design process begins by considering the needs of building occupants and intended building use. • What is the intended use of the building? Is the building usage primarily office space? Is there a manufacturing operation? Are there areas that have special requirements such as computer or electronic rooms, video/television production, training facilities, etc.? • What physical activity level is expected of the occupants? Seated occupants require different indoor temperatures for comfort than continuously moving occupants. An example may be a building with a mix of office space and light assembly or manufacturing. • Where will the occupants be located and at what times? Pay particular attention to areas with intermittent use, such as conference, training, and lunchrooms. • How are the occupants expected to dress? Give consideration to how the building occupants will dress. Will they dress in traditional business attire, such as long-sleeved shirts or blouses, ties, and jackets? Or, will they dress in cooler, casual attire, such as golf shirts, light slacks, skirts, or shorts? Gather as much usage information as possible before designing a system. This can be challenging, particularly when finishing out tenant spaces. However, usage information is crucial to the selection of heating and cooling equipment, building zoning, and duct layout. Several publications provide guidance for properly assessing indoor space comfort. An example is ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers) Standard 55, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy. This standard specifies the combinations of indoor space environments and personal factors (activity and clothing) that will produce thermal environmental conditions acceptable to 80 percent or more of the occupants within a space. Standard 55 addresses temperature, thermal radiation, humidity, and air speed. ASHRAE Standard 62, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, is another source for occupant comfort and safety issues regarding indoor air quality. The standard recommends that relative humidity be maintained between 30 and 60 percent. This maximizes comfort and reduces the potential for microbial growth. Step 2. Define the Thermal Zones A thermal zone is an area with similar load profiles and occupant comfort requirements. A thermal zone can be a single room, an area, a group of rooms or an entire building. Defining the thermal zones within a building is crucial to designing a comfortable indoor environment. Each thermal zone is conditioned by a single heating and/ or cooling unit. The load of the thermal zone determines the size of the heating and cooling unit. 14 VAV-PRC003-EN TRAA/E11 i Cost vs. Comfort First cost can be reduced by limiting the number of thermal zones. Unfortunately, this may impact the thermal flexibility of the system, and result in zone comfort issues. Let's take a closer look at this important system decision known as "thermal zoning." Characteristics of a building which can influence thermal load are: • Orientation of the building (North, South, East, West) • Amount and thermal resistance (R- value) of glass (walls, skylights, etc.) • Expected occupancy within the area • Interior partitions and doors • Varying loads from equipment or processes Let's examine a few building examples and discuss the zoning criteria of each. Application Building Example 1 (See Figure 18.) Consider an existing single -story office building which is small, poorly insulated, with many large windows and few interior partitions. On a clear, cool spring day, the entire building is cool in the morning so heating is required. By afternoon, however, the south side of the building being influenced by the solar load, is warm and requires cooling. The north side remains shaded and continues to require heating. This situation results in a simultaneous requirement for heating and cooling for extended periods. Due to the varying loads throughout the building, controlling the building as a single thermal zone (with a single HVAC unit) cannot satisfy the comfort needs of all areas. It also is not a good candidate for a zoning system because of the simultaneous need for heating and cooling. A similar building with good insulation and fewer shaded windows, on the other hand, may be a good candidate for a single thermal zone with individual comfort zones. The reduction in wall glass reduces the solar effect on the building resulting in all areas of the building having similar load profiles throughout the day. In this case, the building has a single thermal zone and is a good candidate for one HVAC unit. Individual comfort zones (zone dampers) will be needed to assure comfortable conditions throughout the zone. Figure18. Building Example 1 illustrates a small, poorly insulated office on the left, and improved design on the right. Men's Women's Men's Women's Restroom Restroom Restroom Restroom OThermostat O Thermostat t s k7 Poar� Destgn Eytements k� t Improvetl,Deslgrr Elements One thermostat far apace T Thermostat + Mulhplezonethermostats �= Thermostat t 61ass„wigtlows wdh no shadtng � e � ,�' Shaded wtndo�wsy`� 11' • �i'nimal wallnsula4an .r �Irisutated walls= t�`-� per. \Glass windows \ Shaded Insulated with no shading Minimal wall = Windows Walls insulation \ VAV-PRC003-EN 15 TRANE° Building Example 2 (See Figure 19.) Consider a strip mall in the spring or fall with stores that face both east and west. In the morning, the east side of the building gets full sun and warms up while the west side is shaded and requires heating. In the afternoon, the east side of the building may need heat and the west side cooling. Because of the thermal load variation throughout the day, this building will not remain comfortable if designed with a single heating and cooling unit. On the other hand, comfort in this building could be improved by dividing the building into two thermal zones (two HVAC units), one serving the east exposure and the other serving the west. Even with the two systems, individual occupant comfort is not necessarily assured. Interior partitioning, varying schedules and number of occupants within the thermal zone will drive differing amounts of heating and cooling. The issues related to comfort zoning are addressed in the next section. Application Considerations . Outside Doors Coffee 4— Shop Jewelry Store door Design`Etements qne ttiiermos6aY fe engre space a One HVAC unrt Electronics Store Pharmacy Toy Store Clothing Store N 1 Figure 19. Building Example 2 illustrates a poorly insulated store design (above) and an improved design (below) Outside J Jewelry Coffee Doors Store Shop Electronics Store Pharmacy Clothing TOY Store Store N 1 Step 3. Define the Comfort Zones A primary criteria for defining a thermal zone is that it will not require simultaneous heating and cooling. An HVAC unit with one fan is limited to supplying either heating or cooling. Most applications with larger thermal zones however will have varying thermal needs throughout the zone. These small variations can easily be addressed by properly defining comfort zones. A comfort zone is an area within a thermal zone that is controlled by a zone damper. The amount of conditioned (heated or cooled) air entering the space varies. This is in response to a space thermostat. ASHRAE Standard 55 recommends limiting indoor temperature variations. Temperature variations of less than 2°F in 15 minutes or 4°F in an hour. Deviations from this recommendation will cause discomfort in 80 percent of the occupants. Zoning systems can greatly reduce temperature variations caused by shifting occupancy and solar load conditions in large thermal zones. 16 VAV-PR C003-E N Application Step 4. Sizing HVAC Equipment Once the building heating and cooling loads are known and the thermal zones have been determined, the heating and cooling equipment can be selected. Each thermal zone requires a separate heating and cooling unit. As discussed earlier, unitary zoning systems typically use packaged DX rooftop units or DX split systems. These systems are offered as heating and cooling units or heat pumps. When selecting the heating and cooling unit for a thermal zone, load diversity within the zone should be considered to minimize equipment size and therefore reduce system first cost and operating expense. Load diversity is defined as the ratio of the instantaneous peak loads (block load) to the sum of the peak loads within the thermal zone. In recognizing load diversity, the designer acknowledges that all areas of the thermal zone will not require maximum cooling or heating at the same time. While using diversity may reduce the size of the HVAC unit, the zone ductwork, dampers, and diffusers must be sized for the individual zone peak loads. The main trunk duct may be sized based on the HVAC unit airflow. Figure 20. Diversity example Building Perimeter Wedge Zone Calculating thermal zone diversity: 1. Determine the instantaneous peak (or block) load for the thermal zone. This information is output from load analysis software such as Trane TRACE®or manually calculated. 2. Calculate the sum of the peak loads for each of the comfort zones within the thermal zone. 3. The diversity factor is then calculated by dividing the instantaneous peak load value by the sum of the peak loads. Instantaneous Diversity Peak Load Factor Sum of Peaks The heating and cooling equipment will never be called upon to provide more capacity than was determined by the instantaneous peak load value. Consequently, the equipment capacity can be reduced by the diversity factor. Table 1. Diversity example Zone - • Time Peak Load Interior 3 p.m. in mid -July 7.5tons North 5 p.m. in mid -July 3.0 tons East 9 a.m. in June 2.5 tons South 4 p.m. in November 4.0 tons West 5 p.m. in September 2.5 tons Sum of Peak Loads 19.5 tons Note: The sum of blocks loads =17.5 tons and occurs at 5 p.m. in mid -July. Diversity = 17.5 = 90% 19.5 VAV-PRC003-EN 17 TbPANE Step 5. Size Zone and Bypass Damper Units Sizing zone damper is relatively straightforward'. The.volume of airflow (in cfm or L/s) for each comfort zone shouldbe known from the load analysis. The designer must select the duct velocity to be used, for the system.. Recommended' zone damper velocities are 1000to 1600 feet per minute (fpm),, when applied'atthe branch level'. Sizing dampers in this range will minimize damper cost, reduce the risk of excessive noise, and ensure adequate zone mod'ulation/temperature control. Dampers located immediately adjacent tothe zone or diffuser may need to be sized" at a lower velocity to avoid sound, and airflow delivery issues. Bypass dampers are typically sized for 80,percent of HVAC unit airflow. Recommended velocities are 1600 to 2000 fpm. Bypass dampers, should' be located as close to the HVAC unit as possible. (See Bypass Damper Operation for additional details.) Note: VariTrac systems: are designed for HVAC unit static pressures up to: 1.75" w.c. Figure 21'.. Hand balancing dampers Hand Balancing Duct Step 6: Designing the Duct System Low pressure; low velocity air distribution systems, such as zoned unitary systems, are usually designed' using the equal friction method. Although static regain is the duct design method' of choice for medium and high velocity variable air volume systems, the added: complexity is difficult to justify with smaller unitary systems. In addition, the low operating velocity of most unitary systems makes the pressure available to "regain small' and inconsequential. Withthe equal friction method', ducts are sized for a constant pressure loss per given length of duct and fitting(s). Where low noise levels are especially critical, the system velocity can be reduced' by enlarging: the entering and leaving; ductwork, damper unit or adding duct liner. A characteristic of the equal friction method that must be considered however, is that there is no natural provision for equalizing pressure drops in the branch sections. This results in each branch duct, and thus the damper units, having different. entering static pressure and airflow characteristics. A robust system and zone unit controller, like the Trane VariTrac system, will compensate for system static changes. The use of manual (or hand) balancing dampers in the branches will also ensure that airflow is appropriately distributed to each diffuser. (See Figure 21'.)7he overall' effect is improved acoustical' and system performance. 18 VAV-PRC003-EN' Step 7. Air Diffuser Selection and Placement Supply Diffusers Many types of supply air diffusers are used in variable air volume systems. Performance, and ultimately space comfort, can vary greatly depending on the diffuser selected. Although constant -volume diffusers will provide air to the space at full cfm, as air volume delivered to the space decreases, so does performance. Linear slot diffusers are recommended for most VAV systems. Linear supply air slot diffusers are designed to properly mix variable air delivery of both heated and cooled air. Linear slot diffusers supply conditioned air which "hugs" the ceiling ratherthan "dumps" air downward on the occupants. This airflow characteristic is known as the "coanda effect". The throw and aspiration characteristics of slot diffusers help to evenly distribute the air throughout the room or space. Locate linear slot diffusers in the center of the room with the discharge air pattern perpendicular to a perimeter wall. To maximize diffuser performance, placement in which air discharge patterns converge at right angles should be avoided. (See Diffuser section of the VariTrane catalog (VAV- PRC008-EN) for additional diffuser placement and performance recommendations.) The throw characteristics of diffusers is well -documented. Slot diffusers should be positioned so that the velocity of the air striking an obstruction (such as a wall or column) is 75 feet per minute (fpm) or less. If airstreams from two diffusers collide, the collision velocity should not exceed 150 fpm. Higher collision velocities result in uncomfortable drafts in the lower levels of the room. In heating applications, linear slot diffusers must be placed to offset heat loss and prevent downdraft problems along perimeter walls. The following techniques have been proven by test and experience: Application (.fij o ,ti07 .i11:ce- ,�: • When the average glass plus wall heat loss is less than 250 Btuh/linear foot, the slot diffuser may be located in the center of the room with one or more slots blowing toward the perimeter wall. • With glass and wall heat loss between 250 and 450 Btuh/linear foot, diffusers should be positioned to blow toward the window and the perimeter wall with a collision velocity of 75 to 150 fpm. If using a continuous glass design, position diffusers every four feet. • If heat loss exceeds 450 Btuh/linear foot, radiation or floor mounted heated air will be required to offset the high wall heat loss. Return Diffusers Figure 22. Proper return diffuser orientation Slot -style return diffusers offer some acoustical advantages over perforated grille styles. Perforated drop -in grilles typically offer little attenuation effect and thus allow sound in the plenum to break out into the occupied space. This is a problem in areas near the unitary heating and cooling unit. Improved ceiling aesthetics is also an advantage of slot return diffusers in jobs where slot supply diffusers are used. Within the occupied space, they blend with the slot supply diffusers. A general rule of thumb is for the return air openings to equal the total area of the supply openings. If the ceiling is not tight, such as a drop -in ceiling, the return openings can be reduced by up to 50% of the supply air openings. To promote good air distribution, return diffusers should be positioned to minimize supply air short-circuiting to the return slot. The returns should be either perpendicular to the supply airflow or parallel and offset from the supply diffusers. :ULAR VAV-PRC003-EN 19 tr, Pressure Dependent vs. Pressure Independent Pressure -Dependent A pressure -dependent VAV control sequence uses the space temperature sensor to directly control the position of the zone damper. The actual airflow delivered to the space is a by-product of this damper position and the static pressure in the duct upstream of the zone damper. Ventilation air is a fixed -damper position and must be measured and set during. the commissioning process. Pressure -Independent A pressure -independent VAV control scheme directly controls the actual volume of primary air that flows to the space. An airflow -measuring device in the VAV terminal unit makes this possible. The position of the modulating device is not directly controlled and is a by-product of regulating the airflow through the unit. Because the airflow delivered to the space is directly controlled, it is independent of inlet static pressure. Figure 23. Single -duct VAV unit is available with integral electric or hot water heat Example 2 Parallel fan powered units with local heat applied help solve problems in difficult areas to control like lobbies and vestibules. The parallel fan provides local heat to an individual zone without relying on the main HVAC unit's heat or supply fan. This allows greater flexibility for mixing zones on a VariTrac system. VariTrane units with integral electric or hot water heat are available as: • single -duct • parallel fan -powered • series fan -powered Figure 25. Parallel fan -powered VAV terminal unit Application Local Reheat Capabilities . Using VariTrane VAV Units VariTrane pressure independent VAV units are a simple way to upgrade the zone VAV capabilities on a VariTrac system. The main advantage is the ability to integrate units with either hot water or electric reheat. Here are application examples where VAV units may enhance your design: Example 1 Series fan -powered VAV units work well in conference rooms and training rooms. Series fan -powered units supply constant air volume to the space. This provides excellent air movement in the space regardless of the internal load requirements. Hot water or electric heat are integral to the unit and optionally available to temper the air at partial load conditions. Figure 24. Series fan -powered VAV terminal unit 20 VAV-PRC003-EN Application Considerations Local Reheat Capabilities Mon--VAV Options The Trane VariTrac Zone Controller has built-in capabilities and logic to control a number of reheat sources. The previous page discussed how a VariTrane VAV unit with reheat can solve application issues by providing local reheat. Local Reheat Let's investigate a few other alternatives which will provide local reheat, and result in exceptional zone temperature control. Local reheat is particularly important when an HVAC unit is in cooling mode. Cold air is delivered to all zones whether it is needed or not. Setting the minimum cooling position to zero may not be practical based on ventilation and/or general airflow requirements. In this case, local reheat options which can be controlled by the standard VariTrac zone controller include: • hydronic wall fin or convector unit with either modulating or two position control. (See trane.com for a full line of wall fin and convector products. • electric wall fin with multi -stage control • duct -mounted electric heater with multi -stage control • duct -mounted hot water coil with either modulating or two -position control. (See trane.com for a full line of duct - mounted water coils.) Figure 26. Trane hydronic wall fin This is ideal for spaces with large windows or perimeter heat losses which exceed 450 Btuh per linear foot. Trane wallfin is available with various grilles and paint options and can be pedestal or wall -mounted Figure 27. Trane electric wall fin VAV-PRC003-EN 21 Bypass Damper Operation When zone dampers modulate airflow to the spaces, static pressure changes in the supply duct system. High pressure in a duct system creates excessive noise and causes poor comfort control. Low pressure results in insufficient airflow to the spaces. The HVAC unit in a changeover bypass system is constant volume and does not modulate supply airflow. Changeover -bypass VAV systems support variable -air -volume operation in the zones by using a bypass duct with a motorized damper and a pressure -sensing device. As duct pressure rises above the static pressure setpoint, the bypass damper begins to open. Conversely, when static pressure falls below the static pressure setpoint, the bypass damper begins to close until the static pressure setpoint is reached. The optimal static pressure setpoint is automatically determined upon system calibration. Application �, Proper operation requires consideration of all aspects of bypass design and location. The bypass dampers and ductwork should be sized and located according to the following general recommendations: • Avoid turbulence by locating the bypass two to three equivalent duct diameters downstream of the HVAC unit discharge. • Locate the static pressure and supply air sensors in the main supply duct upstream of the bypass. • Locate the bypass before the zone dampers (as close to the HVAC unit as possible) to avoid comfort or noise issues. • Size the bypass damper to maintain the minimum required airflow through the HVAC unit (usually 80 percent of the total design cfm) • Provide adequate access for servicing the damper. Figure 28. Changeover bypass variable -air -volume system Static Pr and Sups Tempera 22 VAV-P R C003-E N Building Pressure Control Comfortable, efficient building operation requires that the air pressure inside the building be slightly higher than the atmospheric pressure outside of the building. That is, the building is at a "positive" pressure with respect to the outside environment. If the indoor pressure is too low (negative), the doors may be hard to open and cold air may leak in through construction cracks, causing drafts and cold floors. On the other hand, if the indoor pressure is too high, the doors may stand open and the supply air flow to the zones may decrease, decreasing comfort. Fixed Outside Air Dampers Achieving appropriate building pressure is simple in a system with a constant volume supply fan and fixed outdoor air damper. To maintain a slightly positive building pressure, size the exhaust fans to remove slightly less air than is introduced through the outdoor air damper. Outside Economizer or Demand - Controlled Ventilation Systems If the system resets the quantity of outdoor air in response to occupancy demands (demand -controlled ventilation), or uses an outdoor air economizer, undesirable changes in building pressure may result. As the quantity of outdoor air intake varies, the system must exhaust a similar quantity of air to avoid over or under pressurizing the building. When using an economizer in a changeover -bypass VAV system under low cooling load conditions (reduced airflow to the zones), the bypass damper opens to maintain the static pressure setpoint and airflow through the supply fan. As the outside air damper opens to provide economizer cooling, the return air damper closes. In buildings with a ceiling plenum return, the bypass air dumps into the ceiling plenum since it can no longer return to the fan. The plenum pressure rises and plenum air enters the zones through the return air grilles. Application �,v : _ r o: In buildings that have a ducted return to the fan, bypass air pressurizes the return air duct. As the return air duct pressure rises, the air flows out of the building through the barometric relief damper in the rooftop unit. Excess bypass air flows into the zones through the return air grilles. Using the following suggestions will help maintain building pressurization control: • Use an exhaust fan with a modulated exhaust damper to remove air from the return air plenum or duct. Energize the exhaust fan as the outside air damper opens beyond the minimum position. Sense building static and maintain building air pressure at a slightly positive level by modulating the exhaust damper position. • Use an exhaust fan with no exhaust damper. Energize the exhaust fan when the outdoor air damper opens beyond 25 percent to remove excess outside air from the building. This method is used with some rooftop units and is effective, affordable, and easy to install. • Use a back draft damper to prevent airflow to the return air plenum or grilles. When bypass airflow pressurizes the return duct, the back draft damper closes. Pressure in the HVAC unit return air inlet rises, causing the rooftop barometric relief damper to open. This method is less effective because the rooftop barometric relief damper is sized for a portion of the total airflow, not 100 percent of airflow which may be seen in economizer mode. As the economizer drives to the maximum position, the building usually becomes over -pressurized. Figure 29. Changeover bypass with an economizer. Without proper building pressurization, bypass air may be forced out of the return duct. Economizer —� ? Outdoor Air Damper Return Damper Return Opening ffij�M�vl Bypass VAV-PR C003-E N 23 Application Tip Summary Tip 1. Use comfort zones Units serving thermal zones can provide greater comfort by dividing the thermal zones into "comfort zones" using a changeover-bypass-VAV system. Tip 2. Create thermal zones Create thermal zones which minimize simultaneous heating and cooling requirements. This will avoid unnecessary changeover of the system and maximize comfort. As an example, a computer room would be a poor candidate for one comfort zone of a changeover-bypass-VAV system because it will rarely, if ever, require heating. Tip 3. Use local heat Zones which vary thermally by requiring more heat than the other zones or require heat when the HVAC unit is in cooling mode should use local heat. Local heat in the form of VariTrane VAV units with electric or hot water heat, or wallfin, or convectors, or duct - mounted coils. The standard VariTrac controller is capable of controlling the heat based on zone temperature demands. Application I e_x -•I. 6 - Tip 4. Place dampers properly The bypass damper should be ducted between the supply and the return of the unit as close to the unit as possible, and should be sized to handle 80% of the total system CFM. Tip 5. Control building pressure It may be necessary to provide a modulating means to control building pressure, especially when economizers or demand -controlled ventilation are used in conjunction with a changeover- bypass-VAV system. Tip 6. Use fan -powered VAV boxes Consider using fan -powered VAV boxes to provide local heat or to enhance comfort levels in some of your zones. Conference rooms, or zones with high wall heat loss are ideal for either series or parallel units. 24 VAV-PRC003-EN Selection Vart7rac Dampers VariTrac dampers are typically installed on VariTrac changeover bypass variable air volume NAV) systems. VariTrac is ideal when applied to buildings which use unitary HVAC units. The damper units have controls, which vary air volume and maintain appropriate duct static pressure in the system to make sure that all zones receive the right amount of airflow. Trane offers four VariTrac dampers: • Round zone dampers with DDC controls • Rectangular zone dampers with DDC controls • Round bypass dampers • Rectangular bypass dampers Figure 30. Round and rectangular zone and bypass dampers Zone Damper Selection Procedures Refer to the sizing chart in Table 2 for zone dampers. Follow down the first column in the table for the desired velocity. Then follow across for the cfm lair volume) of a given VariTrac damper based on that velocity. Note: ff the efm exceeds the damper range, increase the damper size. Minimum airflow damper position should be set to10 percent in heating or cooling when a zone duct temperature sensor is used for stand-alone control. In addition, when controlling duct - mounted electric reheat coils, cooling minimum airflow should meet the heating unit manufacturer's guidelines. (See Application Considerations, Maximum System Effectiveness for more details.) Bypass Damper Selection Procedures To determine the cfm capacity required for a bypass damper, calculate 80 percent of the cfm capacity of the heating/cooling unit. Example: If the rooftop capacity is 1200 cfm, the bypass damper should be sized for 1200 x .8 = 960 cfm. To determine the size of the damper, locate the recommended velocity and cfm for the bypass damper. Since a 10" round bypass damper at 1800 fpm provides 980 cfm, a 10" damper at 960 cfm would be slightly less than 1800 fpm, but still within the 1600 to 2000 fpm recommended velocity. A 10" bypass damper is selected. VAV-PRC003-EN 25 Selection Table 2. Damper sizing charts Round Zone Damper Round Bypass Damper Capacity (cfm), Dimensions, and Weights Capacity (cfm), Dimensions, Blades, and Weights Size o> 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16, Size r> 6" 8" 10" 12" 600 120 210 330 470 640 840 600 120 210 330 470 800 160 280 435 630 855 1115 800 160 280 435 630 1000 -' ""-200 " 350 --.545 785 1070 1395 a 1000 200 350 545 785 o 1200 a� 235 420 655' 940 1280 < ;1675 o 3 I3 = 1200 235 420 655 940 ,140Q 275 490.` 765 1100 1500 1400 o 275 490 765 1100 ID ' � ,1600 : " -.315 : , 560. ":' 875 1255 1710 =" 2235 ; a , "�`,) 1800 : 350 630 Length 12" 12" 16" 16" 20" 20" 2000i 390 700 1090 1570' m Ship Wt 11 Ibs 12lbs 17 Ibs 18lbs 27 Ibs 31 Ibs Length 12" 12" 16" 16" Ship Wt 11 Ibs 12 Ibs 17 Ibs 18 Ibs Rectangular Zone Damper Rectangular Bypass Damper Capacity (cfm), Dimensions, Blades, and Weights Capacity (cfm), Dimensions, Blades, and Weights Size to- 8x12 8x14 8x16 10x16 10x20 14x18 Sizeo- 14x12 16x16 20x20 30x20 600 398 464 531 663 829 1045 600 696 1061 1658 2487 800 531 619 707 884 1105 1393 800 928 1415 2211 3316 °- — 1000 — 663 774 '- 884., 1106 1382 1741 Im 1000 1161 1769 2763 4145 o .1200 . 796 928e. 1061"; 1326 1658 ,:o 2089 �3 1200 1393 2122 3316 4974 1400 928 1083 1238 1547 1934 2437 IM a 1400 160U, 1625 1857 2476 '2830 3869 4421 5803 6632 3 �3 1600 - ."1061 "°-. 1238 1415,: 1769 2211 2785 a 1800_�" 2089 ,, 3183 4974 '_7461"'. �" 3 Blades 2 2 2" 3" 3 4 2000e �2371 35375527 " "'. 8290 Ship Wt 8 Ibs 10 Ibs 12 Ibs 14 Ibs 16 Ibs 18 Ibs Blades 2 3 3 3 m 0- Ship Wt 16 Ibs 21 Ibs 29 Ibs 40 Ibs Notes: 1. Recommended velocity for zone dampers is between 1000 and 1600 fpm. Use good standard design practices (such as location of duct). 2. Recommended velocity for bypass damper is between 1600 and 2000 fpm. 26 VAV-PR C003-E N Selection Model Number Descriptions Digits1-4--Unit Type VADA VariTrac VARA Rectangular Damper Digits 5, 6—Damper 06 6" Damper 08 8" Damper 10 10" Damper 12 12" Damper 14 14" Damper 16 16" Damper 113 14 x 12 Bypass Damper 2R 16 x 16 Bypass Damper 3R 20 x 20 Bypass Damper 4R 30 x 20 Bypass Damper 5R 8 x 12 Zone Damper 6R 8 x 14 Zone Damper 7R 8 x 16 Zone Damper 8R 10 x 16 Zone Damper 913 10 x 20 Zone Damper AR 14 x 18 Zone Damper TR/WE" Digit 7—Controls A Bypass - Round Damper B Changeover C Electric, Three -stage Heat - Disabled with Primary Heat D Normally -open hot water E Normally -closed hot water J Bypass - Rectangular Damper Digits 8-1 1--Design Sequence 00 N/A Digit 12—Special Additional Features VAV-PR C003-E N 27 TIPANE° Service Model Numbers V A D A 0 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Digits 1, 2, 3, 4 — Product Type VADA = VariTrac Air Damper VARA = Rectangular Air Damper Digits 5,6 — VariTrac Damper Size 06 = 6" Damper 08 = 8" Damper 10 =10" Damper 12 = 12" Damper 14=14" Damper 16 =16" Damper 1 R =14 x 12 bypass damper 213 =16 x 16 bypass damper 313 = 20 x 20 bypass damper 413 = 30 x 20 bypass damper 5R = 8 x 12 zone damper 611 = 8 x 14 zone damper 7R = 8 x 16 zone damper 813 =10 x 16 zone damper 913 =10 x 20 zone damper AR =14 x 18 zone damper Selection Procedures A 7 0 0 P 0 8 9 10 11 Digit 7 — Controls (all factory downloaded and verified) A = Bypass with actuator B = Damper only control (Changeover) C = Damper plus up to 3 stages of Electric D = Damper plus 1-stage Normally - open hot water E = Damper plus 1-stage Normally - closed hot water F = Not used G = No controls (Actuator Only) H = Not used J = Bypass for rectangular damper with actuator Digits 8, 9,10,11 OOPO = Design sequence P8 VAV-PRC003-EN Selection Typical Bill of Materials Table 3. Typical VarTrac A changeover -bypass VAV B system components C D E F G H J Figure 31. component changeover VAV systen Device Name Function in System Number Required Central control panel Controls the HVAC system and provides local One per HVAC uniVVariTrac system w/optional operator display operator interface (thermal zone) Communicating bypass Sends supply duct temperature and pressure to One per VanTrac system controller the central control panel Bypass damper(s) Supply air duct volume control to maintain One or two per system as needed to appropriate static pressure in the duct bypass from supply to return airstream VariTrac dampers Varies air volume to the space to control comfort One per comfort zone Zone sensors Sends space temperature and setpoint One per comfort zone (DDC sensor information to the zone damper controller w/ LCD requires 4 VA) CCP power supply 24V power for the central control panel The CCP must have a dedicated 24V power supply Zone damper power supply(s) 24V power for the zone dampers Power supplies may be shared; each zone requires 10VA (plus the load of optional outputs) Trane rooftop communications Allows the CCP and Trane rooftop controller to One per controlled Trane rooftop interface communicate with each other via simple twisted with ReliaTel controller shielded wire pair Optional relay board Provides 24V control of any non -communicating One per controlled non- HVAC unit communicating HVAC unit VAV-PRC003-EN 29 TRANEm Electrical Data and Connections Figure 32. Central control panel field wiring Legend Transformer 0 = Figure note = Termination resistor Twisted pair, shielded wire per Trane specifications E = Shield termination T = Contact points = = Earth ground = Shield ground Termination Board TB2 Figure Notes: 1 All customer wiring must be in accordance with national, state, and local electrical codes. 2 Trane recommends a dedicated transformer for 24 Vac power. 3 Do not apply voltage to the priority shutdown and occupancy inputs. 4 Example of Comm5 communication link wiring. See product -specific literature for Comm5 wire connection details. 30 VAV-PRC003-EN Electrical Data and Connections Figure 33. Relay board wiring Figure 34. Typical relay board wiring Relay Board TB2 Relay Board TB2 VAC CLASS 2 COOL UNIT VAC CLASS 2 HEAT UNIT WILY FAN T/2COOL HEAT PUMP )OL1 COMP )OL2 COMP2 -AT i AUX HEAT -AT 2 REV VALVE E OUTSIDE AIR HEAT/COOL OR ICS VAV-PRC003-EN 31 W N To Zone Dampers 3through 24 A A D 0 0 0 0 w m Z Zone UCM Address #2 ADDRESS D.D.C.\U.C.M. SWITCH CONTROL BOARD BBBBBB VL GN X 00 Q�ER [ � ❑ ❑ PA R Zone UCM Address #1 Jl evoeve+f J ADDRESS D.D.C.\U.C.M. yA SWITCH CONTROL BOARD aaaQa�aBr ��(J��( k� y jry a�r �o\I I I I OtJm� OEL GIN Legend _ Twisted pair, shielded wire per Trane specifications = Shielded ground - Figure note Splice Figure Notes: 0 Shield must be spliced with other communication link shields. ZL Shield must be cut back and taped. Communication Sensor/Bypass Control Assembly Address #33 -{�ar�� Lmfj J��+1� 0�0� �Lf State Pressu Pon ADDRESS D.D.C.\U..C.M. J, SWITCH CONTROL BOARD 1 U".T rn ��n �.t�l VEL GRN,�r-, m �r, „ mU:U Xx OT� ❑ ❑ 'JUP1 Q Press re Transducer Splice Notes: The UCM order in this drawing is for demonstration purposes only. No specific order is required on the Comm link. Air Suppy Temp Sensor VariTrac Termination Board TB2 Electrical Data and Connections Figure 36. Communicating bypass controller wiring CW CLOSE CCW OPEN COM HOT ACTUATOR SPARE CONNECTOR TO NEC CLASS 2 24V TRANSFORMER LOAD 8 VA (WITHOUT ACTUATOR) r� ACTUATOR J1L. W-HOT BK-OPEN R-CLOSE STATIC 24VAC I PRESSURE PORT ACT BIP GND 24V 0 1 Fj "I� 7� ADDRESSII HIGH J3 R SWITCH D.D.C.\U.C.M. r + sK 888888 CONTROL BOARD G VOUT � 1 CO m c� cv N N cM C YEL GRN c� ci PRESSURE m� m� m� m� m� m� ❑ ❑ m� E k m� m TRANSDUCER H I— h F— FZONE SET A/CO2 GND I I I I I I I I I I I I I I AIR SUPPLY TEMP SENSOR I I I I ZI ZI �:-)I DI —I _ 1 O OI SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR COMMUNICATIONS WIRING COMMUNICATING SENSOR/BYPASS CONTROLBOX FEMALE PLUG END OF BYPASS SENSOR ASSEMBLY CABLE MALE PLUG END LOCATED ON DDC\UCM , CONTROL BOARD 90T�r� i AJ D.D.C.\U.C.M. CONTROLBOARD VAV-PRC003-EN 33 TRANE° Figure 37. UCM Wiring ------------------ R (HOD _ — _ — -(TB 1-1) 24VAG / O-(COMMONJ- — _ _(TB4-1) BIP GR-(NC CONTACJT _ 11-1)24VAC BK (RETURNS _ _ _(TBI-2)GND \ Y— — — — — — -NOT CONNECTED CIMONAL FIELD INSTALLED `----- OCCUPANCY SENSOR-----J 3RDSTG. --------I TO J11 -- HEATER STAGE I T0J10--2ND STG,_ CONTACTOR(Sj I TO J9 — 1ST STG_ 24 VAC, 12 VA I -- To J8 - - HOT - - MA C UD OPTIONAL FIELD INSTALLED ELECTRIC HEATER ----------------- TO J8 — —W (HOT) _ PROP. WATER TO J9 — Ell, (CLOSE) — 11 R (OPEN) — 24VAC TO J10 VA MAX I I oPRONAL FIELD QSrALLED — ——PROPORnONAL WATER VALVE— ------------------I I ON-0FF I TO J9 — WATER VALVE T0J8 ------ 124VAC ) VAIN OPRONAL FIELD INSTALLED I ON -Off WATER VALVE -------------- 244 LBt_t)24V _ I [I�INI GND 0 (TB3:6) GNDfl I OUT V TBJ5 AICO2_ I OMONAL FIELD INSTALLED ----- TB3-5 —I . — TB3-6 I I I - I I I I © I I I OPRONAL FIELD INSTALLED _ AUXTEIWSBJSOR _ I Electrical Data and Connections 24 VAC 60 HZ 8.-J NEC CLASS-2 CONTROL CIRCUIT , q—T— G I I W I VV I I I DAMPER I I ACTUATOR WIRING I I I I I r---------- 3 I I ---------- I —ACT BIP IGNDI24V ED ADDRESS D.D.C. \ U.CM. J3 SWITCH CONTROL BOARD sasses CC CC N+N N+Y N�N� q co ED m m R E YL GN���� M� o o m ccm m m I I I I I I I I ZONE GND SET ACOZ GND D.D.C. \ U.GM. zl z1 0! 01 9. CONTROL BOARD SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR COMMUNICATIONS WIRING NOTES: 1. FactoryWiring Field Wiring — - — - — - — Optional or Alternate Wiring 2. '/4' quick connect required for all field connection. e3-2 TB3-1 I TB3-3 T131-2 TB2_5 ) 17B2-1 I I I I t'To-�' T*.� I DIGITAL I ZONE SENEOfl I I 0PTI0NF1 FIELD — INSTALLED DIGITAL ZONE SENSOR — J ------------ TB2{i T33-I I T82-5 TR3-2 I I I Te3a I I I 5 4 3 2 1 ZONESBJSOR IIEMO EMTDN I I I a a I OPTIONAL FIELD INSTALLED DMLI ZONE SENSOR L— — — — — — — — — — J <:E Zone sensor terminals 4 and 5 require shielded twisted pair wiring for communications jack equipped zone sensor options No additional wiring required for night setback override (on/cancel). a5 The optional binary input connects between TB4-1 (BIP) and 24VAC (HOT) from transformer. The binary input can be reconfigured as an occupancy input via the communications interface. As shipped, the aux input is configured as an AUX input. The AUX input can be reconfigured as a CO2 sensor input via the communications interface. < 7Y] S terminal not to be used with this applications. If unit mounted transformer is not provided, polarity from unit to unit must be maintained to prevent permanent damage to control board. If one leg of 24VAC supply is grounded, then ground leg must be connected to TB1-2. (9. Shields of communication wiring should be tied together and insulated. 34 VAV-PRC003-EN Electrical Data, and Connections Figure 38. DDC zone sensor with LCD Digital Sensor Board T81-1 24V -2 GND DigitalSensor Terminal Cnnnp.rtinn. Chart Sensor UCM Field Wire Color Code TB1-1 T131-1 T131-2 T131-2 T132-1 T63-1 TB2-2 T133-2 TB2-3 TB3-3 T133-1 T132-5 TB3-2 TB2-6 Figure 39. DDC zone sensor wiring Mechanical Sensor Tprminal'(nnnpnfinn (hart Sensor UCM Field Wire Color Cade TB1-1 TB3-1 TB1-2 TB3-2 TB-1-4 TB2-5 T131-5 T62-6 T� To TB2-1 ACT BIP GND': 24V 0— ADDRESS Temperature -2 SWITCH D.D.C.W.C.M'. Signal Common assess CONTROL BOARD e I - - Setpoint vO GO m ZO E G D TB3-1 :ommunicati6ns +(High) :ommunications ooa000, �D ACT BIP GND 24V ADDRESS SWITCH D.D:C.\U.C.M'. sasses CONTROL BOARD A Night Setback 1 Override Option Sensor TBt-1. PeJ, Temperature _ Signal Coon Adjustable Warmef A Setpoint Option - Cooler Setpoint - - - - - - - - - - - - "4 Comm 1 -! Communications (Optional) communications I =J� +(High) -5 Jack 1- -i J Communications (Optional) - (Low, TA WE• J3 w a ' [s A/CO2 GND I I Optional Field Mounted Aux. Temp. Sensor �m a 2 G D I Optional Field Mounted Aux. Temp. Sensor Figure Notes: Shield must be spliced with other communication link shields Shield must be cut back and taped at sensor. VAV-PRC003-EN 35 Specifications Figure 40. VariTrac DDC zone Table 4. Zone sensor options sensors e Number of ,j Zone Sensor Options Required Wires' Sensor only (no communications jack available) 2 Sensor with adjustable setpoint 3 Sensor with night setback override and cancel buttons 2 Sensor with adjustable setpoint and night setback override and cancel buttons 3 r 1 1? Sensor with digital display and adjustable setpoint and night setback override and cancel buttons 52 Notes: Most sensors have a communication jack available as an option. If these jacks are used, they must be wired to the UCM using an approved twoconductor, shielded cable. The communication jacks do not e fig. need to be wired for the system to operate properly. 2Three wires are required for sensor connections. Two wires are required for 24-Vac power connection. 36 VAV-PRC003-EN Figure 41. VariTrac central control panel components Figure 42. VariTrac UCM round damper ecifications Table 5. VariTrac control panel specifications Power Requirements 20-30 Vac, 60 Hz, single-phase, 30 VA minimum. Class 2 transformer Operating Environment 32°-122T (0°-50°C) 10-90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage Environment AOT-122T (-40°-85T) 5-95% relative humidity, non -condensing Control Enclosure NEMA 1 resin enclosure plenum rated Mounting Mount directly on wall surface or mount on recessed 4" x 4" (101.6 mm x 101.6 mm) conduit box. Weight 2.5 lbs. 0.13 kg) Communication Link Wiring Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22-AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper conductors. Maximum total wire length is 3,500 ft (1066.8 m). Wire must meet Trane specifications Binary Input Voltage (provided by VariTrac CCP): 10-14 Vdc Current (provided by VariTrac CCP): 10-14 mA Note: Only "dry' contacts may be attached to binary inputs UL Approval The VariTrac Central Control Panel is UL approved Memory Backup Upon a power loss, all operator -edited data stored in the VariTrac Central Control Panel is maintained permanently. Table 6. UCM damper specifications Power Requirements 20-30 Vac, 60Hz, single-phase 10 VA minimum (plus load of optional heat outputs). Class 2 transformer required. Operating Environment 32°-120T (0°-49°C). 10-90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage Environment-50°-200T (-46°-93°C). 5-950/. relative humidity, non -condensing Control Enclosure NEMA 1 metal enclosure plenum rated Communication Link Wiring Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22-AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper conductors. Maximum total wire is 3,500 ft (1066.8 m)• Wire must meet Trane specifications VAV-PR C003-E N 37 Figure 43. Communicating bypass controller Figure 44. Zone occupancy sensor Ideal for zones with intermittent occupancy like conference rooms). When occupied, the zone reverts to unoccupied setpoints to save energy. Specifications Table 7. Communicating bypass control assembly specifications Power Requirements 20-30 Vac, 60Hz, single-phase 15 VA minimum. Class 2 transformer Operating Environment 32c-120T (0°-49T) 10-90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage Environment -5T-200°F (-46°-93°C). 5-95% relative humidity, non -condensing Control Enclosure NEMA 1 metal enclosure plenum rated Communication Link wring Communication link wiring must be Level 4 22-AWG twisted shielded pair wire with stranded tinned copper conductors. Maximum total wire is 3,500 ft (1066.8 m). Wire must meet Trane specifications. Table 8. Zone occupancy sensor specifications Power Supply 24 Vac or 24 Vdc ±10% Maximum VA Load 0.88 VA @ 24 Vac, 0.722 VA @ 24 Vdc Isolated Relay Rating 1 A @ 24 Vac or 24 Vdc Operating Temperature 32°-131°F (0°-55°C) Storage Temperature -22°-176°F (-30°-80°C) Humidity Range 0-95% non -condensing Effective Coverage Area 1200 sq. ft (365.8 m) Effective Coverage Radius 22 ft (6.7 m) Housing Material ABS plastic 38 VAV-PRC003-EN Figure 45. DDC zone sensor with digital display Figure 46. CO2 duct sensor Figure 47. CO2wall sensor Specifications Table 9. Digital zone sensor specifications Thermistor Resistance Rating 10kW at 77' (25°C) Accuracy at 77T (25°C) OAT (0.2°C) Setpoint Resistance Rating 500 Ohms at 70T (21.2°F) Display Zone Temperature Range 4T-WF (10° to 35°C) Display Setpoint Range 50'-90T (10' to 32°C) Operating Temperature 0'-120°F (-18° to 49°C) Storage Temperature -20°-130oF (-29° to 54 Q Humidity Range 5-95% non -condensing Power Supply 24 VAC Maximum VA Load 4 VA Housing Material Rigid vinyl Table 10. CO2 sensor specifications TR/lINE� Duct Wall Dimensions 3 1/8" x 3 1/8" x 7 3/4" 4 1/4" x 3 1/8" x 1 7/16" Operating Temperature 23°-113°F (-5°-45°C) 59°-95°F OY-35°C) Accuracy at 77°F (25°C) < ± (30 ppm CO2 + 3% of reading) < ± (40 ppm CO2 + 3% of reading) Measuring Range 0-2000 parts per million (ppm) Recommended Calibration Interval 5 years Response Time 1 minute (0-63%) Storage Temperature -40-158OF (-20°-700C) Humidity Range 0 to 85% relative humidity (RH) Output Signal (jumper selectable) 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 VDC Resolution of Analog Outputs 10 ppm CO2 Power Supply Nominal 24 VAC Power Consumption <5 VA Housinq Material ABS plastic VAV-PRC003-EN 39 I Rt' Acoustics are tricky to define for specific jobsites. To provide an acoustical overview of a typical office system with mineral glass fiber dropped ceiling, ARI standard 885-98 has generated the transfer functions in Table 11. Sound power data was collected in accordance with ARI Standard 880. Applying the transfer function for sound reduction due to office furnishings, materials, etc. generated the NC data which follows. This is a reference document only provided to address general acoustical issues. What you will find is that the sound in the occupied spaces generated by the VariTrac dampers is minimal when compared to the main HVAC unit sound generation. Acoustics Table 11. Acoustical transfer functions ARI 885-98 Discharge Transfer Function Assumptions Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6 7 Small Box -24 -28 -39 -53 -59 -40 (<300 cfm) Medium Box -27 -29 240 -51 -53 -39 (<300-700 cfm) Large Box -29 -30 -41 -51 -52 -39 (>700 cfm) Note: Add to terminal unit sound power to determine discharge sound pressure in the space. ARI 885-98 Radiated Transfer Function Assumptions Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6 7 Type 2 Mineral -18 -19 -20 -26 -31 -36 Fiber Insulation Some general ideas to minimize acoustical issues: • pay close attention to location of the HVAC unit. This will typically set the overall acoustical quality of your job. • locate VariTrac dampers outside the occupied space. • internally lined ductwork can be used to reduce the discharge sound generated by the HVAC unit. • install flex duct with minimal sagging, and turns. • locate balancing dampers as far from the diffuser as possible to limit airborne noise. Note: 1 /anTrac dampers do not carry the ARI seal. Table 12. Radiated sound data NC Based on 885-98 Mineral Tile Size Radiated NC Size 6 in. 33 470 8 in. 26 840 10in. 25 1310 12 in. 26 1885 14 in. 29 2140 16 in. 21 2515 NC based on maximum rated airflow conditions. 40 VAV-PRC003-EN Table 13. Discharge sound data Discharge Size CFM ISP NC 6 in. 375 0.25 - 6 in. 375 0.5 - 6in. 375 1 18 6 in. 375 2 22 6 in. 300 0.25 6 in. 300 0.5 - 6 in. 300 1 - 6 in. 300 2 19 6 in. 225 0.25 - 6 in. 225 0.5 - 6 in. 225 1 - 6 in. 225 2 16 6 in. 150 0.25 - 6 in. 150 0.5 - 6in. 150 1 - 6in. 150 2 16 6 in. 75 0.25 - 6in. 75 0.5 - 6in. 75 1 - 6in. 75 2 16 6 in. 38 0.25 - 6 in. 38 0.5 - 6 in. 38 1 - 6in. 38 2 15 8 in. 656 0.25 - 8 in. 656 0.5 16 8 in. 656 1 24 8 in. 656 2 30 Discharge Size CFM ISP NC 10 in. 1031 0.25 - 10in. 1031 0.5 15 10 in. 1031 1 21 10 in. 1031 2 27 10 in. 825 0.25 - 10 in. 825 0.5 - 10in. 825 1 17 10 in. 825 2 22 10 in. 619 0.25 - 10 in. 619 0.5 - 10in. 619 1 - 10in. 619 2 20 10 in. 413 0.25 - 10 in. 413 0.5 - 10 in. 413 1 - 10 in. 413 2 19 10 in. 206 0.25 - 10 in. 206 0.5 - 10 in. 206 1 - 10 in. 206 2 19 10 in. 103 0.25 - 10 in. 103 0.5 - 10 in. 103 1 - 10 in. 103 2 18 12 in. 1500 0.25 - 12 in. 1500 0.5 15 12 in. 1500 1 21 12 in. 1500 2 29 8 in. 525 0.25 - 12 in. 1200 0.25 - 8 in. 525 0.5 - 12 in. 1200 0.5 - 8 in. 525 1 20 12 in. 1200 1 17 8in. 525 2 25 12 in. 1200 2 25 8 in. 394 M5 - 12 in. 900 0.25 - 8 in. 394 0.5 - 12 in. 900 0.5 - 8 in. 394 1 16 12 in. 900 1 - 8in. 394 2 22 12 in. 900 2 22 8 in. 263 0.25 - 12 in. 600 0.25 - 8 in. 263 0.5 - 12 in. 600 0.5 - 8 in. 263 1 - 12 in. 600 1 - 8 in. 263 2 23 12 in. 600 2 21 8 in. 131 0.25 - 12 in. 300 0.25 - 8 in. 131 0.5 - 12 in. 300 0.5 - 8 in. 131 1 15 12 in. 300 1 - 8 in. 131 2 24 12 in. 300 2 20 8 in. 66 0.25 - 12 in. 150 0.25 - 8 in. 66 0.5 - 12 in. 150 0.5 - 8 in. 66 1 - 12 in. 150 1 - 8 in. 66 2 20 12 in. 150 2 19 Note: NC data based on ARI 885-98 Acoustical transfer functions in Table 11. Discharge Size CFM ISP NC 14 in. 2000 0.25 - 14 in. 2000 0.5 17 14 in. 2000 1 24 14 in. 2000 2 30 14 in. 1600 0.25 - 14 in. 1600 0.5 - 14 in. 1600 1 19 14 in. 1600 2 26 14 in. 1200 0.25 - 14 in. 1200 0.5 - 14 in. 1200 1 15 14 in. 1200 2 23 14 in. 800 0.25 - 14 in. 800 0.5 - 14 in. 800 1 - 14 in. 800 2 23 14 in. 400 0.25 - 14 in. 400 0.5 - 14 in. 400 1 - 14 in. 400 2 23 14 in. 200 0.25 - 14 in. 200 0.5 - 14 in. 200 1 - 14 in. 200 2 20 16 in. 2625 0.25 - 16 in. 2625 0.5 17 16 in. 2625 1 25 16 in. 2625 2 32 16 in. 2100 0.25 - 16 in. 2100 0.5 - 16 in. 2100 1 23 16 in. 2100 2 29 16 in. 1575 0.25 - 16 in. 1575 0.5 - 16 in. 1575 1 22 16 in. 1575 2 27 16 in. 1050 0.25 - 16 in. 1050 0.5 - 16 in. 1050 1 - 16 in. 1050 2 22 16 in. 525 0.25 - 16 in. 525 0.5 - 16 in. 525 1 - 16 in. 525 2 23 16 in. 263 0.25 - 16 in. 263 0.5 - 16 in. 263 1 - 16 in. 263 2 23 VAV-PRC003-EN 41 Dimensions and Weights , e r: t Figure 48. Central control panel dimensions Top view 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) 10.25 in. (26.04 cm) Front view Bottom view Note: 1. Central control panel weight is 2.5 lbs. 2.75 in. (6.99 cm) Side view 42 VAV-PRC003-EN Dimensions and Weights Figure 49. Communicating bypass control dimensions 7 4 6 3/4" 10 5" 3 3/8"� O O 4 5/16" 3 7/8" 11 0 0 i 0.300" 1 a -- 1.00"� 4 -► 1.00"— 4--►I T Back View 7/8" knockout 1/2" conduit Customer entry Notes: Weight Operating Temp Humidity Mounting Method 4 4 1 /4" No TR/WE� Mounting holes See back view for dimensions Duct Static Pressure Sensor Duct Temp Sensor 1 1 15/16" 1 *-- 4-- 3 5/16L--� Side View 3 1/4 Ibs 32° to 140° 5 to 95% (non -condensing) Metal screws VAV-PRC003-EN 43 Dimensions and Weights Figure 50. Round zone and bypass damper dimensions Damper Size A B c Nominal CFM Weight 6" 6.375" 12.00" 11.125" 300 6lbs 8" 8.375" 12.00" 13.125" 500 7lbs 10" 10.375" 16.00" 15.125" 800 8lbs 12" 12.375" 16.00" 17.125" 1100 9lbs 14" 14.375" 20.00" 19.125" 1600 11Ibs 16" 16.375" 20.00" 21.125" 2000 12lbs 44 VAV-PR C003-E N Dimensions and Weights Figure 51. Rectangular zone damper dimensions X 16.00" Ref. Slip & Drive Connection Dimensions X Y 8.00" 12.00" 8.00" 14.00" 8.00" 16.00" 10.00" 16.00" 10.00" 20.00" 14.00" 18.00" \,V,V 6.00" Ref. TRANE° Damper Frame Data Y Frame 16 a e galvanized steel Blades 16-gage galvanized steel All blades are 3.19" nominal width and 8" maximum Gear ABS plastic Blade Pin 3/8" rolled steel, zinc plated VAV-PRC003-EN 45 AIMMIL TRIWEm Dimensions and Weights Figure 52 Rectangular bypass damper dimensions Hub I t% 1.20" r� C. .70" +-2` � 4" — Actuator Dimensions Dimensions X Y 14" 12" 16" 16" 20" 20" 30" 20" Wiring Actuator CCP Red CCW Close White COM Com Black CW Open Damner Frame Data Frame 13 gage galvanized steel Blades 16 gage galvanized steel; blades are 6" nominal width and 8" maximum Linkage 1/8" rolled steel, zinc plated Blade Pin 3/8" square steel, zinc plated Blade Pin Extension 7/16" diameter, 7" long Included with all dampers Bearings I Self-lubricating acetol Blade Seals None Side Seals None Cable 10" Weight Factory Installed Cable Provided i 46 VAV-PRC003-EN Figure 53. Occupancy Sensor ® 3.60" 0 Front View 1 2.50" y Side View Figure 55. Digital Zone Sensor = 2.8 HH.HM'-C�AX' i NOCC SETPOMT OVERRUEI II O 6 ON O 1 CANCEL 4.5 VAV-PRC003-EN 47 ABS gears - Gears formed of a lightweight plastic known for its toughness, impact strength, and dimensional stability. Back draft damper -A one-way airflow damper in a parallel fan powered unit prevents primary flow from exiting the plenem inlet. Binary input -A two -position signal indicating on/off status. Binary output - A control output that is either on or off. Built-in time clock -The occupancy timer included in the CCP operator display. Bypass damper - The motorized damper ducted between the system supply and return ducts used to control static pressure in changeover bypass VAV systems. Central control panel (CCP) -The system level control device in a Trane changeover bypass or delivered VAV system that gathers data from zone controllers and operates the HVAC unit to maintain the correct air flow and temperature. Changeover, -bypass VAV - A control that provides variable air volume functionality to a constant volume air , handling system. CO2 sensor -An analog sensor that detects and measures carbon dioxide sensor to determine occupancy level. Commissioning - The process of starting up and verifying correct operation of a building system. Conditioned air -Air that is heated, cooled, humidified, or dehumidified to maintain comfort in an interior space. Constant volume -An air distribution system that varies the temperature of a fixed volume of air to maintain space comfort. Delivered VAV -A self configuring system providing true pressure independent VAV control to smaller building applications. Delivered VAV requires a CCP with operator display, a Commercial Voyager VAV rooftop unit and VariTrane VAV boxes. Demand control ventilation - A method of maintaining indoor air quality through intelligent ventilation based on occupancy. The quantity of ventilation is controlled based on indoor CO2 levels, which correlate to occupancy levels. Demand controlled ventilation saves money by reducing ventilation during periods of low occupancy. Direct -expansion (DX) - When the refrigerant in the system is either condensed or evaporated directly by the medium being heated or cooled. Discharge air (DA) -Air discharged from the air handler into the ducts. Discharge air control -An air handling system that provides fixed temperature air (either fixed or variable volume). Other control devices vary the actual volume of air delivered to the space to maintain occupant comfort. Economizer -A damper arrangement and automatic control system that allows a heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) system to supply up to 100 percent outside air to satisfy cooling demands, even if additional mechanical cooling is required Exception schedule -A one time only time of day schedule in a system that is removed automatically after use Free cooling - Outdoor air introduced to a system under correct conditions to provided cooling to a space. Also see also "Economizer HVAC Unit -An air moving device that conditions air. An HVAC unit may provide cooling, or heating and cooling. Typical HVAC units include packaged rooftop units, split systems, and water source heat pumps. LCD - Liquid crystal display NDIR - Non -dispersive infrared technology Negative pressure -The condition that exists when more air is exhausted from a space than is supplied. Non-volatile memory - System memory that retains programming with no battery or capacitor back up required Normally closed (NC) - Electrical contacts that are closed (current flows) in the de -energized condition Normally open (NO) - Electrical contacts that are open (no current flows) in the de -energized condition Occupancy sensor -A binary sensor that transmits a signal upon detection of movement in the coverage area Outdoor air (OA) -This is fresh air drawn in to provide space ventilation. Also see Ventilation air" Outdoor air damper -The damper that draws fresh air into the air handling system for ventilation. Also referred to as the ventilation or fresh air damper Override - A manual or automatic action taken to bypass normal operation Packaged unitary system -An air handling system with all the major components contained in a single cabinet or installed in a single location PIR - Passive infrared sensing technology (used in occupancy and motion detection sensors) Polling -The method a VariTrac CCP uses to determine the need for heating or cooling from the air handling system by examining the zone requirements Positive pressure -The condition that exists when more air is supplied to a space than is exhausted. Pressure -dependent VAV control - A VAV unit with airflow quantity dependent upon static pressure. There is no zone flow sensor in pressure dependent VAV boxes. Pressure -independent VAV control -A VAV unit with airflow quantity independent of duct static pressure. Actual airflow to the space is measured and controlled by an airflow sensor in the pressure independent VAV box. 48 VAV-P R C003-E N Priority shutdown -An immediate shutdown of the fan and heating or cooling stages in a VariTrac changeover bypass or Delivered VAV system caused by either the loss of critical system information or an external priority shutdown input Pulse -width modulating reheat - Reheat that operates duct mounted electric coils on a 0-100% duty cycle in response to increased space heating demand. Reheat device -A source of heat located downstream from a control device such as a VAV box to add heat to air entering a space to provide occupant comfort ReliaTel (RTRM) - The latest generation Trane factory mounted unitary controller. Return air (RA) - Air returned to the air handler from the conditioned space, to be reconditioned. Setpoint-The desired room temperature to be achieved and maintained by an HVAC system. Setpoint limit - An electronic or manual constraint imposed on a setpoint to prevent misadjustment SPDT - A relay with of one set of normally -open, normally -closed contacts Staged electric reheat - Reheat that operates one or more duct mounted electric coils in a series in response to increased space heating demand. Staged (or perimeter) hot water reheat - Reheat that operates duct - mounted hot water or space -mounted electric or hot water reheat coils in response to increased space heating demand Static pressure -The difference between the air pressure on the inside of the duct and outside of the duct. Static pressure is an indicator of how much pressure the fans are creating and how effective they will be at distributing the supply air through the ducts. Supply air (SA) - air which blows out of the air handler into the ducts. See also "Discharge air (DA)" Terminal unit - HVAC equipment that provides comfort directly to a space. Thermal requirements -The heating or cooling load requirements for a specific area or space in a building. Care must be taken to not control areas with different thermal requirements from one air handling system Touch -screen operator display - The LCD panel mounted onto a VariTrac CCP to allow direct user interface and time of day programming for the system TR/EA/E11 Unit control module UCM -A Trane microelectronic circuit board that controls individual HVAC equipment. May link to an Integrated Comfort System Unitary - one or more factory -made assemblies which normally include an evaporator or cooling coil, an air moving device, and a compressor and condenser combination Variable air volume (VAV) - an air handling system that varies the volume (amount) of constant temperature air to a space to control comfort VanTrac - The Trane changeover bypass VAV system VariTrane -The Trane pressure independent VAV box VAV box - The damper or air valve (plus associated controller) that controls the zone air volume in a VAV system. Also see "Variable air volume" Ventilation air -The outdoor air drawn into the HVAC unit to provide. fresh air to the space. Also see "Outdoor air (OA)" Voting - See "Polling" Zone sensor -The device that measures a variable (usually temperature) in a space and sends it to a controller. Commonly referred to as a thermostat. VAV-PRC003-EN 49 � T14�1NE J VAV-P R C003-E N 'r Tram A business of American Standard Companies www.trane.com Literature Order Number VAV-PRC003-EN File Number PL-TD-VAV-000-PRC003-EN-0604 Supersedes VAV-DS-12 Stocking Location La Crosse For more information contact your local district office Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change or email us at comfort@trane.com design and specifications without notice. / T z� Hardware Installation Tracker" Version 12 Building Automation System BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Hardware Installation Tracker"' Version 12 Building Automation System BMTK-SVN01 D-EN February 2004 Racker Version 12 Building Automation System Hardware Installation This guide and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part, without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Since Trane has a policy of continuous product improvement, it reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Use of the software contained in this package is provided under a software license agreement. Unauthorized use of the software or related materials discussed in this guide can result in civil damages and criminal penalties. The terms of this license are included with the compact disk. Please read them thoroughly. Although Trane has tested the hardware and software described in this guide, no guarantee is offered that the hardware and software are error free. Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any per- son of such revision or change. Trane may have patents or patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document, Trane does not imply giving license to these patents. TM ® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Trane: Tracer, Tracker, Trane, Precedent, Rover, VarM-ac, Vari- Trane, and Voyager. TM ® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: LonMark, LonTalk, and Neuron from Echelon Corporation; ReliaTel from Tone Software Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A. © 2004 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN NOTICE: Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully: &WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Indicates a situation that may result in equipment or property -damage -only accidents. The following format and symbol conventions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual: IMPORTANT Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to operate improperly but will not likely result in potential for damage. A note may be used to make the reader aware of useful information, to clarify a point, or to describe options or alternatives. ♦ This symbol precedes a procedure that consists of only a single step. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Contents Chapter 1 Overview .................................. 1 Controller components ....................................... 4 Termination module.......... ........................... 5 Mainmodule ............................................. 6 Display module ........................................... 7 Model numbers .............................................. 8 Tracker controller specifications ............................... 9 UCM maximum capacities for Tracker models 12 and 24 .......... 10 UCM maximum capacities for Tracker model WSHP ...............11 Before installation....... ........................... ..... 12 Verify the shipment ...................................... 12 Inspect for shipping damage ............................... 12 Store unused components until needed ..................... 12 After installation ............................................ 13 FCC compliance ............................................. 14 Chapter 2 Termination module mounting .............. 15 Select a location for the controller ............................. 15 Verify location conformance to controller specifications ........ 15 Verify location conformance to controller dimensions and clearances ............................................ 16 Verify location conformance to optimal touch screen viewing angles................................................ 18 Mount the termination module ................................ 19 Securing the termination module to a wall ................... 20 Securing the termination module to a conduit box ............ 20 Installing electrical conduit ................................ 21 Chapter 3 Termination board wiring ................... 23 Wire 24 Vac power .......................................... 25 Wire optional inputs and outputs .............................. 26 Wire the alarm relay ...................................... 27 Wire the priority shutdown device .......................... 27 Wire the utility pulse meter ................................ 28 Wire the thermistor ...................................... 28 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i Contents Wire the UCMs ............................................ 29 Wire specifications .... ............... ................ 29 UCM wiring configurations ............................. 32 Termination resistor placement for Comm5 links .............. 34 Wire supported UCMs.................................... 37 Requirements for repeaters on Comm5 communication links ... 37 Chapter 4 Main module mounting .................... 41 Chapter 5 Display module mounting ................... 43 Chapter 6 PC workstation wiring ...................... 47 Verify PC workstation specifications ............................ 47 Direct connection to PC workstation ............................ 47 Modem connection to PC workstation .......................... 50 Ethernet connection to PC workstation .......................... 52 Connecting over an existing LAN ........................... 52 Connecting through a hub.................................53 Connecting with one cable ................................. 54 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ........................... 55 Troubleshooting components ................................. 55 LEDs...................................................55 Service pin buttons and jumper .......... I ................. 55 Symptom/action troubleshooting .............................. 59 Chapter 8 Maintenance .............................. 63 Cleaning the touch screen .................................... 63 Calibrating the touch screen ................................... 63 Appendix A Installation checklists . ................... 65 Appendix B Declaration of Conformity ................... 73 Index......................................... 75 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Chapter 1 Overview The Tracker building automation system (BAS) is an energy management system for small- to medium -size buildings. The Tracker BAS controls heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment. It consists of a Tracker controller (Figure 1) and an optional PC workstation. The Tracker BAS can be operated by using either a Tracker controller or a PC workstation that is running Tracker PC Workstation software. A visual interface enables an operator to set up and change HVAC operating parameters and to collect and display building information. The Tracker PC Workstation software allows a PC to be connected to the Tracker controller directly with a prescribed adapter and cable, locally over a standard Ethernet local area network (LAN) connection, or remotely with a modem and standard phone line. The Tracker BAS supports Comm5 communications architecture, which is the Trane implementation of LonTalkm protocol. It resides on a network (Figure 2 on page 2 and Figure 3 on page 3) that includes HVAC and other comfort -related equipment, such as Trane VariTrac zoning systems; zoning controls; unit control modules (UCMs), which control and monitor other HVAC equipment; Tracer LCI-V (LonTalk© communication interfaces for Voyager rooftop controls); Tracer LCI-R (LonTalkm communication interfaces for ReliaTel rooftop controls); external input/ output (I/O) devices, which help to monitor and control specific areas or devices; and miscellaneous equipment such as sensors, lights, and fans. Figure 1. Tracker controller BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Chapter 1 Overview Figure � .._- Figmwa2. Example Tracker building automation system (models l2and 24)omonetwork ` VariTracmVariTrano zone dampers Voyager constant Precedent rooftop volume rooftop Voyager rooftop with ReliaTel controls Interconnecting (Comm5 link): single, twisted VariTrac central pair, shielded wire for two- control panel way communication. �Tr4cer�, "ra" Utility pulse meter input Universal inputs Analog inputs Binary outputs Binary inputs Outdoor air Binaryoutputs mp* numxennor nP temperature input Tracer �aoorZN5l7 Generic rooftop 1/3modu|o unitary controller Priority shutdown / ! contact input Alarm relay output | | | | | !:i�Tracker controller Tracker PC Workstation Direct, dial -in (modom). or Ethernet connection 2 BMTK-SVN0D-EN BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 3 Chapter 1 Overview Controller components The controller consists of a termination module, main module, and display module (Figure 4). Figure 4. Tracker controller components Termination module ;play module 4 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Controller components Termination module The termination module (Figure 5) is a housing that provides a termination board and cable access for power, communications, and system input connections. Mounting holes enable it to be mounted on a wall or a recessed conduit box. The termination board accepts connections for power, communications, and system inputs. Figure 5. Termination module Cable access (three places) nnation j BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Chapter 1 Overview Main module The main module (Figure 6) is a housing that contains the main logic board and the Ethernet board. The main module can be "hot swapped": it can be removed and installed without removing power from the termination module. When the main module is installed onto a powered termination module, it receives power and begins to operate automatically. The main logic board provides an Ethernet LAN port, a PC interface port, and a modem port. It provides an internal interface to termination module I/O. It also provides Comm5 communication, 24 VAC power, alarm, and communication indicators. It communicates and exchanges data with the devices wired to the termination module. It also communicates with the display module. The Ethernet board provides two LED indicators. One shows that an Ethernet link is detected; the other shows that there is serial traffic between the Ethernet board and the main logic board. Figure 6. Main module Ethernet board Main logic board rt Ethernet LAN port 6 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Controller components Display module The display module (Figure 7) is a housing that contains a printed circuit board, liquid crystal display (LCD) touch screen, and an alarm LED. The printed circuit board supports the LCD touch screen and the alarm LED. The touch screen provides the operator access to the user interface program. The display module can be "hot swapped:" it can be removed and installed without removing power from the main module. When the display module is installed onto a powered main module, it receives power and begins to operate automatically. Figure 7. Display module Alarm LED ;Dtouch screen BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Chapter 1 Overview Digit number Model number Model numbers Each controller is identified by a model number that provides information about the controller (Figure 8). Figure 8. Model number definition 6a. 7 14 4 5 .,8 y . 9. B M T K 0 0 0 A A 0 A x 1 0 Digit Description 1-2 BM = Building management 3-4 TK = Tracker 5-7 Customer ID: 000 = Customer sales office (CSO) KBB = Independent wholesale distributor (IWD) 8 A = 24 Vac, 50/60 Hz 9 Ethernet option A = Modem with no Ethernet LAN option B = Modem with Ethernet LAN option 10-11 OA = Design sequence 12 Model/software options: 1 = Model 12 2 = Model 24 3 = N/A 4 = N/A 5 = WSHP (water -source heat pump) 6 = N/A 13 Display options: 1 = LCD touch screen 14 Language options: 0 = English 8 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Tracker controller specifications Tracker controller specifications Table 1 shows the specifications for the Tracker controller. Table 1. Tracker Controller specifications Power 24 Vac nominal (19 Vac to 30 Vac), 50/60 Hz, 1 phase 40 VA minimum, UL Class 2 transformer required Operating environ- From 32°F to 122°F (0°C to 50oC) ment 10% to 90% relative humidity, non -condensing Storage environment From -40`F to 1850F (-400C to 85°C) 5% to 95% relative humidity, non -condensing Cabinet NEMA 1 resin enclosure —plenum rated Mounting Flat wall surface with one of the following recessed conduit boxes: 2 in. x 4 in. (5.08 cm x 10.15 cm) 4in.x4in. (10.15cmx10.15cm) Dimensions Height: 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) Width: 10.25 in. (26.04 cm) Depth: 2.75 in. (6.99 cm) Weight 2.5 Ib (1.13 kg) Analog input 10 kS2 at 770F (25°C) • Thermistor From -50°F to 200°F (-46°C to 93°C) Binary inputs User -supplied dry contacts only. Tracker -supplied • Utility pulse meter voltage of.12 Vdc nominal (10 Vdc to 14 Vdc) at • Priority shutdown 12 mA nominal (10 mA to 14 mA). Binary output Tracker -supplied single -pole single -throw (SPST) dry • Alarm relay contact rated at 24 Vac, 0.5 A maximum Memory backup At power loss, the system backs up memory and stores all data for seven days. After seven days, trends and alarms are not retained. Approvals See Appendix B, Declaration of Conformity. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 9 Chapter .1 Overview UCM maximum capacities for Tracker models 12 and 24 The Tracker model 12 and 24 controllers can control and monitor specific types and numbers of Trane unit control modules (UCMs) as specified in this topic. The supported UCMs are as follows: • HVAC controllers that conform to the LonMark® Space Comfort Con- troller (SCC) profile: the primary controller options are the Voyager rooftop with a Tracer LCI-V, Precedent rooftop with ReliaTel controls and a Tracer LCI-R, and Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Other con- trollers are limited to the Tracer ZN510, ZN511, and ZN524. • VariTrac central control panels (CCPs) with a TCI-V. • Tracer MP503 I/O module.. Table 2 shows the maximum number of each UCM type that can be linked to each Tracker controller model. Any combination of the specified UCMs may be used in aggregate if they do not exceed the maximum. (For example: A fully loaded Tracker 24 controller can control 24 SCC devices, 10 VariTrac CCPs, and 4 Tracer MP503 I/O modules.) The Trane VariTrac CCP is the main controller for either a changeover bypass system configuration or a delivered variable air volume (VAV) system configuration. Any combination of CCP configurations may be used in aggregate, as long as they do not exceed the maximum. Note: • Each VariTrac CCP configured for changeover bypass can control 1 HVAC device and up to 24 VAV UCMs. • Each VariTrac CCP configured for delivered VAV can con- trol 1 HVAC device and up to 32 VAV UCMs. • See repeater information, "Requirements for repeaters on Comm5 communication links" on page 37. Table 2. Tracker controller models 12 and 24 UCM capacities 24 SCC* 24 Trane VariTrac CCP 10 Tracer MP503 1/0 module 4 Total maximum UCMs supported 38 12 SCC* 12 Trane VariTrac CCP 5 Tracer MP503 1/0 module 4 Total maximum UCMs supported 21 * SCCS supported by Tracker are limited to Voyager rooftops, Precedent rooftops with ReliaTel controls, Tracer ZN517, ZN510, ZN511, and ZN524. 10 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN UCM maximum capacities for Tracker model WSHP UCM maximum capacities for Tracker model WSHP The Tracker model WSHP controller can control and monitor specific types and numbers of Trane unit control modules (UCMs) as specified in this topic. The supported UCMs are as follows: • Space Comfort Controllers (SCCs): the primary controller options are the Tracer ZN510, ZN511, and ZN524. Other controllers are limited to Voyager rooftops with a Tracer LCI-V, Precedent rooftops with Reli- aTel controls and a Tracer LCI-R, and Tracer ZN517 unitary control- lers • Tracer loop controller (TLC) • Tracer MP503 I/O module Table 3 shows the maximum number of each UCM type that can be linked to each Tracker controller model. Any combination of the specified UCMs may be used in aggregate if they do not exceed the maximum. (For example: As the table shows, a fully loaded Tracker WSHP controller can control 100 SCC devices, 1 Tracer loop controller (TLC), and 4 Tracer MP503 UO modules.) See repeater information, "Requirements for repeaters on Comm5 communication links" on page 37. Table 3. Tracker controller model WSHP UCM capacities IMPORTANT SCC compressor operation will be enabled only when a TLC is commu- nicating with the Tracker panel. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 11 ,; s Chapter 1 Overview Before installation Before beginning to install the Tracker controller, make sure that you have all the necessary controller components and that they are undamaged. Also, take steps to protect components until they are needed. IMPORTANT Before you install the Tracker hardware, review this guide and other Tracker support literature and create an installation plan. Verify the shipment When the shipment arrives at the job site, carefully unpack the carton. Even though outgoing orders are thoroughly reviewed before leaving the factory, compare the items in the shipment with the shipping authorization paper and verify that all items are present. Verify that the controller model received is the model that you ordered and write down the model number for use later. Note: Contact your sales office to order additional Tracker literature, if needed. Inspect for shipping damage Inspect the items in the shipment to verify that no shipping damage or loss occurred. If your inspection reveals damage or material shortage: • Make the appropriate notation on the carrier delivery receipt. • Immediately file a claim with the carrier, specifying the extent and type of damage and/or shortage found. • Notify the appropriate Trane representative. Store unused components until needed CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Store all Tracker components off -site until most or all of the building construction is complete. Failure to do so could result in damage to components. The termination module is shipped detached from the main module and display module assembly. To protect the controller from damage, Trane recommends storing the main module and display module assembly away from the construction and/or installation site to prevent it from being damaged or lost. Verify that the storage site conforms to the specifications shown in Table 1 on page 9. 12 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN After installation After installation After installing the Tracker hardware, use the post -installation checklist (Table 4) to verify that all installation procedures were completed. Table 4. Tracker controller post -installation checklist Inspect shipment upon receipt Verify that the shipment is complete. Inspect the controller and accessories to verify that there has been no shipping damage or loss. File a damage claim with the carrier, if necessary. Verify that the controller received is the one that was ordered. Write down the controller model number for use later. Verify termination module mounting Verify that the controller is in a safe indoor environment. Verify that the location enables appropriate personnel to access the controller. Verify that the controller is mounted securely with recommended fasteners and screws. Verify that the installation conforms to controller dimensions, recommended clearances, and viewing angles. Verify 24 Vac power wiring Verify that the power wiring complies with applicable codes. Verify the 24 Vac power connection to the controller termination Block TB1. Check the power wiring for shorts and improper grounds. If using conduit connections, make sure separate conduits are used for power and communications. Inspect the controller printed circuit card for damage. Verify input and output wiring Verify that wiring complies with specifications. Inspect all binary and analog terminations at TB1. Verify communication wiring Verify that wiring complies with specifications. Inspect communication wiring between devices. Verify that all connections are properly shielded. Verify wire terminations with a voltmeter Verify that the tests detailed in Table 18 on page 70 provide acceptable values. Verify main module installation Verify that the main module is snapped in tightly against the termination module. Verify that there is LED5 (HRT) activity. Verify display module installation Verify that the display module is snapped in tightly against the main module. Verify that the touch screen illuminates when touched. Verify direct and modem communication wiring Verify that the recommended cable is used for a direct PC connection. Verify that the recommended adapter is used for the direct connection cable. Verify that the direct connection cable is connected to the correct Tracker port. Verify that the phone cable is connected to the correct Tracker port. Verify Ethernet communication wiring Verify that the recommended cable is used for the connection. Verify that the Ethernet connection cable is connected to the correct Tracker port. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 13 MANE Chapter 1 Overview FCC compliance The Tracker controller generates, uses, and radiates radio frequency, energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio and television reception. The Tracker controller has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part 15'of FCC rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a commercial installation.` There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If the Tracker controller does cause interference, consult a radio or television technician for suggestions to correct the problem. Also, the booklet How to Identify and Resolve Radio -TV Interference Problems is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington DC 20402. Order stock number 004-000-00345-4. 14 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN TRANE Chapter 2 Terminationmodule mounting - After unpacking and inspecting the shipment, mount the termination module. The mounting process for the termination module consists of selecting a location and mounting the module. This chapter provides information and procedures that enable you to mount the termination module. Select a location for the controller When selecting a location for the Tracker controller: Y Select a location that is in a clean, non -corrosive, indoor environment. The controller is only intended for indoor installation. • Consider both security and control wire lengths when making the selection. • Select a location that limits controller access to operating and service personnel. • Select a location that conforms to the operating environment described in Table 1 on page 9. The recommended operating environ- ment will extend the life of the electronic components. Verify that the location does not subject the controller to extreme operating condi- tions (including excessive vibration). CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Install the Tracker controller out of direct sunlight. Failure to do so may cause overheating, which could result in equipment damage. IMPORTANT Do not install the Tracker controller near high -power radio signals, elec- trical switching gear, power buses, large motors, or other sources of electrical noise. The electrical interference may lead to control malfunc- tions. Verify location .conformance to controller specifications Verify that the selected location conforms to the applicable controller specifications listed in Table 1 on page 9. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 15 r TRME g. Chapter 2 Termination module mounting Verify location conformance to controller dimensions and clearances Verify that the selected location provides enough space to accommodate the controller (Figure 9) and its minimum clearances (Figure 10 on page 17): • The top clearance allows for ventilation and conduit entry. • The bottom clearance allows for PC cable interface clearance. • The front clearance allows for operation and service access. Figure 9. Dimensions 4L-J Top view 10.25 in. 2.75 in. (26.04 cm) 46.99 cm) 8.75 in. (22.38 cm) Front view Side view Bottom view 16 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Figure 10. Minimum clearances 12 in. (30 cm) T(3 2 in. 0 cm) Select a location for the controller 12 in. 36 in. (30 cm) (91 cm) Front Back 12 in. 54 in. Distance (30 cm) (1.4 nn to floor BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 17 Chapter 2 Termination module mounting: Verify Location conformance to optimal touch screen viewing angles Verify that the height and location enable the user to view the touch screen at the optimal viewing angles (Figure 11). Figure 11. Optimal touch screen viewing angles Side view Top view 18 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i T E® Mount the termination module I Mount the termination module After selecting a suitable location for the Tracker controller, mount the termination module. Mounting consists of securing the termination module to a wall or a 2 in. x 4 in. recessed conduit box (mounted vertically or horizontally) or a 4 in. x 4 in. recessed conduit box (several European ' electrical box sizes are also usable) and installing electrical conduit (optional). Figure 12 shows the conduit access and mounting holes on the termination module. Figure 12. Termination module conduit access and mounting holes Conduit access Conduit connector (three places) Holes for mounting on a 2 it conduit box horizontally (left and right) Two holes for mounting on < (one on each side) Holes for mounting on a 4 in. x 4 in. conduit box Jamb nut (four corners) (attaches to conduit connector) nination board counting on a 2 in. x 4 in. vertically (top and bottom) BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 19 i TRANE" Chapter 2 Termination module mounting Securing the termination module to a wall 1. Mark the location of the two mounting holes on the wall. 2. Set the termination module aside and drill mounting holes. - 3. Secure the termination module to the wall with the supplied hard- ware (#10 x 1 in. screw with plastic anchor). Securing the termination module to a conduit box 1. Remove the screws from the conduit box. 2. Line up the conduit box screw holes on the termination module (Figure 12 on page 19) with the screw holes on the conduit box. 3. Install the screws. Note: When mounting the termination module to a 4 in. x 4 in. conduit box, removing the plastic cover over the box will provide easier access. Do not attempt to break away excess plastic. Instead, use a hack saw blade and carefully cut away the plastic. 20 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN I __j IF' i TISANE° Mount the termination module Installing electrical conduit Use the conduit openings on the top of the Tracker termination module to supply power or communication wires to the controller. If the controller is mounted on a wall, you must use electrical conduit. If the controller is mounted to a conduit box through which power, input/ output, and communications are supplied, you do not need to use electrical conduit. IMPORTANT The 24 Vac wire conduit may not contain input/output or communica- tion wires. Failure to comply will cause the Tracker controller to mal- function due to electrical noise. 1. Remove one of the 7/8 in. (22 mm) diameter plugs at the top of the ter- mination module (Figure 13). 2. Install 1/2 in. (12 mm) conduit connector (Figure 12 on page 19) in opening. 3. Install the conduit jamb nut on the conduit connector threads and tighten it to secure the connector to the Tracker panel. Figure 13. Electrical conduit installation 3.0 in. (7.62 cm) n 1.5 in. 0 7/8 in. (3.81 cm) (0 22 mm) Termination module top view 0.75 in. (2.02 cm) BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 21 i 22 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN MANEO i Chapter 3 Termination board wiring After mounting the termination module, wire the termination board. The wiring process consists of wiring the termination board to 24 Vac power, inputs, outputs, and UCMs. This chapter provides information and procedures that enable you to wire the termination board. Figure 14 on page 24 shows all field wiring connections. Refer to the required and optional supply checklists in Appendix A (Table 15 and Table 16 on page 65) to verify that you have the materials required to wire the Tracker controller. When termination board wiring is complete, use the termination module post -installation checklist in Appendix A (Table 18 on page 70) to verify the wiring. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 23 Legend - ED = Transformer Twisted pair, shielded wire _ — = Earth ground per Trane specifications V' Thermistor device per E = Shield termination = Shield ground Trane specifications = Termination resistor T = Contact points = Figure note Figure Notes: 1 All customer wiring must be in accordance with national, state, and local electrical codes. 2 Trane recommends a dedicated transformer for 24 Vac power. 3 Alarm relay circuit must not exceed 24 Vac, 1 A. 4 Do not apply voltage to the priority shutdown inputs. 5 Example of Comm5 communication link wiring. See product -specific literature for Comm5 wire connection details. 24 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Wire 24 Vac power Wire 24 Vac power After the termination module is mounted in the selected location, wire 24 Vac power to the termination board. Table 5 shows the specifications for power wiring. Table 5. Power wiring specifications 24 Vac Power input Trane recommends 18 AWG (1.02 mmz) wire and T131-1, T61-2, 24 Vac nominal (19-30 Vac), 50/60 Hz, metal conduit. Earth ground T131-3 1 phase 40 VA minimum, class 2 Low voltage (24 Vac) wire must comply with transformer required National. Electrical Code (NEC) and federal, state, and local electrical codes. IMPORTANT The 24 Vac wire conduit may not contain input/output or communica- tion wires. Failure to comply may cause the Tracker controller to mal- function due to electrical noise. 1. Route input wires into the termination module through the conduit box or any of the conduit access openings designated for input and communication wiring (Figure 12 on page 19). 2. Wire the two 24 Vac power input wires and the ground wire to the controller 24 VAC terminals (Figure 14 on page 24) BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 25 Wire optional inputs and outputs The Tracker controller provides input and output terminals as follows: • Input for an optional priority shutdown device • Input for an optional utility pulse meter • Input for an optional outdoor air temperature sensor • Output terminal for an optional alarm relay Refer to Table 6 for input and output wire specifications, and to the termination board wiring diagram in Figure 14 on page 24 for wiring all inputs and outputs. Alarm relay output Binary output Trane recommends 18 AWG (1.02 mm2) wire and metal TB1-4, TB1-5 Dry contact conduit. Operating range: 24 V, 1 A Maximum length = 1000 ft (305 m) *t maximum Priority shutdown Binary input Trane recommends 18-22 AWG (1.02 mm2-0.643mm2) device input Operating range: wire and metal conduit. TB1-6, TB1-7 12Vdc nominal Maximum length = 1000 ft (305 m) *t (10 Vdc to 14 Vdc) at Utility pulse meter 12 mA nominal (10 mA to 14 mA) input < 50.4 = switch closed TB1-8, T61-9 > 1000 Q = switch open Thermistor input Analog input for an outdoor air Shielded wire, 18-22 AWG (1.02 mm2-0.643mm2) TB1-10, TB1-11, temperature sensor twisted pair shield ground TB1-12 Operating range: Maximum length = 300 ft (91 m) *t From -50°F to 200OF (-46°C to 93°C) Thermistor, 10 kQ at 77°F (25°C) * All field -installed binary wiring is low voltage and must comply with National Electrical Code (NEC) and federal, state, and local electrical codes. t Alarm relay wires and 24 Vac wires may reside in the same conduit. t Do not run input wires and ac power wires together in the same conduit or wire bundle. 26 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Wire optional inputs and outputs Wire the alarm relay Wire the alarm relay to the termination board output. CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Use a dedicated power transformer for this output. Failure to do so will damage the main module, if the alarm output is powered from the Tracker 24 Vac input (TB-1 and TB-2) and the circuit shorts to ground. 1. Route input wires into the termination module through a conduit opening (Figure 12 on page 19) or the conduit box. 2. Connect the wires to the ALARM RELAY terminals on the termina- tion board (Figure 14 on page 24). 3. Connect the other end of the wires to the customer -supplied power supply and load. Wire the priority shutdown device Wire the priority shutdown device to the termination board input. 1. Route input wires into the termination module through a conduit opening (Figure 12 on page 19) or the conduit box. 2. Connect the wires to the PRIORITY SHUTDOWN terminals on the termination board (Figure 14 on page 24). 3. Connect the other end of the wires to the contacts of the priority shut- down device. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 27 i TRME i Chapter 3 Termination board wiring j Wire the utility pulse meter Wire the utility pulse meter to the termination board input. 1. Route input wires into the termination. module through a conduit opening (Figure 12 on page 19) or the conduit box. 2. Connect the wires to the METER INPUT terminals on the termina- tion board (Figure 14 on page 24). 3. Connect the other end of the wires to the pulsed -output contacts of the electrical meter. Wire the thermistor The thermistor input is for a Trane outdoor air temperature sensor only. The input cannot be used for any other purpose. Using wire that meets j the specifications listed in Table 6,on page 26, wire the thermistor to the termination board input. i j 1. Route input wires into the termination module through a conduit opening (Figure 12 on page 19) or the conduit box. 2. Connect the wires to the THERMISTOR terminals on the termination board (Figure 14 on page 24). j 3. Connect the shield to the ground terminal. i The thermistor input is not polarity sensitive. 4. Connect the other end of the wires to the thermistor device. IMPORTANT Tape the shield at the sensor. Any connection between the shield and ground will cause a malfunction. 28 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN F Wire the UCMs Wire the UCMs The Comm5 communication link connects unit control modules (UCMs) to the Tracker termination module. Each controller has one Comm5 communication link. This topic includes information and procedures for wiring a UCM to a termination module: Note: Do not exceed the maximum number of UCMs that can communicate on a Tracker controller (see "UCM maximum capacities for Tracker models 12 and 24" on page 10.for details) Wire specifications Tracker Comm5 communication -link and sensor wiring is low -voltage Class 2 wire and must be field -supplied and installed in compliance with NEC and local codes. To prevent electrical noise interference, all wiring must comply with requirements outlined in this topic for wire selection and link -wiring topology. Trane recommends that you use Level 4 (Echelon) shielded cable for the Tracker communication link wiring between the Tracker and the Comm5 UCMs to which it communicates. Trane also recommends that you use it for communication wiring between the VaiiM-ac CCP and its associated VariTrac or VariTrane UCMs, and for sensor wiring to these devices. Level 4 cable is available in shielded, plenum and non -plenum versions. Level 4 cable is available from Trane-approved suppliers as well as other suppliers. Table 7 on page 30 shows the Trane approved suppliers; Table 8 on page 31 provides the specifications for Level 4 compliant cables. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 29 r Chapter 3 Termination board wiring I Table 7 Trane-approved wire suppliers Connect -Air International Level 4 1 Shielded plenum W221 P--2002 Phone: 1-800-247-1978 22 AWG UL type CMP FAX: 1-253-813-5689 (0.643 m m 2 ) Web: www.connect-air.com Level 4 1 Shielded non -plenum W221 P-1003 22 AWG UL type CM (0.643mm2) Windy City Wire Level 4 1 Shielded plenum 106500 Phone: 1-800-379-1191 22 AWG UL type CMP FAX: 1-708-493-1380 (0.643m m2) Web: www.smartwire.com Level 4 1 Shielded non -plenum 107600 22 AWG UL type CM - (0.643mm2) Category 4 cable is not the same as Level 4 cable and should not be used. The Echelon Level 4 cable specification was originally defined by the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and differs from the Category 4 specification proposed by the Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA). 30 1 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN do resistance (Maximum resistance of a single copper conductor regardless of whether or not it is solid or stranded and regardless of whether or not it is metal coated.) 18.0 Q/1000 feet at 20°C do resistance unbalance (maxi- mum) 5% Mutual capacitance of a pair (maximum) 17 pF/foot Pair -to -ground unbalance (maxi- mum) 1000 pF/foot/1000 feet Characteristic impedance 772 kHz 1.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 8.0 MHz 10.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 102 Q ± 15% 100 Q ± 15% 100 Q ± 15% 100 Q ± 15% 100Q±15% 100 Q ± 15% 100 S2 ± 15% Attenuation (maximum dB/1000 feet at 20°C) 772 kHz 1.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 8.0 MHz 10.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 4.5 dB/1000 feet at 20°C 5.5 dB/1000'feet at 20°C 11.0 dB/1000 feet at 20°C 15.0 dB/1000 feet at 20°C 17.0 dB/1000 feet at 20°C 22.0 dB/1000 feet at 20°C 24.0 dB/1000 feet at 20°C Worst -pair near -end crosstalk (minimum) (Values shown are for information only. The minimum NEXT cou- pling loss for any pair combina- tion at room temperature is to be greater than the value determined using the formula NEXT (FMHz)>NEXT(0.772)-15jogjo (FMH7/ 0.72) for all frequencies in the range of 0.772 MHz-20 MHz for a length of 1000 feet.) 772 kHz 1.0 MHz 4.0 MHz 8.0 MHz 10.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 20.0 MHz 58 dB 56 dB 47 dB 42 dB 41 dB 38 dB 36 dB dc resistance unbalance (maxi- mum) 5% 31 32 rJNNE" Wire the UCMs Figure 16. Daisy -chain configuration for UCM communication -link wiring with Tracker controller in middle of link Trane UCM Trane UCM Trane UCM Trane UCM Figure Note: • Maximum wire length for daisy -chained wiring is 4593 ft (1400 m) unless a Comm5 repeater is used. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 33 MANEO Chapter 3 Termination board wiring Termination resistor placement for Comm5 links Install one 105 Q resistor across the communication link terminals of the device at the beginning of the daisy chain, which is typically a Tracker controller. Then install a second 105 0 resistor across the communication terminals at the last UCM on each link. See Figure 17 on page 35 for an example of a link that begins with a Tracker controller. See Figure 18 on page 36 for. an example of a link that does not begin with a Tracker controller. note: If, after installation, the link is extended to add more UCMs, the resistor must be relocated to the new last UCM on the link. IMPORTANT For maximum performance of the Comm5 link, use the 105 Q resistors that are included with the Tracker controller. If they are not available, as a second choice, use a 100 Q, 1/4 W, 5% tolerance resistor, or as a third choice, a 110 Q,'/4 W, 5% tolerance resistor. Failure to comply may cause the controller to malfunction. The resistor value can be determined by reading its color bands. Table 9 i provide the resistor color coding. ! Table 9. Resistor color band table 105 Q ± 1 % tolerance Brown, black, green, brown 100 92 ± 5% tolerance Brown, black, brown, gold 110 Q ± 5% tolerance Brown, brown, brown, gold If a repeater is used; each link of the configuration that is created by the repeater requires termination resistors (see "Requirements for repeaters on Comm5 communication links" on page 37). Create a set of as -built drawings or a map of the communication wire layout during installation. Ensure that sketches of the communication layout show the placement of the termination resistors. 34 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i TJMNE I .Figure 17. Daisy -chain termination resistor placement Tracker termination board TB1 (Last device on the link) apace /3\ Figure Notes: 1 105 4 termination resistor 2 Shield must be cut back and taped at last unit controller. 3 A continuous shield is required. At each unit controller, splice shield wire and tape back to prevent grounding. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 35 ��., � ���� ��,. �� . ,r�n�, .: �� 6 ;� ViAlly `., Wire the UCMs Wire supported UCMs Wire the supported UCMs to the Tracker termination board. When installing communication wire: • Keep the polarity consistent throughout the site. Although Comm5 is not polarity sensitive, consistency will improve serviceability. • Strip away a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) of the.outer conductor and foil shield when splicing or terminating shielded wire. IMPORTANT Use extreme care when stripping away the outer conductor and foil shield. Be careful not to nick the insulating jacket of the two conduc- tors. A nick in the insulating jacket will cause communication problems. Wire the UCMs as follows: 1. Install termination resistors in the correct locations. 2. Route input wires into the termination module through the conduit box or any of the conduit openings designated for input and communi- cation wiring (Figure 12 on page 19). 3. Connect the wires to the COMM terminals on the termination board . (Figure 14 on page 24). 4. Connect the shield to the ground terminal. 5. Connect the other end of the wires to the UCMs, as necessary. Requirements for repeaters on Comm5 communication links The Comm5 communication link repeater is a device that repeats and regenerates the signal on a Comm5 link in order to enhance signal quality or extend the length of the run. The Comm5 link goes from the Tracker controller to the UCMs to the repeater. A second link segment extends from the other side of the repeater to the rest of the devices. The configuration on either side of the repeater must be a daisy -chain configuration. Both link segments require termination. A link repeater is required when: • The total wire length is greater than the maximum wire run length of 4593 ft (1400 m) for a daisy -chain configuration. • More than 60 devices are connected to a link. This total does not include the Tracker controller, the link repeater, and the possible use of the Rover service tool on the same link. The link repeater has several limitations: • Only one link repeater can be used on a link. • The use of a repeater doubles the maximum allowable wire length. For example, when a repeater is used with a daisy -chain configura- tion, the total wire length can be 9186 ft (2800 m) (with half the wire length on either side of the repeater). BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 37 jMANE Chapter 3 Termination board wiring • The link repeater is limited to 60 devices on either side of the link (120 devices total). • The link repeater requires an earth ground. The installer should be aware of this before making power connections. Recommended shield connections are shown in Figure 19. Figure 20 on page 39 shows a daisy -chain repeater connection. Follow these guidelines when using a repeater: • Reference the installation information that comes with the link repeater (Comm5 repeater installation, 3270 3285). • Connect the shield -drain wires entering the repeater to a terminal marked with a capacitor symbol. The entering shield -drain wire must be connected to earth ground at the Tracker controller. • Connect the shield -drain wires leaving the repeater to the repeater terminal marked with an earth ground symbol. s i Figure 19. Connecting communication link shield wiring to repeater Link Repeater Entering starting a - Leaving shield. Must be connected to the earth ground terminal on the repeater and terminated (insulated from ground) at the last LICK Legend = Transformer S = Earth ground = Twisted pair, shielded wire = Shield ground perTrane specifications 38 a BMTK-SVN01 D-EN TRANE" Wire the UCMs Figure 20. Comm5 daisy -chain repeater connection L \ L Splice 0 Legend Twisted pair, shielded wire [ = Shield termination perTrane specifications Shield ground A = Figure note = Termination resistor Figure Notes: 1 105 Q termination resistor 2 Shield must be cut back and taped. 3 A continuous shield is required. At each controller, splice shield wire and tape back to prevent grounding. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 39 40 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN MANE Chapter 4 Main module mounting After mounting and wiring the termination module, attach the main module to the termination module. This chapter provides information and procedures that enable you to mount the main module. Note: The Tracker controller ships with the display module assembled to the main module. If those two modules are assembled, performing this procedure also mounts the display module. Note: It is not necessary to turn off 24 Vac power to the Tracker controller prior to mounting or removing the main module. 1. Verify that all wires on the termination module are securely fastened in place. 2. Carefully line up the alignment pins on the termination module with the back side of the main module (Figure 21 on page 42). CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Do not use excessive force when mounting the module. If the module does not snap easily into place, slightly reposition it on the alignment pins. Failure to comply may cause damage to the module. 3. Firmly push the main module onto the termination module until it snaps into place. If 24 Vac power is applied, the main module will start. If the display module is not assembled to the main module, you will see the LEDs on the main module flash on and off after a few sec- onds. If the display module is assembled to the main module, it will turn on and display information. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 41 j Chapter 4 Main module mounting Figure 21. Main module mounting Termination module Alignment pin (four places) Main module 42 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN TRANEO Chapter 5 Display module mounting After mounting the main module, attach the display module to the main module. This chapter provides information and procedures that enable you to mount the display module. Note: The Tracker controller ships with the display module assembled to the main module. If those two modules are assembled, you need only to perform the main module mounting procedure (Chapter 4, "Main module mounting"). Note: It is not necessary to turn off 24 Vac power to the Tracker controller prior to mounting or removing the display module. 1. Tilt the top of the display module about 30 degrees toward you. 2. Line up the three tabs on the bottom of the display module with the slots on the bottom of the main module (Figure 22 on page 44). 3. Starting with the center tab, insert the tabs into the slots. CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Do not use excessive force when mounting the module. If the module does not snap easily into place, slightly reposition it on the alignment pins. Failure to comply may cause damage to the module. 4. Push the top of the display module toward the main module until it snaps into place while making sure that the tabs on the display mod- ule engage the slots on the main module (Figure 23 on page 45). If 24 Vac power is applied to the Tracker controller, the display module will turn on and display information. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 43 Chapter 5 Display module mounting Figure 22. Tab and slot alignment BMTK-SVN01D-EN 45 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i T E® RJ-12 interface cable 3591 4260 9-pin female modular adapter 3591 4262 25-pin female modular adapter 3591 4263 The cable and adapter are not shipped with the Tracker controller and must be purchased separately. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 47 - TRANE Chapter 6 PC workstation wiring IMPORTANT Do not use a standard phone cable for a direct connection. The RJ-12 cable is a 6-wire straight -through cable. Failure to comply will cause the Tracker controller to malfunction. IMPORTANT The maximum allowable length of the RJ-12 cable is 50 ft (15 m). Failure to comply may cause the Tracker controller to malfunction. 1. Locate the RJ-12 cable and the appropriate adapter. 2. Connect the RJ-12 cable to the RJ-12 port on the bottom side of the controller (Figure 24). 3. Connect the other end of the RJ-12 cable to a 9-pin or 25-pin adapter, as appropriate (Figure 25 on page 49). 4. Connect the adaptor to the appropriate serial port on the PC worksta- tion. I Figure 24. Tracker communication ports psi /I ll g , `h LAN RJ-45 port RJ-12 port RJ-11 port (Ethernet connection) (PC direct connection) (modem connection to standard telephone line) 48 BMTK-SVNO TRANE" .Figure 25. Tracker direct connection to a PC workstation LAN RJ-45 port for future Ethernet RJ-12 port for PC connection direct connection (bottom side) (bottom side) Connect RJ-12 to 9-pin female adapter F; . To PC workstation serial port Direct connection to PC workstation RJ-12 cable Connect RJ-12 to 25-pin female adapter BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 49 I TRANE I� Chapter 6 PC workstation wiring Modern connection to PC workstation To make a modem connection between the controller and a PC workstation, you need an RJ-11 cable (standard telephone cable). Note: The Trane Company reserves the right to support only selected modems for the Tracker PC workstation. This ensures proper operation of the Tracker software and makes troubleshooting easier, if a communication failure occurs. �,I Modem specifications are subject to change. For a current list of `specified modems, contact your localTrane office: 1. Connect a RJ-11 cable (standard telephone cable) into the RJ-11 port on the bottom side of the controller (Figure 24 on page 48). 2. Connect the other end of the cable to a phone jack, a port on an exter- nal modem, or the PC workstation modem port (Figure26 on page 51). The incoming modem port is typically labeled "Line" or "Line in." Note: Use the Tracker software to set the communication port that the modem will use. e, 50 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN I rRANEO Figure 26. Tracker modem connection to a PC workstation Phone jack 110-1 l I I IVUOI I I I ul l Modem connection to PC workstation 11 modem port tom side) 11 cable Tracker PC Workstation BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 51 Ethernet connection to PC workstation Connecting over an existing LAN To make an Ethernet LAN connection between the Tracker controller and a Tracker PC Workstation through an existing customer LAN, you need two CAT 5 patch cables. 1. Connect one end of the first CAT 5 patch cable to the RJ-45 Ethernet port on the bottom side of the Tracker controller (Figure 27 on page 52). 2. Connect the other end of the cable to an RJ-45 Ethernet wall jack near the controller. 3. Connect one end of the second CAT 5 patch cable to an RJ-45 Ether- net wall jack near the Tracker PC Workstation. 4. Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ-45 Ethernet port on the PC workstation. Figure 27. Tracker Ethernet LAN connection to a PC workstation over an existing LAN Tracker Controller t LAN port (bottom side) cker Workstation 52 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN CAT 5 patch cable BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 53 CAT 5 / crossover cable 54 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Chapter 7 Troubleshooting components Light -emitting diodes (LEDs) and service pin buttons are used for troubleshooting the Tracker system. LEDs The LEDs on the Tracker controller main logic board and display module show central processing unit (CPU) status and traffic on the Comm5 communication link, the Ethernet module, and the EIA-232 connection. Figure 30 shows the location of the main logic board LEDs; Table 11 on page 57 provides a description of them. Figure 30 shows the location of the Ethernet module LEDs; Table 11 on page 57 provides a description of them. Figure 7 on page 7 shows the location of the alarm LED on the display module; Table 12 on page 57 provides a description of it. Service pin buttons and jumper Table 13 on page 58 describes the service pin buttons that are located on the main logic board. They are used for rebooting the controller and for Neuron identification. The table also describes the jumper that is on the main logic board. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 55 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Figure 30. Tracker controller main logic board component location 0 H X P 0 000 0 0 00 0 0 H RT LED5 noBOP LED3 St O LED4 Q LI CODE SERVICE r— ..Dg ' o C© LED2 PC RX PCB S2 LED7 LED8 i Ethernet Left Right board LED LED 56 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Troubleshooting components Table 11. Tracker main logic board LEDs HI TX LED6 Green Flashes when the main module attempts to communicate with the display module. The main module attempts to communicate with the display module even when the display module is not installed. With no display module installed, the LED flashes every two seconds. HRT LED5 Green Shows the status (heart beat) of the CPU. This LED is on continuously while the controller boots up. It flashes to show processor activity. CODE LED4 Red Shows the status of the controller operating code. This LED is on continuously while the controller is booting up and/or whenever the controller needs operat- ing code. Note: Code can be downloaded to the Tracker controller with the use of the Tracker PC software if this LED is on. PC RX LED7 Green Shows that EIA-232 traffic is on the PC port. This LED is normally off. Flashes when the controller receives data from the PC. PC TX LED8 Green Shows that EIA-232 traffic is on the PC port. This LED is normally off. Flashes when the controller transmits data to the PC. BOP LED3 Red Flashes when the controller binary output relay is energized and when an appropriate alarm condition exists. SERVICE LED9 Red Shows that Comm5 service is required. This LED is normally off. LED is on continuously to show that controller hardware is defective. LED is on continuously to show that the Service pin button (SW2) was pressed: Flashes to show that the controller must be rebooted. Comm LED2 Yellow Shows that network traffic is on the Comm5 link. Flashes when the controller receives data from a Comm5 device. Left LED None Green Shows that an Ethernet link is detected. Right LED None Green Shows that there is serial traffic between the Ethernet module and the Tracker main logic board. Table.12. Alarm LED Normal Green LED is on continuously when the controller is operating normally and has received no alarms of the appropriate severity. Alarm Red Flashes when the controller receives an alarm of the appropriate severity. To acknowledge the alarm and turn off the LED, press the Alarm function button displayed on the user interface home screen. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 57 I ". TRANE Chapter.7 Troubleshooting Table 13. Main logic board service pin buttons and jumper S1 This service pin is the reset button. Pressing S1 reboots the controller. It starts the same operation as does rebooting the controller from either the controller or the PC software. All RAM data is permanently lost. Note: Before pressing this button, attempt to restart the controller by cycling power; this method retains the RAM image. S2 Momentarily pressing this service pin button causes the controller to broadcast Neuron ID and Program ID. This action also turns on LED9. J1 This jumper is for factory use only. It must always remain in place. If removed, the backup capacitor will not charge and data may be lost if power is lost. 58 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN rRA E® Symptom/action troubleshooting Symptom/action troubleshooting Table 14 provides a list of symptoms that indicate a problem in the Tracker system. For each symptom, the table provides one or more actions that you can perform in an attempt to resolve the problem. Table 14. Symptom/action troubleshooting MW Action Tracker controller does not • Verify that the telephone cable is connected to the PC modem port (Figure 24 on communicate by modem. page 48). • Verify that the phone line is an analog line (not digital). • Perform the modem self -test procedure from the display module. Note: The modem is an integral component of the main module and is not field replaceable. Replacement of the modem requires replacement of the main module. Tracker controller does not • Verify that the cable is connected to the PC direct connect port (figure 24 on communicate by EIA-232 page 48). port. • Verify that the proper cable is used. (Refer to Table 10 on page 47.) • Verify that the PC workstation is using the Tracker controller software; other com- munications software will not work. • Look for activity on the PC RX LED (Figure 30 on page 56). Tracker controller did not . When the controller is initially powered up, it automatically discovers all communi- discover UCMs when ini- cating UCMs of the proper type and installs them into its database. The discovery tially started. process takes several minutes, depending on how many UCMs are installed on the communication link. After the controller has built its database after the initial power up, the controller no longer automatically discovers UCMs. If you want to initiate the discovery process, you must do so manually. Initiate the discovery process when a new UCM is added to the system or an existing UCM is replaced. • Verify proper wiring of the Comm5 communication link. (UCMs can be discov- ered only if Comm5 communication has been established.) • Wait at least 5 minutes for the controller to discover the UCMs. Note: You can press the service pin button on a UCM at any time to check if it is communicating with the controller. Pressing the service pin button. causes the UCM status LED to flash on and off (known as "winking"), if the controller is communicating with that UCM. Touch screen beeps when Touch screen is out of calibration. touched but does not • Perform the procedures for calibrating the touch screen in TrackerBuilding Auto - progress to the next screen. mation System Controller Operations guide (BMT-SVU01A-EN). Touch -screen back light and • Perform the adjust brightness and contrast procedure from the display module. contrast is out of adjust- ment. Tracker 1/0 status is wrong. • Verify electrical connection using the post -installation checklist (Table 18 on page 70)• • Verify 1/0 status as indicated on home display on the display module. • Display Tracker 1/0 status self test from display module. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 59 MM Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Table 14. Symptom/action troubleshooting (Continued) Symptom M.c� Action w Tracker alarm output is not • Confirm proper wiring of the alarm relay output. Consult the post -installation working as expected. checklist (Table 18 on page 70) for details. • Initiate the BOP self test from the display module. Note: The binary output is for alarm notification only. There must be an unacknowledged alarm present of the proper severity to actuate the alarm output. Tracker controller will not • Look for wiring problems (shorts or opens, for example) that develop when wire communicate with its is damaged during installation. UCMs. • Look for shorts between the two conductors resulting from nicks in the insulating jacket. (This can be caused by improper technique when stripping away the outer jacket and shield.) • Look for a strong source of EMI/RFI interference nearby. • Look for ac power disturbances from nearby transformers and electrical equip- ment. This is especially true when running communication links in close proxim- ityto florescent lighting ballasts. • Verify the UCM has not failed. • Verify proper termination resistance. Tracker processor is locked • Cycle power to the Tracker main module by removing it from the termination up. module. • If the processor is still locked up after cycling power to the controller, perform a reboot from the display module or the PC software (if the controller is able to communicate). • If the controller will not respond to the above listed methods, push the reset but- ton (S1) on the main module (see Figure 30 on page 56). Note: Heartbeat LED (HRT LED5) will be solid green. Alarm LED on the display is • At the Tracker controller user interface home screen, push the alarm button on flashing red. the display module to acknowledge the alarm, then take the proper corrective action. Note: The alarm LED flashes when the controller receives an alarm of the appropriate severity. Pressing the Alarm button acknowledges the alarm and turns off the flashing LED (until the control- ler receives another alarm of the appropriate severity). Tracker controller is annun- • At the Tracker controller user interface home screen, push the alarm button on ciating an alarm. the display module to acknowledge the alarm, then take the proper corrective action. Note: The alarm relay energizes when the controller receives an alarm of the appropriate severity. Pressing the alarm button acknowledges the alarm and turns off the alarm relay output (until the controller receives another alarm of the appropriate severity). Display module is not illu- • Press anywhere on the touch screen surface to turn the back light on. The control- minated. ler automatically turns off the back light during extended periods of inactivity to conserve energy and bulb life. • Confirm that the controller has 24 Vac power. When the display module has power, the alarm LED will be either solid green or flashing red. Display module does not • Confirm that the controller has 24 Vac power. When the display module has respond to the touch. power, the alarm LED will be either solid green or flashing red. • If the display module is not responding correctly when the display module is powered up and the back light is on, initiate the touch -screen calibration proce- dure from the display module. 60 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i rRANEO I Symptom/action troubleshooting i Table 14. Symptom/action troubleshooting (Continued) Tracker controller displays • Verify if the electrical power has been off for more than 1 week (the actual time the wrong date. varies depending on storage temperature). • Verify that jumper pin A on the main module is in place. Note: The controller default date (displayed when the controller is initially powered up or whenever the super capacitor is unable to back up the controller time) is January 1, 2000. Outdoor air temperature is • Measure the resistance of the outdoor air temperature thermistor (preferably at not reading correctly. the termination module). Check the measurement using Table 19 on page 71. • Inspect the location of the outdoor air temperature sensor. It must not be mounted in the sunlight or near another source of radiant heat. Note: The outdoor air temperature sensor can be used for this purpose only. Ethernet link is not detected • Verify that the correct type of cable is used. When communicating over a network, (on the Ethernet board, the use a patch cable. When communicating to an Ethernet card on a lap top com- left LED is off) puter, use a crossover cable. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 61 62 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i F TRANEO Chapter 8 Maintenance The only maintenance necessary for the controller is to occasionally clean and calibrate the touch screen. Cleaning the touch screen To clean the touch screen, wipe it off with a non-abrasive cloth. For more aggressive cleaning, use low-pressure compressed air to blow off the surface and then wipe it off with a non-abrasive cloth. To clean fingerprints from the touch screen, lightly spray it with a mild glass cleaner. Immediately wipe the touch screen with an absorbent, non i abrasive cloth. CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! R _ , Immediately wipe moisture from the surface of the LCD touch screen. Failure to do so will cause the operator display to malfunction. i Calibrating the touch screen To calibrate the touch screen: 9 1. At the Tracker home screen, press the Advanced button. The Advanced. Selections screen displays; 2. Press the Calibrate Touch Screen button. A calibration screen dis- plays. CAUTION Avoid Equipment Damage! Do not allow the touch screen to come in contact with sharp objects. 3. Touch the target using a small, pliable, blunt object, such as a pencil eraser. Hold until the beeping stops. A second calibration screen dis- plays. 4. Again, touch the target with the object. Hold until: the beeping stops. The Advanced Selection screen displays. 5. To exit this procedure, press the Home button. The home screen dis- plays. BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 63 64 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN i Optional supplies Table 16 lists the supplies that may or may not be necessary, depending ° on the Tracker installation. i E Table 16. Optional supplies checklist ' Q Inputs/output wrong. installation Item y� ' ❑ Alarm relay wiring 18 AWG (1.02 mm2) wire and metal conduit ❑ Priority shutdown 18-22 AWG (1.02 mm2-0.643 mm2) wire and wiring and metal conduit Meter input ❑ Thermistor wire 18-22 AWG (1.02 mm2-0.643 mm?) twisted pair, shielded wire ❑ Alarm relay power Power supply for alarm relay output (not to supply exceed 24 Vac) ❑ Alarm relay output Load for alarm relay output (not to exceed load 1 amp at 24 Vac) ❑ Thermistor Outdoor air temperature sensor. 65 E i TRANE Appendix A Installation checklists Comm5 UCM identification and location Each UCM has a unique 12-digit identifier that serves as its address. The Tracker controller uses the address to communicate with the UCM. The installer must know the UCM addresses when assigning names to UCMs during setup. Use Table 17 to record the name, location, and ID of each UCM (SCCs, VariTrac CCPs, and I/O modules) connected to the Comm5 link. The 12 digit identifier is on a sticker attached to the UCM. Some UCMs have peel -away stickers that can be detached and applied to the table. Table.17. Comm5 UCM identification and location Space Comfort Controllers (24 maximum) "MA , ; ..- i Edted name, „n ,il+;v '4 .,, Location or,.area served �`.Zds. - z _r,.Wi ..• � 12 digit ID BMTK-SVN01 D-EN I TRANEO L Comm5 UCM identification and location .Table 17. Comm5 UCM identification and location (Continued) BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Table 17. Comm5 UCM identification and location (Continued) VariTrac centralcontrol"""panels (10 ma mum) ,'" Editetl name � Location or area served 12 digit I y �. 1/0 modules i4 maximum).. Edited name'. Location orarea,served ;, 1�2'digrt ID'gr BMTK-SVN01 D-EN f I I I MANEO Pre -installation wiring notes Pre -installation wiring notes The wiring for the Tracker system will have been completed prior to Tracker installation. All Tracker wiring conforms to the following, guidelines: • The Tracker controller receives 24 Vac from a dedicated power circuit. If not, the Tracker controller may malfunction. • Each UCM receives 24 Vac from a dedicated power source. If not, the UCM may malfunction. • Input wires and ac power wires are run in separate conduits or wire bundles. If not, the Tracker controller may malfunction due to induced electrical noise. • Comm5 cable and ac power wires are run in separate conduits or wire bundles. If not, the Tracker controller may malfunction due to induced electrical noise. • UCM communication cables do not run near lighting ballasts or other transformers. If they do, the UCM may malfunction due to induced electrical noise. i e I i BMTK—SVN01 D—EN 69 f Termination module post -installation checklist Use Table 18 to verify, that the circuits connected to the termination board on the termination module are wired correctly. Record test results in the "Actual value" column. Table 18. Termination module post -installation checklist 24 Vac . Measure the voltage between TB1-1 and TB1-2. It must be 24 Vac. T131-1, nominal (19 Vac to 30 Vac). Measure the voltage between TB1-1 and TB1-3. it must be approxi- mately the same voltage as measured between T61-1 and TB1-2 TB1-2, TB1-3 ✓ The ground wire must be connected to terminal TB-3. it must be tied to building or earth ground at nearest location. Measure the voltage between T131-2 and T131-3. It must be approximately 0 V. . Alarm relay Measure the voltage between T131-4 and T131-5. It must not exceed T1314,: 24 Vac. Jumperthese two terminals. The user -supplied load should T131-5 now be. energized and active. Priority There must be no voltage applied to these terminals. These termi shutdown nals must be connected to dry contacts only. Measure the resis- T131-6, tance between TB1-6 and T131-7. It must be approximately Q with 713177 the user -supplied contacts in the closedposition, and infinity ohms with the contacts in the open position. Meter input There must be no voltage applied to these terminals. The terminals T131-8, must be connected to dry contacts only. Measure the resistance TB1-9 between TB1-8 and TB1-9. It must be approximately 0 Q with demand meter contacts in the closed; position, and infinity ohms with the contacts in the open position. Thermistor . There must be no voltage applied to these terminals. The cable T131-10;' shield must be connected to terminal T131-1.2. Measure the resis- TB1-11, tance between TB1=10 and T131-11. Note the approximate temperature at the location of the outdoor TB1-12 air temperature sensor. Compare the resistance and temperature values to the listed val- ues in Table 19 on page 71. Comm There must be no voltage applied to these terminals. Measure the T61-13, T131-14, ✓ resistance between TB1-13 and T131-14. The resistance must be approximately 50 4 with daisy -chained wiring. This test confirms TB1-15 the correct usage of the termination resistors as well as the conti- nuity of the wire. e ! TRA NE Termination module post -installation checklist Table 19. Thermistor sensor electrical characteristics 72 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN T E Appendix B Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer's Name: Trane Manufacturer's Address: 4833 White Bear Parkway Saint Paul, Minnesota 55110 USA The manufacturer hereby declares that the product: Product Name: Tracker model 12, 24, and water -source heat pump (WSHP) Product Number: BMTKOOOAAOA110 BMTKKBBABOA110 BMTKOOOAAOA210 BMTKKBBABOA210 ' BMTKOOOAAOA510 BMTKOOOABOA110 BMTKKBBAAOA110 BMTKOOOABOA210 BMTKKBBAAOA210 BMTKOOOABOA510 Conforms to the following standards or other normative documents: Electromagnetic Emission: . EN 50081-1:1998 (by Council Directive 89/336/EEC) Radiated EN55022: 1998 Class B limit Conducted EN55022: 1998 Class B limit Electromagnetic Immunity: EN61000-6-1:2001 ! EN61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge ±8 kV air discharge EN61000-4-3 3 V/m EN61000-4-4 ±1 kV EN61000-4-5 ±1 kV EN61000-4-6 3 V EN61000-4-11 1 cycle/100% UL and C-UL listing 916, Energy management equipment Flammability rating UL 94-5V (UL flammability rating for plenum use) FCC FCC Part 15, Class A, CFR 47 When and where issued Electromagnetic Emission: 4/9/2003 Electromagnetic Immunity: 4/10/2003 Saint Paul, Minnesota USA Mark of Compliance Bounheng Saycocie Design/Compliance Engineer European Contact Societe Trane (Epinal, France) 1, rue des Ameriques, B.P. 6 F-88191 Golbey Cedex, France Phone: (33) 329.31.73.00 Fax: (33) 329.81.24.98 74 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Numerics 24 Vac power wiring, 25 A adapters for direct connection to PC, 47 alarm relay wire requirements, 26 wiring procedures, 27 analog input, 9 thermistor, general, 26 thermistor, wiring, 28 binary input priority shutdown device input, wiring, 27 priority shutdown device, general, 26 utility pulse meter, general, 26 utility pulse meter, wiring, 28 binary output alarm relay, general, 26 alarm relay, wiring, 27 C cabinet specifications, 9 cable for direct connection to PC, 47 cable installation CAT 5 crossover cable, 52 CAT 5 patch cable, 52 calibrating the touch screen, 63 capacities for UCMs, per controller, 10,11 CAT 5 crossover cable cable installation, 52 CAT 5 patch cable cable installation, 52 checklist optional supplies, 65 post -installation for termination module, 70 post -installation, general, 13 required supplies, 65 cleaning the touch screen, 63 clearances, minimum, 17 Comm5 communication daisy -chain repeater connection, 39 LonTalk communication interface, 1, 10,11 repeater connection to shield wiring, 38 repeater description, 37 requirements for repeaters, 37 status and traffic, 55 termination resistor placement, 34 Tracker BAS support, 1 wire specifications, 29 wiring procedures, 29-40 components description, 4 display module, 7 main module, 6 shipment, 12 storage, 12 termination module, 5 conformance to dimensions and clearances, 16 connection to PC workstation, 47 controller dimensions, 16 figure, 1 location selection, 15 minimum clearances, 17 model number definition, 8 overview, 1 PC connection, 47 specifications, 9 D daisy -chain configuration repeater connection, 39 termination resistor placement, 35, 36 UCM wiring, 32, 33 dimensional specifications, 9 dimensions, 16 clearances, 16 conformance, 16 direct connection to PC, 47 diagram, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54 procedures, 48 display module description, 7 LED, 55, 57 mounting, 43-44 tab and slot alignment, 44 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 75 TRANEO E description, 6 mounting, 41-42 EIA-232 connection maintenance, 63 installing, 47 memory backup, 9 LEDs, 55 meter, utility pulse electrical conduit installation, 19, 21 wire requirements, 26 electrical interference, 15 wiring procedures, 28 Ethernet communication port, 48 model numbers, 8 Ethernet connection to PC modem connection to PC, 50 procedures, 52 diagram, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54 procedures, 50 RJ-11 communication port, 48 mounting display module, 43-44 1/0 modules main module, 41-42 maximum capacity per controller, specifications, 9 10,11 termination module, 15-21 1/0 options, 26 MP503 1/0 module, 10, 11 installation after, 13 N before, 12 checklists, 65-71 direct connection to PC, 47 Neuron identification, 55 electrical conduit, 19, 21 Ethernet LAN connection to PC, 52 modem connection to PC, 50 0 operating environment, 9 J outdoor air temperature sensor wire requirements, 26 jumper wiring procedures, 28 function, 58 overheating, 15 general, 55 P L PC communication port LAN communication port, 48 RJ-11, 48 LCI-R, 1, 10, 11 RJ-12, 48 LCI-V, 1, 10, 11 PC workstation connection LEDs, 57 diagram, 49, 51, 52, 53, 54 CPU status and traffic, 55 direct, 47 display module, 55, 57 Ethernet LAN, 52 EIA-232 status and traffic, 55 modem, 50 main logic board, 55, 57 wiring, 47 location post -installation checklist, 13 choosing, 15 power requirements, 9, 25 conformance to specifications, 15, pre -installation wiring notes, 69 18 priority shutdown device input controller size accommodation, 16 wire requirements, 26 LonTalk see Comm5 communications wiring procedures, 27 M R main logic board, 57 rebooting, 55 jumpers, 58 repeater LEDs, 55 connections to Comm5 link shield service pin buttons, 58 wiring, 38 main module daisy -chain connection, 39 76 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN Index description, 37 limitations, 37 requirements, 37 wiring, 29 RJ-11 cable installation, 50 modem connection procedures, 50 PC communication port, 48 RJ-12 cable installation, 47 direct connection procedures, 48 parts specifications, 47 PC communication port, 48 RJ-45 Ethernet connection procedures, 52 S SCCs maximum capacity per controller, 10,11 service p,in buttons, 55, 58 shipment component verification, 12 inspect for damage, 12 Space Comfort Controllers (SCCs), 10, 11 specifications analog input, 9 binary input, 9. binary output, 9 cabinet, 9 Comm5 wire, 29 dimensions, 9 for direct connection to PC workstation, 47 input and output wire, 26 memory backup, 9 mounting, 9 operating environment, 9 power requirements, 9 storage environment, 9 weight, 9 storage environment, 9 storage of components, 12 sunlight effects, 15 thermistor see outdoor air temperature sensor touch screen calibrating, 63 cleaning, 63 height, 18 Tracer LCI-R, 1, 10, 11 LCI-V, 1, 10, 11 ZN510, 10, 11 ZN511, 10, 11 ZN517, 10, 11 ZN524, 10, 11 Tracer MP503 1/0 module, 2, 3 Tracer ZN517 unitary controller, 2, 3 Tracker BAS controller, 1 description, 1 on network, 2, 3 software, 1 workstation, 1 troubleshooting, 55-61 components, 55 jumper, 55 service pin buttons, 55 symptom/action table, 59 u UCMs maximum capacities per controller, 10,11 SCC, 10, 11 termination resistor placement, 34 Tracer MP503 1/0 module, 10, 11 types, 10, 11 VariTrac CCPs, 10, 11 wire specifications, 29 wiring configurations, 29, 32, 33 wiring procedures, 37 wiring, daisy -chain configuration, 32,33 V VariTrac CCP, 10, 11 VariTrac CCPs T maximum capacity per controller, 10,11 termination board wiring, 23-40 termination module description, 5 mounting, 15-21 post -installation checklist, 70 pre -installation wiring notes, 69 termination resistor daisy -chain configuration, 35, 36 placement, 29, 34 W water -source heat pump maximum capacities, 11 model numbers, 8 overview, 1 weight specifications, 9 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN 77 TRANEO Index i wire Comm5, 29 requirements for alarm relay, 26 requirements for meter, 26 requirements for outdoor air temperature sensor, 26 requirements for priority shutdown device input, 26 specifications, 29 wiring 24 Vac, 25 alarm relay, 27 configurations for Comm5 UCM communication, 32 daisy -chain configuration, 32, 33 l/O terminals, 26 outdoor air temperature sensor, 28 PC connection, 47 priority shutdown device input, 27 procedures for UCMs, 37 repeaters, 29 termination board, 23-40 UCMs, 29-40 utility pulse meter, 28 � Z ZN ZN510, 10, 11 �. ZN511,10,11 - ZN517, 10, 11 ZN524, 10, 11 78 BMTK-SVN01 D-EN ,. Literature Order Number BMTK-SVN01 D-EN File Number SV-ES-BAS-BMTK-SVN-0ID-EN-0204 Supersedes SV-ES-BAS-BMTK-SVN-0IC-EN May 2003 Trans Stocking Location Inland A business of American Standard Companies _. www.trane.com Trans has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to For more information, contact your local Trane change design and specifications without notice. Only qualified technicians should perform the installa- office or e-mail us at comfort@trane.com tion and servicing of equipment referred to in this publication. Installation a • Operatio n Tracer TM ZN517 Unitary Controller �Z C �cm y i n c � � t Co� 0 CNT-SVX 12C-EN April 2005 Tracer ZN517 Unitary Controller Installation and Operation This guide and the information in it are the property of American Standard Inc. and may not be used or reproduced in whole or in part, without the written permission of American Standard Inc. Trane, a business of American Standard, Inc., has a policy of continuous . product and product data improvement and reserves the right to change design and specification without notice. Although Trane has tested the hardware and software described in this guide, no guarantee is offered that the hardware and software i are error free. Trane reserves the right to revise this publication at any time and to make changes to its content without obligation to notify any per- son of such revision or change. I Trane may have patents or patent applications covering items in this publication. By providing this document, Trane does not imply giving license to these patents. Tm ® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of Trane: Trane, Tracer, Tracker, Rover. Tm ® The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations: LonTalk and Neuron from Echelon Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A. © 2005 American Standard Inc. All rights reserved. CNT SVX12C-EN TRANIE° NOTICE: Warnings and Cautions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual. Read these carefully: &WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. &CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION Indicates a situation that may result in equipment damage or property damage. The following format and symbol conventions appear at appropriate sections throughout this manual: IMPORTANT Alerts installer, servicer, or operator to potential actions that could cause the product or system to operate improperly but will not likely result in potential for damage. Note: s A note may be used to make the reader aware of useful information, to clarify a point, or to describe options or alternatives. ♦ This symbol precedes a procedure that consists of only a single step. CNT-SVXI2C-EN -1 TRANE' Table of contents Chapter 1 Overview and specifications .... ...... ... . 1 Product description .......................................... 1 Dimensions................................................. 1 Clearances ................... .............. ............. 2 Power........................................................ 2 Operating environment ....................................... 2 Storage environment .......................................... 4 Agency listing/compliance.......... ................... .. 4 { Factory default temperature setpoints ............. , 4 Additional components ....................................... f Power transformer ........................................ 6 I Zone temperature sensors .. ...... ...... ............ 6 Discharge air temperature sensors ........................... 6 Damper actuators (optional) ................................ 6 Chapter2, Mounting the controller ..................... 7 Location recommendations. ....................... .......... 7 Mounting recommendations ................................... 8 Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration... ............. 9 Wiring requirements and options .............................. 10 DIP switch settings .... ................ .................. 12 Binary outputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications .................... 13 Binary output 5.......................................... 13 Overriding binary outputs................. .............. 14 Binary inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications ...................... 14 1311: Occupancy or generic ................................. 14 B12: Fan status ........................................... 14 CNT SVX12C-EN Table of contents Analog inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications ..................... 15 All: Universal 4-20 mA .......... ...... , .... ..... 15 AI2: Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature .......... 17 DAT Discharge air temperature..... ...... .... ..... 17 ZN: Zone temperature .................................... 18 SET Temperature setpoint................................. 18 Chapter 4 Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration .............................. 19 Power -up sequence..........................................19 Cascade zone control........................................20 Simplified zone control .......................... ......... 20 Occupancy modes........... .. .........20 Occupied mode .......................................... 21 Unoccupied mode... ............ ......................21 . Occupied standby mode .................................. 21 Occupied bypass mode ................................... 22 Timed override control ....................................... 22 Outdoor air damper operation ................................. 22 Fan operation ............................................ .23 Peer -to -peer communication .................................. 23 Economizing ................................... ..........23 Discharge air tempering ...................................... 24 Demand control ventilation ........ ................ ....... 24 "Unit protection strategies........... ................ 24 Filter -maintenance timer .............................. 25 Fan off delay ............ :............................... Fan status..............................................25 Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration ...... 27 Wiring requirements and options .... ................... ... 28 DIP switch settings ........................ ................30 Binary outputs for 4-cool applications .......................... 31 Binary output ..........................................31 Overriding binary outputs ................................. 31 Binary inputs for 4-cool applications ............................ 32 Bll: Occupancy or generic...............................32 B12:Fan status ................... ......................32 Analog inputs for 4-cool applications ........................... 33 ii CNT SVX12C-EN TRANE Table of contents I All: Universal 4-20 mA ... ........... ........... 33 4 Al2: Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature .......... 35 DAT: Discharge air temperature ............................ 35 ZN: Zone temperature ......... ......... . 36 SET: Temperature setpoint ................................ 36 Chapter 6 Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration. .. ... . ... .. 37 Power -up sequence ............. . .... 37 Cascade zone control ....................................... 38 Simplified zone control ................................... 38 Occupancy modes .............. .. .......... 38 Occupied mode ..... ...... . .... 39 Unoccupied mode .... ....... .. ........ ... . 3 Occupied standby mode .......... ..... .. ..... 39 3 Occupied bypass mode ... ..... ....... 40 i Timed override control, ..... ..... ................ 40 Outdoor air damper operation ......... ..... 40 Fan operation . .......... .. 41 Peer -to -peer communication ....... ........ ................. 41 Economizing .................................. ..... . 41 Discharge air tempering.... ................ ........: ... 42 Demand control ventilation ................................... 42 Unit protection strategies ....... ... .......... . . 42 Filter -maintenance timer .................................. 43 Fan off delay . ........................... .. 43 Fanstatus .............................................. 43 Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration . 45 Wiring requirements and options .............................. 46 DIP switch settings ...................... .................... 48 Binary outputs for heat pump applications ...................... 49 Binary output 5.......................................... 49 Overriding binary outputs ................................. 49 Binary inputs for heat pump applications ..................... 50 B11: Occupancy or generic ....................... .... . 50 B12: Fan status ....................................... 50 Analog inputs for heat pump applications ....................... 51 All: Universal 4-20 mA................................... 51 TMNE e Table of contents AI2`. Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature .......... 53 DAT: Discharge air temperature ............................. 53 ZN: Zone temperature .................................... 54 SET: Temperature setpoint................................. 54 Chapter 8 Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration ..... ... ... ... 55 Power -up sequence ......................... ....... 55 Cascade zone control. ................. . .... 56 Simplified zone control ........:... ....... . 56 Occupancy modes ...................................... ....56 Occupied mode... ..... ......: ..... ............... 57 Unoccupied mode........... .... ...... .. .. . 57 Occupied standby mode . . . .... ...... 57 Occupied bypass mode .... ..... ... ..... ..... 58 Timed override control .................................... .. 58 Outdoor air damper operation....... .. .. ... 58 Heating or cooling mode ........... . ................ ... 59 Fan operation.. ............ ............. . 59 _ Compressor operation .............................. .59 Reversing valve operation .................................... 59 Economizing................................... ..........60 Discharge air tempering ...... ................ ....... 60 Demand control ventilation ................................... 60 Peer -to -peer communication . .. ........ ... . 61 Unit protection strategies ......................... . .. .. . 61 Filter -maintenance timer . ..... ....... .... 61 Fan off delay .............. .............................62 Fanstatus ............................... ...... ....62 Chapter 9 PID control ........................... . 63 What PID loops do ......................... . ..... .. . 63 PID calculations. .............. .. ...... 64 Proportional calculation .. ........ ..... 64 Integral calculation ............. ............. ..... .. 64 Derivative calculation ......... .......... ..... ....... 65 Sampling frequency ..... .. .............................. 65 PID loop action . ................ .......... ...... .. 68 Direct action ......................... ....... ...... 68 iv CNT SVX12C-EN MANE Table of contents Reverse action .......................................... 68 Error deadband ............................................. 69 Adjusting error deadband for modulating outputs......... 69 Adjusting error deadband for staged outputs ................. 69 Other PID settings...... ................ ................. 71 Troubleshooting procedure ...... ....... .............. 71 Tips for specific problems ... . . ................ 72 Changing the sampling frequency ...................... 72 Changing the gains ....... ...... .............. .. 72 Chapter 10 Status indicators for operation and communication.. .. 73 Test button........ .................... 73 Manual output test......... ......... .......... 71 Service Pin button.. .... ................ ... ..... 74 Interpreting LEDs . ....... . . .... .. 76 Diagnostics .. ............. .... ............ 78 Diagnostic types..... ..... ..... . 78 Table of diagnostics .. .............. . ...... .. 79 Chapter 11 General wiring information ........ 81 Input/output terminal wiring . .............. ... ........ 81 Wiring specifications ..................................... 81 HVAC unit electrical circuit wiring ........................... 82 AC power wiring ........... .. ............ ..... 85 Communication -link wiring and addressing ..................... 86 0 i Chapter 12 Troubleshooting ........................... 87 Initial troubleshooting ....... ........ .................... 88 Diagnosing operational problems .............................. 88 Index.............. .......... .........93 CNT-SVX12C-EN rRAHE• Chapter 1 Overview and specifications This guide provides installation and configuration information for the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller, as well as a description of its operations. The overview includes a product description, specifications, and descrip- tions of ancillary products that may be necessary. Product description The Tracer ZN517 is an application -specific controller that provides direct digital, zone temperature control. The controller can operate as a stand-alone device or as part of a building automation system (BAS). Communication between the controller and a BAS occurs via a LonTalk communication link, which is based on the LonTalkO protocol. The controller is designed to be field -installed and is sent from the factory configured for a 2-heat/2-cool application. You can change this configura- tion using the DIP switches located on the circuit board. The Tracer ZN517 supports the following three configurations: • 2-heat/2-cool with optional economizer control. • 4-cool with optional economizer control • Heat pump with optional economizer control Features such as discharge air tempering and demand control ventilation can be configured using the Rover service tool. Note: For information about using the Rover service tool, see the Rover Operation and Programming guide (EMTX-SVX01B- EN). Dimensions Plastic -cover model dimensions For complete dimensional drawing, see Figure 1 on page 3.. • Height: 5.375 in. (137 mm) • Width: 6.875 in. (175 mm) • Depth: 2 in. (51 mm) CNT-SVX12C-EN 1 TRANS' Chapter 1 Overview and specifications Metal -cover model dimensions For complete dimensional drawing, see Figure 2 on page 3. • Height: 9.0 in (25 mm) • Width: 10.37in. (263 mm) • Depth: 2.25 in. (58 mm) Clearances For wiring, ventilation, and maintenance, provide the following minimum clearances for the module: Plastic -cover model (see Figure 1 on page 3) • Front: 4.0 in. (102 mm) • Each side: 1.0 in. (25 mm) • Top and bottom: 4.0 in. (102 mm) Metal -cover model (see Figure 2 on page 3) • Front: 24.0 in. (610 mm) • Each side:.2.0 in. (51 mm) • Top and bottom: 1.0 in. (25 mm) The transformer must meet the following minimum requirements for the controller and its output devices: 19-30 Vac (24 Vac nominal) • 50/60 Hz • 9 VA and 12 VA maximum per binary output utilized Operating environment Operate a Tracer ZN517 unitary controller in an indoor environment that meets the following requirements: • Temperature: From —40°F to 160°F (-40°C to 70°C) • Relative humidity: From 5-90%, noncondensing 2 CNT SVX12C-EN TRANEO Figure 1. Plastic -cover model dimensions and clearances 1 in. (25 mm) T 4 in 4 in (102 mm) (102 mm) ' 4 in 5.625 in 6.31 in. (102 mm) (143 mm) I (160 mm) Operating environment 15 in i mm) 5.375 in (137 mm) 2 in. (51 mm) s �— Clearances Dimensions r e figure 2. Metal -cover model dimensions and clearances 1 in. (25 mm) 1. 875 in. 48 mm) 6.5 in. T O I ~— (165 mm) i f o °-� __ 0.28 in. ®per O -- — —®— — (7 mm) 9 in. (229 mm) I ® ®I 7 in. I I 9 in. (178 mm) I I (229 mm) I j 2 in. 2 in. j (51 mm).17 (51 mm) A I I ° 24 in.. 10.37 in. 1 in. ® �' (610 mm) (263 mm) (25 mm) ° width with cover 10.25 in. �—Clearances 25 in. (260 mm) 1 in. (58 mm) width without cover Dimensions (25 mm) CNT-SVX12C-EN 3 Chapter 1 Overview and specifications Storage environment If you are storing a Tracer ZN517 unitary controller for a substantial amount of time, store it in an indoor environment that meets the. following requirements: • Temperature: From —40° to 185°F (-40° to 85°C) • Relative humidity: From 5-95%, noncondensing Agency listing/compliance CE—Immunity: EN50082-2:1995 EN61000-6-2:1999 CE—Emissions: EN61000-3-2:1995 EN61000-3-3:1995 EN50081-1:1992 (CISPR 22) EN55011:1998, Class B UL and C-UL 916 listed: Energy management equipment UL 94-5V (UL flammability rating for plenum use) FCC Part 15, Class A, CFR 47 Factory default temperature setpoints The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller relies on a number of temperature setpoints to control HVAC equipment. Table 1 gives the factory defaults for these setpoints, which can all be edited with the Rover service tool or a BAS. Table 1. Factory default temperature setpoints Default setpoints Occupied cooling 74.0°F (23.3°C) Occupied standby cooling 78.0°F (25.6°C) Unoccupied cooling 85.0°F (29.4°C) Occupied heating 71.0°F (21.7°C) Occupied standby heating 67.0°F (19.4°C) Unoccupied heating 60.0°F (15.6°C) Occupied setpoint limits Cooling setpoint high limit 110.0°F (43.3°C) Cooling setpoint low limit 40.0°F (44.4°C) 4 CNT SVX12C-EN rRAHEO Factory default temperature setpoints Table 1. Factory default temperature setpoints Heating setpoint high limit 105.0°F (40.60C) Heating setpoint low limit 40.0°F (44.4°C) Discharge air limits High limit 170.E°F (77.00C) .Low limit .37.4°F (3.0°C) Control point high limit 150.8°F (66.0°C) Control point low limit 44.6°F (7.0°C) Outdoor air damper setup Economizer enable temperature 53.6°F (12.0°C) CNT SVX12C-EN 5 Chapter 1 Overview and specifications Additional components The following components are required for proper equipment operation. They are not included with the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Addi- tional components may also be required besides those described in this section, depending on your application. Power transformer A transformer providing 24 Vac is required to power the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller and associated output relays and valve and damper actuators (see "AC power wiring" on page 85). Zone temperature sensors Table 2 shows some of the Trane zone temperature sensors that are sup- ported by the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Contact your Trane sales office for information about other compatible zone sensors. Table 2. Trane zone temperature sensor options AW F `y Timed overnde r t ,BAS W Zone buttons rx order number Comm lack Setpoint thumbwheel Temperature pn n Cancel o� sens 4190 1086 x x x 4190 1087 x 4190 1088 x x x x 4190 1089 x x 4190 1090 x x x x x 4190 1094 x x x 4190 7015 x (stainless steel wall plate) Discharge air temperature sensors Discharge air temperature sensors must be Trane 10 kQ (at 25°C) ther- mistors. The discharge air temperature (DAT) input may use a sealed temperature sensor (part number 4190 1100) or a duct/immersion tem- perature sensor (part number 4190 1103). Damper actuators (optional) Actuators cannot exceed 12 VA draw at 24 Vac. Use actuators with on/off action and spring return (to normally open or closed position), based on the desired default position. 6 CNT SVX12C-EN rRME' Chapter 2 Mounting the controller This chapter gives recommendations and requirements for mounting the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Location recommendations For rooftop and heat pump applications, the controller can be mounted inside the unit or at a convenient location inside the_building. Trane recommends locating the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller: • Near the controlled piece of equipment to reduce wiring costs • Where it is easily accessible for service personnel • Where public access is restricted to minimize the possibility of tam- pering or vandalism CNT SVX12C-EN 7 PRlWE' Chapter 2 Mounting the controller Mounting recommendations Mounting recommendations are as follows: IMPORTANT Mount the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller with the cover on to avoid the possibility of damaging the circuit board during installation. • Mount the controller in any direction, other than with the front of the cover facing downward. • Mount using the two 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) radius mounting holes provided (see Figure 3). Mounting fasteners are not included. • Attach the controller securely so it can withstand vibrations of associ- ated HVAC equipment. • When the controller is mounted in a small enclosed compartment, complete all wiring connections before securing the controller in the compartment. Figure 3. Mounting the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller 8 CNT SVX12C-EN TIRANE° Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration This chapter provides information.for wiring input and output terminals and setting DIP switches for typical 2-heat/2-cool applications. The func- tion of inputs and outputs is also defined for these applications. The types of 2-heat/2-cool applications supported by the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller are: • Rooftop units with or without economizers Split systems with or without economizers CNT-SVXI2C-EN 9 6 MANE Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration Wiring requirements and options Table 3 shows required controller inputs for minimal proper operation of all 2-heat/2-cool applications. Table 3. Required controller inputs for all 2-heat/2-cool applications 24 Vac power Terminals: GND,24 V "AC power wiring" on page 85 Zone temperature Terminals: ZN, GND "ZN: Zone tempera - or communicated ture" on page 18 Table 4 shows optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications. Table 4. Optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications Economizing Input: "Economizing" on DAT (discharge air temperature) page 23 Input: AI2 (outdoor air temperature) Outputs: 24 V (24 Vac common) OPN (binary output) CLS (binary output) Discharge air Input: DAT "Discharge air tem- tempering* pering" on page 24 Demand control Input: "Demand control ventilation* All (CO2 sensor) ventilation" on page 24 Cascade control Input: DAT "Cascade zone con- trol" on page 20 In order to use this function, the economizing function must be enabled. Figure 4 on page 11 shows a wiring diagram for the Tracer ZN517 that includes all required and all optional components for 2-heat/2-cool appli- cations. CNT-SVXI2C-EN TRANS° Wiring requirements and options Figure 4. Wiring diagram for 2-heat/2-cool applications Power* Tr 1-state Fan modulating Comj2W ressor 1 contactor economizer (optional) mpressor 2 contactor — Heat stage 1 Common Heat stage 2 I I 1 24Vac H ' G Y1 W2 Generic binary output (optional) I I I I 1 ' 1 GND 24VJ�GND 24VI GND 24V OPN CLS Rc Rh G 1 2 9 4 �5N05COM 5NC� STATUS l ll �u ffJJll\\ JJ ll JJJJJ LED AC POWER AC O ECONOMIZER HVAC UNIT BINARY OUTPUT Traced ZN517 LED SERVICE �A CB M A5 BINARY IN$PUT�S ND }ANALO20 All i INPUTi ZONESENSOR -0AT- [ZN GND SET SLED I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I 1 I LonTalk ------- 1 1 ------ 1 I I 1 GND + I I T 0-2 3 O _ , 1 Typical 3-wire ; ;Discharge air LonTalk 4 0 . 1 I I 1 sensor , ,temperature OT *Terminals Rc and Rh are provided as ; ; ; (optional) inputs for 24 Vac power from the con- Occupancy (optional) Outdoor air IS trolled device. If the device has a sepa or generic o�0 0�O Fan status temperature rate heating and cooling units, use Rh (optional) (default: (optional) for heat and Rc for cooling. If corn- normally closed Dry contacts closed = no flow bined, use only Rc (see "HIVAC unit only open = flow) electrical circuit wiring" on page 82). or generic CNT SVX12C-EN 11 Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration DIP switch settings Set the DIP switches on the circuit board for the 2-heat/2-cool configura- tion. The correct settings are shown in Figure 5. Figure 5. DIP switch settings for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration GNO 29UI G1'I] irV �GfW 29V OPN CLS�Rc Rw G 1 2 7 v �I SIU, SCOM:TTATUS ncroRER oUT ECONp117iR HVRC UNIT BINARYOUiMi LED j O N D P 12-heat/2-cool i without economizer oryD' _ 1 2 3 4 Ll ° ON D I P cz .= o -Q 00 �❑O0 o w SERVICE r cams = LED PIN I A e A a FolSt s °II ®Tracer- zmw M T� GGHHTS2'dSte' COPYRIGHT 'Y TWUTS1 ANOLOG INPUTS I 12N 20NESENSORICOMMS -a12- I 0 A11I -Al2- -OAT- GND SETT LED 1 2 3 4 2-heat/2-cool with economizer CNT SVX12C-EN MANE Binary outputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications Binary outputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications This configuration supports rooftop units and split systems applications that have the following components: • Economizer • Supply fan • Cool • Cool • Heat 1 • Heat 2 • Exhaust The Tracer ZN517 controller has eight binary outputs. Each binary out- put is a relay with a rating of 12 VA. Table 5 describes the function of each output for 2-heat/2-cool applications. Table 5. Binary outputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications OPN Economizer, drive open CLS Economizer, drive closed G Supply fan 1 (Y1) Cool stage 1 2 (Y2) Cool stage 2 3 (W1) Heat stage 1 4 (W2) Heat stage 2 5NO/5COM/5NC (binary output 5) Exhaust fan/occupancy/generic Binary output 5 Use the Rover service tool to configure binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC) in one of the following ways. It is the only output that can be configured as a generic binary output. • Not used. • Exhaust fan: Will energize when the economizer outside air damper position is greater than the user -defined control point. • Occupancy: Will energize when the Tracer ZN517 is in.the occupied mode. • Generic: Can be monitored only by a BAS and has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. CNT SVX12C-EN 13 TRANS' Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration Overriding binary outputs Use the manual output test to manually control the outputs in a defined sequence. For more information about the manual output test, see "Man- ual output test" on page 74. Binary inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller has two binary inputs. Each binary input associates an input signal of 0 Vac with open contacts and 24 Vac with closed contacts. Table 6 gives the function of each binary input for 2 heat/2 cool applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding paragraphs. For an explanation of the diagnostics generated by each binary input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 4, "Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration"." Table 6. Binary inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications 'Binary input y� �� %terminal label unction � - IWO ,,.... B11 Occupancy or generic B12 Fan status B11: Occupancy or generic The function of the occupancy input is to save energy by increasing the range of zone setpoints when the zone is unoccupied. BI1 is used for two occupancy -related functions. For stand-alone controllers, this binary input can be hard -wired to a binary switch, clock, or occupancy sensor to determine the occupancy mode —either occupied or unoccupied. For con- trollers receiving a BAS-communicated occupancy request, the function of BI1 is to change the mode from occupied to occupied standby. (For more information on occupancy -related functions, see "Occupancy modes" on page 20.) An occupancy sensor with a binary output may be used. . BI1 is the only input that can be configured as a generic binary input. When configured. as a generic binary input, it can be monitored only by a BAS, and has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. B12: Fan status The fan status input provides feedback to the controller regarding the fan's operating status. If BI2 is wired to a fan status switch and the input indicates that the fan is not operating when the controller has the fan controlled to on, the controller will generate a Local Fan Switch Failure diagnostic. (For more information, see "Fan status" on page 25.) 14 CNT SVX12C-EN Analog inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications Analog inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications The Tracer ZN517 controller has five analog inputs. Table 7 describes the function of each input for 2-heat/2-cool applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding paragraphs. For an explanation of the diag- nostics generated by each analog input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 4, "Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration". Table 7. Analog inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications Analog inputs terminal label Q Funct All Universal analog input Al2 Outdoor air temperature DAT Discharge air temperature ZN Zone temperature (required) SET Temperature setpoint Note: Use a GND terminal as the common ground for all zone sensor analog inputs. See Figure 4 on page 11. All: Universal 4-20 mA The All analog input can be configured in one of the three ways shown in Table 8. Table 8. All configuration options and associated measurement ranges Generic 4-20 mA input 0-100% (4 mA=O%; 20 mA=100%) CO2 measurement 0-2000 ppm (4 mA=O ppm; 20 mA=2000 ppm) Relative humidity (RH) measurement 0-100% (4 mA=O% RH; 20 mA=100% RH) If this input is not needed for an application, configure it as Not Used. This disables the generation of diagnostics. Note: All is polarity sensitive. For the generic input configuration, a 4-20 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal. (Wiring is dependent on the specific applica- CNT SVX12C-EN 15 T E® Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration tion.) The sensor communicates a value of 0-100% to the BAS. This con- figuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. For the CO2 measurement configuration, a 4-20 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal as shown in Figure 6. The sensor will transmit a 0-2000 ppm value to the BAS. This configuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. If a valid value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a CO2 Sensor Failure diagnostic. Figure 6. All terminal wiring: CO2 measurement GND-+20 All Tracer ZN517 24 Vac rJ� , CO2 sensor``' ' (Trane part number: 41904100or41904101) 24 Vac GND Out For the RH measurement configuration, a hard -wired 4-20 mA zone humidity sensor (see Figure 7) must provide a value to the controller. If a valid hard -wired or communicated relative humidity value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates an RH Sensor Fail- ure diagnostic and disables the dehumidification function. The RH sensor is used only to provide a valid humidity reading to a BAS; it does, not affect the operation of the Tracer ZN517. Figure 7. All terminal wiring: RH measurement GND +20 All ®j Tracer ZN517 ' RH sensor Figure Note: The +20 terminal provides 20 ±2 Vdc that is used to power a Trane RH sensor (part numbers 4190 1109, 4190 7011, 4190 7012, 4190 7014). CNT SVX12C-EN _. . Analog inputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications Al2: Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature The AI2 analog input can functions as either: • An outdoor air temperature input • A generic temperature input If AI2 is configured as the local (hard -wired) outdoor air temperature input, the controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kf2 thermistor wired to analog input AI2. An outdoor air tempera- ture value communicated by means of a LonTalk link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both hard -wired and communicated outdoor air temperature values are present, the controller uses the com- municated value. If you set DIP switch 3 to ON for economizing (see "DIP switch settings" on page 12), you automatically configure AI2 as an outdoor air tempera- ture input. Economizing (free cooling) is a function whereby outdoor air is used as a source of cooling before hydronic or DX cooling is used. The Tracer ZN517 uses the outdoor air temperature value to determine whether economizing is feasible. Economizing is not possible without a valid outdoor air temperature. (For more information, see "Economizing" on page 23.) If AI2 is configured as a generic temperature input, it can be monitored by a BAS. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kn thermistor wired to analog input AI2. The generic tempera- ture input can be used with any Trane 10 kf2 thermistor. The thermistor can be placed. in any location and has no effect on the operation of the con- troller. If you set DIP switch 3 to OFF (see "DIP switch settings" on page 12), you automatically configure AI2 as a generic temperature input. Note: AI2 is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead. DAT: Discharge air temperature The DAT analog input functions as the local discharge air temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor wired to analog input DAT. The thermistor is typically located downstream from all unit heating and cooling coils at the unit dis- charge area. Trane recommends the use of a discharge air temperature sensor to uti- lize the cascade control function (see "Cascade zone control' on page 20). Cascade control is a more accurate method of temperature control. If no discharge air temperature sensor is used, the controller will default to control based solely on .the zone temperature (see "Simplified zone con- trol" on page 20). ... Note: DAT is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead., CNT-SVXI2C-EN 17 TRANE° Chapter 3 Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration ZN: Zone temperature The ZN analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) zone temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor in a standard Trane zone sensor wired to analog input ZN. A communicated zone temperature value via the LonTalk communi- cations link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. When both a hard -wired and communicated zone temperature value is present, the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated zone temperature value is present, the controller gener- ates a Space Temperature Failure diagnostic. The ZN analog input is also used to communicate timed override requests and cancel requests to the controller for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with the ON and CANCEL button option. SET Temperature setpoint The SET analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) temperature setpoint input for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with a tem- perature setpoint thumbwheel. Use the Rover service tool or a BAS to enable or disable the local setpoint input. A communicated setpoint value via the LonTalk communications link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both a hard -wired and a communicated setpoint value are present, the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated setpoint value is present, the controller uses the stored default setpoints (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). If a valid hard -wired or communicated setpoint value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a Local Space Setpoint Failure diagnostic. 18 CNT SVX12C-EN A Tracer ZN517 unitary controller configured to control a 2-heat/2-cool unit will operate to maintain the zone temperature setpoint. This chapter discusses many of the operational sequences the controlleruses to accom- plish this goal. Power -up sequence When 24 Vac power is initially applied to the Tracer ZN517 unitary con- troller, the following sequence occurs: 1. The Status (green) LED goes on. 2. All outputs are controlled off. 3. The controller reads all input. local values to determine initial values. 4. The power -up control wait function begins automatically if the config- ured power -up control wait time is greater than zero. When this func- tion is enabled, the controller waits for the configured amount of time (from 10 to 120 seconds) to allow a communicated occupancy request to arrive. If a communicated occupancy request arrives, normal oper- ation can begin. If a communicated occupancy request does not arrive, the controller assumes stand-alone operation. 5. The Status LED goes off. 6. The wait timer expires. 7. The Status LED goes on. 8. If a hard -wired zone -temperature value is not detected, the controller begins to wait fora communicated value. (This can take several min- utes [15-minute default] and occurs concurrently with the remainder of the power -up sequence.) If a communicated zone -temperature value arrives, normal operation can begin when the power -up sequence has concluded. If a communicated zone -temperature value does not arrive, the binary outputs remain off and a Space Tempera- ture Failure diagnostic is generated (normal operation cannot begin without a valid zone temperature value). 9. Normal operation begins assuming no diagnostics have been gener- ated. CNT-SVX12C-EN 19 rRANEO Chapter 4 Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration Cascade zone control Cascade zone control maintains zone temperature by controlling the dis- charge air temperature to control the zone temperature. The controller uses the difference between the measured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint to produce a discharge air temperature setpoint. The controller compares the discharge air temperature setpoint with the discharge air temperature and calculates a unit heating/cooling capacity accordingly (see Figure 8). The end devices (outdoor air damper, valves, etc.) operate in sequence based on the unit heating/cooling capac- ity (0-100%). Figure 8. Cascade zone control Calculated Active zone discharge air Calculated unit temperature temperature heating/cooling setpoint s Difference setpoint ® Difference capacity Measured Measured zone discharge air temperature temperature If the discharge air temperature falls below the Discharge Air Control Point Low Limit (configurable using the Rover service tool) and cooling capacity is at a minimum, available heating capacity will be used to raise the discharge air temperature to the low limit (see "Discharge air temper- ing" on page 24). Simplified zone control In the absence of a discharge air temperature sensor, the. controller uses simplified zone control to maintain the zone temperature. In the unoccu- pied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature by calculating the required heating or cooling capacity (0-100%) according to the mea- sured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint. The active zone temperature setpoint is determined by the current operating modes, which include occupancy and heat/cool modes. Occupancy modes Occupancy modes can be controlled by any of the following: • The state of the local (hard -wired) occupancy binary input BI1 (see "13I1: Occupancy or generic" on page 50) • A timed override request from a Trane zone sensor (see "Timed over- ride control' on page 22) 20 CNT-SVX 12C-EN Occupancy modes • A communicated signal from a peer device (see "Peer -to -peer commu- nication" on page 23) •.. Acommunicated signal from a BAS _ A communicated request, either from a BAS or a peer controller, takes precedence over local requests. If a communicated occupancy request has been established and is no longer present, the. controller reverts to the default (occupied) occupancy mode after 15 minutes (if no hard -wired occupancy request exists). The Tracer ZN517 has the following occupancy mode options: Occupied • Unoccupied Occupied standby • Occupied bypass Occupied mode In occupied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The controller uses the occu- pied mode as a default when other modes of occupancy request are not present. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Unoccupied mode In unoccupied mode, the controller attempts to maintain the zone temper- ature based on the unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The fan cycles between high speed and off. The outdoor air damper remains closed. The controller always uses the stored default setpoint values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS); regardless of the presence of a hard -wired or communicated setpoint value. Occupied standby mode The controller is placed in occupied standby mode only when a communi- cated occupied request is combined with an unoccupied request from occupancy binary input BI1. In occupied standby mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied standby heating or cooling setpoints. Because the occupied standby setpoints are typically spread 2°F (1.1°C) in either direction and the outdoor air damper is closed, this mode reduces the demand for heating and cooling the space. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling) for occupied mode. The controller always uses the stored default setpoint values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS), regardless of hard -wired or com- municated setpoint values. 21 TRANE° Chapter 4 Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration Occupied bypass mode The controller is placed in occupied bypass mode when the controller is operating in the unoccupied mode and either the timed override ON but- ton on the Trane zone sensor is pressed or the controller receives a com- municated occupied bypass signal from a BAS. In occupied bypass mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The controller will remain in occupied bypass mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied bypass time (config- urable using the Rover service tool or a BAS) expires. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default val- ues (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Timed override control If the zone sensor has a timed override option (ON/CANCEL buttons), pushing the ON button momentarily shorts the zone temperature signal to the controller. This short is interpreted as a timed override on request. A timed override on request changes the occupancy mode from unoccu- pied mode to occupied bypass mode. In occupied bypass mode, the control- ler controls the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The occupied bypass time, which resides in the Tracer ZN517 and defines the duration of the override, is configurable (using the Rover service tool or a BAS) from 0 to 240 minutes (default value is 120 minutes). When the occupied bypass time expires, the unit changes from occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. Pushing the CANCEL button momentarily sends a fixed resistance of 1.5 kf2 to the ZN analog input of the controller, which is interpreted as a timed override cancel request. A timed override cancel request will end the timed override before the occupied bypass time has expired and will transition the unit from occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. If the controller is in any mode other than unoccupied when the ON but- ton is pressed, the controller still starts the occupied bypass timer with- out changing the mode to occupied bypass. If the controller is placed in unoccupied mode before the occupied bypass timer expires, the controller will be placed in occupied bypass mode and remain in that mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied bypass time expires. Outdoor air damper operation The Tracer ZN517 does not support a two -position outdoor air damper actuator. However, a modulating, triac, 3-wire floating point actuator with spring return can be used for two -position control. Two -position con- trol can function only when an outdoor air temperature (either hard- wired or communicated) does not exist, and by setting the damper mini- mum position (using the Rover service tool) to the desired value. To con- 22 CNT-SVXI2C-EN Fan operation trol an air damper actuator for two -position control, configure the Tracer ZN517 for economizing (economizing will not function). Fan operation The Tracer ZN517 can be configured to run continuously at a single speed or to cycle on and off automatically. If configured for continuous opera- tion, the fan runs continuously during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. If configured for cycling operation, the fan will cycle if the temperature is away from setpoint during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. During the unoccupied mode, the fan cycles regardless of the fan configuration. IN Peer to -peer communication Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers have the ability to share data with other LonTalk-based controllers. Multiple controllers can be bound as peers, using the Rover service tool, to share: • Setpoint • Zone temperature • Heating/cooling mode • Fan status Unit capacity control Shared data is communicated from one controller to any other controller that is bound to it as a peer. Applications having more than one unit serv- ing a single zone can benefit by using this feature; it allows multiple units to share a single zone temperature sensor and prevents multiple units from simultaneously heating and cooling. Econornizing Economizing (also referred to as "free cooling") uses outside air for cool- ing. The Tracer ZN517 provides two triac (3-wire floating point) outputs to control the damper actuator. One output opens the actuator; the other closes it. The controller also provides analog inputs for both a discharge air temperature sensor and an outside air temperature sensor. While economizing is enabled, the controller`uses a discharge air temperature (DAT) control loop to maintain proper temperature control. The controller opens the outside air damper, turns on the fan, and attempts to maintain a user -defined discharge air temperature. If the outside air is unsuitable for economizer operation, the outside air damper will close and normal operation (DX cooling) will be activated. Economizing plus DX cooling is initiated only when economizing alone cannot meet the zone's cooling requirements. To enable this function, set DIP switch 3 to ON (see "DIP switch settings" on page 12). CNT SVX12C-EN 23 Chapter 4 Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration Discharge air tempering Discharge air tempering (also called supply air tempering) prevents occu- pant discomfort caused by cold outside air being brought into a space through the outside air damper. This is an important feature in cold cli- mates because the outside air damper is never fully closed for ventilation purposes. Discharge air tempering starts when: • The controller is in heating mode. • The space is otherwise satisfied (no heating or cooling required). • Ventilation air is passing through the unit • The discharge air temperature falls 10°F (5.6°C) below the occupied ` heating setpoint. Tempering stops when the occupied heating setpoint is exceeded. To enable this function, use the Rover service tool to select Supply Air Tem- pering Enabled. Demand contr®I ventilation The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller modulates the outside. air damper position in direct response to the CO2 level, regulating the amount of out- door air allowed to enter. This function is referred tows demand control ventilation. Demand control ventilation requires that the two triac (3- wire floating point) outputs be used to control the damper actuator. The minimum damper position will increase as CO2 levels rise above 500 ppm. The function executes with a 3-minute loop frequency to allow time for the sensor to respond. To enable this function, use the Rover service tool to configure the Tracer ZN517 as follows: • Configure Ail as a carbon dioxide sensor • Enter a minimum CO2 level (Control Point) (factory default: 500 ppm). • Enter a maximum CO2 threshold (Threshold) (factory default: 1500 ppm). When the CO2 level reaches the threshold, the minimum position is 100% open. Unit protection strategies The following strategies are initiated when specific conditions exist in order to protect the unit or building from damage: • Filter maintenance timer • Fan off delay • Fan status 24 CNT-SVX12C-EN s Y Unit protection strategies Filter -maintenance timer The filter -maintenance timer tracks the amount of time (in hours) that the fan is enabled. The Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint (Maint Req Time Setpoint), configured with the Rover service tool, is used to set the amount of time until maintenance (typically, a filter change) is needed. If the setpoint is configured to zero, the filter -maintenance timer is dis-. abled. The controller compares the fan -run time to Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint. Once the setpoint is reached, the controller generates a Mainte- nance Required diagnostic. When the diagnostic is cleared, the controller resets the filter -maintenance timer to zero, and the timer begins accumu- lating fan -run time again. Fan off delay The fan stays on for an additional 30 seconds (adjustable with the Rover service tool) to allow the residual cooling or heating energy to be circu- lated through the system. Fan status The controller monitors fan status to protect equipment from overheat- ing. If fan or airflow is not detected for 30'seconds when needed, the i equipment shuts down. I CNT-SVX12C-EN 25 TRNYE' Chapter 4 Sequence of operations for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration 26 CNT SVX12C-EN T E� Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration This chapter provides information for wiring input and output terminals and setting DIP switches for typical 4-cool applications. The function of inputs and outputs is also defined for these applications. The types of 4-cool applications supported by the Tracer ZN517 unitary i controller are rooftop units with or without economizers. CNT SVX12C-EN 27 rE. Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration Wiring requirements and options Table 9 shows required controller inputs for minimal proper operation of all 4-cool applications. Table 9. Required controller inputs for all 4-cool applications 24 Vac power Terminals: GND, 24 V "AC power wiring" on page 85 Zone temperature Terminals: ZN, GND "ZN: Zone tempera - or communicated ture" on page 36 Table 10 shows optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications. Table 10. Optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications Economizing Input: "Economizing" on DAT (discharge air temperature) page 23 Input: AI2 (outdoor air temperature) Outputs: 24 V (24 Vac common) OPN (binary output) CLS (binary output) Discharge air Input: DAT "Discharge airtem- tempering* pering" on page 24 Demand control Input: "Demand control ventilation* All (CO2 sensor) ventilation" on page 24 Cascade control Input: DAT "Cascade zone con- trol" on page 20 * In order to use this function, the economizing function must be enabled. Figure 9 on page 29 show typical applications that include all required and all optional components for 4-cool applications. 28 CNT SVX12C-EN Wiring requirements and options Figure 9. Wiring diagram for 4-cool applications Power* Tri-state Fan modulating I (�_ - ,,.,...,.. , LonTalk 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I I 1 I I In I L--i--i------- t I I I 1 I I I I I I 2 -------------� ------ OUt ° 3 a -------------- -� Typical s wire ; ;Discharge air LonTalk 4 0 *Terminals Rc and Rh are provided as sensor temperature P 1 � � � (optional) 1 1 inputs for 24 Vac power from the con- Occupanc Fan status of Outdoor air trolled device. If the device has a sepa- or generic °�° °�O generic u temperature rate heating and cooling units, use Rh (optional) (optional) (optional) for heat and Rc for cooling. If com- bined, use only Rc (see "HVAC unit Dry contacts electrical circuit wiring" on page 82). only CNTSVX 12C-EN 29 RA E o Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration DIP switch settings Set the DIP switches on the circuit board for the 4-cool configuration. The correct settings are shown in Figure 10. Figure 10. DIP switch settings for the 4-cool configuration rND 2,V�GN0 ?,UI�CJD 191 OPN 0.5��Ra R� G I i l 9 ]ISNO SCOM SMISTRTUS - JL J �l 11DZR `flC OUT ECpi0M12ER WRC UNIT BI1NRf0UfPU1 LED ' ON DIP \\\\ KI 4 cool without I , economizer 1 2 3 4 1, _ — ----- + ON DIP of with economizer economizer 1 2 3 4 ; c s ®Tracer' a+5i M RAHE-- N AMERICAN STD JPC. 0 o F CDPYRIGHT 2061 SERVICE F- COrT'75 trGINARY I—TS �ANOLOG INPUTS —S1-RICOMMS LED PIN I R e A e II -81 I--e12-��ND -20 AI II —Al2— I —DAT— 1 W " SET LED °1 _. 30 CNT-SVX12C-EN TRANE• Binary outputs for 4-cool applications Binary outputs for 4-cool applications This configuration supports rooftop unit applications that have the fol- lowing components: • Economizer • Supply fan • Cool 1 - • Cool • Cool • Cool • Exhaust fan The Tracer ZN517 controller has seven binary outputs. Each binary out- put is a relay with a rating of 12 VA. Table 11 describes the function of each output for 4-cool applications. Table 11. binary outputs for 4-cool applications OPN Economizer, drive open CLS Economizer, drive closed G Supply fan 1 (Y1) Cool stage 1 2 (Y2) Cool stage.2 3 (Y3) Cool stage 3 4 (Y4) Cool stage 4 5NO/5COM/5NC (binary output 5) Exhaust fan/generic/occupancy Binary. output 5 Use the Rover service tool to configure binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC) in one of the following ways. It is the only output that can be configured as a generic binary output. • Not used. • Exhaust fan: Will energize when the economizer outside air damper position is greater than the user -defined control point. • Occupancy: Will energize when the Tracer ZN517 is in the occupied mode. • Generic: Can be monitored only by a BAS and has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. Overriding binary outputs Use the manual output test to manually control the outputs in a defined sequence. For more information about the manual output test, see "Man- ual output test" on page 74. CNT SVX12C-EN 31 Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration Binary inputs for 4-cool applications The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller has two binary inputs. Each binary input associates an input signal of 0 Vac with open contacts and 24 Vac with closed contacts. Table 12 gives the function of each binary input for 4-cool applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding para- graphs. For an explanation of the diagnostics generated by each binary input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 6, "Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration"." Table 12. Binary inputs for 4-cool applications y EPdt` bPl Function 611 Occupancy or generic B12 Fan status B11: Occupancy or generic The function of the occupancy input is to save energy by increasing the range of zone setpoints when the zone is unoccupied. BI1 is used for two occupancy -related functions. For stand-alone controllers, this binary input can be hard -wired to a binary switch, clock, or occupancy sensor to determine the occupancy mode —either occupied or unoccupied. For con- trollers receiving a BAS-communicated occupancy request, the function of BI1 is to change the mode from occupied to occupied standby. (For more information on occupancy -related functions, see "Occupancy modes" on page 38.) BI1 is the only input that can be configured as a generic binary input. When configured as a generic binary input, it can be monitored only by a BAS, and has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. B12: Fan status The fan status input provides feedback to the controller regarding the fan's operating status. If BI2 is wired to a fan status switch and the input indicates that the fan is not operating when the controller has the fan controlled to on, the controller will generate a Local Fan Switch Failure diagnostic. (For more information, see "Fan status" on page 43.) 32 CNT-SVXI2C-EN Analog inputs for 4-cool applications Analog inputs for 4-co®I applications The Tracer ZN517 controller has five analog inputs. Table 13 describes the function of each input for 4-cool applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding paragraphs. For an explanation of the diag- nostics generated by each analog input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 6, "Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration". Table 13. Analog inputs for 4-cool applications All Universal analog input AI2 Outdoor air temperature DAT Discharge air temperature ZN Zone temperature (required) SET Temperature setpoint Note: Use a GND terminal as the common ground for all zone sensor analog inputs. See Figure 9 on page 29. i - All: Universal 4-20 mA The All analog input can be configured in one of the three ways shown in i Table 14. Table 14. All configuration options and associated measurement ' ranges Generic 4-20 mA input 0-100% (4 mA=O%; 20 mA=100%) COz measurement 0-2000 ppm (4 mA=O ppm; 20 mA=2000 ppm) Relative humidity (RH) measurement 0-100% (4 mA=O% RH; 20 mA=100% RH) If this input is not needed for an application, configure it as Not Used This disables the generation of diagnostics. Note: All is polarity sensitive. For the generic input configuration, a 4-20 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal. (Wiring is dependent on the specific applica- tion.) The sensor communicates a value of 0-100% to the BAS. This con- figuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. CNT SVX12C-EN 33 TRAfiIE' Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration For the CO2 measurement configuration, a 4720 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal as shown in Figure 11 on page 34. The sensor will transmit a 0-2000 ppm value to the BAS. This configuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. If a valid value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a CO2 Sensor Fail- ure diagnostic. Figure 11. All terminal wiring: CO2 measurement GND +20 All. Tracer ZN517 24 Vac CO2 sensor_' (Trane part number: 4190 4100 or 4190 4101) 24 Vac GND Out For the RH measurement configuration, a hard -wired 4-20 mA zone humidity sensor (see Figure 12) must provide a value to the controller. If a valid hard -wired or communicated relative humidity value is estab- lished and then is no longer present, the controller generates an RH Sen- sor Failure diagnostic and disables the dehumidification function. The RH sensor is used only to provide a valid humidity reading to a BAS; it does not affect the operation of the Tracer ZN517. Figure 12. All terminal wiring: RH measurement GND +20 All s/ Tracer ZN517 RH sensor Figure Note: The +20 terminal provides 20 t2 Vdc that is used to power a Trane RH sensor (part numbers 4190 1109, 4190 7011, 4190 7012, 4190 7014). 34 CNT SVX12C-EN Analog inputs for 4-cool applications AI2: Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature The AI2 analog input can function as either: • An outdoor air temperature input • A generic temperature input If AI2 is configured as the local (hard -wired) outdoor air temperature input, the controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor wired to analog input Al2. An outdoor air tempera- ture value communicated by means of a LonTalk link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both hard -wired and communicated outdoor air temperature values are present, the controller uses the com- municated value. If you set DIP switch 3 to ON for economizing (see "DIP switch settings" on page 30), you automatically configure AI2 as an outdoor air tempera- ture input. Economizing (free cooling) is a function whereby outdoor air is used as a source of cooling before hydronic or DX cooling is used. The Tracer ZN517 uses the outdoor air temperature value to determine whether economizing is feasible. Economizing is not possible without a valid outdoor air temperature. (For more information, see "Economizing" on page 41.) If AI2 is configured as a generic temperature input, it can be monitored by a BAS. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from. a 10 kS2 thermistor wired to analog input AI2. The generic tempera- ture input can be used with any Trane 10 k92 thermistor. The thermistor can be placed in any location and has no effect on the operation of the con- troller. If you set DIP switch 3 to OFF (see "DIP switch settings" on page 30), you automatically configure Al2 as a generic temperature input. Note: AI2 is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead. DAT: Discharge air temperature The DAT analog input functions as the local discharge air temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kf2 thermistor wired to analog input DAT. The thermistor is typically located downstream from all unit heating and cooling coils at the unit dis- charge area. Trane recommends the use of a discharge air temperature sensor to uti- lize the cascade control function (see "Cascade zone control" on page 38). Cascade control is a more accurate method of temperature control. If no discharge air temperature sensor is used, the controller will default to control based solely onthe zone temperature (see "Simplified zone con- trol" on page 38). Note: DAT is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead. CNT SVX12C-EN 35 .. v—I MANE' Chapter 5 Applications for the 4-cool configuration ZN: Zone temperature The ZN analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) zone temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor in a standard Trane zone sensor wired to analog input ZN. A communicated zone temperature value via the LonTalk communi- cations link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. When both a hard -wired and communicated zone temperature value is present,. the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated zone temperature value is present, the controller gener- ates a Space Temperature Failure diagnostic. The ZN analog input is also used to communicate timed override requests and cancel requests to the controller for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with the ON and CANCEL button option. SET: Temperature setpoint The SET analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) temperature setpoint input for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with a tem- perature setpoint thumbwheel. Use the Rover service tool or a BAS to enable or disable the local setpoint input. A communicated setpoint value via the. LonTalk communications link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both a hard -wired and a communicated setpoint value are present, the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated setpoint value is present, the controller uses the stored default setpoints (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). If a valid hard -wired or communicated setpoint value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a Local Space Setpoint Failure diagnostic. 36 CNT-SVXI2C-EN r Chapter 6 equence of operations for the 4-cool configuration A Tracer ZN517 unitary controller configured to control a 4-cool unit will operate to maintain the zone temperature setpoint. This chapter dis- cusses many of the operational sequences the controller uses to accom- plish this goal. Power; up sequence When 24 Vac power is initially applied to the Tracer ZN517 unitary con- troller, the following sequence occurs: 1. The Status (green) LED goes on. 2. All outputs are controlled off. i 3. The controller reads all input local values to determine initial values. j 4. The power -up control wait function begins automatically if the config- ured power -up control wait time is greater than zero. When this func- tion is enabled, the controller waits for the configured amount of time (from,10 to 120 seconds) to allow a communicated occupancy request i to arrive. If a communicated occupancy request arrives, normal oper- ation can begin. If a communicated occupancy request does not arrive, the controller assumes stand-alone operation. 5. The Status LED goes off. 6. The wait timer expires. 7. The Status LED goes on. 8. If a hard -wired zone -temperature value is not detected, the controller begins to wait for communicated value. (This can take several min- utes [15-minute default] and occurs concurrently with the remainder of the power -up sequence.) If a communicated zone -temperature value arrives, normal operation can begin when the power -up sequence has concluded. If a communicated zone -temperature value does not arrive, the binary outputs remain off and a Space Tempera- ture Failure diagnostic is generated (normal operation cannot begin without a valid zone temperature value). 9. Normal operation begins assuming no diagnostics have been gener- ated. CNT-SVX12C-EN 37 Chapter 6 Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration Cascade zone control Cascade zone control maintains zone temperature by controlling the dis- charge air temperature to control the zone temperature. The controller uses the difference between the measured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint to produce a discharge air temperature setpoint. The controller compares the discharge air temperature setpoint with the discharge air temperature and calculates a unit heating/cooling capacity accordingly (see Figure 13). The end devices (outdoor air damper, valves, etc.) operate in sequence based on the unit heating/cooling capac- ity (0-100%). Figure 13. Cascade zone control Calculated Active zone discharge air Calculated unit temperature temperature heating/cooling setpoint Difference setpoint Difference capacity Measured Measured zone discharge air temperature temperature 0 If the discharge air temperature falls below the Discharge Air. Control Point Low Limit (configurable using the Rover service tool) and cooling capacity is at a minimum, available heating capacity will be used to raise the discharge air temperature to the low limit (see "Discharge air temper- ing" on page 42). Simplified zone control In the absence of a discharge air temperature sensor, the. controller uses simplified zone control to maintain the zone temperature. In the unoccu- pied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature by calculating the required heating or cooling capacity (0-100%) according to the mea- sured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint. The active zone temperature setpoint is determined by the current operating modes, which include occupancy and heat/cool modes. Occupancy modes Occupancy modes can be controlled by any of the following: • The state of the local (hard -wired) occupancy binary input BI1 (see "13I1: Occupancy or generic" on page 32) - • A timed override request from a Trane zone sensor (see "Timed over- ride control" on page 40) S8 CNT SVX 12C-EN MANEO Occupancy modes C A communicated signal from a peer device (see "Peer -to -peer commu- nication" on page 41) • A communicated signal from a BAS A communicated request, either from a BAS or a peer controller, takes precedence over local requests. If a communicated occupancy request has been established and is no longer present, the controller reverts to the default (occupied) occupancy mode after 15 minutes (if no hard -wired occupancy request exists). The Tracer ZN517 has the following occupancy mode options: • Occupied • Unoccupied • Occupied standby • Occupied bypass Occupied mode - In occupied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The controller uses the occu- pied mode as a default when other modes of occupancy request are not present. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Unoccupied mode In unoccupied mode, the controller attempts to maintain the zone temper- ature based on the unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The fan cycles between high speed and off. The outdoor air damper remains closed. The controller always uses the stored default setpoint values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS), regardless of the presence of a hard -wired or communicated setpoint value. Occupied, standby mode The controller is placed in occupied standby mode only when a communi- cated occupied request is combined with an unoccupied request from occupancy binary input BI1. In occupied standby mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied standby heating or cooling setpoints. Because the occupied standby setpoints are typically spread 2°F (1.1°C) in either direction and the outdoor air damper is closed, this mode reduces the demand for heating and cooling the space. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling) for occupied mode. CNT SVX12C-EN 39 Chapter 6 Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration Occupied bypass mode The controller is placed in occupied bypass mode when the controller is operating in the unoccupied mode and either the timed override ON but- ton on the Trane zone sensor is pressed or the controller receives a com- municated occupied bypass signal from a BAS. In occupied bypass mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The controller will remain in occupied bypass mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied bypass time (config- urable using the Rover service tool or a BAS) expires. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default val- ues (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Timed override control If the zone sensor has a timed override option (ON/CANCEL buttons), pushing the ON button momentarily shorts the zone temperature signal to the controller. This short is interpreted as a timed override on request. A timed override on request changes the occupancy mode from unoccu- pied mode to occupied bypass mode. In occupied bypass mode, the control- ler controls the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The occupied bypass time, which resides in the Tracer ZN517 and defines the duration of the override, is configurable (using the Rover service tool or a BAS) from 0 to 240 minute's (default value is 120. minutes). When the occupied bypass time expires, the unit changes from occupied bypass'mode to unoccupied mode. Pushing the CANCEL button momentarily sends a fixed resistance of 1.5 kf2 to the ZN analog input of the controller, which is interpreted as a timed override cancel request. A timed override cancel request will end the timed override before the occu- pied bypass time has expired and will transition the unit from occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. If the controller is in any mode other than unoccupied when the ON but- ton is pressed, the controller still starts the occupied bypass timer with- out changing the mode to occupied bypass. If the controller is placed in unoccupied mode before the occupied bypass timer expires, the controller will be placed in occupied bypass mode and remain in that mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone Isensor or the occupied bypass time expires. futdoor air damper operatior The Tracer ZN517 does not support a two -position outdoor air damper actuator. However, a modulating, triac, 3-wire floating point actuator with spring return can be used for two -position control. Two -position con- trol can function only when an outdoor air temperature (either hard- wired or communicated) does not exist, and by setting the damper mini- mum position (using the Rover service tool) to the desired value. To con- 40 CNT-SVX12C-EN Fan operation trol an air damper actuator for two -position control, configure the Tracer ZN517 for economizing (economizing will not function). Fan operation The Tracer ZN517 can be configured to run continuously at a single speed or to cycle on and off automatically. If configured for continuous opera- tion, the fan runs continuously during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. If configured for cycling operation, the fan will cycle if the temperature is away from setpoint during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. During the unoccupied mode, the fan cycles regardless of the fan configuration. Peer -to -peer communication Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers have the ability to share data with other LonTalk-based controllers. Multiple controllers can be bound as peers, using the Rover service tool, to share: •- Setpoint _ • Zone. temperature • Heating/cooling mode • Fan status Unit capacity control Shared data is communicated from one controller to any other controller that is bound to it as a peer. Applications having more than one unit serv- ing a single zone can benefit by using this feature; it allows multiple units to share a single zone temperature sensor and prevents multiple units from simultaneously heating and cooling. Economizing Economizing (also referred to as "free cooling") uses outside air for cool- ing. The Tracer ZN517 provides two triac (3-wire floating point) outputs to control the damper actuator. One output opens the actuator; the other closes it. The controller also provides analog inputs for both a discharge air temperature sensor and an outside air temperature sensor. While economizing is enabled, the controller uses a discharge air temperature (DAT) control loop to maintain proper temperature control. The controller opens the outside air damper, turns on the fan, and attempts to maintain a user -defined discharge air temperature. If the outside air is unsuitable for economizer operation, the outside air damper will close and normal operation (DX cooling) will be activated. Economizing plus DX cooling is initiated only when economizing alone cannot meet the zone's cooling requirements. To enable this function, set DIP switch 3 to ON (see "DIP switch settings" on page 30). CNT-SVX12C-EN 41 Chapter 6 Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration AIM, �r ` • Discharge air tempering (also called supply air tempering) prevents occu- pant discomfort caused by cold outside air being brought into a space through the outside air damper. This is an important feature in cold cli- mates because the outside air damper is never fully closed for ventilation purposes. Discharge air tempering starts when: • The controller is in heating mode. • The space is otherwise satisfied (no heating or cooling required). • Ventilation air is passing through the unit The discharge air temperature falls 10°F (5.6°C) below the occupied heating setpoint. Tempering stops when the occupied heating setpoint is exceeded: To enable this function, use the Rover service tool to select Supply Air Tem- pering Enabled. ®errand control ventilation The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller modulates the outside air damper position in direct response to the CO2 level, regulating the amount of out- door air allowed to enter. This function is referred to as demand control ventilation. Demand control ventilation requires that the two triac (3- wire floating point) outputs be used to control the damper actuator. The minimum damper position will increase as CO2 levels rise above 500 ppm. The function executes with a 3-minute loop time to allow time for the sensor to respond. To enable this function, use the Rover service tool to configure the Tracer ZN517 as follows: • Configure All as a carbon dioxide sensor 0 Enter a minimum CO2 level (Control Point) (factory default: 500 ppm). • Enter a maximum CO2 threshold (Threshold) (factory default: 1500 ppm). When the CO2 level reaches the threshold, the minimum position is 100% open. Unit protection strategies The following strategies are initiated when specific conditions exist in order to protect the unit or building from damage: • Filter maintenance timer • Fan off delay • Fan status 42 CNT-SVX12C-EN ANEW-- TRME Unit protection strategies Filter -maintenance timer The filter -maintenance timer tracks the amount of time (in hours) that the fan is enabled. The Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint (Maint Req Time Setpoint), configured with the Rover service tool, is used to set the amount of time until maintenance (typically, a filter change) is needed. If the setpoint is configured to zero, the filter -maintenance timer is dis- abled. The controller compares the fan -run time to Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint. Once the setpoint is reached, the controller generates a Mainte- nance Required diagnostic. When the diagnostic is cleared, the controller resets the filter -maintenance timer to zero, and the timer begins accumu- lating fan -run time again. Fan off delay The fan stays on for an additional 30 seconds (adjustable with the Rover service tool) to allow the residual cooling energy to be circulated through the system. Fan status The controller monitors fan status to protect equipment from overheat- ing. If fan or airflow is not detected for 30, seconds when needed, the ' equipment shuts down. E i CNT-SVX12C-EN 43 TRANS' Chapter 6 Sequence of operations for the 4-cool configuration 44 CNT SVX12C-EN Amok Chapter 7 Applications forthe heat pump configuration This chapter provides information for wiring input and output terminals and setting DIP switches for typical heat pump applications. The function of inputs and outputs is also defined for these applications. The types of heat pump applications supported by the Tracer ZN517 uni- tary controller are heat pumps with: • One or two compressors with reversing valves • Optional auxiliary heat control • Optional economizer control E CNT SVX12C-EN 45 MANE Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration !Wiring requirements and options Table 15 shows required controller inputs for minimal proper operation of all heat pump applications. Table 16 shows optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications. Table 16. Optional controller inputs and outputs for specific applications Economizing Input: "Economizing" on DAT (discharge air temperature) page 23 Input: Alt (outdoor air temperature) Outputs: 24 V (24 Vac common) OPN (binary output) CLS (binary output) Discharge air Input: DAT "Discharge air tem- tempering* pering" on page 24 Demand control Input: "Demand control ventilation* All (CO2 sensor) ventilation" on page 24 Cascade control Input: DAT "Cascade zone con- trol" on page 20 * In order to use this function, the economizing function must be enabled. Figure 14 on page 47 shows all required and optional components con- nected for heat pump applications. 46 CNT SVX12C-EN Wiring requirements and options Figure 14. Wiring diagram for heat pump applications Power* Tri-State Fan modulating Compressor 1 contactor economizer (optional) Compressor 2 contactor — Reversing valve - Common Auxiliary heat LonTalk - - - - - - - - - I' 1 1 1, I 11 1 [�� l'-, -'GND +— I, i ____ 3 I I '------- O I I I I 1 , OUt _______________� l 1 1 m ;Typical 3-wire Discharge air LonTalk 4 0 *Terminals Rc and Rh are provided as ' sensor I temperature I I , I (optional)i i 5 inputs for 24 Vac power from the con- ' trolled device. If the device has a sepa- occupancy ono o% Fan status o Outdoor air rate heating and cooling units, use Rh (o generic generic temperature (optional) (optional) (optional) for heat and Rc for cooling. If com bined, use only Rc (see "HVAC unit Dry contacts electrical circuit wiring" on page 82). only CNT SVX12C-EN 47 Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration ®BP switch settings Set the DIP switches on the circuit board for the heat pump configura- tion. The correct settings are shown in Figure 15. Figure 15. DIP switch settings for heat pump configuration IGNO iMU I�GNO zYlljroO "I WN CLS� Ra Re G , 2 7 9 51b SLCM SNCJ$TATUS ` f�, Jl l O N D T P ncPaltR CWT ECOroN12ER IA1RL WIT BItIPRlOUiPUi LED -Heat pump - , without economizer 1 2 3 4 CAl f " ON DIP Heat pump with economizer ' 1 2 3 4 0 0 =Tracer- ZNst? TN jII N RMERICAN ME 5T0 NC, E J p o H COPYRIGHT 208�- 0 SERUICE COV5—rBINARY INPUTS HNOLOG INPUTS 20NEseHsoRICOMMS S LED PIN I p B n e II BIf- -Btz-� ro •zo nit� -nlz- -onT- zN GNo sET1 LED a 48 CNT SVX12C-EN m Binary outputs for heat pump applications Binary outputs for heat pump applications This configuration supports heat pump applications that have the follow- ing components: • Economizer Supply fan One or two compressors • Reversing valve • Auxiliary heat • Exhaust fan The Tracer ZN517 controller has eight binary outputs. Each binary out- put is a relay with a rating of 12 VA. Table 17 describes the function of - each output for heat pump applications. Table 17. Binary outputs for 2-heat/2-cool applications OPN Economizer, drive open CLS Economizer, drive closed G Supply fan 1 (Y1) Compressor 1 2 (Y2) Compressor 3 (0) Reversing valve" 4 (W1) Auxiliary heat 5NO/5COM/5NC (binary output 5) Exhaust fan/generic/occupancy Binary output 5 Use the Rover service tool to configure binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC) in one of the following ways. It is the only output that can be configured as a generic binary output. • Not used. • Exhaust fan: Will energize when the economizer outside air damper position is greater than the user -defined control point. • Occupancy: Will energize when the Tracer ZN517 is in the occupied mode. • Generic: Can be monitored only by a BAS and. has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. Overriding binary outputs Use the manual output test to manually control the outputs in a defined sequence. For more information about the manual output test, see "Man- ual output test" on page 74. CNT SVX12C-EN 49 TRME Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration Binary inputs for heat pump applications The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller has two binary inputs. Each binary input associates an input signal of 0 Vac with open contacts and 24 Vac with closed contacts. Table 18 gives the function of each binary input for 4-cool applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding para- graphs. For an explanation of the diagnostics generated by each binary, input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 8, "Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration". Table 18. Binary inputs for heat pump applications - Binary H , input Function germinal label 611 Occupancy or generic B12 Fan status B11: Occupancy or generic The function of the occupancy input is to save energy by increasing the range of zone setpoints when the zone is unoccupied. BI1 is used for two occupancy -related functions. For stand-alone controllers, this binary input can be hard -wired to a binary switch, clock, or occupancy. sensor to determine the occupancy mode -either occupied or unoccupied. For con- trollers receiving a BAS-communicated occupancy request, the function of 13I1 is to change the mode from occupied to occupied standby. (For more information on occupancy -related functions, see "Occupancy modes" on page 56.) BI1 is the only input that can be configured as a generic binary input. When configured as a generic binary input, it can be monitored only by a BAS, and has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. B12: Fan status The fan status input provides feedback to the controller regarding the fan's operating status. If BI2 is wired to a fan status switch and the input indicates that the fan is not operating when the controller has the fan controlled to on, the controller will generate a Local Fan Switch Failure diagnostic. (For more information, see "Fan status" on page 62.) 50 CNT SVX12C-EN Analog inputs for heat pump applications Analog inputs for heat pump applications The Tracer ZN517 controller has five analog inputs. Table 19 describes the function of each input for heat pump applications. Each function is explained in the succeeding paragraphs. For an explanation of the diag- nostics generated by each analog input, see "Table of diagnostics" on page 79. For more information about how the controller operates, see Chapter 8, "Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration". Table 19. Analog inputs for heat pump applications All Universal analog input Al2 Outdoor air temperature DAT Discharge air temperature ZN Zone temperature (required) SET Temperature setpoint imoie: Use a GND terminal as the common ground for all zone sensor analog inputs. See Figure 14 on page 47. All: Universal 4-20 mA The All analog input can be configured in one of the three ways shown in Table 20. Table 20. All configuration options and associated measurement ranges Generic 4-20 mA input 0-100% (4 mA=O%; 20 mA=100%) CO2 measurement 0-2000 ppm (4 mA=O ppm; 20 mA=2000 ppm) Relative humidity (RH) measurement 0-100% (4 mA=O% RH; 20 mA=100% RH) If this input is not needed for an application, configure it as Not Used. This disables the generation of diagnostics. Note: w All is polarity sensitive. For the generic input configuration, a 4-20 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal. (Wiring is dependent on the specific applica- CNT-SVX12C-EN 51 MAW' Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration tion.) The sensor communicates a value of 0-100% to the BAS. This con- figuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. For the CO2 measurement configuration, a 4-20 mA sensor must be hard- wired to the All terminal as shown in Figure 16. The sensor will transmit a 0-2000 ppm value to the BAS. This configuration has no direct effect on Tracer ZN517 operation. If a valid value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a CO2 Sensor Failure diagnostic. Figure 16. All terminal wiring: CO2 measurement GND +20 All Tracer ZN517 24 Vac CO2 sensor_' ' (Trane part number: 4190 4100 or 4190 4101) 24 Vac GND O t For the RH measurement configuration, a hard -wired 4-20 mA zone humidity sensor (see Figure 17) must provide a value to the controller. If a valid hard -wired or communicated relative humidity value is estab- lished and then is no longer present, the controller generates a RH Sensor Failure diagnostic and disables the dehumidification function. The RH sensor is used only to provide a valid humidity reading to a BAS; it does not affect the operation of the Tracer ZN517. Figure 17. All terminal wiring: RH measurement GND +20 All -/ Tracer ZN517 RH sensor Figure Note: The +20 terminal provides 20 ±2 Vdc that is used to power a Trane RH sensor (part numbers 4190 1109, 4190 7011, 4190 7012, 4190 7014). 52 CNT SVX12C-EN Analog inputs for heat pump applications AI2: Outdoor air temperature or generic temperature The Al2 analog input can function as either: • An outdoor air temperature input • A generic temperature input If AI2 is configured as the local (hard -wired) outdoor air temperature input, the controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor wired to analog input AI2. An outdoor air tempera- ture value communicated by means of a LonTalk link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both hard -wired and communicated outdoor air temperature values are present, the controller uses the com- municated value. If you set DIP switch 3 to ON for economizing (see "DIP switch settings" on page 48), you automatically configure Al2 as an outdoor air tempera- ture input. Economizing (free cooling) is a function whereby outdoor air is used as a source of cooling before hydronic or DX cooling is used. The Tracer ZN517 uses the outdoor air temperature value to determine whether economizing is feasible. Economizing is not possible without a valid outdoor air temperature. (For more information, see "Economizing" on page, 60.) If Al2 is configured as a generic temperature input, it can be monitored by a BAS. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor wired to analog input Al2. The generic tempera- ture input can be used with any Trane 10 kS2 thermistor. The thermistor can be placed in any location and has no effect on the operation of the con- troller. If you set DIP switch 3 to OFF (see "DIP switch settings" on page 48), you automatically configure Al2 as a generic temperature input. Note: AI2 is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead. DAT Discharge air temperature The DAT analog input functions as the local discharge air temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kE2 thermistor wired to analog input DAT. The thermistor is typically located downstream from all unit heating and cooling coils at the unit dis- charge area. Trane recommends the use of a discharge air temperature sensor to uti- lize the cascade control function (see "Cascade zone control' on page 56). Cascade control is a more accurate method of temperature control. If no discharge air temperature sensor is used, the controller will default to control based solely on the zone temperature (see "Simplified zone con- trol' on page 56). Note: DAT is not polarity sensitive; you can connect either terminal to either sensor lead. CNT: SVX12C-EN 53 FRANEO Chapter 7 Applications for the heat pump configuration ZN: Zone temperature The ZN analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) zone temperature input. The controller receives the temperature as a resistance signal from a 10 kQ thermistor in a standard Trane zone sensor wired to analog input ZN. A communicated zone temperature value via the LonTalk communi- cations link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. When both a hard -wired and communicated zone temperature value is present, the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated zone temperature value is present, the controller gener- ates a Space Temperature Failure diagnostic. The ZN analog input is also used to communicate timed override requests' and cancel requests to the controller for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with the ON and CANCEL button option. SET Temperature setpoint The SET analog input functions as the local (hard -wired) temperature setpoint input for applications utilizing a Trane zone sensor with a tem- perature setpoint thumbwheel. Use the Rover service tool or a BAS to enable or disable the local setpoint input. A communicated setpoint value via the LonTalk communications link can also be used for controllers operating on a BAS. If both a hard -wired and a communicated setpoint value are present, the controller uses the communicated value. If neither a hard -wired nor a communicated setpoint value is present, the controller uses the stored default setpoints (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). If a valid hard -wired or communicated setpoint value is established and then is no longer present, the controller generates a Local Space Setpoint Failure diagnostic. 54 CNT SVX12C-EN Chapter 8 Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration A Tracer ZN517 unitary controller configured to control a heat pump will operate to maintain the zone temperature setpoint. This chapter dis- cusses many of the operational sequences used to accomplish this goal. Power -up sequence When 24 Vac power is initially applied to the Tracer ZN517 unitary con- troller, the following sequence occurs: 1. The Status (green) LED goes on. 2.All outputs are controlled off. 3. The controller reads all input local values to determine initial values. 4. The power -up control wait function begins automatically if the config- ured power -up control wait time is greater than zero. When this func- tion is enabled, the controller waits for the configured amount of time (from 10 to 120 seconds) to allow a communicated occupancy request to arrive. If a communicated occupancy request arrives, normal oper- ation can begin. If a communicated occupancy request does not arrive, the controller assumes stand-alone operation. 5. The Status LED goes off. 6. The wait timer expires. 7. The Status LED goes on. 8. If a hard -wired zone -temperature value is not detected, the controller begins to wait for a communicated value. (This can take several min- utes [15-minute default] and occurs concurrently with the remainder of the power -up sequence.) If a communicated zone -temperature value arrives, normal operation can begin when the power -up sequence has concluded. If a communicated zone -temperature value does not arrive, the binary outputs remain off and a Space Tempera- ture Failure diagnostic is generated (normal operation cannot begin without a valid zone temperature value). 9. Normal operation begins assuming no diagnostics have been gener- ated. CNT SVX12C-EN t_ _ 55 Chapter 8 Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration Cascade zone control Cascade zone control maintains zone temperature by controlling the dis- charge air temperature to control the zone temperature. The controller uses the difference between the measured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint to produce a discharge air temperature setpoint. The controller compares the discharge air temperature setpoint with the discharge air temperature and calculates a unit heating/cooling capacity accordingly (see Figure 18). The end devices (outdoor air damper, valves, etc.) operate in sequence based on the unit heating/cooling capac- ity (0-100%). Figure 18. Cascade zone control Calculated Active zone discharge air Calculated unit temperature temperature heating/cooling setpoint Difference setpoint Difference capacity Measured Measured zone discharge air temperature temperature If the discharge air temperature falls below the Discharge Air Control Point Low Limit (configurable using the Rover service tool) and cooling capacity is at a minimum, available heating capacity will be used to raise the discharge air temperature to the low limit (see "Discharge air temper- ing" on page 60). Simplified zone control In the absence of a discharge air temperature sensor, the controller uses simplified zone control to maintain the zone temperature. In the unoccu- pied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature by calculating the required heating or cooling capacity (0-100%) according to the mea- sured zone temperature and the active zone temperature setpoint. The active zone temperature setpoint is determined by the current operating modes, which include occupancy and heat/cool modes. Occupancy modes Occupancy modes can be controlled by any of the following: • The state of the local (hard -wired) occupancy binary input BI1 (see "BI1: Occupancy or generic" on page 50) • A timed override request from a Trane zone sensor (see "Timed over- ride control' on page 58) CNT SVX12C-EN " TRANS' Occupancy modes • A communicated signal from a peer device (see "Peer -to -peer commu- nication" on page 61) • A communicated signal from a BAS A communicated request, either from a BAS or a peer controller, takes precedence over local requests.If a communicated occupancy request has been established and is no longer present, the controller reverts to the default (occupied) occupancy mode after 15 minutes (if no hard -wired occupancy request exists). The Tracer ZN517 has the following occupancy mode options: • Occupied • Unoccupied • Occupied standby • ` Occupied bypass Occupied mode In occupied mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based I on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The controller uses the occu- pied mode as a default when other modes of occupancy request are not present. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling with compres- sor operation). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Unoccupied mode In unoccupied mode, the controller operates to maintain the zone temper- ature based on the unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint. The fan cycles with compressor operation. The outdoor air damper remains closed. The controller always uses the stored default setpoint values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS), regardless of the presence of a hard -wired or communicated setpoint value. Occupied standby mode The controller is placed in occupied standby mode only when a communi- cated occupied request is combined with an unoccupied request from occupancy binary input BIL In occupied standby mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied standby heating or cooling setpoints. Because the occupied standby setpoints are typically spread 2°F (1.1°C) in either direction and the outdoor air damper is closed, this mode reduces the demand for heating and cooling the space. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling with the compressor). CNT SVX12C-EN 57 'CRANE® Chapter S Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration Occupied bypass mode The controller is placed in occupied bypass mode when the controller is operating in the unoccupied mode and either the timed override ON but- ton on the Trane zone sensor is pressed or the controller receives a com- municated occupied bypass signal from a BAS. In occupied bypass mode, the controller maintains the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The fan runs as configured (continuous or cycling with the compressor). The outdoor air damper closes when the fan is off. The controller will remain in occupied bypass mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied .. bypass time (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS) expires. The temperature setpoints can be local (hard -wired), communicated, or stored default values (configurable using the Rover service tool or a BAS). Timed override control If the zone sensor has a timed override option (ON/CANCEL buttons), pushing the ON button momentarily shorts the zone temperature signal to the controller. This short is interpreted as a timed override on request. A timed override on request changes the occupancy mode from unoccu- pied mode to occupied bypass mode. In occupied bypass mode, the control- ler controls the zone temperature based on the occupied heating or cooling setpoints. The occupied bypass time, which resides in the Tracer ZN517 and defines the duration of the override, is configurable (using the Rover service tool or a BAS) from 0 to 240 minutes (default value is 120 minutes). When the occupied bypass time expires, the unit changes from occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. Pushing the CANCEL button momentarily sends a fixed resistance of 1.5 kQ to the ZN analog input of the controller, which is interpreted as a timed override cancel request. A timed override cancel request will end the timed override before the occu- pied bypass time has expired and will transition the unit from occupied bypass mode to unoccupied mode. If the controller is in any mode other than unoccupied when the ON but- ton is pressed, the controller still starts the occupied bypass timer with- out changing the mode to occupied bypass. If the controller is placed in unoccupied mode before the occupied bypass timer expires, the controller will be placed in occupied bypass mode and remain in that mode until either the CANCEL button is pressed on the Trane zone sensor or the occupied bypass time expires. Outdoor air damper operation The Tracer ZN517 does not support a two -position outdoor air damper actuator. However, a modulating, triac, 3-wire floating point actuator with spring return can be used for two -position control. Two -position con- trol can function only when an outdoor air temperature (either hard- wired or communicated) does not exist, and by setting the damper mini- mum position (using the Rover service tool) to the desired value. To con- CNT SVX 12C-EN MANE Heating or cooling mode trol an air damper actuator for two -position control, configure the Tracer ZN517 for economizing (economizing will not function). Heating or cooling mode The heating or cooling mode can be determined in one of two ways: By a communicated signal from a BAS or a peer controller • Automatically, as determined by the controller A -communicated heating signal permits the controller to heat only. A communicated cooling signal permits the controller to cool only. A com- municated auto signal allows the controller to automatically change from heating to cooling and vice versa. In heating and cooling mode, the controller maintains the zone tempera- ture based on the active heating setpoint and the active cooling setpoint, respectively. The active heating and cooling setpoints are determined by the occupancy mode of the controller. When no communicated signal is present (stand-alone operation) or the communicated signal is auto, the controller automatically determines the heating or cooling mode. Fan operation The Tracer ZN517 can be configured to run continuously at a single speed or to cycle on and off automatically. If configured for continuous opera- tion, the fan runs continuously during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. If configured for cycling operation, the fan will cycle if the temperature is away from setpoint during the occupied, occupied standby, and occupied bypass modes. During the unoccupied mode, the fan cycles regardless of the fan configuration. Compressor operation The Tracer ZN517 supports heat pump applications with one or two com- pressors. The compressor(s) will cycle to meet zone temperature require- ments. Compressor operation will be overridden by a preset 3-minute minimum on/off time delay in order to maintain oil return when the unit is either initially energized, manually reset, switched between modes, or cycled within a single mode. Reversing valve operation The reversing valve is configurable to energize in either the cooling mode (typical of Trane units) or the heating mode. Be sure to configure the reversing valve operation based on the heat pump manufacturer's design. An energized valve will remain energized until a mode change (either CNT-SVXI2C-EN 59 TRANE° Chapter 8 Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration from cooling to heating or vice versa) is initiated. The reversing -valve operation is delayed after compressor shutdown to reduce noise due to refrigerant migration. The reversing valve will de -energize when a power failure occurs, or when the controller is set to off either through a commu- nicated off signal or when the fan switch is set to OFF. Economizing Economizing (also referred to as "free cooling") uses outside air for cool- ing. The Tracer ZN517 provides two triac (3-wire floating point) outputs to control the damper actuator. One output opens the actuator; the other closes it. The controller also provides analog inputs for both a discharge air temperature sensor and an outside air temperature sensor. While economizing is enabled, the controller uses a discharge air temperature (DAT) control loop to maintain proper temperature control. The controller opens the outside air damper, turns on the fan, and attempts to maintain a user -defined discharge air temperature. If the outside air is unsuitable for economizer operation, the outside air damper will close and normal operation (DX cooling) will be activated. Economizing plus DX cooling is initiated only when economizing alone cannot meet the zone's cooling requirements. To enable this function, set DIP switch 3 to ON (see "DIP switch settings" on page 48). Discharge air tempering Discharge air tempering (also called supply air tempering) prevents occu- pant discomfort caused by cold outside air being brought into a.space through the outside air damper. This is an important feature in cold cli- mates because the outside air damper is never fully closed for ventilation purposes. Discharge air tempering starts when: • The controller is in heating mode. • The space is otherwise satisfied (no heating or cooling required). • Ventilation air is passing through the unit • The discharge air temperature falls 10°F (5.6°C) below the occupied heating setpoint. Tempering stops when the occupied heating setpoint is exceeded. To enable this function, use the Rover service tool to select Supply Air Tem- pering Enabled. Demand control ventilation The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller modulates the outside air damper position in direct response to the CO2 level, regulating the amount of out- door air allowed to enter. This function is referred to as demand control ventilation. Demand control ventilation requires that the two triac (3- 60 . CNTSVXI2C-EN TRANS° Peer -to -peer communication wire floating point) outputs be used to control the damper actuator. The minimum damper position will increase as CO2 levels rise above 500 ppm. The function executes with a 3-minute loop frequency to allow time for the sensor to respond. To. enable this function, use the Rover service tool to configure the Tracer ZN517 as follows: Configure All as a carbon dioxide sensor • Enter a minimum CO2 level (Control Point) (factory default: 500 ppm). • Enter a maximum CO2 threshold (Threshold) (factory default: 1500 ppm). When the CO2 level reaches the threshold, the minimum position is 100% open. Peer -to -peer communication Tracer ZN517 unitary controllers have the ability to share data with other LonTalk-based controllers. Multiple controllers can be bound as peers, using the Rover service tool, to share: Setpoint • Zone temperature Heating/cooling mode • Fan status • Unit capacity control Shared data is communicated from one controller to any other controller that is bound to it as a peer. Applications having more than one unit serv- ing a single zone can benefit by using this feature; it allows multiple units to share a single zone temperature sensor and prevents multiple units from simultaneously heating and cooling. Unit protection strategies The following strategies are initiated when specific conditions exist in order to protect the unit or building from damage: • Filter -maintenance timer • Fan off delay • Fan status Filter -maintenance timer The filter -maintenance timer tracks the amount of time (in hours) that the fan is enabled. The Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint (Maint Req Time Setpoint), configured with the Rover service tool, is used to set the amount of time until maintenance (typically, a filter change) is needed. If the setpoint is configured to zero, the filter -maintenance timer is dis- abled. CNT-SVX12C-EN 61 TRANS' Chapter 8 Sequence of operations for the heat pump configuration The controller compares the fan -run time to Maintenance Required Timer Setpoint. Once the setpoint is reached, the controller generates a Mainte- nance Required diagnostic. When the diagnostic is cleared, the controller resets the filter -maintenance timer to zero, and the timer begins accumu- lating fan -run time again. Fan off delay The fan stays on for an additional 30 seconds (adjustable with the Rover service tool) to allow the residual cooling or heating energy to be circu- lated through the system. Fan status The controller monitors fan status to protect equipment from overheat- ing. If fan or airflow is not detected for 30 seconds when needed, the equipment shuts down. . 62 CNT-SVX12C-EN rR ANEO Chapter 9 I® control This chapter will help you set up, tune, and troubleshoot proportional, integral, derivative (PID) control loops used in the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. For more information about PID loops, see BAS-APG002, PID Control in Tracer Multi -Purpose Controllers. PID control requires the use of a Rover service tool. All PID factory defaults can be restored by clicking the Use Defaults button. What PI® loops do A PID loop automatically controls an output to maintain a measured value at its setpoint by monitoring the error (the difference between the measured value and the setpoint). The loop performs proportional, inte- gral, and derivative calculations to determine how aggressively to change i the output. The goal of PID control is to reach the setpoint as quickly as possible without overshooting the setpoint or destabilizing the system and to maintain the setpoint consistently over time. If the system is too aggres- sive, it will overshoot the setpoint as shown in Figure 19. If it is not aggressive enough, the time to reach the setpoint will be unacceptably slow. Figure 19. The effects of PID aggressiveness Too aggressive (overshoot) Setpoint a� 73 Ideal response Too slow -------------------------- Initial point Time CNT SVX12C-EN 63 TRANS* Chapter 9 PID control PID calculations PID algorithms perform three calculations: the proportional calculation, the integral calculation, and the derivative calculation. These calcula- tions are independent of each other but are combined to determine the response of the controller to the error. Proportional calculation The proportional calculation responds to how far the measured value is from the setpoint. The larger the error, the larger the output of the calcu- lation. The proportional calculation has a much stronger effect on the result of the PID algorithm than either the integral or derivative calcula- tions. It determines the responsiveness (or aggressiveness) of a control system. Though some systems use only proportional control, most Trane controllers use a combination of proportional and integral control. Proportional -only control loops require an error to produce an output. If the setpoint and the process variable are the same, the error is zero, so the system does not have an output. In an HVAC system, this can cause an actuator to open or close. The integral calculation solves this problem. The recommended range for the proportional calculation in the Tracer ZN517 is 4-16. Restore PID factory defaults by clicking the Use Defaults button. Integral calculation The integral calculation responds to the length of time the measured value is not at setpoint. The longer the measured value is not at setpoint, the larger the output of the calculation. The integral calculation uses the sum of past errors to maintain an out- put when the error is zero. Line 1 in Figure 20 on page 65 shows that with proportional -only control, when the error becomes zero, the PID output also goes to zero. Line 2 in Figure 20 shows the integral output added to the proportional output. Because the integral calculation is the sum.of, past errors, the output remains steady rather than dropping to zero.when the error is zero. The benefit of this is that the integral calculation keeps the output at the appropriate level to maintain an error of zero. The value of the integral calculation can build up over time (because it is the sum of all past errors), and this built-up value must be overcome before the system can change direction. This prevents the system from over -reacting to minor changes, but can potentially slow the system down. The recommended range for the integral calculation in the Tracer ZN517 is 1-10. Restore PID factory defaults by clicking the Use Defaults button. 64 CNT SVX12C-EN TRA NE Sampling frequency Figure 20. Integral output added to proportional output Error # 0 Error = 0 —� ;-* Proportional + integral l ; output if proportional Proportional +integra output has gone to zero output a O O O Proportional -only - output Time Derivative calculation The derivative calculation responds to the change in error. In other, i words, it responds to how quickly the measured value is approaching set - point. The derivative calculation can be used to smooth an actuator motion or cause an actuator to react faster. I However, derivative control has several disadvantages: • It can react to noise in the input signal. ` Setting derivative control requires balancing between two extremes; E too much derivative gain and the system becomes unstable, too little and the derivative gain has almost no effect. t0 The lag in derivative control makes tuning difficult. '0 Large error deadbands, common in HVAC applications, render deriv- ative control ineffective. Because of these disadvantages, derivative control is rarely used in HVAC applications (with the exception of steam valve controllers, which use derivative control to force the steam valve to react faster to changes). a Sampling frequency The sampling frequency is the rate at which the input signal is sampled and PID calculations are performed. Using the right sampling frequency is vital to achieving a responsive and stable system. Problems can arise if the sampling frequency is too slow or too fast in comparison to time lags in the system. Sampling too slowly can cause an effect called aliasing in which not enough data is sampled to form an accurate picture of changes in the CNT SVX12C-EN 65 MA NE Chapter 9 PID control measured value. The system may miss important information and reach setpoint slowly or not at all. Figure 21 and Figure 22 show how aliasing can affect system response. In Figure 21 the sampling frequency is too slow. Because of this, many of the actual changes in duct static pressure are missed. In Figure22 the sam- pling frequency is fast enough that the changes in static pressure are tracked accurately. Figure 21. Sampling too slowly U) aD a U co U d o Figure 22. Sampling at the correct rate Time Time Problems also arise from sampling too quickly. Some systems have natu- rally slow response times, such as when measuring room temperature'. Slow response times can also be caused by equipment lags. Since PID loops respond to error and changes in error over time, if the process vari- able (measured value) changes slowly, then the error will remain constant for an extended period of time. If the process variable is sampled repeat- edly during this time, the proportional output remains about the same, but the integral output becomes larger (because it is the sum of past errors). When the control system does respond, the response is out of pro- portion to the reality of the situation, which can destabilize the system. . 66 CNT-SVX12C-EN . i r Sampling frequency` i ' The control system should always wait to process the result of a change before making another change. Figure 23 shows the process variable if sampling times are too fast, acceptable, and barely acceptable. If the sampling frequency is too fast (2 seconds), the process variable begins to oscillate and finally destabilizes because the PID loop output drives the actuator to extremes. Figure 23. System stability with different sampling times Sampling freq. = 10 s Sampling freq. = 20 s +�'A tf r! CNT-SVX12C-EN 67 I Chapter 9 PID control a PID loop action The action of a PID loop determines how it reacts to a change in the pro- cess variable (such as a room temperature). A controller. using direct action increases the output when the process variable increases. A con- troller using reverse action decreases the output when the process vari- able increases. Direct action Figure 24 shows the temperature when a system is cooling a space. If the error is large and the PID output is at 100%, the actuator and valve com- bination are fully open. As.the process variable (room temperature) decreases, the error becomes smaller, and the controller closes the valve to reduce or stop cooling. Since the PID output and process variable move in the same direction (both decreasing), the loop is direct acting. Figure 24. Cooling a space Process variable (temperature) a� a E F Error Setpoint Time Reverse action Figure 25 shows the temperature when a system is heating a space. If the error is large and the PID output is at 100%, the actuator and valve com- bination are fully open. If the process variable (room temperature) increases, reducing the error, the controller closes the valve to reduce heating. Since the PID output and process variable move in opposite directions, the loop is reverse acting. Figure 25. Heating a space Time Setpoint Error a E ~ Process variable (temperature) 68 CNT SVX12C-EN T Error deadband a Error deadband Error deadband is typically used to minimize actuator activity. It can also be used to allow for some "slop" in the system sensors and actuator mechanics.Error deadband prevents the PID output from changing if the absolute value of the error is less than the error deadband. For example, in. Figure 26 the error deadband is set at 2.0°F (1.1°C). As long as the absolute value of the error is less than the 2.0°F (1.1°C), the PID output cannot change. If the absolute value of the error does exceed 2.0°F (1.1°C), the PID output can change: Figure 26. Error deadband As can be seen from Figure 26, error deadband is a means of limiting how I often an actuator is controlled. If a PID loop controls a chilled water valve, this is not so important. But if a PID loop controls how many stages of cooling are being used, it is important to limit equipment cycling. Adjusting error deadband for modulating outputs In most applications, start with an error deadband of five or ten times the sensor resolution. For example, thermistors have a resolution of approxi- mately 0.1°F (0.06°C), so a good error deadband is 0.5°F (0.30C). This set- ting ensures that the sensor reading has changed an adequate amount before the controller responds. IMPORTANT The error deadband should not be smaller than the sensor resolution or the controller will react to noise. Adjusting error deadband for staged outputs This section shows how to adjust the error deadband for staging applica- tions. Finding the best error deadband for staged output applications is more difficult than for modulating outputs. Instead of using a continuous actu- ator, such as a chilled water valve, staged systems use binary outputs to start and stop pieces of equipment, such as fans in a cooling tower. Each CNT-SVX12C-EN 69 Chapter 9 PID control piece of equipment contributes a set amount to the final output. When setting the error deadband for staged outputs, the main goal is toTeduce equipment cycling. Follow these guidelines when adjusting the error deadband: • Ask how tight control should be. A smaller error deadband results in tighter control, but control should not be so tight that the stages cycle on and off too frequently. For example, for a VAV air -handler turning on cooling stages, control can be somewhat loose. The individual VAV.boxes control their valve to the space depending on the supply air temperature. If the supply air temperature is relatively warm, the VAV box allows more air flow." If the supply air temperature is somewhat cool, the VAV box con- stricts the air flow. • The contribution of each stage can change depending on external cir- cumstances, so make adjustments under worst case conditions. Adjust the error deadband for cooling tower fan stages on very warm days, and adjust the error deadband for boiler stages on very cold days. With the preceding guidelines in mind, use the following procedure to determine error deadband. To adjust the error deadband for staged outputs: 1. Run the system manually. If possible, do so under worst -case conditions for the site. Although it is not always possible for a technician to do this, it is possible for a well -trained customer. 2. Find the smallest change in temperature, AT, that the first stage can contribute (the quantity could also be building static pressure for fans or flow for pumps). Pay attention to possible changes in external circumstances, such as the amount of water flow. If the system uses a lead -lag approach to the equipment, it will be necessary to find the minimum AT for all stages. 3. Multiply AT by 0.45 (the error deadband should be slightly less than half of AT). Keep in mind the resolution of the sensor. You may need to round the error deadband to a more reasonable value. 4. Run the system with the new error deadband. Cycling should be reduced as much as possible. CNT-SVX12C-EN TRANE Other PID settings Other PID settings You can also use these settings to manage PID loops: • Proportional bias, which takes the place of derivative gain in propor- tional -only control • Minimum and maximum output, which limit the range of output of the PID algorithm • Enabled and disabled modes, which enable the PID output or disable it to a default value • Fail-safe mode sets the PID output to a "safe" value if the hardware input that provides the process variable fails. For more information, see BAS-APG002, PID Control in. Tracer Multi - Purpose Controllers. Troubleshooting procedure IMPORTANT Remember to change only one thing at a time. Follow these steps to troubleshoot a PID loop: 1. Make sure that the system is not in override. 2. - Graph the process variable, setpoint, and valve position over to determine how the system performs. Look at the big picture. Can the system do what's expected of it? What is happening to the process variable? Is it oscillating or failing to reach setpoint? Is the output oscillating? 3. Check for failure conditions that are always true. 4. Check PID settings for: • Output minimum incorrectly set to 100% • Output maximum incorrectly set to 0% • Sampling time that is too fast or too slow 5. Check the system for disturbances from: • Bad actuator linkages • Faulty sensors ` 6. Change PID gains. • Reduce gains if experiencing system overshoot, output at mini- mum or maximum; or cycling of output around setpoint • Increase gains if experiencing system undershoot Chapter 9 PID control Tips for specific problems Table 21 provides tips for troubleshooting specific problems. Table 21 Tips for specific problems Measured value is cycling • Slow the sampling frequency around setpoint • Decrease PID gains Overshooting setpoint Reduce gains Undershooting setpoint Increase gains Output at maximum Ensure that minimum output is not set to 100% Output at minimum Ensure that maximum output is not set to 0% Changing the sampling frequency The major cause of actuator cycling is time lags in the system. If a 10% change in PID output requires two minutes to affect the process variable, it does no good to have the sampling frequency set to two seconds. The integral contribution will build up before any significant change in error can be measured. A sampling frequency of 30 to 60 seconds would work much better in this situation. In other words, to fix a cycling system, slow down the loop! See "Sampling frequency" on page 65 for more informa- tion. Changing the gains Be careful when changing PID gains. Never change gains unless the effects can be measured. Use a doubling/halving technique when increas- ing or decreasing gains. If the PID gains are set to 4, 1, and 0 respectively, and you are going to reduce them, try 2, 0.5, and 0. If the system now undershoots, try gains of 3, 0.75, and 0 respectively. CNT SVX12C-EN TRINE• Chapter 10 Status indicators for operation and communication This chapter describes the operation and communication status indica- tors on the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller, including: i A description of the. location and function of the Test button and Ser- vice Pin button and the light -emitting diodes (LEDs) • A complete list of the diagnostics that can occur, their effect on con- troller outputs, and an explanation of how to clear diagnostics and restore the device to normal operation Test button Use the Test button to perform the manual output test (see "Manual out put test" on page 74), which verifies that the controller is operating prop- erly. Figure 27 shows its location. i Figure 27. Tracer ZN517 unitary controller circuit board J1 (location of jumper for Re, Rh :,� z,U)L woG , t 7 4 115M5CCMsnc$TRTUS Status LED (green) terminals) MAR ECONOPI3F w,cWIT BMPOOP01 LED i ee DIP switches Q i . 7F D Test button E 0 0 � =TracerTM ar sip I r - copYRiwTsio67" Service Pin button SERVILE cun5 BIMW IMPUTB am�oc IWUTB zn S'"s )CONNS LED PIN I n B R B II -Bit--BII-�0 PI I -ADZ- I'DAT- I zn cro eETI LED Service LED (redy ' LonTalk LED (yellow) CNT-SVXI2C-EN 73 Chapter 10 Status indicators for operation and communication Manual output test The manual output test sequentially turns off and on all binary outputs to verify their operation. The test overrides normal operation of the con- troller, which is suspended while the test is being performed. Use the manual output test to: • Verify output wiring and operation. -Force compressor operation so that a technician can use test equip- ment to verify unit operation. • Clear diagnostics and restore normal operation (although not a pri- mary function of the manual output test). Perform the manual output test either by repeatedly pressing the Test button to proceed through the test sequence or by using the Rover service tool. Table 22 on page 75, Table 23 on page 75, and Table 24 on page 76 list the outputs in the sequence in which they are verified for the 2-heat/ 2-cool, 4-cool, and heat pump configurations, respectively. To perform a manual output test: 1. Press and hold the Test button for 3 to 4 seconds, then release the button to start the test mode. The green LED light goes off when the Test button is pressed, and then it blinks (as described in Table 26 on page 77) when the button is released to indicate the controller is in manual test mode. 2. Press the Test button (no more than once per second) to advance through the test sequence. Table 22 shows the resulting activities of the binary outputs. 3. The controller exits the test mode after the final step or after 1 hour passes, whichever comes first. Note: The outputs are not subject to minimum on or off times during the test sequence. However, the test sequence permits only one step per second, which enforces a minimum output time. Service Pin button Use the Service Pin button to verify that the controller is communicating on the network communications link, and to add devices and identify, existing devices on the network communications link. See Figure 27 on page 73 for the location of the Service Pin button. For more information about the function of the Service Pin button, see the Rover Operation and Programming guide (EMTX-SVX01B-EN) or the Tracker Building Automation System Hardware Installation guide (BMTK-SVN01A-EN). 74 CNT SVX12C-EN Service Pin button 1 Begins test mode Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 2 Fan on' On Off Off Off Off Off Off 3 Compressor 1 On Off . On Off Off Off Off 4 Compressor 2 On Off On On Off Off Off 5 Heat 1 On Off Off Off On Off Off 6 Heat 2 On Off Off Off On On Off 7 Outdoor air damper On On Off Off Off Off Off 8 Generic/exhaust fan/occuppancy On Off Off Off Off Off On 9 Exit2 ' Off Off Off Off Off Off Off ' At the beginning of Step 2, the controller attempts to clear all diagnostics. `2 This step exits the manual output test and initiate a -reset to restore the controller to normal operation. l Table 23. Manual output test sequence for 4-cool configurations 1 Begins test mode Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 2 Fan on' On Off Off Off Off Off Off 3 Compressor 1 On Off On Off Off Off Off 4 Compressor 2. On Off On On Off Off Off 5 Compressor 3 On Off On On On Off Off 6 Compressor 4 On Off On On On On Off 7 Outdoor air damper On On Off Off Off- Off Off 8 Generic/exhaust fan/occupancy On Off Off Off Off Off On 9 Exit2 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 1 At the beginning of Step 2, the controller attempts to clear all diagnostics. z This step exits the manual output test and initiate a reset to restore the controller to normal operation. CNT SVX12C-EN 75 Chapter 10 Status indicators for operation and communication 1 Beg ins test mode Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 2 Fan on' On Off Off Off Off Off Off 3 Reversing valve on On Off Off Off On Off Off 4 Compressor 1 On Off On Off On Off Off 5 Compressor 2 On Off On On On ' Off Off 6 Compressors off On Off Off. Off Off Off Off 7 Auxiliary heat On Off Off Off Off On Off 8 Outdoor air damper On On Off Off Off Off Off 9 Generic/exhaust fan/occupancy On Off Off Off Off Off On 10 Exit2 Off, Off Off Off Off Off Off ' At the beginning of Step 2, the controller attempts to clear all diagnostics. 2 This step exits the manual output test and initiate a reset to restore the controller to normal operation. Interpreting LEDs The red LED on the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller (see Figure 27 on page 73) indicates whether the controller is not working properly (see , Table 25). Table 25. Red LED: Service indicator LED is off continuously when power The controller is operating normally. is applied to the controller. LED is on continuously when power The controller is not working prop - is applied to the controller. erly, or someone is pressing the Ser- vice button. LED flashes once every second. The controller is not executing the application software because the net- work connections and addressing have been removed.' ' Restore the controller to normal operation using the Rover service tool Refer to EMTX-SVX01 B-EN for more information. 76 CNT SVX12C-EN TRANEO Interpreting LEDs The green LED on the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller (see Figure 27 on page 73) indicates whether the controller has power applied to it and if the controller is in manual test mode (see Table 26). Table 26. Green LED: Status indicator P The yellow LEDs on the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller (see Figure 27 on page 73) indicate the controller's communications status (see Table 27): Table 27. Yellow LED Communications indicator CNT SVX12C-EN 77 MANE Chapter 10 Status indicators for operation and communication Diagnostics In response to a diagnostic, the controller attempts to protect the equip- ment it is controlling by disabling all the outputs. When the diagnostic clears, the controller resumes normal operation. Diagnostic types The Tracer ZN517 has two types of diagnostics: informational and auto- matic (also referred to as nonlatching). Informational diagnostics provide information about the status of the controller. They do not affect machine operation. They can be cleared from the controller in one of the following ways: • By using the Rover service tool (see "Resetting a diagnostic" in EMTX-SVX01B-EN, Rover Operation and Programming guide.) Through a building automation system (see product literature) • By initiating a manual output test at the controller (see "Manual out- put test" on page 74) By cycling power to the controller. When the 24 Vac power to the con- troller is cycled off and then on again, a power -up sequence occurs. f Automatic (nonlatching) diagnostics clear automatically when the prob- lem that generated the diagnostics is solved. j i i 79 F T F Chapter 11 e eral wiring information This chapter provides specifications and general information about wir- ing the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. The controller requires wiring for: • Input/output terminals • AC power to the controller • Communication -link wiring, if the controller is to communicate with a building automation system (BAS) l Input/output terminal wiring All input/output terminal wiring for the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller is application specific and dependant on the configuration of the control j ler. For application -specific wiring information and diagrams, see Chapter 3, "Applications for the 2-heat/2-cool configuration"," Chapter 5, "Applica- tions for the 4-cool configuration"," and Chapter 7, "Applications for the I' heat pump configuration". Wiring specifications Input/output terminal wiring must meet the following requirements: • All wiring must comply with the National Electrical Code and local codes. Use only 18 AWG twisted -pair wire with stranded, tinned -copper. con- ductors. (Shielded wire is recommended.) o Binary input and output wiring must not exceed 1000 ft (300 m). • Analog input wiring must not exceed 300 ft (100 m). f Do not run input/output wires in the same wire bundle with any ac power wires. CNT SVX12C-EN 81 TRME Chapter 11 General wiring information HVAC unit electrical circuit wiring The terminals labeled Re and Rh are provided as inputs for 24 Vac power from the transformer(s) of the HVAC system. Note: The Tracer ZN517 is shipped from the factory with terminals Re and Rh coupled with the jumper at J1 on the controller cir- cuit board. Packaged units If the HVAC unit combines heating and cooling (referred to as a "pack- aged" unit), it will typically have one "R" transformer. For 24 Vac wiring of packaged units, the Re terminal must be wired as shown in this procedure: 1. Locate the jumper at J1 on the controller circuit board (Figure 28 on page 83). Place the jumper on both pins at J1 on the circuit board (Figure 29 on page 83). 2. Wire the Re terminal to the transformer on the unit (Figure 30 on page 84). e Split systems j - If the unit is a split system (a unit with physically separate heating and cooling sections), there is typically a separate transformer for each func- tion. For 24 Vac wiring of split systems, the Re and Rh terminals must be . ` wired as show in this procedure: 0 1. Locate the jumper at J1 on the controller circuit board (Figure 28 on page 83). Remove the jumper from the pins at J1 on the circuit board (Figure 29 on page 83), 2. Replace the jumper on one of the pins at J1 for possible future use. 3. Wire Re to the transformer for the cooling section of the unit (Figure 31 on page 84). 4. Wire Rh to the transformer for the heating section of the unit (Figure 31 on page 84). i 0 0 i i 82 CNT SVX12C-EN 83 p rRAMEO Chapter 11 General wiring information Figure 30. Wiring for packaged heating and cooling units ` Primary �s Secondary, 24 Vac —� Fan Tri-state modulating Compressor 1 contactor economizer (optional) Compressor 2 contactor Heat sta e 1 Heat sta e 2 24 Vac H ��----------, � ,�...,. N i `------------- R GJY1Y2 W1 W2^ Generic binary output (dry contact) i 0 I IGND 24VGND24V�GND24VOPNCLSI�Rh G 1 -2 S 4 �NO5COMSNC� STATUS (�JiJll pgU�JJII\\ JJ 11 JJJJJJ I t I AC POWE AC ECONOMIZER HVAC UNIT BINARY OUTPUT Figure 31. Wiring for split system applications ` Primary�s Primary Secondary, 24 Vac i Secondary, 24 Vac Tri-state modulating Fan* economizer i Compressor 1 contactor. (optional) I — -Compressor 2 contactor .�.... Heat stage 1 24 Vac Heat stage 2 N��-----------i i ------------Rc Rh G Y1 , 7-��1 W2 f1 'Generic binary output (dry contact) GND 24VJJ GND 24� GND 24V OPN CLS �Rh G 1 2 3 4 �tJO5COM M STATUS AC POWER AC OUT \ECONOMIZER) WACUNIT BINARYOUTPUi *Wire the fan (G) to the appropriate section of the split system. a s i I 84 CNT-SVX12C-EN r - AC power wiring I AC power wiring CAUTION Equipment damage! Complete input/output wiring before applying power to the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. Failure to do so may cause damage to the con- troller or power transformer due to inadvertent connections to power circuits. ACAUTION Hazardous voltage! Make sure that the 24 Vac transformer is properly grounded. Failure to do so may result in damage to equipment and/or minor or moderate injury. . IMPORTANT E Do not share 24 Vac between controllers. All wiring must comply with National Electrical Code and local codes. y The ac power connections are in the top left corner of the Tracer ZN517 i unitary controller (see Figure 32); Figure 32. Connecting'ac power wires to the controller I - H 24 Vac unit ----------------------------, N transformer __________________ V GND 24VIIGND24V AC POWER AC OUT If you are providing a new transformer for power, use a UL-listed Class 2 power transformer supplying a nominal 24 Vac (19-30 Vac). The trans- former must be sized to provide adequate power to the Tracer ZN517 uni- tary controller (9 VA) and output devices, including relays and valve actuators, to a maximum of 12 VA per output utilized. The Tracer ZN517 may be powered by an existing transformer integral to the controlled heat pump, provided the transformer has adequate power available and ade- quate grounding is observed. CNT SVX12C-EN 85 TRANEB Chapter 11 General wiring information Communication -link wiring and addressing The Tracer ZN517 unitary controller communicates with a BAS and with other LonTalk controllers via a LonTalk communication link. For instruc- tions on LonTalk communication wiring and addressing, follow the requirements given in the Tracer Summit Hardware and Software Instal- lation guide (BMTX-SVN01A-EN) or the Tracker Building Automation System Hardware Installation guide (BMTK-SVN01D-EN) or another BAS installation manual 86 CNT-SVX12C-EN Chapter 12 Troubleshooting This chapter outlines some general troubleshooting steps that should be performed if there is a problem with the operation of the equipment con- trolled by the Tracer ZN517 unitary controller. This chapter. describes some common problems; however, it cannot describe every possible problem. If you encounter operational problems with the Tracer ZN517; you must first perform initial troubleshooting steps; see "Initial troubleshooting" on page 88. After this procedure, consult the tables in "Diagnosing opera- tional problems" on page 88 for further troubleshooting assistance. CNT-SVX 12C-EN 87 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Initial troubleshooting Always perform the initial troubleshooting steps listed in Table 29 before moving on to the specific area of trouble. Perform the steps in the order they are listed. Table 29. Initial troubleshooting steps Step 1 Look at the red Service LED. If it is flashing once per second, the controller is Tracer ZN517 is. not executing the application software because the network connections and not configured addressing have been removed. For a complete explanation of this LED's behavior, see Table 25 on page 76. Use the Rover service tool or a BAS to restore normal operation. See EMTX- SVX01B-EN for more information. Step 2 Look at the green Status LED, It should be on continuously during normal Tracer ZN517 is in operation. A blinking Status LED indicates the Tracer ZN517 is performing a manual outputtest manual output test. For a complete explanation of this LED's behavior, see mode Table 26 on page 77. Step 3 Take your meter (set to measure ac voltage) and measure the voltage across Tracer ZN517 cir- the ac-power terminals on the Tracer ZN517 (with ac wires connected). See cuit board prob- Figure 32 on page 85. lem If you see approximately 24 V (21-27 V) on those terminals, the board is receiving adequate input power and you likely have a Tracer ZN517 circuit board problem. Step 4 Disconnect the ac wires from the input power terminals. Take your meter (set Input power prob- to measure ac voltage) and measure the voltage across the ac wires. If you lem see approximately 0 V, the board is not receiving the power it needs to run. Step 5 Reconnect the ac wires to the input power terminals. Perform the manual Tracer ZN517 cir- output test, which is described in "Manual output test" on page 74. cuit board prob- If the outputs on the controller do not behave as described in the manual lem output test (page 74), then you are likely to have a Tracer ZN517 circuit board problem. Diagnosing operational problems. After you have performed the initial troubleshooting steps, refer to the succeeding tables in this chapter to further diagnose the following opera- tional problems: • Fan does not energize (Table 30 on page 89) • Heat does not energize (Table 31 on page 90) • An outdoor air damper stays closed (Table 32 on page 90) • An outdoor air damper stays open (Table 33 on page 91) 88 CNT SVX12C-EN Diagnosing operational problems Unit .wiring The wiring between the controller outputs and the fan relays and contacts must be present and correct for normal fan operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram. Failed end device The fan motor and relay must be checked to ensure proper operation Random start After power -up, the controller always observes a random start from 0 to 25 seconds. The observed controller remains off until the random start time expires. Power -up control -wait If power -up control -wait is enabled (non -zero time), the controller remains off until one of two conditions occurs: 1) The controller exits power -up control -wait once it receives communicated information. 2) The controller exits power -up control -wait once the power -up control -wait time expires. Cycling fan operation If configured to cycle with capacity, normally the fan cycles off with heating or cooling. The heating/cooling sources cycle on or off periodically with the fan to provide varying amounts of capacity to the zone. Unoccupied operation Even if the controller is configured for continuous fan operation, the fan normally cycles with capacity during unoccupied mode. While unoccupied, the fan cycles on or off with - heating/cooling to provide varying amounts of heating or cooling to the space. . Fan mode off If a local fan mode switch determines the fan operation, the off position controls the fan off. Requested mode off You can communicate a desired operating mode (such as off, heat, and cool) to the con- troller. If off is communicated to the controller, the unit controls the fan off. There is no heating or cooling. Diagnostic present For information about diagnostics, see Table 28 on page 79. No power to the con- If the controller does not have power, the unit fan does not operate. For the Tracer ZN517 troller controller to operate normally, it must have an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the green LED is off continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power or has failed. Unit configuration The controller must be properly configured based on the actual installed end devices and application. If the unit configuration does not match the actual end device, the valves may not work correctly. Manual output test The controller includes a manual output test sequence you can use to verify output oper- ation and associated output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test sequence, the unit fan may not be on. Refer to the "Manual output test" on page 74. CNT SVX12C-EN 89 TRANE' Chapter 12 Troubleshooting Table 31. Heat does not energize Unit wiring The wiring between the controller outputs and the electric heat contacts must be present and correct for normal electric heat operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram. Failed end device Check electric heat element, including any auxiliary safety interlocks, to ensure proper operation. Normal operation The controller controls electric heat on and off to meet the unit capacity requirements. Requested mode off You can communicate a desired operating mode (such as off, heat, and cool) to the con- troller. If off is communicated to the controller, the unit shuts off all electric heat. Unit configuration Check to make sure unit is not in the 4-cool configuration. Communicated dis- Numerous communicated requests may disable electric heat, including an auxiliary heat able enable input and the heat/cool mode input. Depending on the state of the communicated request, the unit may disable electric heat. Manual output test The controller includes a manual output test sequence you can use to verify output oper- ation and associated output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test sequence, the electric heat may not be on. Refer to the "Manual output test" on page 74. Diagnostic present For information about diagnostics, see Table 28 on page 79. No power to the con- If the controller does not have power, electric heat does not operate. for the ZN517 con- troller troller to operate normally, you must apply an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the green LED is off continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power or has failed. Table 32. Outdoor air damper remains closed Unit wiring The wiring between the controller outputs and the outdoor air.damper must be present and correct for normal outdoor air damper operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram. Failed end device Check damper actuator to ensure proper operation. Normal The controller opens and closes the outdoor air damper based on the controller's occu- operation pancy mode and fan status. Normally, the outdoor air damper is open during occupied mode when the fan is running and closed during unoccupied mode. . Warm up and cool The controller includes both a morning warm up and cool down sequence to keep the down outdoor air damper closed during the transition from unoccupied to occupied. This is an attempt to bring the space under control as quickly as possible. Requested mode off You can communicate a desired operating mode (such as off, heat, or cool) to the control- ler. If off is communicated to the controller, the unit closes the outdoor air damper. Manual output test The controller includes a manual output test sequence you can use to verify output oper- ation and associated output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test sequence, the outdoor air damper may not be open. Refer to the "Manual output test" on page 74. Diagnostic present j For information about diagnostics, see Table 28 on page 79. 90 CNT-SVX12C-EN Diagnosing operational problems Unit configuration The controller must be properly configured based on the actual installed end,devices and. application. If the unit configuration does not match the actual end device, the outdoor air damper may not work correctly. No power to the If the controller does not have power, the outdoor air damper does not operate. For the controller ZN517 controller to operate normally, you must apply an input voltage of 24 Vac. If the green LED is off continuously, the controller does not have sufficient power or has failed. Table 33. Outdoor air damper remains open Unit wiring The wiring between the controller outputs and the outdoor air damper must bepresent and correct for normal outdoor air damper operation. Refer to applicable wiring diagram. Failed end device Check damper, actuator to ensure proper, operation. Normal The controller opens and closes the outdoor air damper based on the controller's occu- operation pancy mode and fan status. Normally, the outdoor air damper is open during occupied mode when the fan is running and closed during unoccupied mode. Manual output test The controller includes a manual output test sequence you can use to verify output oper- ation and associated output wiring. However, based on the current step in the test sequence, the outdoor air damper may be open. Refer to the "Manual output test" on page 74. Unit The controller must be properly configured based on the actual installed end devices and configuration application. If the unit configuration does not match the actual end device, the outdoor air damper may not work correctly. • Numerics 24 Vac wiring, 85 2-heat/2-cool configuration Analog inputs, 15-18 Binary inputs, 14 Binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC), 13 Binary outputs, 13-14 Demand control ventilation, 24 DIP switch settings, 12 Discharge air temperature input, 17 Discharge air tempering, 24 Economizing, 17,23 Exhaust fan output, 13 Fan off delay, 25 Fan operation, 23 Fan status; 25 Fan status input, 14 Filter -maintenance timer, 25 Generic binary input, 14 Generic binary output, 13 Manual output test sequence, 75 Occupancy modes, 20 Occupancy or generic input, 14 Occupancy output, 13 Outdoor air damper operation, 22 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 23 Required and optional components, 10 Required and optional inputs and outputs, 10 Sequence of operations, 19-25 Temperature setpoint input, 18 Timed override control, 22 Unit protection strategies, 24 Wiring diagram, 11 Zone temperature input, 18 4-cool configuration Analog inputs, 33-36 Binary inputs, 32 Binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC), 31 Binary outputs, 31 Demand control ventilation, 42 DIP switch settings, 30 Discharge air temperature input, 35 Discharge air tempering, 42 Economizing, 35, 41 Exhaust fan output, 31 Fan off delay, 43 Fan operation, 41 Fan status, 43 Fan status input, 32 Filter -maintenance timer, 43 . Generic binary input, 32 Generic binary output, 31 Manual output test sequence, 75 Occupancy modes, 38 Occupancy or generic input, 32 Occupancy output, 31 Outdoor air damper operation, 40 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 41 Required and optional components, 28 Required and optional inputs and outputs, 28 Sequence of operations, 37-43 Temperature setpoint input, 36 Timed override control, 40 Unit protection strategies, 42 Wiring diagram, 29 Zone temperature input, 36 A AC power wiring, 85 Actuator Minimizing activity with error deadband, 69 Actuators, damper, 6 Additional application -dependent components, 6 Agency listing/compliance, 4 Analog inputs All (Universal 4-20 mA), 15, 33, 51 All configuration options, 15, 33, 51 All configured for CO2 measurement, 16, 34, 52 All configured for RH measurement, 16, 34, 52 All generic configuration, 15, 33, 51 AI2 (Outdoor air or generic temperature), 17, 35, 53 AI2 configuration options, 17, 35, 53 CNT SVX12C-EN 93 Td7E' Index AI2 generic temperature configuration, 17, 35, 53 Generic temperature, 17, 35, 53 Analog inputs, 2-heat/2-cool DAT (Discharge air temperature), 17 SET (Temperature setpoint), 18. Table, 15 ZN (Zone temperature), 18 Analog inputs, 4-cool DAT (Discharge air temperature), 35 SET(Temperaturesetpoint), 36 Table, 33 ZN (Zone temperature), 36 Analog inputs, heat pump DAT (Discharge air ,temperature), 53 SET (Temperature setpoint), 54 Table, 51 ZN (Zone temperature), 54 Applications Heat pump, 45 Rooftop units, 9, 27, 31 Split systems, 9 Applications, 2-heat/2-cool, see 2- heat/2-cool configuration Applications, 4-cool, see 4-cool configuration Applications, heat pump, see Heat pump configuration B BAS communication, 1, 86 Binary inputs, 2-heat/2-cool Bll (Occupancy or generic), 14 B12 (Fan status), 14 Table, 14 Binary inputs, 4-cool B11 (Occupancy or generic), 32 B12 (Fan status), 32 Table, 32 Binary inputs, heat pump B11 (Occupancy or generic), 50 B12 (Fan status), 50 Table, 50 Binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC) 2-heat/2-cool, 13 4-cool, 31 Heat pump, 49 Binary outputs 2-heat/2-cool, 3-14 4-cool, 31 Configuration options for binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/5NC), 13, 31,49 Heat pump, 49 Binary outputs, 2-heat/2-cool Exhaust fan, 13 Generic, 13 Occupancy, 13 Overriding, 14 Table, 13 Binary outputs, 4-cool Exhaust fan, 31 Generic, 31 Occupancy, 31 Overriding, 31 Table,.31 Binary outputs, heat pump Exhaust fan, 49 Generic, 49 Occupancy, 49 Overriding, 49 Table, 46, 49 Building automation system communication, 1, 86 C Calculations In PID loops, 64-65 Cascade zone control 2-heat/2-cool, 20 4-cool, 38 Heat pump, 56 CE, see Agency listing/compliance Circuit board Diagram, 73 jumper (J1) location, 83 CO2 measurement input, 16, 34, 52 Compliance Compressor operation, 59 Configuration options All (Generic, CO2, or RH), 15, 33,51 Al2 (Outdoor air or generic temperature), 17, 35, 53 B11 (Occupancy or generic), 14, 32,50 Binary output 5-(exhaust fan, occupancy, or generic), 13, 31, 49 Configurations 2-heat/2-cool, 9-25 4-cool, 27-43 Heat pump, 45-62 Damper actuators, 6 Demand control ventilation, 24, 42, 60 Derivative calculation, PID loops, 65 Derivative control, 65 Diagnosing operational problems, 87-91 Diagnostics Automatic, 78 CO2 Sensor Failure, 16, 34, 52,. 79 Disable generation of, 15, 33, 51 Discharge Air Temp Failure, 79 General, 78 Informational, 78 Invalid Unit Configuration, 79 Local Fan Switch Failure, 14, 32, 50,79 Local Space Setpoint Failure, 18, 36, 54, 79 Maintenance Required,25, 43, 62,79 Nonlatching, 78 Normal, 79 P Normal, 79 RH Sensor Failure, 16, 34,.52, 79 Space Temperature failure, 18, 19, 36, 37, 54, 55, 79 . Table, 79 Types, 78 Dimensional diagram, 3 Dimensions, 1 DIP switch settings 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 12 4-cool configuration, $0 Economizing, 17, 35, 53 Heat pump configuration, 48 Direct action of PID loops, 68 Discharge air temperature input 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 17 4-cool configuration, 35 Heat pump configuration, 53 94 CNT-SVX12C-EN TRANS' Discharge air.temperature . sensors; 6 Discharge air tempering, 24, 42, 60 E Economizing, 17, 23, 35, 41, 53, 60 Equipment Rooftop units, 13 Split systems, 13 Error deadband, 69-70 Adjusting for modulating. outputs, 69 Adjusting for staged outputs, 69-70 F Fan off delay, 25, 43, 62 Fan status, 25, 43, 62 Fan status input 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 14 4-cool configuration, 32 Heat pump configuration, 50 Fans Operation, 23, 41, 59 Troubleshooting, 89 Filter -maintenance timer, 25, 43, 61 Free cooling, see Economizing G Gains Changing, to troubleshoot specific problems, 72 Generic Temperature input, 17, 35, 53 Generic binary input 2-heat/2-cool, 14 4-cool, 32 Heat pump, 50 Generic binary output 2-heat/2-cool, 13 4-cool 31 Heat pump, 49 GND terminal, analog inputs, 15, 33,51 Grounding power transformers, 85 H Heat failure, troubleshooting, 90 Heat pump applications, 45 Components, 49 Heat pump configuration Analog inputs, 51-54 Binary inputs, 50 Binary output 5 (5NO/5COM/ 5NC), 49 Binary outputs, 49 Compressor operation, 59 Demand control ventilation, 60 DIP switch settings, 48 Discharge air temperature input, 53 Discharge air tempering, 60 Economizing, 53, 60 Exhaust fan output, 49 Fan off delay, 62 Fan operation, 59 Fan status, 62 Fan status input, 50 Filter -maintenance timer, 61 Generic binary input, 50 Generic binary output, 49 Heating or cooling mode, 59 Manual output test sequence, 76 Occupancy modes, 56 Occupancy or generic input, 50 Occupancy output, 49 Outdoor air damper operation, 58 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 61 Required and optional components, 46 Required and optional inputs and outputs, 46 Reversing valve operation, 59 Sequence of operations, 55-62 Temperature setpoint input, 54 Timed override control, 58 Unit protection strategies, 61 Wiring diagram, 47 Zone temperature input, 54 Heating or cooling mode Heat pump configuration, 59 Humidity Measurement input, 16, 34, 52 HVAC packaged units Wiring, 82 Wiring diagram, 84 Index HVAC split systems Wiring, 82 Wiring diagram, 84 HVAC unit electrical circuit wiring, 82-84 Input/output terminal wiring, 81 Integral calculation, PID loops, 64 Integral control, 64 J Jumper (J1) location, 83 L LEDs General, 73 Interpreting green (status), 77 Interpreting red (service), 76 Interpreting yellow (communications), 77 Location, 73 LonTalk communication, 86 Description, 1 LonTalk protocol, see LonTalk communication M Manual output test, 74-76 Manual output test sequence 2-heat/2-cool, 75 4-cool, 75 Heat pump, 76 Mounting Cover, 8 Diagram, 8 Location, 7 Operating environment, 2 Procedures, 8 N National Electrical Code, 81, 85 CNT SVX12C-EN 95 TRANE' Index Occupancy modes, 2-heat/2-cool General, 20 Occupied, 21 Occupied bypass, 22 Occupied standby, 21 Unoccupied, 21 Occupancy modes, 4-cool General, 38 Occupied, 39 Occupied bypass, 40 Occupied standby, 39 Unoccupied, 39 Occupancy modes, heat pump General, 56 Occupied, 57 Occupied bypass, 58 Occupied standby, 57 Unoccupied mode, 57 Occupancy or generic input 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 14 4-cool configuration, 32 Heat pump configuration, 50 Operating environment, 2 Outdoor air damper Operation, 22, 40, 58 Outdoor air damper remains closed Troubleshooting, 90 Outdoor air damper remains open Troubleshooting, 91 Outdoor air or generic temperature Input, 17, 35, 53 Outdoor air temperature input, 17, 35,53 Overriding binary outputs 2-heat/2-cool, 14 4-cool, 31 General, 74 Heat pump, 49 Overshooting the setpoint, 63 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 23, 41, 61 PID loops, 63-72 Action, 68 Calculations, 64-65 Definition, 63 Derivative calculation, 65 Direct action, 68 Effects of aggressiveness, 63 Error deadband, 69-70 Integral calculation, 64 Managing with additional settings, 71 Overview, 63 Proportional calculation, 64 Reverse action, 68 Sampling frequency for calculations, 65-67 Tips for specific problems, 72 Troubleshooting, 71-72 Power requirements, 2, 4 Power transformers, 6 Power wiring, 85 Power -up sequence, 19, 37, 55 Product description, 1 Proportional calculation, PID loops, 64 Proportional, integral, derivative (PID) loops, see PID loops Protection strategies 2-heat/2-cool, 24 4-cool, 42 Heat pump, 61 0 Rc, Rh terminal wiring, 82-84 Coupling and uncoupling with jumper, 83 Reverse action of PID loops, 68 Reversing valve operation, 59 Rooftop units, 9, 13, 27, 31 Rover, 1 Rover service tool, 1, 4, 13, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 31, 36, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 49, 54, 56, 57, 58, 60, 61, 62, 63, 74, 76, 77, 78, 88 Sampling frequency, 65-67 Changing, to troubleshoot specific problems, 72 see LonTalk communication, 86 Sensors Application -specific, 15, 33, 51 CO2, 16, 34, 52 Discharge airtemperature, 6, 20, 38,56 Occupancy, 14, 32, 50 Table of options, 6 Zone humidity, 16, 34,52 Zone temperature, 6 Sequence of operations, 2-heat/2- cool Demand control ventilation, 24 Discharge air tempering, 24 Economizing, 23 Fan off delay, 25 Fan operation, 23 Fan status, 25 Filter -maintenance timer, 25 Occupancy modes, 20 Outdoor air damper operation, 22 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 23 Power -up sequence, 19 Timed override control, 22 Unit protection strategies, 24 Sequence of operations, 4-cool Demand control ventilation, 42 Discharge air tempering, 42 Economizing, 41 Fan off delay, 43 Fan operation, 41 Fan status, 43 Filter -maintenance timer, 43 Occupancy modes, 38 Outdoor air damper operation, 40 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 41 Power -up sequence, 37 Timed override control, 40 Unit protection strategies, 42 Sequence of operations, heat pump Compressor operation, 59 Demand control ventilation, 60 Discharge air tempering, 60 Economizing, 60 Fan off delay, 62 Fan operation, 59 Fan status, 62 Filter -maintenance timer, 61 Heating or cooling mode, 59' Occupancy modes, 56 Outdoor air damper operation, 58 Peer -to -peer data sharing, 61 Power -up sequence, 55 Reversing valve operation, 59 Timed override control, 58 Unit protection strategies, 61 96 CNT-SVX12C-EN TRWE8 Service Pin button Function, 74 Location 73 Setpoint, controlling with PID loop, 63. Settings PID loops, 71 Simplified zone control 2-heat/2-cool, 20 4-cool; 38 Heat pump, 56 Specifications Agency listing/compliance, 4 Dimensional diagram,3 Dimensions, 1 Input/output terminal wiring, 81 Power requirements, 2, 4 Storage environment, 4 Transformers, 85 Split systems, 9, 13 Status indicators for operation and i communication General, 73 Green LEDs, 77 j Manual output test, 74 Red LEDs, 76 Service Pin button, 74 Test button, 73, 74 Yellow LEDs, 77 Storage environment, 4 T Temperature sensors Discharge air, 6 Table of options, 6 Zone, 6 Temperature setpoint input 2- heat/2-cool configuration, 18 4-cool configuration, 36 Heat pump configuration, 54 Test button Function, 73 Location, 73 Thermistor, 54 Timed override control 2-heat/2-cool, 22 4-cool, 40 Heat pump, 58 Transformers, 6, 85 Troubleshooting Fans, 89 Heat failure, 90 Initial steps, 88 Outdoor air damper remains closed, 90 Outdoor air damper remains open, 91 PID loops, general, 71-72 PID loops, specific problems, 72 U UL, see Agency listing/compliance Unit protection strategies 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 24 4-cool configuration, 42 Heat pump configuration, 61 Universal 4-20 mA, 15, 33, 51 W Wiring AC power, 85 Compliance with National Electrical Code, 81, 85 Connecting ac power, 85 General, 81-86 HVAC packaged units, 82 HVAC packaged units, diagram, 84 HVAC split systems, 82 HVAC split systems, diagram, 84 HVAC unit electrical circuit, 82-84 Input/output.terminals, 81 LonTalk communication, 86 Network communication, 86 Requirements and options for 2- heat/2-cool configuration, 10 Requirements and options for 4- cool configuration, 28 Requirements and options for heat pump configuration, 46 .Wiring diagram 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 11 4-cool configuration, 29 Heat pump configuration, 47 Index Z Zone temperature input 2-heat/2-cool configuration, 18 4-cool configuration, 36 Heat pump configuration, 54 Zone temperature sensors, 6 CNT-SVX12C-EN 41 0 i i I 98 10/12/ 06 12:25 1�1/10/2006 14'. 30 4078391655 DEL AIR - 727415615752 i27.4666752 THE METAL SHOP NO.822 P002/004 PAGE 01/05 UMODEL RED DOWNSLAST DIRECT DRIVE CENTRIFUGAL. ROOF EXHAUSTER APPLICATION Model RCtS direct drive units Ore usnd to athavtt air from ell Will- of n Commercial and insti1Lrtl0MAI buildings stgh as hospiYAN And heal+ r care titllnlel. schedtt,>rdol linnet buildinq%�machinery and equipmentropmi,nWggr,,rrt4ilstoresandsimilar0001IC411ons c3 The non r)v*rlmndlrfl whrrl with Its higher ttati{ prPcsurn capability rAgRa$ tills unit sultably for clrhr;..lvetes! of nonducted applications. It's roof mounting permits 10Cstlon near the orca to bC.vsrrrlllartq, .11lowing short duel runs and more efficienr. oprrAtion. The spun Aluminum rtrriii provides an attractive weerance and is compatabie with belt driven Model p$ and companion graviry unit) tQ mn!re up n COrnriletc vtntilovon system. Direct drhre vnits asT smnllrr e0)mwtor whrela,.resulting In low toUnd levels antl quiet operation Thty ht+vt no belts or lan tln4rings to maintain or odlusr end Conr*OuarlTly rOquire very itrlle maintenance, CONSTRUCTION Hotlirng Curb tap hats patpunchrd mounting holes for ease of installation. •. fen plate IfQ18Taf motor compartment horn c*mArninarrd RYhauer Rir Spun aluminum hood and sk4•1 for waAthe r prntrction and attractive Appearan<a • heavy gauge motor suppwr for fipidity and strersplh • Neopren@ Isol4mrs for reductian of vihrolion and /mirnd. (quick access To motor eompar;mrrit for rase of tnaintenant:R. Condult p4,^.tAge for easy electrical connettlon from below roof. Aluminum b(rdscraen and disconnect ant included on standard mcdolll, wheml Non overlogding fnrsafroperation In ducted systems • 8ackwrrd inclinttd wheals constructed of nontormllve nluminun+. SrArireny Arid dynamlrAlly bsfancrrl for smooth operallon. Speed Controllable Motors STttndArd motors 4nr single speed, speed controllable and drip+proof. AR motors art rated for continuous duty. Discomneer Is standard with single speed drip-pfoOf motors. motwA ship mounted 4s standard DIMENSIONAL DATA MC?DEL A D G D mi, TYPICAL drtwlwc wEitnr �6 213/4 163/4 161/2 13/4 11314 48 9 21 314 1 G 3/4 16 112 1 3/4 It 314 46 —10 _ •11r 1i4 JG 3/4 16 1 /t 1 X4 11 314 - 67 — 1 � 33 1/il u w 24 2 112 191 4 123 ACC2550RIES Sailed State Speod Controll control it marched to the minor An• I blower whes:110 Itllow continuous reduction in p,*dewmancir iilowing xtiustment: of aknow for sr stern Waning CFM Is reduced in dtrrri proportlon to motor Vo-cd reduction. Speed control is only AvOleble lot 1 5 v01t IrnQlr ph.tst. EtthauATef porformrnct Mtn tie cant rolled /errm the ventilated stun. AMCA SNAI. 06;ei A m S t A. rf111Mi M>. r.. ua•elr aiL silo,. IMn., IIr MM IIN AYr:A S\•' rlr Mser �I e� yry I»r<\ N Nrl per eIr•• �w rKrrepsr •�• Ilcc w.v m . dE� n.A4rwm an w• hN�r ewe Sn .m rnrrrte #4k- imJ'UCAC•fIWM111 w1-ne�rrp. US= POWER ROOF VErITI1 ATOR UL 5TANOARD 705 MODEL 11EC0111MENDED 12' NIGH MOUNTING CURE RI:GOMMENOF,O GRAVITY DAMPER I V. VOLT SPE D Ce1WPOIL RED OD STOCK NO, OD STOtiK NO, STOCK NO, STOCK NO. al111.171p_ 11 411ril 1 2727.1 N/A r3-- )43�/e/e 611?14 T 11 411D11 -----'727,1 Nl� 1� �IAJ/4 611�14 -- 11-- - 411011 .F22 ,I NIA 12 _221/4 G_lii22 18 d1101£1 !727.1 2828.1 15 x2 1 /4 - 61 12i] -- - 18 41101 g N/A 2028.1 SPEED CONTROL 2727.1 MAX I/3 HP-5 AMP 120V 2828,1 MAX 1 /2 HP-10 AMP 120V ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHE5, WEIGHTS IN POUNDS, 00 IS OUTSIDE DIMENStiON OF SQUARE CURB AND 0AMPI R DUE TO CONTINUING RESEARCH. SOL,ER & PALAU RF_SFRVFS THE RIGHTTO CHANGE SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT NOTICE. -Wr- e _ ___. _ __ ®---- .i1ar12/06 12:25 4078391655 4 DEL AIR N0.822 P005/004 7274666752 10/10/2006 14:00 7274665752 THE METAL SHOP PAGE 04/05 Mu"DEL Cepanuvtrablastlfra�►al olrecltaof t Prllre W Ablator w11h Oor n Dri mnt Motor �xflattster Modei iMe><ar Marc. UM at Static PreSsu1'11 t r srvaa 20a 230/1/60 - . REDS- Hp 8Hp RPM vase 0 1/8� ` 1/^ 3/A 1/2T 5!8 3/4 { 7/S 1 S e_ekNO. <tork No. Ci 1110 0,05 1650 11.0 390 3-17 Z95 i32 134 _ RE( 06JHIAS RE0061iWc$ t1 1/25 10.04 1050 A,5 _573 468 32b _ REr38WM1A5 _ N/A . .. 1/10 0.12 1550 .9,5 $4� �$1� 703 622 1 523 398 251 , ARrnA1H1AS REDOWHIQ 10, 1/4 0.27 16C10 12.4 1436 1348 y1256 1155-� 1041 Q10 _ -758 tSOA Al2 REC 10MMiA5 AF(y1gMHiCS„ 12 1/d _ 0.15 115f1 >3.9 1545 1135b 1144 952 769. 558 -�� RED12MMIAS_ 0012MM1CS 1R _ 0,5Z,_ 1750 103 x3s2 _�4Ad 110.1 • 673J 1832 1689 1562 : 1 '24 REE12QHIAS R�'P12dH1C5 15 1/Z1150 13:7 3003 .2779 2540 2285 2038 1774 1480'y1180 89b RE0r500.AtC5 Sprrd tRPlw.t shown r1 Aarmpt. Performance is tsasrd an acnrat 1pged of rtsr, Peanh*+DAft eerrifrQd is for imtallorron type A-frte intit, fro? outlet Performance rofings rnclude rhr eNecr3 of birdscrern in rhr airstream. 7rin ;•ound rotinpf shown arc the loudness vrdiues in the (an Bonet 9 S' l t,Snr) :n o hemfcphericaf her iirld calcuforrd perAMCA SMAdr id 301. Ngluec shown 111E for instnllnf!»n lytin A-rrar inletfnn snne 1"14 Performance Onto at Reduced Speed 1 /8 133- 187- _234 293 238 525 721 640 856 1058 CFM at Static � 1 /4 3/8 146 - Pressure 1 /2 'A 3 :4 ----- - - - -425- - -- `7/8� 1 - - - -'- - J - " 393 - 633 . _.376 1073 929 " - Model RED Motor Max, Hp BHp RPM sor1Q3 uA SP 2.4 3.5 4.6 0 224 260 295 343 409 627 -"791 808 6-1550 8-1050 1 /10 0.02 0.02 ' 0.03 0,04� 950 _1100 1250 1450 f 6.2 229 -- all 638 403 131- 1 R 5 1J10 1 J4 1 1 JA 0,02 --(3.a5 0,10 750 1150 1450 1 $' 5,5 _ 8.4` 4.2 $-1 SS0 10-16z5 i 2.1(175 12-1625 15-1 140 249 545 - 0.06 0,09 0.15 _0.22 0.0£s 0.12 _ 900 1.100 6.3 987 1167 696 936 1 552 '489 ^ F05 762 _ ' - t,78 084 1344 514 _ - 412 811 1; 10 I . _ -_.. 1300 1500 900 1050 8.5 11:0 790 1042 615 910 553 $66 1139 1484 - 795 1346 1253 5.8 1209 1 959 708 456 7.6 7 411 1702 970 771 1231 1040 14$4 ; 1299 -1801 16s4S 1212 _ 759 1567-� 12(" 1902 1 �i02 2228 1950 112 _ - 1/2 r 0.17 0.24 1200 1350 9.6 11.8 14.9 7613 1914 2083 1958 2219 1432 1653 0.36 0.14 0.19 1550 750 19 2 1599 1907 6.3 " 850, 7.9 9.% 11,5 0,27 950 1050 2481 2742 2202 2493 1256 1672 f 87 1,332 •1C IiL621,.- 0.36 Model A e `cruced speed toblt Indicates ),er and motor MOM of ba3e unit: Prrfrrrmdnce is 6r thor bos#unlr operored or (edurt-ri creed usino the solid state speed rnntrpl nr;cri+o+y AMCAStoi far rnund rolino deal nat anply to artery wah speed Comm) List S AMP$pied Control formnhdrt 1/3 HP and cmdller, Use TO AMP Spa -if Control formofors 712. F, 7274666752 Irl 5/2006 14:39 727466-752 THE METAL SHOP PAGE 01/02 -I Horne of the Origing] Tube .1-10teel Tank Holders LZ TO: DATE: lo FROM: v, No. # of Message: lw-se- See cut -5" 200F, 14:39 7274666752 THE METAL SHOP PAGE 02/02 AT-r- eR►C. jOn-e 3 4.4 DEVELGPMENT FEE W ORKSHEET Utility Department Project Date / 4G Owner/Contact Person: Phone: Address: 63- ow e/.-SO 6 1) TYPE OF DEVELOPMENT: Residential ❑ Non -Residential 2) TYPE OF UNIT(s): Single Family ❑ Multi -Family Commercial, 1ndustrialE5--" 3) TOTAL NUMBER OF UNITS or BUILDINGS: 4) TYPEE OF UTILM, CONNECTIO fi a) Deter: Individual 9Master F I c+% Tap Required ❑ Tap Existing b) Sewer Tap: IndividualE Common ❑ b Tap Required ❑ Tap Existing 0 5) WATER METER SIDE: %-inch❑ 1-inch ❑ 1 Vz-inch ❑ 2-inch ❑ Supplied try Contractor 6) AWS METER: None ❑ Individual Mastcr Supplied by ((Alternative water supply} Meter❑ Meter ❑ Contractor a) Meter Size: %-inch ❑ 1-inch ❑ 1 V2-.arch .: ❑ 2-inch F-] Supplied by ❑ Conft, rtor Water impact fees........ $ 1552 s Sewer impact fees........ $ 3 V97 So Water Meter set .......... $ Water Meter set and tap $ Meter deposit and S/C.. $ T Sewer tap ................ $ 1- AWS Meter Set .........$ bD AWS Meter Tap & set.$ TOTAL II Signature - Utility. Director Or Engineer Date: 12 fl z o COMMENTS: Updated: October 1, 2006 Page 1 of 2 City of Sanford Utility. Department P.O. Box 1788, Sanford. FL 32772 Residential r quivaient residential Connection (ERC) — 300 Gallons Per Day (GPD) $1242/Unit - Single family structure, or multi -family unit containing three (3) bedrooms or more. $931.50/Unit - Multi -family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. This cate o judgment/assumption, estimation that such family units on average,require 75% 225 GPD sin eg rY is based on Commercial — Industrial — Institutional F family unit.) $1242 /ERU - Fixture unit schedule from Southern Plumbing,Code-will be used. ERU will be charged for connection and to twee projects , up twenty (2) fixture units. For ro sects haing more than twenty (20) fixture units, the Impact Fee will be determined by increments of 25% based on multiples of five (5) fixture units above the .twenty (20) fixture unit base for the first ERU. (Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 1.25 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5ERU.) Sewer Svstem 1mDaCt Fees Equivalent Residential Connections = 300 Gallons Per Day y ( :GPD ) $2798/Unit " Single family structure or multi -family unit containing three (3) bedrooms or more. $2098,50/Unit -Multi-family unit or Mobile Home unit containing less than three (3) bedrooms. (This category< is based on judgment/assumption/estimation that such family units on average require 75% of water and sewer service of an average single family unit.) Commercial — Industrial — Institutional $2798/ERU - Fixture unit schedule from Southern Plumbing Code will be used. One ERU will be charged for connection and u to twenty20 fixture units. For projects having more than twee 20 fixture Chits the Impact Fee will be ( ) p J g increments of 25% based on multiples of five (5) fixture units above ttyhe twenty (20) fixture unit base for the first ERU. (Example: twenty-five (25) fixture units will be rated as 1.25 ERU; twenty-six (26) fixture units will be rated as 1.5 ERU,) TART lc •fnn I �... �,._ . —_ __ u.....�ucau over a bathtub or whirlpool bathtub attachments does not increase the drainage fixture unit value. 71i5 L. •+ +wav iv7.4. ° See section 709.2 through 709,4 for methods ° flows. of computing unit value of fixtures not listed in Table 7.09.1 or for rating of devices int Trap size will be consistent with the ennittent fixture outlet size. ° For the purpose of computing loads on building drains and sew urinals shall not be rated at a lower drainage fixture unit unless the lower values are confirmed, by testing. ° For the a sewers, water closets or purpose of computing loads on building drains and sewers, water closets or urinals shall unless the lower values are con'ttot be rated at a lower drainage fixture unit firmed by testing. teiUH.DRA_ -- •Kvr, VIA t uKE UNITS FOR FIXTURE DRAINS OR TRAPS �C)�7;iRL IIV OR DRAINAGE FrKTU� TRAP SaX (Inches) U IT VALUE Sg, S F. v , N ,.► 1 �' I Y' 2 2 3 2Z F.V. /`itEW 2'Y2 4 3 5 4 ti COMMERCIAL — INDUSTRIAL — INSTITUTIONAL FEE CALCULATION: Total ERU(s) : Total F.U. 2 divide by 20 = 1, 2 Water Impact Fee: $1242 x ERU(s) (F U ERU(s) = $ Sewer Impact Fee: $2798 x /. 26 ERU(s) = $ 3'197 50 Total Fixture Units (F.U.): Z Z F.U. /20=ERU) Updated; October 1, 2006 Page 2 or 2 Standard Plumhinn rm. , m, COUNTY OF SEMINOLEh IMPACT FEE STATEMENT STATEMENT NUMBER: 07100000 DATE: January 12, 2007 BUILDING APPLICATION #: 07-10000002 BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER: 07-10000002 UNIT ADDRESS: CODISCO WAY 531 28-19-30-506-0000-033A TRAFFIC ZONE:022 JURISDICTION: .SEC: TWP: RNG: SUF: PARCEL: SUBDIVISION: TRACT: PLAT BOOK: PLAT BOOK PAGE: BLOCK: LOT: OWNER NAME: ADDRESS: APPLICANT NAME: SANFORD PARTNERS LLC ADDRESS: P.O. BOX 2809 ORLANDO FL 32802 LAND USE: OFFICE TYPE USE: WORK DESCRIPTION: CITY-SANFORD SPECIAL NOTES: SANFORD INDUSTRIAL PARK DEL AIR OFFICE --------------------------------------------- FEE BENEFIT RATE UNIT --------'--------------------- CALC UNIT TOTAL DUE TYPE DIST SCHED RATE UNITS TYPE ROADS -ARTERIALS N/A Office < 100K Square Feet 1,545.00 13.425 1000gsft 20,741.62 ROADS -COLLECTORS N/A Office < 100K Square Feet .00 _NA ;, 13.425 1000gsft .00 FIRE RESCUE .00 LIBRARY N/A .00 SCHOOLS N/A .00 PARKS N/A .00 LAW ENFORCE N/A • .00 DRAINAGE N/A .00 CREDIT FEES: SCI ROAD ARTERIAL$ Impact Fee Credit 741.62 0 100 qft 20,741.62- DUE .00 STATEMENT RECEIVED BY: �� DN Nee�7WA-p-SrIGNATURE . (PLEASE PRINT NAME) DATE'- NOTE TO RECEIVING SIGNATORY APPLICANT: FAILURE TO NOTIFY OWNER AND ENSURE TIMELY PAYMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR LIABILITY FOR THE FEE. *** DISTRIBUTION: 1-BLDG DEPT 3-APPLICANT 2-FINANCE 4-LAND MANAGEMENT **NOTE** PERSONS ARE ADVISED THAT THIS IS A STATEMENT OF hES DUE UNDER THE SEMINOLE COUNTY ROAD, FIRE/RESCUE, LIBRARY AND/OR EDUCATIONAL•._ ISSUANCE OF A BUILDING PERMIT. PERSONS ARE ALSO"ADVISED THAT ANY RIGHTS OF THE APPLICANT, OR OWNER, TO APPEAL THE CALCULATION OF ANY OF THE ABOVE MENTIONED IMPACT FEES MUST BE EXERCISED BY FILING A.WRITTEN REQUEST WITHIN 45 CALENDAR DAYS OF THE RECEIVING SIGNATURE DATE ABOVE, BUT NOT LATER THAN CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY OR OCCUPANCY. THE REQUEST FOR REVIEW MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTY LAND DEVELOPMENT CODE. COPIES OF RULES GOVERNING APPEALS MAY BE PICKED UP, OR REQUESTED, FROM THE PLAN IMPLEMENTATION OFFICE: 1101 EAST FIRST STREET, SANFORD FL, 32771; 407-665-7356. PAYMENT SHOULD BE MADE TO: SEMINOLE COUNTY OR CITY OF SANFORD BUILDING DEPARTMENT 1101 EAST FIRST STREET SANFORD, FL 32771 PAYMENT SHOULD BE BY CHECK OR MONEY ORDER, AND SHOULD REFERENCE PHE COUNTY BUILDING PERMIT NUMBER AT THE TOP LEFT OF THIS STATEMENT. ***THIS STATEMENT IS NO LONGER VALID IF A BUILDING PERMIT IS NOT*** ISSUED WITHIN 60 CALENDAR DAYS OF THE RECEIVING SIGNATURE DATE ABOVE * DETAIL OF CALCULATION AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. CALL 407-665-7356. G�✓f CITY OF SANFORD PERMIrQAPPLICATION Application # : / / tTl Submittal Date: ,12 ' Job Address: (,j&y4 Value of Work: $ Q Historic District: Parcel ID: Description of Work: Zoning: o'! 1iZ/1—$quare Footage: ECEIVED APR 3 0 2007 ....................................................................................................................... Permit Type: Building ❑ Electrical Ek" Mechanical ❑ Plumbing ❑ Fire Sprinkler/Alarm ❑ Pool ❑ Sign ❑ Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Addition/Alteration ❑ Change of Service l- Temporary Pole ❑ Mechanical: Residential ❑ Non -Residential ❑ Replacement ❑ New ❑ (Duct Layout & Energy Cale. Required) Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential ❑ Commercial ❑ Occupancy Type: Residential ❑ Commercial 6" Industrial ❑ Occupancy Use Group(s): r -r Construction Type: # of Stories: # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required) .................. required ) •..."Pe Contractor: T/7ri2...�.......................................................... /... ,.i/� r Property Owner: Address: / Po e�� S C�u C �!/C Address: " Phone: E-mail: Phone.M-.�.f-KM State License Number: �ef/70m bl( Bonding Company: Mortgage Lender: Address: Address: Architect/Engineer: Address: Plan Review Contact Person: Phone: Fax: Phone: Fax: E-mail: Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS., and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING; CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this pennit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the ro of there uire en of F da Lien Law, F P P �' P Pert., 4 � ��� Signature of Owner/Agent Print Owner/Agent's Name Date Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Owner/Agent is _ Produced ID APPROVALS: ZONING: Special Conditions: Rev 02/2007 Personally Known to Me or UTIL: FD: ,Sere of Dbft eCor/AgoKV Date Pnn for/A nt's Name Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Contractor/Agent is Personally Known to e r Produced ID ENG: BLDG: $1100 -L3 TO COASTLINE EXISTING SERVICE (1) 2.1/2" EC W/3-250 A/U + 1#1CU EACH Code violations found during inspection are required to be corrected. Plan/permit issuance does not grant approval of a code violation. 2004 FBC109.1 600 AMP. 3 PH. MDP 2 120/208 3 PH. 600 AMP MB M D P-1 2000 AMP. 3 PH. GEAR EXISTING TO DEL -AIR (4) 3" EC W/4-300 3CU EACH NEW _ 1200 AMP. 3 PH. 1200 AMP ATS — METER BASE CT CABINET U.L. ARRESTOR EXISTING SERVICE — (4) W EC W/4-300 CU EACH _ELECTRIC RISER OFFICE DENOTES EXISTING SERVICE DENOTES NEW SERVICE (4) 3" EC W/4-300 CU EACH o _ cm N V L9 Co Cn Ch Q1 N La L 0 (C N O LO O O"T s � C:) (n N N LL 5 CZ�aTOC) 0 ^ @i � x 3 o a Co m 3 cCno0 a Ln co rn 0 0 _M U �j w C L° N r �p O 0')i�^0? �-% N M LO M CC c`) W�-°jz- `00 C -0a LL U) 0 c� E w '^ c� VJ J (z in O mN U-S?co L O ccoo i -0 LL Q O - O I _ O � V C CY) U) 00 a zo _ Uj , dCV- ' t,_ 3 Q..� 43 OMIT# > l�r:tric Service DAE: Details 531 odisco ay Sanford Florida -%* aacaao, RECEIVED CITY OF SANFORDd'ERMIT APPLICATION JA N 1 7 2007 Permit #:(07 �—Date: 01-17-07 Job Address:_Del-Air - 531 Codisco Way - Sanford, Florida 32771 - 407-333-2665 Description of Work: To furnish and install an addressable fire alarm system, Historic District: n/a Zoning: city Value of Work: $ $35' 895 .00 Permit Type: Building Electrical Electrical: New Service — # of AMPS Mechanical: Residential Non -Residential Plumbing/ New Commercial: # of Fixtures Mechanical Plumbing FireffifWAlarm X Pool — Addition/Alteration Change of Service TemporaryPole Replacement New (Duct Layout & Energy Calc. Required) # of Water & Sewer Lines # of Gas Lines Plumbing/New Residential: # of Water Closets Plumbing Repair — Residential or Commercial Occupancy Type: Residential Commercial Industrial I I B Total Square Footage:: 87362 (2 floors total) Construction Type: II Imo_ # of Stories: 2 # of Dwelling Units: Flood Zone: (FEMA form required for other than X) Parcel #: (Attach Proof of Ownership & Legal Description) Owners Name & Address: Sanford Partners LLC / Robert Dello Russo / 109 CommeroeS Lake Mary, Florida 32746 - John Schneeman Rep. Phone: 407-324-8516 Contractor Name & Address: Nutech Fire & Security, Inc - 150 Candace Dr. - Maitland, Florida 32751 State License Number: EF0000191 Phone&Fax: 407-628-1600 / 407-539-1115ContactPerson: David D. Ramos Phone: X1602 Bonding Company: Address: Mortgage Lender: Address: Architect/Engineer: Wilson & Associates - P.O. box915260 Phone: 407-682-4052 Address: Longwood, Florida 32791-5260 Fax: 407-682-3841 i Application is hereby made to obtain a permit to do the work and installations as indicated. I certify that no work or installation has commenced prior to the issuance of a permit and that all work will be performed to meet standards of all laws regulating construction in this jurisdiction. I understand that a separate permit must be secured for ELECTRICAL WORK, PLUMBING, SIGNS, WELLS, POOLS, FURNACES, BOILERS, HEATERS, TANKS, and AIR CONDITIONERS, etc. OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify that all of the foregoing information is accurate and that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning. WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. NOTICE: In addition to the requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property that may be found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits required from other governmental entities such as water management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify the owner of the property of the requirements of�Florida 'en Law, FS 713. X : X : l/ / RATE Signature of Owner/Agent Date Signature of Contractor/Agent e `S Greg DeTa do EF00001 ® DeTardo, President Print Owner/Agent's Name Print Contra or/Agent's Name Tech Fire& Security, Info X: X: �LORIDA Signature of Notary -State of Florida Date Signa'tur of Notary -State of Florida Date �- /7 — O -- Owner/Agent is _ Personally Known to Me or Produced ID APPLICATION APPROVED BY: Bldg: Zoning: (Init I & Date) Special Conditions: Contractor/Agent is v Personally Known to Me or Produced ID Utilities: (Initial & Date) (Initial & Date) FD: nitial &, Q tel Y P� Notary Public State of Florida r° �� Donna Aletse Weiner tvty ;Ommission DD461495 166D Expires 0811412009 F/rye & Seourfty, /no. Professional Consultants Asset Protection Managemen State Licensed #EF0000191 UL Listing #S526, Location Description: Del -Air UL Listing #BP8 75p UL Listing #BP8W60. 531 Codisco Way — Sanford, Florida 32771 LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: I, Greg DeTardo, grant David D. Ramos, limited power of attorney to act as my representative for the purpose of obtaining any and all licenses/permits with regard to the fire alarm/low voltage permit for the above location. The above listed representative is authorized to sign any receipts, applications, forms or other documents required in obtaining this permit. Signed: (/ // Dater ^07 Printed: Greg DeTardo — President 00 gyORAT s, License Holder #: EF0000191 Greg DeTardo, president j� / NuTech Fire& Security/Inc. STATE OF GU Lea-% FLORIDA COUNTY OF The fgegoing instrument was acknowledged this /j'�y day of ,2ao7 ,by who personally appeared before me and acknowledged that He/She signed the instrument voluntarily for the purpose expressed in it. Personally Known Produced Identification Type of Identification X �G�ir > a Signature of Notary Public, State of Florida Print or Type Name of Notary Public =ovaY>LB^ Notary F,.,r :< State of Florida Donna ,A+e..:, Weiner o` My Commission DD461495 �'1 or nod Expires 0804/2009 Witness # 1 /�7 X P-VIQIL�- Date: �� �' (A �p Print name:A - �J&,h,y— W1 s # 2 , Date: 1710 Print name:'H Ot1144el i n e- O Lpos i Q Orlando (407) 628-1600 "Providing Florida with professionally installed security, fire and communications equipment for over fifteen years" 150 Candace Drive • Maitland, FL 32751 • FAX (407) 539-1115 • Daytona (904) 257-1080 • Ocala (352) 401-9900 @b.......l.i.. /DAM AAC 00N9 - G_w.wll. n..l..n (.T w..►�nhennu�ifa nnm NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT Permit No. State of Florida County of Seminole Tax Folio No. The undersigned hereby gives notice that improvement will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. 1. Description of property: (legal description of the property and street address if available) 531 odisco ay Sanford, Florida 2. General description of improvement: Add to existing offices 3. Owner information a. Name and address Sanford Partners LLC General Partner Robert Dello Russo 109 Commerce St Lake Mary Florida J2746 b. Interest in property 1110" c. Name and address of fee simple titleholder (if other than Owner) 4. Contractor a. Name and address Certified Construction & Design John Schneeman b. Phone number 407-324-8516 Fax number 407-324-9244 5. Surety a. Name and address x/A b. .Phone number Fax number c. Amount of bond 6. Lender a. Name and address N/A b. Phone number Fax number 7. Persons within the State of Florida designated by Owner upon whom notices or other documents may be served as provided by Section 713.13(1)(a)7., Florida Statutes: a. Name and address John Schneeman 521 Silvergate Loop Lake Mary, Florida 32746 b. Phonenumber 407-324-8516 Fax number 40 -324-9244 8. In addition to himself or herself, Owner designates of to receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as provided in Section 713.13(l)(b), Florida Statutes. a. Phone number Fax number 9. Expiration date of notice of commencement (the expiration date is 1 year from the date of r n sa5rldif -rent date is specified) Signature of Owner LL Ayiyrn to (or ed) an scribed before me this � day of , 20�� by ig= r cux,'y%6 Personally Known FOR Produced Identification nf tification Produced ignature of Notary Pu 1c, State of Florida Commission Expires: ;; DIANECAROLTODGAANIAN ..i •• ;p, COMMISSION 4 DD 184234 EXPIRES: February 17, 2067 •� 4f. h `, BoMed Thtu Notary Pubk tpidenrtdars SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, Fl. 32771 / P. O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 (407) 302-2516 / FAX (407) 302-2526 Timothy Robles /Fire Marshal Plans Review Sheet Date: January 22, 2007 Business Address: 531 Codisco Way #40 -Storage / Office Business Name: Del -Air Ph. ( 407) 628-1600 Contractor: New Tech Ph. (407) 628-1660 Fax. Comment: Fire Department will require (2) two "31 JX" phone lines for fire alarm monitoring. 1.1 Horn Strobes shall be mounted according plans with ceiling visibility /show shelving locations . 1.5 Building owner- Sanford Fire Prevention will require (3) three phone numbers and names for after hour emergencies to be placed in "Knox Box" 1.6 Monitoring — Required on all tamper, fire sprinkler flow switches, 1.7 Duct Detectors- Required for local notification only 1 SANFORD FIRE DEPARTMENT FIRE PREVENTION DIVISION 300 N. Park Ave., Sanford, Fl. 32771 / P. O. Box 1788, Sanford, Fl. 32772 (407) 302-2516 / FAX (407) 302-2526 Timothy Robles /Fire Marshal Plans Review Sheet Date: January 22, 2007 Business Address: 531 Codisco Way 440 -Storage / Office Business Name: Del -Air Ph. ( 407) 628-1600 Contractor: New Tech Ph. (407) 628-1660 Fax. Reviewed [ ] Reviewed with comment [X Rejected [ ] Reviewed by: Timothy Robles, Fire Marshal /Plans Examiner / Shall comply with N.F.P.A. #72 Comment: Fire Department will require (2) two "31 JX" phone lines for fire alarm monitoring. 1.5 Building owner- Sanford Fire Prevention will require (3) three phone numbers and names for after hour emergencies to be placed in "Knox Box" 1.6 Monitoring — Required on all tamper, fire sprinkler flow switches, 1.7 Duct Detectors- Required for local notification only 1 OF NYC LISTED v,„;NG! MEA SYSTEM FEA-fijkCS • Up to 234 zones suitable for 2-wire smoke detectors Eight additions! waterflow supervision. zones • Up to 260 individually supervised notification circuits • lk to 242 gi"aphic annunciator outputs U OtQs�e02fogbe Fora C relays ,. Q�;�Y1 1�tf1 3%1E3@6 from DMP provides alarm dealers withkthe industrys most powerful addressable fire system available. The package is built around the proven XR200 Command Processor"'and offers the panels reputation for reliability and full range of zone expansion, communication, and relay output capabilities. • Contact ID and Modem Ile reporting to non-DMP receivers • Serviceman's Passcode restricts. system access to authorized Persons only with central station verification No external programmer required.. 4.: c aMMUNICATION "IheA,200 has unmatched communication ap tilities using its digital dialer, multiplex, c4ikr, and data network communication. ' e%jun also choose Modem Ile and Contact I Driprting to non-DMP UL listed receivers to rTeda range of installation and monitoring rgUwnents. DISITAL COMMUNICATION TIeXR200F uses the SDLC format to send aL4rm and system reports to the central station using high speed digital data transfer.. MLLTIPLE76 +CI7aMMUNICATION Tte XR200 panel's multiplex capability atbws you to meet requirements for installations where UL AA multiplex eonnunication is either required ora viable C)Pkx EXPANDED MOST OPTIONS The XR200 features enhanced host options that provide host backup, customizable check -in times, retry times, and much rnote, By enabling the host. backup, the pare) can send messages via a second 4624 card or a network device, such as a DM P iCOM- Internet Alarm Router. DUAL REPORTING You can send reports to one or two DMP SCS .1 or SCS-1 R Receivers and use either receiver as a backup if the other cannot be reached. FIRE ZONE PROGRAMMING You can program zones for fire, fire verify, fire retard, presignal, cross zoning, or fire supervisory. This flexibility allows you to match individual zone characteristics to the needs of any area in the fire installation. ZONE EXPANSION The XR20OF provides up to 242 fire zones programmable for a variety of fire applications. Six Class B powered zones are provided,for supervising fire initiating devices. 28 additional zones are available on the 8 keypad addresses and up to 200 zones can be added using expansion Interface Cards. 200 ADDRESSABLE NOTIFICATION CIRCUITS The XR20OF panel supports up to 200 Model 867 Addressable Style W Notification Circuit Modules for individual protected area annunciation. Each 867 can be set to a unique supervisory address and bell relay address for zoned annunciation. BUILT-IN PROGRAMMER AND DIAGNOSTICS The XR200 programmer is on -board and does not require external programming. This allows installers and service technicians to program the panel and run the panel's system diagnostics program from any keypad. UPLOADJDOWNLOAD You can program the XR20OF through any alphanumeric keypad or remotely using the DMP Remote Link' program. OUTPUTS Adding the optional Model 430 Wire Harness and two Model 305 Plug-in output relays to the XR20OF panel adds two SPOT relay outputs and eight 12 VDC 50mA outputs. Model 716 Output ExpanderModules increase the panel's relay capacity to 202 auxiliary Form C relays and 242 open collector outputs. 200 USER CODES You can assign up to 200 custom usercodes in the XR200 panel. Customizing usercocies allows you to select the system functions and keypad displays each user can access, Ni ne fixed access levels are available. Each has its own predefined authority level. XR20OF PACKAGE CONTENTS Qty Description 1 XR200 Command Processor'M PCB 1 350.81 Large, Red Enclosure 1 893 or 893A Dual Phone Line Module 1 715 or 715.18T Zone Expander Module 1 866 Style W Notification Module 1 318 Dual Battery Harness 1 32016 VAC, 40VA Wire -in Transformer 1 325 Transformer Bracket/Terminal Strip 2 365-7 RJ Phone Cables LISTINGS AND APPROVALS • Underwriters Laboratories - S3598 Central Station Signaling Local Protective Signaling Remote Station Protective Signaling Proprietary Protective Signaling • California State Fire Marshal - 7165 1157:105 • New York City MEA 168.93-E Vol, 3 • Factory Mutual - OD9A1.AY SPECIFICATIONS 867 LX-Bus Notification Circuit 717 Graphic Annunciator:20 Primary Power 16.5 VAC 40VA Transformer Module outputs Secondary Power 12 VDC. 7.0 Ah Battery 869 Style D Initiating Circuit 725 24 VDC 4-zone expander Auxiliary Power 1 Amp at 12 VDC Module 736P Radionics Interface Module Alarm Output 1.5 Amps at 12 VDC 708 Bus Extender Module . 502-12 Two Amps.@ 12 VDC Dimensions 175" H x 13.5" W x 3.5" D 710 Bus Splitter/Repeater 505.12 Five Amps @ 12 VDC Weight 10 pounds. (Panel and Enclosure] 710E 24 VDC Splatter/Repeater 508 8 Amps 12 or 24 VDC `Enclosure 20 gauge cold rolled steel 711 /E Single Point Zone Expander SLR-835B Photoelectric Smoke Enclosure Color Red .``: 714 4-zone Class-B Expander 5216/BXTAddressable Smoke ACCESSORIES 714-8/16 8 or 16-zone Class-B 521LX/LXTAddressable Smoke/Heat 630F Fire Command LCD Expander 600Series Heat Detectors 690F Fire Command 32-char. LCD 715 4 zones for 2-wire smokes 5515G Sentrol Moisture Sensor 79.0F 4-zone LCD. Fire Command 715-8/16 8 or 16 zones for 2-wire smokes 305 Plug-in Relay Output 860 Relay Module 716 Output Expander: 4 Form C 430 Output Harness 865 Style Y/Z. Notification Module relays, 4 outputs 305 Output Relay 2500 North Partnership Boulevard c G1CItd Monicorinp Produet• , a - 1 Springfield, Missouri 65803-8877 �+ $nai try Em PM NYC h1EA The 690 and 790 Security Command, and 791 and 793 Easy EntryTM' LCD Keypads from DMP offer high quality, cost-effective security and fire system controls with an easy -to -use keypad interface. Users can perform all system functions from the keypads. The Model 791 and 793 Easy Entry°" LCD Keypads feature the added versatility of access control reader integration with codeless access. The 791 and 793 keypads allow users to present a DMP cardor credential to the access control reader. ate,,,, s<?",�i'�"u*.`'.k7r� SLOPERVISED AND ls. NSUPER'VISF'O OPERATION program the keypads for either supervised or unsupervised operation. When supervised, the keypad occupies its own unique device address on the keypad data bcas Unsupervised operation allows you tv !stall multiple keypads set to the same d`ete address, increasing the number of k epads and providing maximum fEeilbility in operating the system. E4LF LT Iid DIAGNOSTICS At( bur keypads also contain an internal diapostics program that lets installers ari-dservice technicians test the operation of he keypad at any time without df s;Ning the system. The diagnostics poolam tests the keypad's prewarn tone, LC-"ments and backlighting, each of th-e eyboard's 16 keys, and the four zones ors 11e 790/79IJ793 keypads. RE r)RACIC IGFITING IN A Il URI M Thefeypads additionally offer one of the mas unique features found on any keyed. During an alarm condition on the system, the keyboard backlighting on the keypd turns a bright red. This change in cotafrom the normat.green backlighting heap persons on -site to instantly recolnize an alarm condition. cocm cm In Gn EASY USER 14M.1 FUNCTIONS Users can access all of the functions necessary to operate and maintain their system right from the keypad User Menu. From silencing alarms and resetting sensors to displaying events, any function allowed by the.user's assigned authority level can be easily accessed through the keypad. The User Menu is restricted so that a valid user code is required before access is granted to any of the functions, This protection allows you to install the keypad in even high traffic public areas without'danger of unauthorized access. USER SELECTAl6LF OPTIONS Each of the Security Command" and Easy Entry' keypads provide a simple User Options menu through, -which users can change the display brightness, speaker tone, and volume level of the keypad. 2-BUTTON PANIC KEYS The Security Command"' and Ea!;y Entry'" keypads allow the top row of keys to be. used as 2-button panic keys. *rhe user simply presses and holcls two of the keys simultaneously to send either a panic, non -medical emergent% or fire report to the central station. INSTALLER OPTIONS The Easy Entry" keypads also provide a Keypad Options and Keypad Diagnostics menu that is available only to systen n installers and service technicians_ Installers can enter Keypad Options to configure the keypad for the customer in the many ways such as setting the keypad address and changing the default keypad message. Additionally, installers can then use Keypad Diagnostics to check the LCO display segments and keyboard backlighting, and test each key. RETROFIT ANY EXISTINC IDMP SYSTEM Designed to allow easy retrofitting, the Security Command'" keypads and Easy Entry' keypads are compatible with alt existing DMP panels and wiring and require no special modules or panel upgrades. You can provide a new look and greater functionality to an existing system at just a fraction of the cost for all new equipment. DISTiNCT SOUND PATTERNS The keypads also provide distinct sound patterns for burglary, fire, zone monitor, and prewam that can help users identify an event occurring on their system. Top. Row Select Keys 0 C= = i�AH EID_L4, /,L Label shows Police Emergency. Fiveicons only Panic key label placement VIYt^:;NPLI KEYPADS CHOICE OF DEUCES 7911793 EXTERNAL CARrj� INSTALLED ON ONE RUN FOR ZONES READER CONNECTION kultiple keypads can also be installed on You can connect sucl i devices to the zones An external card reader can be connected he same wire run to increase the cost as PIRs, door and window contacts, pull to the 791 and 793 keypads in addition to avings of each installation. stations, sprinkler tamper svitches, and internal reader capability of the 793 silent panic buttons. The flexibility of this keypad. You can use any proxirt-ltty 70/7911:793 FOUR design allows you to plan the installation magnetic stripe, or other reader that W01TIONAL PROTECTION in a way that affords the best coverage outputs Wiegand format. L014ES b reduce the expense and potential while eliminating potential problems associated with multiple wire runs. - 7911793 INTERNAL DOOR ervice_problems inherent in "home- ACCESS RELAY tinning" your security devices to the 793 BUILT-IN I ROXI CITY Each Easy Entry'" keypad contains an Janet, the 790, 791, and 793 keypads READER internal Form C dry contact relay that can rovide four fully programmable Class B Leading the way in security/access be used to control door strikes or rotection zones you can use for a variety control innovation, the 793 Easy Entry" magnetic locks on entrances to buildings, d burglary, fire, and access control keypad contains advanced, built-in offices, or restricted areas within a home -pplications. proximity reader circuitry that allows or business, users to simply present their access cards 7: NE TV'PE SELIECTION or credentials to the keypad to gain access 7911793 SOFT 5@-!UNTTI 'fie zones can be programmed with any to a protected area. MOMENTARY BYPASS d the panel's available zone types such For enabling access through doors on 24. 2night, fire,firesupervisory, panic, exit, 7.911793 REQUi STTO EXIT hourzones, the 791 and 793 EasyEntryw ad emergency. FEATURE keypads allow you to connect the door You can also connect a normally open PIR contact to zone 2 on the keypad. and or exit button to Zone 3 on the 791 and provide a 40-second shunt of the zone 793 keypads to provide Easy Exits whenever the door is opened. feature. a �� lN a i �t. ty 4• ICEIPAD MODELS SAND aC ILGR CHART Display t�'al Series Zones 2-Button Panic Red Keyboard In Us<:r Tntecnal Wlegand Internal Compatible Colors Type Keys Alarm Options Relay Input Prox Panels Seventy None LCD CommandTM Yes Yes Yes No No No All White, Ivory. Black, Red Sewrity 4 LCD command TM Yes Yes Yes No No No All White, Ivory, Blade, Red 791 Easy Entry'" 4 LCD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No All White, Ivory, Blade, Red -29) Easy Enlr" 4 LCD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes All White, Ivory, I Blade, Red Kiir''IPA.D ACCESSORIES 695. f(eypad Conduit Backbox 696 Keypad Backbox 699 . Keypad Deskstand LCOReplacement Housing Repacement Wire Harnesses PROXIMITY CREDENTIALS 1306P Prox Patch" 1326 ProxCarde It Proximity Card 1346 ProxKeye II Proximity I(Wob 1386 ISOProx Ile Proximity Card 1351 ProxPass®Active Vehicle Tag PROXIMITY READERS PP•6005B ProxPointe Plus MP-5365 Miniftxl PR-5455 ProzProe II MX-5375 MaxiProxe TL•5395 ThinUne Ile . VP-6100 Veri-Prox fingerprint/ Proximity Reader VP-6200 Biometric Fingerprint Reader SSWiLW Keypad from IEI SSWFX Keypad from IEI SSVALM-AL Keypad from IEI SS/WG-Q15 Keypad from IEI APPROVA,;S • Underwriters Laboratories ri • New York Material Equipment Acceptance (MEA) • California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) • Factory Mutual (FM) . i� 1� 2500 North Partnership Boulevard Springfield, Missouri 65803-8877 J Remote Booster Power Supplies Models: MIR8PS6 and MInBPS10 .MIRBPS6 f- t:,. r O MEA �r L Features: is Extends power available to Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs). M . Available in 10 amp and.6.5 amp versions. e Includes four Independent 3 amp NACs -two configurable as auxiliary outputs. ■ Configurable signal rates. ■ Field selectable input -to -output correlation. • Two inputs allow activation by Signature Series modules or existing NACs. ar NACs configure for either four Class B or two Class A circuits. is 110 Vac and 220 Vac versions it On -board status LEDs for easy recognition of wiring faults. lssuu I Description The Remote Booster Power Supply is a self-contained 24 Vdc power supply designed to augment fire alarm audible and visual power requirements. The booster contains all of the necessary circuits to monitor and charge batteries, control and supervise four Class B or two Class A NAC circuits andmonitortwo control- ling inputs from external sources. Simple switch selection provides a wide variety of operational configurations. Each remote.booster power supplylssupplled with its own enclosure providing ample space for additional Interface modules and battery compartment. The Remote Booster Power Supply Is available in either a 6.6 or 1 o amp version © 24 Vdc. Application The Remote Booster Power Supplyprovides additional power for .audible and visual devices when constrained by system capaclty or site application. Fault conditions detected by the MIRBPS will open the main panel's NAC: This Initiates a trouble condition and eliminates the need to wire a separate trouble contact back to the control panel.. During alarm condition, detected faults are overridden and the main panel's default configuration Is continuous 24Vdc on all NACs typically used to drive visual devices. The BPS's default output configuration is continuous 24Vdc on all NACs. This output Is typically used to drive visual devices. MIRBPS notification appliance circuits easily configure for any one of three signaling rates: 120 SPM; 3.3.3 temporal; or, continuous. This makes the MIRBPS ideal for applications requiring signaling rates not available from the main panel. It also allows Independent setup of a notification appliance circuit without interfering with the mein panel and Its initlatingeircuits. in addition to the three generated signal rates, the MIRBPS can Qlso be configured to follow the signal rate of the main panel's notification appliance clrcult. This allows seamless expansion of existing NACs. The MIRBPS includes seven on -board LED Indicators: one for each resident NAC; one for battery supervision; one forground fault; and, one for ac power. The trouble contact has a sixteen second delay when an ac power failure or brownout condition is detected. This reduces the reporting of troubles duringshort duration ac brownouts. NAC configuration options Include, ac power fall delay(16 seconds or 6 hours); sensing Input to NAC output correlations; and, auxiliary outputs. NAC 3 and are configurable as auxiliary outputs. Auxiliary outputs can be always on,.or off after 30 seconds without ac power, Jumpers conflgurethe MIRBPS for Class A or Class B wiring. M I N T O N E 64 1 1 PARKLAND DRIVE, S A R A S O T A, FL 3 4 2 4 3 Llturuturu Shu-t YMa5005-0107 Pane 1 of 4 nrriarrin ft fnfnrmatinn Shipping M. Cat alogNumber DascrIpIIon lb (kg) MIRBPSS, 6.5 Amp Booster Power Supply 13(5.9) MIRBPSI 0 10 Amp Booster Power Supply ReleterdEquipment 12V6Ak6 6.5 Amp Hour Battery, two required 3.4 (1.6) 12V10A 10 Amp Hour Battery, Iwo required 6.5 amp Booster 10 Amp Booster Catalog Number AC Line Vortege 120VAC 120VAC NotlficetlonAppliance Power 3.0A max. per circuit C�? 24Vdc nominal 3,oA Max. per circuit ®24Vdc nominal 10A max,total all NACs 6.5A max total all NACa Two configurable outpute roplace NACs 3 and/or 4.J Auxiliary Outputs NAC 3 and/or 4 are configurable as auxiliary outputs. Input Curront(from an existing NAC) 3mA 12Vdc, fimA @ 24Vdc Accomodates three two -gang modules. Signature Mounting Space 1Q Amp Hours (2 of 12V10A) Maximum Battery Size Terminal Wlre'Gauge 18-12 AWG 0 to 93% non condensing Relatly© Hurnldity 32' to 1201F (0" to 49'C) Temperature Rating Class A or Class B NAC Wiring Styles Continuous, 120 SPM, 3-3-3 temporal, or follow installed panel's NAC. Output Signal Rates ULI, ULC, CSFM, MEA Agency Listings Engineering Specification Supply where needQd Mirtone MIR BPS series Booster Power The booster supply must incorporate fourindependent super. Supplies as an extension of Notification Appliance Circuits. The vised Notification Appliance Circuits. It shall be possible to extensionshall be In.the form of a standalone booster power configtare the NACs to foilowthe main panel's NAC or activate supply. The supply must Incorporate Its own standby batterles. from Intelligent Signature Series modules. The booster NACs. Batteries must be sized for <24>, <60> hours of standby must be configurable to operate Independently at any one ofihs followed by <5>, <30> minutes of alarm. It must be possible to following rates: continuous; 120 SPM; or, 3.3.3 temporal. Fault conditions on the booster shall not Impede alarm activation of support up to 10 amp hour batteries. host NAC circuits. MIRT0NIE Page 2 of Liirroiure Shnni 'MMa5005-0107 tflJe 4 typical Wiring Single booster anywhere on A notification appliance circuit Existing NAC end-of•Ilne resistors are not required to be t nslalled atthe booster's terminals. This allows multiple boosters to be driven from a single NAC circuit without the needfor special configurations. Multiple boosters cascaded from a single notification appliance circuit - Tn ne.l ,i0nolil v� NAC Girton duvlri+, Uunl.lor, ai LUL lubi�lnr u, NAC nulrwl If I tdy NAC rwlpul N: FIrO Alarm NAC —1, #A Control Panal ' NAC n 41 H4 5 Doostor Power Supply Ta mYl uOn:Ylrx� aeviea, hnuslar, rx EOL ru6i5ox ur NAC outran M I n, NAC a I > NAC nultlul A] NAC oulpul 44 lloosinr Pnwor Supply To next si9nalinp Uevlw, booster, rx • EOL resie lrN o, NAC wlpul. Al NAC cxdfwl 02 > NAC ou4wl 01 > NAC output 94 S Rooster Powor To next slgnallnQ device, booster, ew EOL reslslor NAC oulput #1 NAC oulput #2 NAC output #3 NAC oulput #4 Multiple Signature modules branching a single notification Appliance circuit NAC Circuit NACi+ noostor Power - ( CD EOL 15 K Supply Main Doord NAC2+ -O 1 NAC9 _ C) NAC4+ From exlstingfre alarm pie panel notirieallon dreuk orCCI modulo IN - +_ Sense 1 COM OUT [CLS C Out to EOL IN (.' r or nazi davlce NAC Chull Sonso 2 COM CO.' EOL OUT NO ff ar 47 K Troublo COM-1.5 amps total Ball NC - + M1 ple notification appliance circuits branched from a single CC1 ticdu is 4ntr81 panel � NOTES: tIN Used for another Class B +-6- 0 . 31-1 To nett olarvrling NAC clicuil, >,ii',VIa1, Ix}xti tw, or ECt �UGI'.IIN NAC allpn Ml Daa out to ci -> NAC oulpd rrz neddevlce . N NAC w1(a,I N] Up to 10 CCt Data In from s ; NAC r„yyll 94 or Wmodules previous device of P - Art 5 at le anivale when per booster NAC, S• naturo conlrollel re Dooslar Powor Supply Inp,l WcYl activates (I oxlonprrrjranvldnq) NACCiroult EOL I. 47 K NAC Gila,il To nnal slonNi(vU lkwira, Ixxxvhx, nr r = >-1.5 8npa total NAC Clralil Ea., metal x NAC rr+l plI 91 - 1. NAC nnpll Ir2 Flro Alarm — NAC WillN:1 modulo µo Control Panol anp,l 1/4 +-+- O rs+.t pNAC Doostor Power Supply lb nnxl cigrv�lin9 p11 5 a,Ip11Ls ncli+alnwhan l„lxd hIAC N"1 e,aivotus EOL - dla out to 1levire, Ixx,sim, or (Isn:1x1 on pra]ranvlu1x,71 15 K rust clovIce u1. EOL roni9lnr NAC adfx 1l41 Data In from q NAC adtad u2 previous device a NAC m dp It N:1 SlQnalUte COnlf0111f 5 NAC ,xdfa,l N4 More ryplcal wiring diagrams on fhe nrxc page... Rooster Power Supply M I R T 0 N E Llleralurn Sheet NM85005-0107 page 3 of 4 L lssua 4 Typi(;&1 Wiring Signata ref mod ule used to activate the booster This configuration eliminates the necessity of separate 24V sources, Signat ure modules may also be used to divide the booster's 3 amp OUtpul cllcults Into smaller current loads. " Nolif'"lion A plinnco Circuit (NAC) Y BOO51O1 Powlr NAC 1+ { 1 Cz u, �•' Supply Main Board NAC2+ C Noliricntbn A rA nco Circuit (NAC) Y NAC34 + G7 Multiple Signaturo modules as booster inputs Configure the outputs where zoning Is required. nooslor Powor Supply Main rile NAC4 _ ` Up to 10 CC 1 IAUX or UM modules IN I? + per boostorNAC. sense 1. COM rQ'), ourI0 • �Y INIr''1 + Sense 2 C0MLir, Oul' ab. tom-: NO �_ f tee Troublo, CUM :� j act e:dtuy 1 Mauula NC.L1" o 0 .21._... _ NOTES; AUsod forenolbr Class a NAC circuit. Data in from provious — Data out to pp dovica or Signnlulo no,d dovico l5.1 NAC4 iscatfirlurod as an auxiliary output. rontrollur �4\ CC1 wiringrnrl be within 3 toot of the Sooslor wiring and in conduil or mounted within the BonslrYs mclosuro. 1. Any Boetslur trouble will nose the CC supervision to roporl a trouble In the main NO pnnal . Installation and Mounting Dimensions 19.00' (33.02 ctil) 0 r� :7.375'(8.6 cm Top View 3.50" (A,g trn) '—'— —s 13.00' (33.02 cnI) n 7.00' (17.78 rm ► Fronl View a� 5 All knockouls E {; F for 3/4" conduil N � 05 v (1.9 c(n) o O o m a NolincaIlon NAC1+ ird NAC2+ n NollOcallon NAC9 - tj NAC4+ Q IN _ +_ San- 1 COMB) Ou11EN T, + 114l" Sonso 2 COM I'D1 Y OUT Zs i NO G� Trouble C0M 9 w° ^.u. y NC (j n NOTES: t d Usod for Another Class B NAC CC1 clnx111. Mouula 2. An 0oocler.lfnublo will cousa lho v +-+- o 0 az.a.s CC supervision to repnd a trouble to Ina mnln fire panel. iA Mr%lalec must be wlrwf and progrnmmed on the Slgnalured - Riser in controller fur proper operobon. 12 - 24 Vdc M I R T O N E 13 C�tr—cuk ((NAC N 7w-, Circuit (NAC Assembly Backboz CCI kroeuM o �.2L- 1 tRicer out tonrxt davlce or rho cupafvlaorydevkm Ruulu AC supply Ihrouth those Batlorywirki knockouts only (non-powor (nomI—or limilud) Ihnilod) Battery i Batlory 1 rI I I t rI I Notaa: 1. Maintain 1/4 In. (e mm) spacing botwoon powerllydad and non-powor Ilmllod wiring or use typo Fill., FPLR, aFPLP cabio par NEC, /�A2 Supervised when nol configured as auxiliary ifowa Non-supervssod when conrlgurod as auxilery povef, Source meet be powol limited. ( It is our intention to kaep the product Infor natlnn current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to chun0e wilhout notice. For more' Informntion or questions reIlailve to this Specification Sheet, contact Mlrtone, rD 21101 Moans Llt.ramra Shoot OM85005-0107 ltsUo, 4 P"on 4 of .1 Field Configurable Horns and Strobes MG 1 Series Features 5 Seledabhe 151300 75F or If Unique low -profile design - The most compact UL- 1971 /ULC-S526 listed strobe available - Ultra -slim -protrudes less than one inch fromthe wall - Attractive appearance - No visible mounting screws II Four field -configurable options in one device - Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output - Select high (default) or low clB horn output - Selecttemporal (default) or steady horn output - Select public mode flash rate (default) or private mode temporal flash I Easytoinstall - Fits standard 1-gang electrical boxes - no trim plate needed - Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings - Pre -assembled with captive hardware - #12 AWG terminals -ideal for long runs or existing wiring ® Unparalleled performance - Industry's most even light distrib utio n - Meetstoug h synchronizing standards for strobes - Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe - Low currentdraw minimizes system overhead - Independent horn control over a single pair of wires - Highlyregulated in -rush current - Multiple frequency tone improves wall penetration - Ind ustry's firsttemporal strobe output Description The Genesis line of signals are among the smallest, most compact audible -visible emergency signaling devices in the world. About the size of a deck of playing cards, these devices are designed to blend with any decor. Thanksto patented breakthrough technology, Genesis strobes do not require bulkyspecular reflectors and lenses. Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce a highly controlled distribution pattern, Significant development efforts employing this newtechnology have given rise to a new bench- mark in strobe performance - FuIlLight technology. FuIlLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular reflectors. This ensures the entire coverage area receives consis- Issue 1 i v, a✓ It low s3B Won 4e f � Yt E@ C� MEA n Listings pending One or more patents pending, tent illumination from the strobeflash. Asa result, Genesisstrobes with FullLight technology go well beyond the minimum UL- required "T" pattern, significantly exceeding UL-1971 and ULC- S526 light distribution requirements. Although all Genesis strobes are self -synchronizing, when installed with an optional synchronization module, strobe flashes from devices on the same circuit synchronize to within 10milliseconds of each other indefinitely. This exceeds the two-hour minimu m specified in the UL standards. Only one synchronization module is required per circuit. Genesis strobes and horn -strobes offer 15 to 110 candela output, which is selectable with a conveniently -located switch on the side of the device. The candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final installation, yet itstays locked in place to prevent unauthorized tampering. Genesis horn output reaches as high as99 dB and features a unique multiple frequency tonethatresults in excellentwall penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. Horns may be configured for either coded or non -coded signal circuits. They can also be set for IowdB outputwhh ajumper cutthat reduces horn output by about 5 dB. Genesis signals feature textured housings in architecturally neutral white ortraditional fire red. An ingenious iconographic symbol indicates the purpose of the device. This universal symbol is code - compliant and is easily recognized by all building occupants regardless of what languagethey speak. Modelswith "FIRE" markings are also available. M I R T O N E 6411 PARKLAND DRIVE, SARASOTA, FL 34143 Literature Sheet #Ma5001-00573 Page 1 of e Genf esisstrobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall- mou nted public -mode notification appliances forthe hearing impa iced. Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where amb ieritnoise conditions exceed 105 dBA (87dBA in Canada), wherreoccupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public aced n rrodation as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (see aQplication notes- USAJ. Corn blrnation horn -strobe signals must be installed in accordance with gi idelines established for strobe devices. Str oozes Thefo4owing guidelines are based on ANSI/NFPA 72 NationalFire Alarrn Code 0999). When applied and installed in accordance with that c ode, Mirtone strobes meet or exceed the illumination produced by the ADA-specified 75 candela (cd) strobe at 50 feet.* Non -Sleeping Rooms Mirtone wall mounted strobes* Up to 20 x 20' (6. t m x 6.1 m) One 15 cd strobe Up to 30 x 30' (9.1 m x 9.1 m) One 30 cd or two 15 cd strobes Up to 40 x 40' (12.2 m x 12.2 m) One 75 cd or two 30 cd strobes Up to 50 x 50' (15.2 m x 15.2 m) One 110 cd or two 75 cd strobes Corriidors Any I ength. Maxi "um width: 20' (6,1m). 15 cd strobes spaced at 100' (30.5 m) max. Strobes must be placed within 15' (4.5m) of each end of the corridor. ' ADA suggests using 75 cd strobes throughout an area, with spacing that never exceeds 50 If from the strobe to any point in the protected space. Non -Sleeping Rooms and Corridors: Mirtone strobes rated at less than 1 10 cd per UL 1971 are intended for use in non -sleeping areas only, I Install with the bottom of the device at least 80 inches (2.0 m) and no more than 96 inches (2.4 m) above the finished floor, No point inany space (including corridors) required to have strobes should be morethan 50 feet (15.2 m) from the signal (in the horizontal plane) . Fordetailed spacing requirements, consult TheHandbookof Visible Aotification Appliances for Fire Alarm Applications published by EST Press, or contact your local Mirtone representa- tive. Sleepingrooms: Mirtone 110 cd strobes are intended for use in sleeping rooms and should be installed along with a smoke detector, It must be wall mounted at least80" (2,03 m) above floor level, butno closer than 24" (610 mm) to the ceiling. The distance from the strobe to the pillow must not exceed 16'.(4.8 rn). Sleeping Rooms Mirtone wall mounted strobe Any size 110 cd within 16 feet of pillow Page 2 of 6 Horns The suggested sound pressure levelfor each signaling zone used with alert or alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5feet (1.5 m) above the floor. The average ambient sound level is, A - weighted sound pressure measured over 24-hour period. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change involume. Application Notes - USA Audible signals in the public mode should never have a sound level less than 75 dBA at 10' (3 m) per NFPA 72. Signals cannot exceed 120 dBA per ADA and NFPA 72 at the minimum hearing distance to audible appliance. Strobe and combination horn/strobe devices should be installed with the bottom of the device at least80 inches (2,0 m) and no more than 96 inches (2A m) above the finished floor. Horns should be installed with their tops not less than 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling and not less than 90 inches (2.3 m) above the finished floor. Strobes must be used to supplement audible signaIswhereverthe average ambient sound level exceeds 105dBA. Combination audible/visual signals must be installed in accordance with NFPA guidelines established for strobes. ADA requires visible signals in the following areas: • rest rooms, meeting rooms, and other common use areas. • sleeping rooms intended for use by persons with hearing impairment (in accordance with Title 1 of ADA). • work areas used by person with a hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA), Application Notes - Canada (Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) Thefire alarm signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any normally occupied area. Thesound pressure level from an audible signal in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential occupancies shall not be lessthan 10 dBA above ambient levels, and never:lessthan 65 dBA. Insleeping rooms the sound pressure level from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBAwhen any intervening doors betweenthe deviceand the sleeping room are closed. Audible signal devices shall be installed not less than 1.8 m to the center ofthe device above the floor (per CAN/ULC S524), The fire alarm audible signal shall be supplemented by fire alarm strobes in anyfloorarea wheretheambient noise level exceeds 87 dBA, orwhere the occupants ofthefloorarea use ear protective devices, are located within an audiometric booth, or are located within sound insulating enclosures. This alsoappliesto assembly occupancies in which music and other sounds associated with performances could exceed 100 dBA Strobes shall be installed in a building so that the flash from one device is visible throughout the floor area or portion thereof in which they are installed. For maximum safety, Mirtone recom- mends that strobes be installed as per the guidelines shown here under Strobe Spacing, M I R T 0 N E Literature Sheet #Ma5001-00573 Issue 1 Genesis horns and strobes mount to any standard one -gang surface or flush electrical box. Matching optional trim plates are used to cover oversized openings and can accommodate one- ging, two -gang, four -inch square, or octagonal boxes, and European 100 mm square. All Genesis signals come pre -as- sembled with captive mounting screws for easy installation. Two tabs at the top of the signal unlock the cover to reveal them ounting hardware. The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room behind the signal for extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws are visible. Genesis Horn/Strobe Field Configuration with optional Temporal horn and horn -strobe trim plate models are factory set to sound ina Firing Field wiring terminals accommodate # 18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm2 t02.5 mm2)wiring. Horns, strobes, and combination horn -strobes are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below. Pdarity siarm c N Note: Strobes must have continuous voltage. next device end of line device three -pulse temporal pattern. Units may be configuredfor use with coded systems by cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This results in a steady output that can be turned on and off (cod ed) as the system applies and removes power to the signal circuit. A Genesis Signal Master is required when horn -strobe models are configured for coded systems. Non -temporal, horn-onlymodeIs sound a steadytone. Genesis strobes and horn -strobes are shipped from thefactory readyfor use as UL 1971 compliant signalsfor public mode operation. These signals may be configured for temporal flash by cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This battery -saving feature is intended for private mode signaling only. Genesis strobes and horn -strobes maybe set for 15,30,75,or 110 candela output. The output setting is changed by simply open i ng the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting. The device does not have to be removed to change the outputsetting. The setting remains visible through a small window onthesideOf the device after the cover is closed. Horns and horn -strobes are factory setfor high dB output. LowdB output may be selected by cutting a jumper on the circuit board. This reduces the output by about 5 dB. M I R T O N E Issue 1 Literature Sheet #M85001-00573 Page 3 of 6 Sp reifications Red or white textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammability rating. s Optical grade polycarbonate (clear) FHooSn unting Flush mount: 2'/2Inch (64 mm) deep one -gang box "'."ll mount only) Surface mount: model 27193 surface mount box, wiremold box, or equivalent surface -mount box With optional trim plate: One -gang, two -gang, four -(rich square, octagonal, or European single -gang box Wire connections Screw terminals: single input for both horn and strobe. #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 MM2 to 2.5 mM2) wire size Operating environment Indoor only: 32-120° F (0-49° C) ambient temperature. 93% relative humidity Agency UL 1971, UL 1638, UL 464, ULC S525; ULC S526, CE, FCC, (MEA, FM, CSFM pending), listings/approvals (All models comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule.) Dirnensions (HxWxD) Signal: 4-1/2" x 2-34' x 13/16" (113 mm x 68 mm x 21 mm) Trimplate: 5" (127 mm); Height- 5-7/8" (149 mm); Depth -'/2" (13 mm) MG1-HD series temporal -tone horns: non -coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded when horn set to steady tone) Operating voltage MG1-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: non -coded, filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded (audible NAC only) when used with optional MG1M Genesis Signal Master) MG1-VM series strobes: non -coded, filtered 16 - 33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR MG1-P series steady -tone homs: coded or non -coded, filtered 20-31 Vdc or unfiltered 20-27 Vfwr UL 1971, UL1638, ULC S526: selectable 15 cd, 30 cd, 75 cd, or 110 cd output MG 14M strobes and MG1-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: one.flash per second synchronized with ffStrolb3eoutputing optional MG1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without MG1M Genesis Signal Master) Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output of horns on same circuit Qom patfble synchronization MG1M, MG1M-RM modules* MG1-HD temporal -tone horns and MG1-HDVM serfes temporal -tone hom-strobes: temporal rate synchronized Horn pulse rate with optional MG1M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without MG1M Genesis Signal Master) MG1-P steady -tone horns: continuous, steady tone only Temporal audible pattern '/2 sec ON,'/z sec OFF, 1/2 sec ON, sec OFF,'/2 sec ON, 11/2 sec OFF, then repeat cycle rvor cumyeuuro wun rvw i-r aeries norns. dBA output Temporal Horns, Horn -strobes (MG1-HD. MGi-HDVM) - Hlah dB Sattino UL464 I Average Peak Temporal I Steady I Temporal/Steady Temporal/Steady 16 Vdc 81.4 85.5 91.4 94.2 24 Vdc 184.4 1 88.6 1 94.5 97.6 33 We 1 86.3 1 90.4 1 96.9 99.5 Temporal Horns, Horn -strobes (MG1-HD, MGt-HDVM) - Low dB Settino UI-464 Average Peak Temporal Steady Temporal/Steady Temporal/Steady 16 Vdc 76.0 80.1 86.3 89.2 24 Vdc 1 79.4 83.5 89.8 92.5 33 Vdc 1 82.1 86.5 42.5 95.3 Steady Tone Horns (MG1-P series) UL464. Average Peak 20 Vdc 76.7 89.5 91 24 Vdc 1 77.1 90 91.1 31 Vdc 1 77.2 90.4 91.6 Notes 1. All values shown are dBA measured at 10 feet (3.01 m). 2. UL464 values measured in reverberation room. 3. Average and Peak values are measured in a nechoic chamber. Average Sound Output (M) (High dB setting, anechoic, 24V, measured at 1 Oft) Ught output a defective cd) Percent of UL rating versus angle 1. am s M I R T 0 N E Page 4 of 6 Literature Sheet #MS5001-00573 Issue 1 Strobes, Horn -Strobes Atrltl-cd Wall Strobes (MGi-VM) UL Nameplate Ratina It a 1971 Fffectiva Mav 9nnd1 15 cd 30 ed 75 0d RMS RMS RMS RMS i Vdc 103 141 255 311 1. I6 Vfwr 125 179 346 392 Typical Current (Measured by Mirtone) 30 ed 75 ed 110 cd Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean, 03VdC4615c'44 79 127 124 245 243 285 283 66 98 96 188 186 240 238 55 82 80 152 150 191 190 1 64 63 112 111. 137 136 18 Vfwr 119 64 169 97 332 203 376 240 10 Vfwr 103 51 143 76 253 150 331 198 24 Vfwr V 94 44 129 65 .218 121 262 152 33 Vfwr 87 37 112 52 179 89 205 106 " Mofti-ed Wall Temporal Horn -strobes (MG1-HDVM) —High dB Setting UL Nameolate Ratina IUI.1971 _ Fffartiva Mav 9nnd1 16 Vdc 16 Vfwr Tvnical Currant (Measured by Mirtnnal 18 Vdc 20 Vdc 24 Vdc 33 Vdc Ill Vfwr 20 Vfwr 24 Vfwr 33 Vfwr 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd RMS RMS RMS RMS 129 167 281 337 176 230 397 443 15 od 30 ed 75 ed 110 ed RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 102 89 135 129 246 242 309 305 88 77 109 104 193 190 248 243 81 71 94 90 161 158 203 200 74 64 72 74 124 121 154 151 144 77 182 106 352 212 393 249 141 68 162 1 87 1 274 1158 362 210 136 65 152 '76 235 133 282 165 125 54 144 65 201 101 232 123 Multi- d Wall Temporal Mom -strobes (MG1-HDVM) — Low dB Setting UL Nameolate Ratinn I111 1971 Fffartiva Mav 90nAI 16 Vdc 16 Vfwr TVDical Current (Measured by Mirtonel 16 Vdc 20 Vdc 24 Vdc 33 Vdc i6 Vfwr 20 Vfwr 24 Vfwr 33 Vfwr 15 cd 30 cd 75 cd 110 cd RMS RMS RMS RMS 122 160 274 330 162 216 383 429 15 cd 30 cd 75 ed 110 ed RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean RMS Mean 96 84 130 12..4 243 240 302 297 79 70 104 99 189 186 241 237 68 61 88 84 156 154 197 193 56 52 71 68 118 116 146 143 128 69 180 104 344 204 389 244 118 60 157 84 266 156 343 200 113 54 144 74 230 128 279 161 112 48 137 64 197 )9 226 117 Horns Wall Temporal Horns (MG1-HD) I11 Nnmanlata Ratinn It It ARd rffartiva Mav 9nnd1 High dB Low dB RMS RMS 16 Vdc 26 19 24 Vdc 36 27 33 Vdc 41 33 16 Vfwr 51, 37 24 Vfwr 69 52 33 Vfwr 76 70 Typical Current (Measured by Mirtone) High dB Low dB RMS Mean RMS Mean 22 17 17 14 24 19 19 16 27 21 22 18 tVfwr 32 25 26 22 34 15 30 14 40 19 34 16 45 21 38 18 52 24 47 22 WaB Horns (MG1-13) UL Nameplate Rating Measured by Mirtone RMS 20 Vdc 9 24 Vdc 10 31 Vdc 12 20 Vfwr 8 24 Vfwr 9 RMS Mean 10 10 11 11 12 12 9 8 10 9 Notes and Comments 1. Currerltvaluesare shown inmA. 2. ULNameplate Rating canvaryfromTypical Currentduetomeasure. ment methods and instruments used. 3. Mirtone recommends using theTypical Current for system des ig n including NAC and Power Supply loading and voltage drop celcu latiors. 4. UsetheVdc RMS current ratingsforfilteredpower supply and battery AH calculations. Use the Vfwr RMS current ratings for unfiltered power supply calculations. 5. Fuses, circuit breakers and otherovercurrent protection devices are typical yratedforcurrentin RMS values. Most ofthese devices operate based upon the heating affect oftha current flowing through the device. The RMS current (notthe mean current) determines the heating affect and therefore, the trip and hold threshold for those devices. 6. Our industry has used'mean'currentsover the years. However, ULwill direct the industryto use the 2004 RMS values in thefuture. M I R T O N E Issue 1 Literature Sheet #M85001-00573 Page 5 of 6 ,0i COrE039 111,10fMation er Description Ship Wt. Ibs (kg) Finish ff R-HDVM Genesis Horn -Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output, selectable hi h/low dB output) R-VM Genesis Strobe (selectable 15,30,75,or 110cdoutput) R-HD Genesis Temporal Hom (selectable high/low dB output) MG 1<f MG1R-P Genesis Stead Hom (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) MG 1f-HDVM MG1RF-HDV Genesis Horn -Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output, selectable high/low dB output) - with "FIRE".marking 0,25 (0. 5 MG 1 F-VNI MG1RF-VM Genesis Strobe (selectable 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd output) - with "FIRE" marking MG 1F-HD MGIRF-HD Genesis Temporal Horn (selectable high/low dB output) -with "FIRE" marking MG I V P MG1RF-P Genesis Steady Horn with "FIRE" marking (not compatible with Genesis Signal Master) Mountina Accessories MG1-r MG1RT Genesis Trim Plate (for two -gang or 4" square boxes) 0.15 (0.7) MG1 T-FIRE MG1RT-FIRE Genesis Trim Plate (for two -gang or 4" square boxes) with "FIRE" markings 0.15 (0.7) 27193.16 27193-11 One -gang surface mount box 1(0.4) Synchronization Modules MG1M Genesis Signal Master - Snap -on Mount MG1M-RM Genesis Signal Master.- Remote Mount (1 Genesis Horn -Strobes may ' be ordered in red or white, w.ith or witho ut 'FIRE' marking. F ��. ea 0.1 (0.5) WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. These visible signal appliances'tlash intensity may not be adequateto alert or awaken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates thatthe intensity of strobe needed to awaken 90 % of sleeping persons is approximately 100 cd. Mirtone recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110 cd minimum. Genesis and Full Light Strobe Technology are trademarks of Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. M I R T 0 N E It is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact Mirtone. ;V 2003 MlAone Page 6.Of 6 Literature Sheet #Ma5001-00573 lasue 1 Field Configurable Ceiling Horn -strobes GC Series Features N Field configurable -no need to remove the devicel 15/30fl5/95 cdand 96/115/150/177 cd models available Switch settings remain visible even after the unit is installed - Low/high dB settings a Unique low -profile design - 30 percent slimmer profile than comparable signals - Attractive appearance - No visible mounting screws 11 Easytoinstall - Fits all standard 4" square electrical boxes with plenty of room behind the signal for extra wire -no extension ring or trim plate needed - Pre -assembled with captive hardware -no loose pieces - #18to #12 AWGterminals -ideal for long runs or existing wiring i Unparalleled performance - Exclusive FullLightstrobetechnofogy produces the industry's mosteven light distribution - Precisiontiming electronics meettough synchronizing standardsforstrobes - Single high -efficiency microprocessor controls both horn and strobe - Low current draw minimizessystem overhead - Independent horn control provided over a single pair of wires - Highlyregulated in -rush current allows the maximum number of strobes on a circuit - 100 d8 peak- multiple frequencytone improves wall penetration - Approved public and private mode applications - UL/ULC listed for ceiling or wall use Description Genesisceifing horn -strobes are small, compact, and attractive audible -visible emergency signaling devices. Protruding no more than 1.6" (41 mm) from the ceiling, Genesis horn -strobes blend with any decor. Thanksto patented breakthrough technology, Mirtone Genesis strobes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. Instead, an exclusive cavity design conditions light to produce a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new benchmark in strobe performance-FuIlLighttechnology. Issue 5 Oneormore (UI l LC Cf FM n�► patentspending. pending FullLightstrobetechnology produces a smooth light distribution pattern wlthoutthe spikes and voids characteristic of specular reflectors. This ensuresthe entire coverage area receives consis- tent illumination from the strobeflash. Asa result, Genesis strobes with FuIlLighttechnology go well beyond the minimum UL- required "cross" pattern, sign-rficantly exceeding UL-1971 and ULC- S526 light distribution requirements. Although all Genesis strobes are self -synchronizing, when installed with an optional synchronization module, strobe flashesfrom devices on the same circuit synchronize to within 10 milliseconds of each other indefinitely, This exceedsthe two-hour minimum specified in the UL standards. Only one synchronization module is required per circuit. Depending on the model, Genesis horn-strobesfeature 15to 95, or 95to 177 candela output (see ordering information), which is selectable with a conveniently -located switch on thefrontofthe device. The candela output setting is clearly visible even after final installation, yet it remains locked in place to prevent unauthorized movementafter installation. Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB (peak) and features a unique multiple frequency tone that results in excellent wall penetration and an unmistakable warning of danger. All models may be configured for either coded or non -coded signal circuits. They can also be setfor low dB output with a jumper cutthat reduces horn output by about 5 dB. Genesis horn-strobesfeeturetextured housings in architecturally neutral white. An.ingenious iconographic symbol indicatesthe purpose of the device. This universal symbol is code -compliant and is easily recognized by all building occupants regardless of what language they speak. Models with "FIRE" markings are also available. MIRT0NE 8985 TOWN CENTER PARKWAY, BRADENTON, FL 34202 Literature Sheet #M85001-0559 Not to be used for Installation purposes. Page 1 of 4 Application GeneslstIrobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as ceiling - mount :&,dpublic-mode notification appliances for the hearing impair ed,prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambie nl4oise conditions exceed 105dBA (87dBA in Canada), where occupants use hearing protection, and in areas of public acco rrs rMation as defined in the Americans with Disabilities Act (see app6'cation notes - USA). Comb! relation horn -strobe signals must be installed in accordance with gui del)nes established for strobe devices. Strolbes The fol lowing guidelines are based on ANSVNFPA72NationalFire Alarm 4C de (2002). When applied and installed in accordance with that co de,Mirtone strobes meet or exceed the illumination pro- duced bythe ADA-specified 75 candela (cd) strobe at 50 feet. (ADA suggesVusing 75 cd stfobesthroughoutan area, with spacing that never exceeds 50 ft. from the strobe to any point in the protected space.) Non-Sl eiping Areas and Corridors: Mirtone strobes rated at less than 11 Oed per UL 1971 are intended for use in non -sleeping areas only. Instil with the bottom of the device at least 80 inches (2.0 m) and. no moretan 96 inches (2.4 m) above thefinished floor. No point in any space(including corridors) requiredto have strobes should be. morethaMfeet (15.2 m) from the signal (in the horizontal plane), Room T'se Maximum Asa Isquare room stse) Maxiowm cetIftig Height Recommended ceding mount Genesis Strobe Non-sleePh9 Rooms (ceifi►sg mound 20 x 20 fL (6.1 x 6.1 rri) 10 feet (3.05 m) 15 cd. 30 x 30 tL (9.1 x 9.1 m) 30 cd 40 x 40 ft 02.2 x 12.2 m) 75 cd 50x50fL05.2x15.2m) 95cd 20 x 20 ft (6.1 x 6.1 m) 20 feet (6.10 m) 30 cd 30 x 30 fL (9.1 x 9.1 m) 75 cd 40 x 40 ft (12.2 x 12.2 m) 95 cd 50 x 50 ft (15.2 x 15.2 m) 115 cd 20 x 20 fL (6.1 x 6.1 m) 30 feet (9.14 m) 75 cd 30 x 30 fL (9.1 x 9:1 m) 75 cd 40 x 40 ft (12.2 x 12.2 m) 115 cd 50x50fL(15.2x15.2m) 150cd Note: Recommendations in the table above assume the strobe is placed in the center of the room. if not, the maximum room size is determined by doubling the distance from the strobe to the farthest wall Sieepingareas: In sleeping areas, ceiling mounted strobes (and wall mourned strobes installed lessthan 24 inches from the ceiling) must be rated at a minimum of 177 cd. Wall mounted strobes installed more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the ceiling must be rated at a minimum of 110 cd. In all cases, the distance from the strobe to the pillow must not exceed 1 V (4.8 m). For detailed spacing requirements, consult The Handbook of Visible Notification Appliances for Fire Alarm Applications published by EST Press, or contactyour local Mirtone representative. Horns The suggested sound pressure level for each signaling zone used with alert or alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient , sound level, or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at Ieast60 seconds, whichever is greater, measured 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor. The average ambient sound level is, A - weighted sound pressure measured overa 24-hour period. Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoretically result in a 6 dB reduction of the received sound pressure level. The actual effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the space. A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Application Notes - USA Audible signals in the public mode should never have a sound level lessthan 75 dBAat 10' (3 m) per NFPA 72. Signals cannot exceed 120 dBA per ADA and NFPA 72 atthe minimum hearing distance to audible appliance. Strobes must be used to supplement audible signals wherever the average ambient sound level exceeds 105 dBA. Combination audible/visual signals must be installed in accordance with NFPA guidelines established for strobes. ADA requires visible signals in the following areas: • rest rooms, meeting rooms, and other common use areas. • sleeping rooms intended for usebypersonswithhearing impairment (In accordance with Title 1 of ADA). • work areas used by a person with a hearing impairment (per Title 1 of ADA). Application Notes - Canada (Based in part on 1995 Canada National Building Code) Thefire alarm signal sound pressure level shall not exceed 110 dBA in any normally occupied area. The sound pressure level from an audible signal in a floor area used for occupancies other than residential occupancies shall not be lessthan 10 dBA above ambient levels, and never lessthan 65 dBA. In sleeping roomsthe sound pressure level from an audible signal shall not be less than 75 dBA when any intervening doors between the device and the sleeping room are closed. Audible signal devices shall be installed not less than 1.8 m tothe center of the device abovethe floor (perCAN/ULC S524). The fire alarm audible signal shall be supplemented byfire alarm strobes in anyfloor area wheretheambient noise level exceeds 87 dBA, orwhere the occupants ofthefloorarea use ear protective devices, are located within an audiometric booth, or are located within sound insulating enclosures. This also appl'iesto assembly occupancies in which music and other sounds associated with performances could exceed 100 dBA Strobes shall be installed in a building so that the flash from one device is visible throughoutthe floor area or portion thereof in which theyare installed. For maximum safety, Mirtone recom- mendsthat strobes be installed as perthe guidelines shown here under Strobe Spacing. WARNING: These devices will notoperate without electrical power. Ashresfrequently These visible signal appliances'tiashintensitymaynot beadequatetoalert orawaken cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of'strobe fire protection specialist. needed to awaken 90% of sleeping persons .is approximately 100 od. Mirtone recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110 cd minimum. M I R T 0 N E Page 2 of 4 Literature Sheet IMS5001-0559 Issue 5 Not to be used for Installation purposes. Oecifications using White textured UV stabilized, color impregnated engineered plastic. Exceeds 94V-0 UL flammabiEra'tiina, s Optical grade polycarbonate (clear) unting I'llerating North -American 4square box, 2 1/8' (54 mm) deep (indoor wall or ceiling applications only). re connections Screw terminals: single input for both horn and strobe. #18 to #12 AWG (0.75 mm2 to 2.5 mm2) environment Indoor: 32-120'F (0-49°C) ambient temperature. 93% relative humidity n Meets or exceeds ULC-S541, year 2004 UL requirements for standards UL1638 and UL1971, and complies with iti tingslapprovals UL1480. All horn -strobes comply with ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Part 36 Final Rule. CSFM approved (high CD models pending). FM and MEA pending., Oerating voltage MGC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: non -coded, filtered 1633 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR (or coded (audible NAC only) when used with optional MG1M Genesis Signal Master) lobe output rating UL 1971, UL 1638, ULC S526: selectable 15/30/75/95 cd (MGC-HDVM) and 95/115/150/177 cd (MGC-HDVMH) MGC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: one flash per second synchronized with optional MG1 M Genesis Srobe flash rate Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or self -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without MG1 M Genesis Signal Master) Temporal setting (private mode only): synchronized to temporal output of horns on same circuit :Mnchronization modules MG1M-RM MGC-HDVM series temporal -tone horn -strobes: temporal rate synchronized with optional MG 1 M Genesis hm pulse rate. Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds (or sett -synchronized within 200 milliseconds over thirty minutes on a common circuit without MG M Genesis Signal Master) �lmporal audible pattern 1/2 sec ON, 1/2 sec OFF, 1/2 sec ON, 1/2 sec OFF, 1/2. sec ON, tYz sec OFF, then repeat cycle urrelnt Draw 5 Vdc t V%" MGC4KWM Tawporol Hmaatrobe: High dB Settling UL Nameplate Rating (UL1971, Effective May 20D4) 15 cd 30 ed 75 ed 95 cd RMS RMS RMS RMS 147 190 316 372 189 253 417 451 al Current 15 cd 30 ed 75 ed 95 MGC•HU MH NO cd Temporal limastrobe: ffipttd6 Scffl% UL Nameplate Rath (UL1971, Effective May 2004)I 95 ed 115 ad 150 cd 177 cd RMS RMS RMS RMS 341 399 506 570 467 578 670 711 Typical Current - 95 cd 115 cd 1 150 ed 177 cd M IM M Temymatflmashaie: Lerr d8 Seuwg MGC minim MO ed Ta porat Norasha6x tow d8 Typical Current Typical Current Zi cd 30 ed. 1 75 ml 95 ad 85 cd 115 ed 1 150 od MIRTONE Issue 5 Literature Sheet #M85001-0559 Not to be used for Installation purposes. Notes and Comments 1. Current values are shown in mA. . 2. ULNameplate Rating can vary fromTypical Current due to meas ure- mentmethodsand instruments used. 3. Mirtonerecommends using theTypical Current forsystemdesign including NACand Power Supply loading and voltage drop calcula- tions. 4. Use the Vdc RMS current ratingsfor filtered Power supplyand battery AH calculations. Use the Vfwr RMS current ratings for unfiltered power supply calculations. 5 Fuses, circuit breakers and other overcurrent ,protection devices are typ ica Ily rated for current in RMS values. Most of these devices operate based upon the heating affect ofthe current flowingthroughthe . device. The RMS current (notthe mean current) determines the heating affectandtherefore, the trip and hold threshold for those devices. 6. Our industry has used 'mean' cu rrents over the years. However,ULwill directthe industry to use the 2004 RMS values in the future. Page 3 of 4 light iutput - (effective cd) Percent of UL rating versus angle Dimensions 6.6" dia. (1r3 mm) u 25 mm 0.60'(15 nrn) Insta fition and Mounting Ali mode's are intended foe indoor wall or ceiling applications only. H om-strobes mourrtto anyflush North -American 4° square electricalbox. Genesis ceiling horn -strobes simply unlatch and twist to open. This gains access to mounting screws and the selectable candela switch. The shallow depth of Genesis devices leaves ample room behind the signalfor extra wiring. Once installed with the cover in place, no mounting screws are visible. Mirtone recommendsthatthese fire alarm horn-strobesalwaysbe installed inaccordance withthe latest recognized edition of national and iocalfire alarm codes. Field Configuration Depending on the model, Genesis horn -strobes may be setfor 15 to 95, or 95to 177 candela output (see ordering information). The output setting is changed by simply opening the device and sliding theswitch to the desired setting. The horn -strobe does not haveto be removed to changethe outputsetting. The setting remains visible through a small window on the front of the device after the cover is closed. The horn -strobe comes factory set for high dB output. Low dB output may be selected by cutting a jumper on the circuit board This reduces the output by about 5 dB. Wiring Field wiring terminals accommodate #18to #12 AWG (0.75 mmz to 2.5 mmz) wiring. Horn/strobes are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below. G) Polarity alarm c N Note: Strobes must have continuous voltage. Ordering Information next device end of line device Catalog Plumber T Description Ship Wt Ibs (kg) White With FIRE Finish Marking MGC- MGCF- Genesis Ceiling/Wall 0.82 HDVM HDVM Hom-Strobe (selectable 15, (1 8) 30, 75, or 95 cd output) MGC- MGCF- Genesis Ceiling/Wall 0.82 HDVMH HDVMH Hom-Strobe (selectable 95, (1.8) 115, 150, or 177 cd output) Accessories MG1M-RM Genesis Signal Master 0.2 - Remote Mount (1-gang) (0.1) Field Configurable Ceiling Horn -Strobes may be ordered with or without optional'FIRE'marking. WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, we suggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. These visible signal appliances' Nash intensity may not be adequate to alert or awaken occupants in the protected area. Research indicates that the intensity of strobe neededtoawaken 901/ of sleeping persons is approximately 100cd. Minions recommends that strobes in sleeping rooms be 110 cd minimum. Genesis and FulfLight Strobe Technology are trademarks of Edwards Systems Technology, Inc. MIRT0N1E it is our intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All specifications are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact Mirtone. 0 2005 Mirtone _ Page 4 of 4 Literature Sheet #Ma5001-0559 Issue 5 Not to be used for Installation purposes. fire Alarm Stations 70 Series Feitures l0 Pull lever 0 simple positive operation 0 Break glass IN Attractive, streamline design IX less than 5 lb pull force complies with ADA is Solid, die-cast metal construction Description The Mirtone 270 Series Non -Coded Fire Alarm Stationsare sturdy, attractive, and designed for economical installation. The station is available in the following operational and functional designs: — The 270 Series provides a single action, break glassinitiat- ing station. It is available with normally open (N.O.),nor- mally closed (N.C.) or combination N.O./N.C. contacts, The basic 270 Series have screw terminals for field connection. The M270A-SPO Series Manual Stations have.6 inch (160mm) wire leads, — The M270P•SPO Series is a break glass, normally open pre. signal station. The pull of the lever sounds an alarm on all pre signal Indicating devices. Inserting a key and turning It will Initiate a general evacuation alarm, Screw terminals are provided for field connection. All non -coded statins are designed for either flush or surface mounting. For flush mounting a 4 inch standard North American square box with single gang plaster cover should be used. For surface mounting the 270 Series or M270P•SPO Series,use P- 027193 Cast Box, P•039250 Steel Box, or Cat. No, 1291 Housing forweatherproof enclosure. WARNING: These devices will not operate without electrical power. As fires frequently cause power interruptions, wesuggest you discuss further safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. M I R T 0 N E 8411 PARKLAND DRIVE, SARASOTA, FL 34243 Issue 5 Literature Sheet #M86001-0303 Page 1 of 2 OrdarirogInformation Table FINISH: Fire Alarm Red with Aluminum Strips MARICIN410S; Top - Fire Alarm Handle - Pull in Case of Fire Cat. N�m LIL Listed Switch Contacts field Connections Pre -Signal Single Pole Double Pole Open Circuit Screw Terminefs Wire Leeds M270_1040 x x x x M270-SPO x x x x . M27OA-DPO x x x x M270ASP0 x x x x M27OP-DIPO x x x x x M27OP-SPO x x x x x Mounting DOOR RELEASE i TEST & RESET AND kSS REPLACEMENT GEN ALARM KEY SWITCH S.P.S.T. PR�INCLUDED WITH -SIGNAL STATIONS) ONLY P27166 GLASS ROD —I Flush Installation Using P-024900 Steel Box I. L1/2' (26mm) rrr���f/(38mm1 WALL SURFACE r/// (INCLUDED WITH n PRE -SIGNAL STATIONS) J ONLY t ^ r DETAILS FLUSH MTG, UNIT FITS 4" SO BOX & PLASTER COVER WITH SINGLE GANG OPENING HAVING OVERALL MIN.' DEPTH OF 2114" M1RTOINE l It is our Intention to keep the product information current and accurate. We can not cover specific applications or anticipate all requirements. All speciflcations are subject to change without notice. For more information or questions relative to this Specification Sheet, contact Mirtone. ®2001 Mkmne Page 2 of 2 Literature Sheet #M65001-0303 Issu 5 WIA FV t .i .1 _1,71F7�tr-' `liw rT`'t �fri5 €4' P Description The 521LX and LXT Smoke Detectors are the industry's first conventional smoke detector with analog features such as remote maintenance reporting (CleanMe'), drift compensation, and multi -criteria detection. Additionally, the smoke detectors contain a single point, addressable module which allows connection to the LX-Bus" of an XR200 Command Processor"' Panel. The 521LXT also incorporates a.heat sensor for fire detection. The multi - criteria, fast response, heat detector algorithms allow the 521 LXT to give fast response to a broad range of fires. CleanMe' Remote Maintenance/Trouble Reporting Feature The 521 has a unique feature that allows it to send a signal when the smoke chamber has drifted outside UL Listed sensitivity ranges or a hardware fault exists. In most cases, the signal will be the result of the detectors becoming dirty over time and, as a result, are oversensitive. This condition could result in false alarms. The CleanMe' signal enables the XR200 control panel to receivea service signal, allowing an installer time to clean the detectors by replacing an inexpensive optical chamber with a new one. This service information can also be transmitted to the Central Station. Drift Compensation Built-in Built-in drift compensation means the 521 detectors will automatically adjust their sensitivity, up to a maximum of 1.00/o/ft., as they become dirty. This feature increases immunityto dustand dirt by 30-50%. The DMP 521 detectors are the industry's first 12 VDC addressable smoke detectors with built-in drift compensation. Sensitivity Level Test Mode Each smoke detector also includes a special sensitivity level test mode that is activated by holding a magnet near the integral reed switch for more than one second. Once the routine starts, the alarm LED will flash one to nine times, indicating actual sensitivity and if service is required. Compatible with LX-Bus'" Systems The 521 can be used on the LX-Bus' of the XR200 Command Processor" panel. Each detector, connects to the 4-wire bus and uses one zone address. Addressing the detectors is simple using the two on -board rotary switches and a small slotted screwdriver. Up to 100 individual detectors can be supervised on one DMP LX-Bus". More than 40 detectors requires Mode1710 Bus Splitter/Repeater Module. 2841 E. Indwtrial Drive Springfield, MO 65802-6310 800-6414282 Model 521 LX and LXT Smoke Detectors Features ®�- • CleanMe"' remote maintenance reporting LISTED reduces false alarms • Built-in drift compensation to reduce false alarms • Field replaceable optical chamber for easy servicing • LED indicates normal or CleanMe" condition • Meets NFPA 72-7-3.2.1 Field Sensitivity Testing • Easy 4-wire connection to XR200 LX-Bus" • 521 LXT provides multi -criteria heat detector • Proven design ensures stability and performance • Easy rotary addressing; no difficult binary switches Specifications Operating range 8.8 - 15.0 VDC Maximum ripple (pk to pk) 10% (v Standby operating current 8.8 mA Alarm operating current 28 mA Sensitivity photoelectric 3.1 % +0.50-1.00% Operating temperature 32°F to 100°F Operating humidity range 0 to 95% Non -condensing RFI Immunity 20V/rn minimum; 0-1000 MHz Color White head and base Heal sensor (LXT only) 1350F Rate of rise: 150F/min and >105°F Power -up time 15.seconds Drift compensation adjustment 1.0%/ft. max. Detector head dimensions: 5" diameter 2" height Mounting dimensions: 4.75" diameter .3" height Listings I UL 268 Order Information Model Description 521LX Smoke Detector with LX-Bus Addressing 521 LXT Smoke Detector with LX-Bus Addressing and Heat Detector 525 Replacement Optical Chambers 526 Smoket In a can" 710 LX-Bus SplittedRepeater - required If 40 or more detectors are used on one LX-Bus MMIM oaKN ea-A-i"d pnww a LT-0402 (1 W9e) Installing the Mounting Base The counting base included with each 521 makes the smoke detector easy to install and remove if necessary. The detector head simply twists off of its 4.75" mounting base_ The counting base connects directly to standard single - gang electrical boxes, 3-inch round, or 4-inch octagonal boxes. The base may also be mounted without electrical boxes if approved by the AHJ or if codes allow. Y,� oti i Locking Tab on Off`l � G Figure 2: Installing the 5Li LJV LX I on the mount Mounting the Detector Head To install a detector head, simply line up the raised marking on the side of the detector with the arrow on the mounting.base. Insert the head and, rotate it clockwise approximately 15 degrees to snap the locking tab into place. See Figure 2. Removing the Detector Head. To remove the detector head, simply turn counterclockwise. If the locking tab slot has been removed, insert a small screwdriver into the locking tab slot on the side of the base and press in while simultaneously turning the detector head counterclockwise as shown in Figure 2. Wiring First, pull wire through electrical box, then through center opening of the 521 mounting base. Connect the 4-wire harness to theJ1 terminal according to the wiring diagram in Figure 3. Follow the wiring in Figure 3 when connecting; the 521 detector to the LX-Bus. Wiring Specifications Several factors determine the performance characteristics of the DMP LY-Busl and keypad bus: the length of wire used, the number of devices connected, and the voltage at each device. When planning; an LX-Busl and keypad bus installation, keep in mind the following four specifications: Ielack (common), Green (data Yellow (data) --I a " I Red (Smoke i x p L � �. all LX-Bus Imo Requires Interface Bottom a Card view Figure 3: 521LX/LXI winng; 1. You can install individual keypads on wire runs of up to 500 feet using; 22 gauge wire or up to 1,000 feet using; 18 gauge wire. To increase the wire length or add additional devices, a power supply is required. 2. Maximum 'distance for any one LX-Bus circuit (length of wire) is.2,500 feet regardless of the gauge of wire. This distance can be in the form of one long wire run or multiple branches with all wiring; totaling; no more than 2,500 feet. 3. Maximum number of devices per 2,500 feet LX-Bus circuit is 40. (Note: Each panel allows a specific number of supervised keypads. Additional keypads can be added in the unsupervised mode. Refer to the panel's installation guide for the specific number of supervised keypads that are allowed.) 4. Maximum voltage drop between the panel (or auxiliary power supply) and any device is 2.0 VDC. If the voltage at any device is less than the required level, an auxiliary, power supply should be added at the end of the circuit. Note: Do not use shielded wire for the LX-Bus or keypad bus. Refer to the 710 Installation Sheet (LT-0310) and the LX-Bus/Keypad Bus Wiring; Application Note (LT 2031) for additional information. Addressing the 521LX and LXT Addressing; the 521 requires setting; two on -board rotary switches to match the address of the LX-Bus zone number. Set the switches to match the last two digits of the zone number. For example, to assign the 521 detector to zone number 120 on LX-Bus 1, you would set the left rotary switch (labeled "TENS") to 2 and the right rotary switch (labeled "ONES") to 0, as shown in Figure 4. To assign the 521 detector to zone number 223 on LX-Bus 2, you would set the left rotary switch to 2 and the right rotary switch to 3. Example: Rotary switches on the 521 module set for zone ®` ` address 120. TENS ONES Figure 4: Address switches 52ILX1521LXT installation Sheet 2 Digital Monitoring Products Testing Each Detector All. 511 smoke detectors are shipped with a plastic dust corer for use in areas where construction is continuous. Smoke detectors will not work with the dust cover in place. Remove the dust cover when installation is completed, prior to testing. Also, disconnect alarm notification appliances, releasing service devices, and extinguishing systems prior to detector tests. Be sure to reconnect all devices at the conclusion of testing. Per NFPA72, "all smoke detectors shall be tested in place Snap Into indentation Indentation Optical base Model 525 Optical Block l{X X Cover Detector cap — �' Slot annually, to ensure smoke entry into the sensing chamber Figure 5: 521 LX/LXT Optical Sensing chamber and alarm response. Testing with smoke or listed aerosol acceptable to the manufacturer, shall be permitted." Annual functional testing is best accomplished using Smoke! In a can, Model 526, available from DMR Carefully follow the directions on the can. The detector performs a smoke test every 9 seconds while flashing its LED. If smoke is detected, the rate of. sampling increases to every 4.5 seconds. Excessive smoke must be detected in three consecutive tests for the alarm to sound. Therefore, when testing the detector with smoldering punks or cotton wicks, hold the smoke source near the opening for smoke entry and gently direct smoke into the detector for 20 seconds or until an alarm is indicated. BE SURE TO PROPERLY EXTINGUISH THE SMOKE SOURCE AFTER TESTING! Testing the 521 with Smoke! In a Can or with a smoking punk only serves as a simple go/no go test. If the test is successful, the LED will remain lit. For in-depth sensitivity testing see Sensitivity Level Test Mode. If testing is unsuccessful, reset the detector by performing a Sensor Reset at the panel. Snap off the detector cap by prying it loose with a screwdriver placed in the slot in the base of the cap as shown in Figure 5. Release the tabs on each side of the optical chamber to remove the chamber. Then, blow or brush off the optical block base and snap a new optical block chamber in place, replace the cap and verify sensitivity with the Sensitivity Level Test. Sensitivity Level Test Mode Each smoke detector also includes a special sensitivity level test mode that is activated by holding a magnet near the integral reed switch for more than one second. See Figure 6. Once the routine starts, the alarm LED.will flash one to nine times, indicating actual sensitivity and whether or not service is required. See the 521 Sensitivity Table. Magnet--" 'Z Reed Switch- Figure 6: Sensitivity Testing the 521 LX/LXT After the sequence of blinks, if the sensitivity is found to be within limits and if all other tests pass, the detector wilt go into alarm until reset by the panel. If the sensitivity is not within limits, or an unserviceable hardware fault has been detected, the alarm LED will continue to flash once per second until the detector is reset by the panel. If the sensitivity test is not within guidelines, take action as recommended in the 521 Sensitivity Table. Approximate Blinks Indication Action Obscuration (%ft.) PhotoWIN 1 Reset unit and re -run sensitivity test, if indication remains the same, replace unit. 4.35 2 Debector is not Clean per instructions. Reset unit sensitive enough and re -run sensitivity test if indication remains the same, replace unit. 3.85 3 3.60 4 Detector is within None sensitivity limits 3.10 5 2.60 6 2.10 7 1.85 8 Detector is too Check to be sure optical block sensitive cover is snapped down completely. Clean per instructions. 1.35 9 Table 1: 521 Sensitivity Table 521LX1521LXT Installation Sheet Digital Monitoring Products 3 521LX and 521LXT Addressable Smoke Detectors D escription The Model 521 LX and 521 LXT Smoke Detectors are the industry's finest smoke detectors, with analog features such as remote maintenance reporting (CleanMe'), drift compensation, and multi -criteria detection. These smoke detectors in corporate an addressable single point module for connection to the LX-Bus` of an XR200 (version 1.04 (6/11 /98) or hi gher), XR200-485 (version 1.04 (6/11 /98) or higher), or XR2400F (version 1.04 (6/11 /98) or higher) Command Processor` Panel. The 521LXT also includes multi -criteria fast response heat sensor algorithms for detection of a broad range of fires. Single Point Addressable The 521 incorporates a factory mounted, addressable single -point zone expander on the back of the smoke detector. The included 4-wire harness allows a direct connection to the LX-Bus of an XR200, XR200-485, or XR2400F panel. The integrated zone expander reports smoke detector alarm and service conditions to the panel as a single zone. A TXD LED is also included, which flashes to confirm polling of the device. CleanMe'" Remote Maintenance/Trouble Reporting Feature The 521 detectors have a unique feature that allows a service signal to be sent to the panel when the smoke detector has drifted outside UL sensitivity ranges or a hardware fault exists. In most cases, the signal will be the result of the detector becoming dirty over time and, as a result, are oversensitive. This condition could result in a false alarm. The CleanMe' signal enables the panel to receive a service signal allowing an installer time to clean the detector by replacing the inexpensive optical chamber with a new DMP Model 525. This service information can be transmitted to the central station. Self -Diagnostics with Automatic Sensitivity Testing Each 521 photoelectric smoke detector monitors its own sensitivity and operational status. Once a day, and immediately upon first power up, it performs a full diagnostic test that includes a dynamic test of the sensing chamber and internal electronics. If the detector drifts out of its sensitivity range or fails internal diagnostics, the alarm LED flashes once every second to indicate trouble. This meets NFPA72 field sensitivity testing requirements without the need for external meters. Built -In Drift Compensation The 521 detector is the industry's first addressable smoke detector with built-in drift compensation. The 521 automatically adjusts sensitivity, up to a maximum of 1.0%/ft., as it becomes dirty. This feature increases immunity to dust and dirt by 30 to 50%. Installation Consult Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and NFPA 72 for specific installation information regarding smoke detector spacing, placement, and special applications. The 521 detectors wire directly to the panel's 4-wire LX=Bus'. See Compatible LX-Bus Interface Cards. When wired to the LX-Bus, the 521 uses only one of the available expansion zone numbers allowing you to assign additional zone expanders to the next zone number address. See Addressing the 521 LX and LXT. Locking the Detector Each 521 detector head is equipped with a breakaway locking tab slot to prevent unauthorized removal of the detector head. For installations where unauthorized removal of the detector head is not a concern, such as high ceilings, no action is required. Remove the head by simply turning counterclockwise. When the head most lock to the base, simply break away the locking tab and the "knock out" for the screwdriver slot with a pair of pliers. To remove the detector head, insert a small screwdriver into the slot of the side of the base and press in while simultaneously turning the detector head counterclockwise. See Figure 1. C 1 aanMP" is a trademark of Sentrol, Inc To lock the 521 to the mounting base, use pliers to break off the locking tab on the base tab and the breakaway tab for the screwdriver slot on the 521. Figure 1: Locking Mount on ,iziLX/t-JCl mouni: _ LISTED r 4 ----- —.-- ❑igicnl Iviorlit-i"'J Produces Sm oke Detector Dip Switches If th ere are dip switches to the left of the screw terminals in the 521 Smoke Detector, they are factory preset and' must iot be changed. Maintenance, Cleaning, & Sensitivity The 511 smoke detectors are designed for easy field service and maintenance. If a smoke detector drifts beyond its approved sensitivity range for more than 24 hours or fails internal diagnostic tests during power -up, the unit automatically indicates trouble by flashing its LED every second. Under normal conditions the LED flashes every 9 seconds. Therefore, a simple visual check of the LED status meets NFPA 72 field sensitivity testing requirements without the need for external meters or ladders. In accordance with NFPA 72-7-3.2.1, smoke detector sensitivity should be checked within one year after installation and every alternate year thereafter, in commercial installations, or every three years in residential sites. The sensing chamber of the 521 photoelectric detector unsnaps for easy field cleaning and service. Whenever the statusLED indicates Cleaning is necessary, remove the photoelectric detector cap, snap off and throw away the optical block.. Then blow or brush off the optical block base and snap a new optical block chamber back in place (see Figure 5), replace the cap and verify sensitivity with the Sensitivity Level Test. k' J p Gi lahNL 4!! sI iF�xfLgixi T+h�t SPECIFICATIONS Operating Range Standby Current Alarm Current Maximum Ripple Sensitivity Photoelectric Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Range RA Immunity Heat Sensor (LXT Only) Rate of Rise Power Up Time Drift Compensation Detector Head Dimensions Mounting Dimensions Color 8.8 to 15.0 VDC 8.8mA 28mA 10% (V P) peak to peak 3.1 % + 6.50 to 1.00% 32 ` F to 100' F 0 to 95% non -condensing 20V/m minimum; 0 to 1000MHz 135°F 15°F/min and>1057 15 seconds 1.0%/ft. max. 5" Diameter, 2" Height 4.75" Diameter, .3" Height White Head and Base 2500 N. PARTNERSHIP BLVD., SPRINGFIELD, MISSOURI 65803-8877 I del D H100A C DC LP Product Overview 4-Wire Photoelectric Duct Smoke Detector with Low -Flow Technology A[rvelocity rating from The System Sensor Innovair" DH100ACDCLP is a 4-wire photoelectric air 100ty 4000 feet per minute duct smoke detectorcapable of sensing smoke in air velocities from 100 to (0.5to 20.32 m/sec.) 4,000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32 m/sec). This Innovair features Low -Flow Patented Interconnectabillity for muttl- . technology that enables duct smoke detection throughout a broad range of air- fanshutdown (up to ton air handlers) flow environments. Many difficult to solve HVAC applications occur in low air - Patented telescopic sampling tube flow duct applications where reliable smoke detection is critical. Innovairwith Low -Flow technology can detect smoke at air speed velocities of 100 feet per Patented cover tamper trouble signal minute or greater, while continuing the same reliable performance to 4,000 feet 24 VAC/DC or 120/240 VAC operation per minute. 8-I191F1.ow voltage barrier The two available form C relay contacts provide reliable performance for the Equipped with two DPDT Form C relay management of fans, blowers and air conditioning systems. These HVAC contacts devices can be configured to prevent the spread of toxic smoke and fire gasses Sullt-ln reset button through a protected area Outside mounting tabs The Innovair family is designed for simplified installation and easy maince• Easy and quick mounting to round nance. The modular construction allows for easy cleaning and uncomplicated or rectangular ducts from V-12.1 field replacement of the IA. recognized power. and sensor boards. The patented (0.3_3.7 meters) wide cover missing feature insures the cover is securely tightened following routine Easy to clean cleaning and maintenance. The patented interconnectabiliity feature allows mul- ULr.ecognized fleld-replaceable tiple Innovairs to communicate with each other.. In the event smoke is detected, fsnwer and sensor boards the Innovair will. signal the remaining interconnected detectors to initiate their Fretnote test station option relays for smoke control. Remote sounder option WARNING: Duct smoke detectors have specific limitations. Transparent cover for convenient DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS ARE: visual inspection NOT a substitute for an open area smoke detector, LlL 268A Ilsted NOT a substitute for early warning detection, and NOT a replacement for a building's regular fire 3-Year warranty detection system. OD Refer to NFPA 72 and 90A for additional information about the proper application of duct smoke detectors. LISTEp L_ Arca'Aktural/Englneering Specifleatlons The k duct smoke detector shall be a System Sensor Model DH100ACDCLP Series Duct Smoke Detector. The detector holLslg shall be UL listed per UL 268A specifically for use In air handling systems. The detector shall operate at air veloc i- tie s (100 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute (0.5 to 20.32 m/sec.). The unit shall be capable of controlling upto ten 0) air handling systems when interconnected with other detectors. The detector shall be capable of providing atrou- -le s{nal in the event that the front cover is removed. It shall be capable of local testing via magnetic switch or remote tesl ill using the SSK451 Multi -Signaling Accessory or the RTS451KEY Remote Test Station. The unit shall be reset by {oc a leset button or remote test station. The duct smoke detector housing shall incorporate an airtight smoke chamber in corn fiance with UL 268A, Standard for Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. The housing shall be capable.of mounting to eider rectangular or round ducts without adapter brackets. An Integral filter system shall be included to reduce dust and Midue effects on detector and housing, thereby reducing maintenance and servicing. Sampling tubes shall eltherbe telesgping or be easily installed by passing through the duct housing after the housing is mounted to the duct. The unit shaltfovide a spacial separation of no less than'/4" (6.4 mm) and/or a physical barrier between the high and low voltage t ermials. The enclosure shall meet all applicable NEC and NFPA standards regarding electrical junction boxes. Terminal connttions shall be of the strip and clamp method suitable for 12-18 AWG wiring. W irf rRIGUlde Sytto wiring diagram for 4-wire duct smoke detectors ffl$.111p�QS ACCEPT I T AVAILABLE. POWER INPUTS^—_ 44 AACC 50 60 a 1 9 10 . A B C 120M: 6D-60 rPo HZ, S I ?i"?22 2MIVAC 5P00 HZ.CONM1OT POWER SOURCE TOARROPRIATE TERMINALS120 OF F-Gi DETECTOR. I VAC 22r01240 I ALARM OR FAN SHUTDOWN, CONTACTS ETC, E��y{}S ( TO e 17 7 1a a i VAC [[�� YIVE I NOTIPGNDEDFOR VDC I N:C.Ici. N.O. .C. I CPC NNE TION TO CONTROL I STANDBY. CONTACTS TRANSFER DUR G ALARM AS INDICATED BY THE ARROWS.' I ��gO I SUPERVISORY TROUBLE CONTACTS 2.0,1 rmstNeT I 14 3 I I TRDLBLECOWACTS CLOSED W AM U 5667 AND6Y. CONTACTS OVEN WHkE OETECTCR PCS OR PO//Eft L9 HlMOVFTI OR WHEN 1 AMPER FEATURE 1 WES WI.OPEN CONTACTS SIGNAL TRCVSL E CONOITSk! 70 PANEL ALARM Y I I ALARM - b CONTACTS SHOWN INITIATION INITIATION \ OPEN IN STANDBY, LOOP CONTACTS CONTACTSCLOSE I IN ALARM. — — — — _ — — UL LISTED 4-WIRE FIRST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP CONTROL PANEL DHIGOACDC Specillcatlons Size 14'Yfx" (37 cm.) Length 5%" (14 cm.) Width 29/" (7 cm.) Depth Shir)Plog Weight 33% ibs, (1.7 kg.) operating Temperature Range 320 to 131DF (0° to 55°C) I— , AVAILABLE POWER INPUTS i ATR I 9 10 A B C TERSOURCE TO APPROPRIATENNECT A INLS OF EACH DETECTOR SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR 1 �24V� POWER SUPPLY I I 1Y0� VAC I INFORMATIO 2201Z40 VAC I ALARMILIARY CONTACTS 1 FAN SHUTDOWN, ETC, 16 6 17 7 16 S I FOR WIRING OF AUXILIARY DEVK:FS REFER TO - MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS ORCONTACT MANUFACTURER. ALARM AUXILIARY CONTACTS SHOWN IN I NOTE THE SUPERVISORY RELAY NOW STANDBY. CONTACTS TRANSFER DURING PROVIDES A'FORM C CONTACT FOR ALARM AS INDICATED BY THE ARROWS. I CUSTOMIZED APPLICATIONS. FOR STANDARD APPLICATIONS. ONLY SUPERVISORY TROUBLECONTACTS THE'NO' CONTACT IS USED I r— . iROUSIE NTACTS CLOSED IN µARNI AND STAHDEY. CCWACIS OPEN WHLE DETECTOR PCS OR POWER IS REMOVED OR WHEN TAMMAT URE ATURE TIMES OUT, OPETI CONTACTS SIGNAL TROUBLE WNDITICN 10 PANEL ALARM CONTACTS SHOWN INITIATION OPEN IN STANDBY. - CONTACTS CONTACTS CLOSE IN ALARM. 4 A' ------------- LAST DETECTOR IN THE LOOP -DHIOOACDC Storage Temperature Range -22° to +158OF (-300 to +700C) — — J EOL RESISTOR SPECIFIED BY PANEL MANUFACTURER Operating Humidity Range 10% to 93% relative humidity non -condensing Air Duct Velocity 100 to 4000 ft./min. (0.5 to 20.32 m/sec.) E4trlcal Ratings — DH100ACDCLP (Includes Detector) Power supply voltage: 20-29 VDC 24 VAC 50-60-Hz 120 VAC 50-60 Hz 220/240 VAC 50-60 Hz r Mut capacitance: 270 CIF max. 270 jjF max. N/A N/A Rlset voltage: 3.0 VDC min. 2.0 VAC min. 10 VAC min. 20 VAC min, Rlset time (with RTS451): .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. .03 to 0.3 sec. Reset time (by power down): 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec. max. 0.6 sec, max. Paler up time: 34 sec, max. 34 sec, max. 34 sec. max. 34 sec. max. Airm response time: 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. 2 to 17 sec. asitivity Test: See detector label See detector label See detector label See detector label Power Supply Vollago 20 - 29 VDC 24 VAC 60.60 Hz 120 VAC 50. 6D Hz 220/240 VAC 50.60 Hz CURRENT REQUIREMENTS (USING NO ACCESSORIES) _ Max. slardby current 15 mA 35 mA RMS 25 mA RMS' 15 mA RMS' Max. alarm auront 70 mA 125 mA RMS 35 mA RMS' 25 mA RMS' CONTACT RATINGS Alarm inilia(lon contacts (SPST) 2.OA @ 30 VACIDC (0.6 power factor) ACCESSORY CURRENT LOADS AT 24 VDC _ Alarm auxiliary contacts (DPDT) IDA @ 30 VDC 10A r@ 250 VAC Note: Alarm auxiliary contacts must switch 100mA minimum at SVDC, Alanm auxiliary contacts shall not bo conneclod to inllilaing circuits of control panels. Use the alarm initiation contact for this purpose. DEVICE STANDBY TROUBLE ALARM APA451 12.&M Max, Wa 3onA Max. PA400 OmA rds ISmA Max. RA40OZ OmA nla 1DtmA Max. Trouble contac(s (SPOT) 2oA @ 30 VDC (resistive) RTS4511RTS451KEY . 12mA' we 7.517A Mex. SSK451 5mA Max, gmA Max- WMA Max. Wing diagram for OH100ACDCLP to APA451 DH100ACDCLP Warm Signal 15 tux, Power + 19 APA451 2 Alarm I Ill. N. 0, 14 3 Power 8p. COM 3 lux Power- 20 1 Common NOE: Wring diagram shown Is for DH100ACDCLP 4-wire duct smoke detector system equipped without a control panel. NqE: A trouble condition is Indicated. when the green LED Is not illuminated. Wling diagram for the RTS451/13TS451KEY and intrconnect feature Alarm Signal 15 r-— — — — — Aux. Power+ 19 —— — 1 (Red LED) Alarm —— - — — — I* a (Green LED) Power Sup, N. 0. 14 I I Sup. COM 3 I AUX, Power— 2 Resat E2F Test Field Installed Interconnect — Jumper Interconnect 12 Unit 1 *NOTE: For RTS451KEY only without a Control Panel. DHIOOACDCLP RTS451 does not have a terminal 6. UNIT 2 -NOTE: Wking d(agrern shown Is for Interconnect - 0 DHI00ACDCLP 4-wkv duct smoke detector system equipped wnhout a coma panel. Interconnect + 12 NOTE: A trouble condnbn Is Indicated when the green LED Is not Illuminated. 'NOTE: When a unit Is powered sit the 12DVAC or 220240VAC Input, any corlbinallan of accessories may be used such the( the given accessory Iceds SM 60 rrA cr less In the st"b7 state; 110 mA or lees In the alarm state. Important Interconnect Notes e When using the interconnect feature, all Interconnected units must be powered with the same, independent supply. e Polarity must be maintained throughout the interconnect wiring. Connect terminal 12 on unit 1. to terminal 12 on unit 2 and so on. Similarly, connect terminal 1 on unit 1 to terminal 1 on unit 2 and so on, Wiring diagram for DHIEOACDCLP to SSK451 and interconnect. feature FIELD INSTALLED i JUMPER FOR TEMPORAL SB-ECT`{2) 6 ALARM SIGNAL ALARM SIGNAL 1 SUPERVISORY SIGNAL 4 9 SUPERVISORY NO ( CONTACT RESET 7 2 RESET TEST P t TEST - POWER (-) fi AUX POKER (-) POWER (+) fi B AUXPOKEnw 2 INTERCONNECT I INTERCOtdVECT- SSK451 DHIOOACDCLP UNIT t FIELDINSTALLED/ - JUMPER 2 NrERCONNECT- --Qi iNTEROOtWEOT- OH100ACDCLP COIL Note: UNIT Please note that the magnetic coil supplied with the RTS451/RTS451KEY Is not required when these accessories are used with the DH100 detectors. The function- ality of the magnetic coil has been designed Into the circuitry of the Innovalyduct smoke detectors. Wiring diagrams for optional accessories 5 t- ALARM SIGNAL (-) G AUX POWER (-) o I ) DUCT DETECTOR DH100ACDCLP 5 <) ALARM SIGNAL(-) AUX POWER I-) o -) 0,darin( Information Pitt No. Description DUL-00ACDCLP 4-wire photoelectric duct detector with low -flow technology A500 Replacement photoelectric detector board AB 4 Replacement 4-wire power board AG f cssorts ST-•L.5. Metal sampling tube duct wldths 1'-2' (0.3-0.6 m) Si-3 Metal sampling tube duct widths 2'-4' (0.6-1.2 m) S1--5 Metal sampling tube duct widths 414' (1.2-2.4 m) ST-L 0 Metal sampling tube duct widths 8'-12' (2.4-3.7 m) T8d-7L-00 Replacement telescoping sampling tube F'44-55-00 Replacement end cap for.T80-71-00 SSR4S1 Multi -Signaling accessory RTSA,1KY Remote test station with key lock RTS4S1 Remote test station A PA4S1 Remote annunciator with plezo alarm Ac cessorles MOD40OR Sensitivity test module RA40OZ Remote annunciator alarm LED F36-09-11 Replacement air filters (two per package) M02.04-00 Test magnet P48-21.00 End cap for metal sampling tubes S08.39.01 Photo replacement screen PA40OW Mlnl-Alert sounder PS24LOW Minl-Alert add -on strobe PS12/24SLENSW Wall -mount 'SMOKE' lens SyAtrn5ensor provides system flexibility with a variety of accessories, including two. remote test stations, and several different means of visible and udble system annunciation. As with our duct detectors, all duct sir -note detector accessories are UL listed. APA451 RTS451KEY Plezo /nrunciator Remote Test Station (UL S4011) with Key (UL S2522) O O • eeeo 0 0 0o e0oo0� 10- 0000 e0000000 e00o000000 0000000000 0000000000 000000000 000o0t.0 0008 IF O O Systern Sensor Sates and Service PA40OW RTS451 Mlni-Alert Sounder Remote Test Station (UL S3593) (UL S2522) shown with PS24LOW. add - on strobe (PS12/24SLENSW smoke lens option available) SSK451 Multi -Signaling Accessory (UL 268A) O o0—O'•'••' L � O System Sensor Headquarters System Sensor Canada System Sensor In China 3825 Ohio Avenue Ph: 905.812.0767 Ph: 86.29.524.6253 St. Charles, IL 60174 Fx: 905.812.0771 Fx: 86.29.524.6269 Ph: 8()O/SENSOR2 System Sensor Europe System Sensor In Singapore Fx:630/377-6495 Ph:44.1403.276500 Ph:65.273.2230 Documents -on -Demand Fx:44.1403.276501 Fx:65.273.2610 800/736-7672 x3 www.sYstemsensor.com RA40OZ Remote Annunciator (UL S2522) SSK451 Multi -Signaling Accessory (UL 268A) shown with PS24LOW add -on strobe (PS12/24SLENSW smoke lens option available) System Sensor - For East Ph: 85.22.191,9003 Fx: 86.22.736.6580 System Sensor - Australia Ph: 613.54.281.142 Fx: 613.54.281,172 System Sensor - Indla Ph: 91,124,637.1770 x.2700 Fx:91,124.637.3118 0 2002 �YBtem Sensor, The company reserves the right to change product specifications without notice. A05-1044003-7/02-1950 LISTED The DMP Zone Expansion Modules provide addressable Class B burglaryzones to which you canconnect non -powered burglary or f ire type devices to DMP Command Processor'' panels, By expanding the DMP Command ProcessorTM' panel, the number and type of applications in which thesystemcanbe used greatly increases. ne modules can be used on the LX-Bus of WCommand Processor, Panels. The n•u dries connect to the 4-wire bus and use anyone zone address to assign additional xneexpanders to the next zone address if d�sird. You can also use the modules as an acbresseddevice on the keypad data bus eEMP Command Processor'' panels. 5inpl f set the module to an available keypad address and connect the wiring to the appropriate screw terminals. address the 711, 714, 714.8, 714.16, 715, 7154, 715-16, and 725 modules by setting two on -board rotary switcheswith a small slotted screwdriver. The 711E uses a small pushbutton on the module for entering the device address. Zc re Expansio n Modules are mounted in a decorative plastic housing suitable for iri<stalling outside the panel enclosure, s W as on walls or single gang boxes. After at Iviring connections are made, the cover s napson to form tight -fitting protection against incidental contact or tampering. 714.8, 714.16, 715.8, and 715-16 Zone Expanders are housed in a. rugged, 20- gauge, cold -rolled steel enclosure. Youmay also mount the 708, 710, 710F, and725 modules inside a DMP enclosure using the 3-hole configuration and the provided standoffs. . OI NE P OGRA IIIa. G Program the zone on the modules with anyof the panel's available zone types for use in burglary applications including Arming type zones when used with keysMtches. Theevansion zones are. programmable for plain English annunciation on Security Cornmand® keypads connected to the panel. Each zone can also be individually programmed to report alarms, troubles, anal restorals to remote DMP SCS•1 Security Receivers. 14 0 D -R.1 L ES The 708 Bus Extender Modules allow you to increase the length of wire used to -run an LX- Bus'"' or keypad bus by a maximum of 4,000 feet, while providing immunity to noise on the wires. The 708 Bra Extenders are received from the factory as a pair of modules that connect between the panel and LX•Bus or keypad bus devices. Use the 708 Modules in applications which include running wire long distances between buildings, in noisy environments, or where the bus is bundled with other wires, such as telephone company wire. The 708 Extender can be used on all DMP panels. 708 MATOMIES • Extends Keypad Bus or LX•Bus by4000 feet with one pair of modules • Connects to an auxiliary power supply for added power • Uses existing wire; No need to run additional wire • Allows twisted pair and/or shielded wire between the 708 modules ` f?EA,TEFI, MOMKLEZ The 710 and 71 OF Bus Sputter/Repeate r Modules allow you to expand the typical lX- Bus"" or keypad bus installation both inthe number of devices and the length of the wire used. Each 710/71OFModule increases the wire run to a maximum of 2, 500feet, Meri using multiple modules, the total distance of all circuits can be an incredible 15,000 feet! 5 k'�r As a splitter, the 710 provides superior mechanicalwireconnecting capabilityfor up to three additional 12 VDC LX.Bus or keypad bus circuits. This makes the 710 module an excellent junction box when terminating multiple LX-Bus"/keypad bus runs atone location. As a repeater, the 710 module can beinstalled at the end of an LX-Bus"Dr keypad bus circuit to allow an additional circuit to be added, thus increasing the total wire length. 71 OF As well as providing' all of the furctans of the 710 listed above, the 71 OF also allows you to use the 725 Zone Wander to expand the number of 24 VDC zones. The 71OF Bus Sptttter/Repeater allows the connection of a 24 VDC power s upply to the 725to power smoke detectors and isolate the Mott source from the panel. Therefore,. the 71OFmust be used when using the 725 Zone Expander. :£ ills u 5 h GNF, EX IPI"NH Rb Me 714 contains four Class B burglary zones afd is suitable for use with 5 VDC burglary and fire devices that are normally opened or normally closed. Individual zones are supervised with 110hm EOL resistors and can be programmed vkh any burglary or fire zone type. Tle 715contains four Class B powered zones aid is suitable for use with 12 VDC, 2•wire devices such as smoke or g(assbreak detectors aid non -powered fire or burglary devices. Individual zones on the 715 are supervised with a 3.3k Ohm EOL resistor and can be programmed with any burglaryor fire zone typ. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES The standard wiring hamess can be replaced with the optional 718T Plug-in Screw Terminal. lhe.enclosuxe can also accommodate the 719T Terminal Boards for the 714 or the 720T Terminal Boards for the 715, which pass through the widngof the panel's LX•Bus`" 1 K EOL resistors are includedwith the 719T and 3.3K resistors are included with the 720T. 7f4J715 FEATURES • Four protection zones on each module • Comes with 12-conductor.wire harness • Optional 12-position screw terminal 79,?<--16 uk.'M1lS SCR QP,TB0 44 The expanders are housed in a Model 340 locking metal enclosure and is suitable for mountingin a remote location. Eachexpander provides screw terminal strips for zone inputs and data bus connections, a two position jumper to designate connection to the keypad bus or the LX-Bus, and an LED to indicate comma ication withh the panel. Separate zone End -of -Line resistors are included witheach expander. 714-8/7114«16 rEPANDER 1 The 710 Expander contains 8 Class B zones. The 714.16 Expander contains 16 Class B zones. Both are suitable for use with normally open or normally closed burglary and fire devices. Individual zones are supervised with an EOL resistor and can be programmed with any zone type. 70 5-8/7 15-16 ir.XPA DERS- The 715-8 Expander contains 8 Class B powered zones. The 715-16 Expander contains 16 Class B powered zones. Both are suitable for use with 12 VDC 2-wire devices, such as smoke detectors and non - powered fire or burglary devices. Individual zones are supervised with an EOL resistor and can be programmed with any zone type. 7 4 4-8, 714-16, 715-8, A14 71 S-. 9 6 FEATURES • 8 or 16 protection zones per expander • Durable metal enclosure housing with lock and key • Individual. screw terminals accommodate 14 to 22 gauge wire for easy connection Suitable for mounting in a remote location The 725 provides four 24 VDC powered zones that enable you to connect 2-wire s n-10 ke detectors to the XR200, XR200.485, and XR240OF Command Processor® Panels. As a result, the 725 provides you the flexibility to retrofit a 24 Volt system without the need to run more wire or change to 12 Voltsrrjake detectors. • Provides four24VDC zones • Sensor reset performed through pane{ relay or 716 Output Expander • Powered from 24 VDC power supply • Supervised operation • 24Volt surge protection from71O • Provides ability to use 24 VDC 2-wire smoke detectors • Easilymow ted in 3-hole pattern 71 117f I DESCRIPTION The 711 and 711 E Zone Expansion Arndufes connect to the panel's 4-wire keypad bus or LX-BusTM' and are set to an address that determines the reportingzone number. The 711 and 711E each provide one Class B zone for the connection of detection devices. 71 11171 1 E FPEATU1R.E s • Single -zone expander • Ruggedscrew terminals accommodate 14 to 22AWG • Board i ts.in Radionics POPIT housing • Address 711 with easy rotaryswitch • Address 711 E by pressing one button • 711 E features address -check feature Olpkal M•N[nNnd P�duoty 75 R X A A I.Y.. 0, 0 K", .i1A xE !ft., In, so, 4.x' Refer to the chart below for a comparison the features of for each DMP Zone Expansion Module. Address # of Zones 3-Hole Plastic Case Operating Voltage Compatible Panels �8 N/A N/A Yes Yes 12 VDC All DMP 710 N/A N/A Yes Yes 12 VDC All DMP 71DF N/A N/A Yes Yes 12 VDC All DMP 711 Rotary 1 No Yes 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200.485, XR240OF 711 E 1-Button 1 No Yes 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200-485, XR240OF 714 Rotary 4, Class B No Yes 12VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200.485, XR240OF 114.8 Rotary 8, Class B No Metal Enclosure 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200-485, XR240OF 11416 Rotary 16, Class B No Metal Enclosure 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200.485, XR240OF 715 Rotary 4, Class B No Yes 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200-485, XR240OF >! �8 Rotary 8, Class B No Metal Enclosure 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200-485, XR2400F 71516 Rotary 16, Class B tb Metal Enclosure 12 VDC XRSuper6, XR20, XR40, XR200, XR200.485, XR240OF 725 Rotary 4, 24 VDC Class B No Yes 12 VDC XR200, XR200.485, XR240OF Operating Voltage 8.8 to 15.0 VDC Operating Current 714 Average 7mA + 1.6mA per zone Alarm 7mA + 2mA per zone 715 Average 7mA + 4mA per zone + 0.1 per 2-wire smoke Alarm 7n-A + 58rnA per shorted zone + 0.1 per 2-wire smoke +30mA per smoke in alarm Dimensions 4.5" X 2.75" X 1.75" Operating Voltage 8.8 to 15.0 VDC Operating Current 714-8/16 Average 20mA + 1.6mA per zone Alarm 20MA +2mA per zone 715-8/16 Average 20mA+4mAper zone +0.1per 2-wire smoke Alarm 20mA+58mApershortedzone+0.1 per2-wire smoke +30mA per smoke in alarm I Enclosure 20-Gauge cold -rolled steel Dimensions 12.5" W x 11.5" H x 3.5" D 714-8/-16 Color Gray 715.8/-16 Color Rid fe Operating Voltage 24VDC Nominal r Average Current 8mA + 4mA per active zone Alarm Current BmA +4mA per active zone + 30mA per smoke h alarm +47mA per shorted device EOL Resstor Nadel 316 6.8k EOL 1 0 ! 6 0 P oil 1. y�,i° ._ B 2500 North Partnership Boulevard Springfield, Missouri 65803.8877 4 VIM F,n aRooucTs s coNrFoLs, Rio. L PAM-1 MULTI' -VOLTAGE -RELAY;MOD.-ULE PRODUCT DESCRIPTION TY%e PAM-1 Relay is, an encapsulated multi —voltage device providing 10.0 Amp form C contacts. The relay may be energ ied by one of three input voltages: 24 V_Ak1, 24 V.D.C., or 115 V.A.C. A nd L.E.D. is provided which, when illumiriaed, indicates the relay coil is enercgi;ed. T"he PAM-1 may be mounted by using the dable-sided adhesive tape, the self- drillin► screw or loosely placed in,a back . box. These devices are ideal for applica- tions where remote relays are required for contrd or status feedback. They are suitable for use with H.V.A.C., Tem- peralve Control, Fire Alarm, Security, Energy Management and Lighting Control Systems. MODEL NUMoERS PAM-1 Single SPDT Relay with L.E.D., double -sided adhesive tape, mounting screw, 12" leads and 6 wire; nuts. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: Per position — 0.015 Amps @ 24 V.D.C., 24 V.A.C., 115 V.A.C. Relay: U.L. Recognized SPOT Contact Rating' 10 A @ 115 V.A.C. 7 A Q 28 V.D.C., 250 Ivlicroamps @ 5 V.O.C. Ambient Temperature: -50°C to +85°C Approvals: Underwriters' Laboratories Listed Dimensions: 1.5"(38.1 mm)Hx1"(25.4mm)Wx .875" (22.2 mm) D with 19-" wire ,aari!'. 18 aa. yu� 4 Actual Size UNDERWRITERS' LABORATORIES UL_ LISTED INSTALLATION WIRING ��©Cc ,r,01 R, RELAY ENERGIZED L.E.0 ;F_._. 115 V.A.C. @ 0.015A -.-.' 24 V.A.C. @ 0.015 A 24 V.D.C. @ 0.015 A eLU • YEL 10.0 AMP ORG N.C. CONTACT N.O. - - Multi -Voltage Control Relay Model PAM 1 Features Completely encapsulated 10 Amp relay i Relay may be energized by one of three input voltages 11 Contains a red LED which illuminates when relay coil is energized ® May be mounted by double -sided adhesive tape, self -drilling screw or placed in back box ® Convenient 6 in (150mm) wire leads for electrical connections ISSUe 1 Description The PAM1 Relay is encapsulated multi -voltage device providing 10 Amp Form C contacts. The relay may be energized by one of three input voltages: 24 Vac, 24 Vdc, or 115 Vac. A red LED is provided which, when illuminated, indicates the relay coil is energized. The PAM1 maybe mounted by using the double -sided adhesive tape, the self -drilling screw, or loosely placed in a back box. The PAM1 is ideal for applications where remote relays are required for control or status feedback. They are suitablefor use with HVAC, Temperature Control, Fire Alarm, Security; Energy Management, and Lighting Control Systems. Specifications Power Requirments 15 mA per position @ 24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 115Vac Relay UL Recognized SPDT Contact Rating 10 Amps @ 115 Vac Ambient Temperature -58'F to 185°F (-50°C to 85°C) Approvals UL Recognized components 1.5 H x 1 W .875 D inches Dimensions (38.1 x 24.5 x 22.2 mm) with 6 inch (150mm) wire leads 18 AWG (1.00MM2) Ordering Information PAM1 Single SPDT relay with LED double -sided adhesive tape, mounting screw and 6 in (150 mm) leads. Installation Wiring RELAY ENERGIZED LED *(-)N N WT BLU HBLK YEL N.C. 10.0 AMP CONTACTS RED' 0R N.C. 115VAC@15mA 24 VAC @ 15 mA 24VDC@15mA PAM1 RA 1 R T O 111 E 6411 PARKLAND DRIVE, SARASOTA, FL 34243 Literature Sheet #M270066 Page 1. of 2 with Face Flange The nu-irrier one high -security KNOX-BOX' is used for mast commercial applications including businesses,schools, governmentand public build- ings, cc>mnunity associations and apartment complexes. The 3200 Series KNOX-BOX with lift- off door holds keys, access cards and other small items necessary for emergency access. Features and Benefits • Holds upto 10 keys or access cards in interior compartment • Ensures high security with UL Medeco lock • Includes a Knox-CoatTM proprietary finishing process that protects Knox products up to four times better than standard powder coat • Colors: Black, dark bronze or aluminum Weighlt+ Surface mount - 8 lbs. Recessed mount- 9 lbs. Options • Alarm tamper switches (UL Listed) • Additional rust and corrosion protection (Aluminization) • Recessed Mounting Kit (RMK) for recessed models only x F r` , w .,, 01 �L FRONT % IEW - 4" WIDE - - 10, 5tainlege Steel lock cover Hole for ® 5 tamper yeah HIGH 1/2" solid plate 6teel door wish gaskrt 3200 Surface Newt FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 7 WIDE 114" eteel case, 100% welded Flange (recce model only 1 r, ® HIGH - 3" DEEP 7 x T' flange 3280 Recessed Mmmt Ordering Specifications To insure procerementand delireryOfMe 3200 SerfesKNOX-BOX, itissuggested that the fallowing specification paragraph be used: KNOX-BOX surface/recessed mount with tilt -off door, with/without UL Listed tamper switches. 1/4` plate steel housing, 1/2° thick steel door with interior gasketwl. Box and lock UL Listed. Lock has 1/8' thick stainless steel dust cover with tamper seat mounting capability. Exterior Dimensions: Surface mount - 5'H x 4'W x 31/4°D Recessed mount - TH x TW x 31/4'0 Lock: UL Listed. Double -action rotating tumblers and hardened steet pins accessed by a biased cut key. Finish: Knox -Coat'"' proprietary finishing process Colors: Black, Dark Brofve, or Aluminum P/N: 32OG Series KNOX-BOX (mfr's cal. ID) Mfrs Name: KNOX COMPANY 1 05 0 � f � s ELK-BLT Battery LifeTester The Battery LifeTester is a compact, easy to use instrument for testing 12 Volt rechargeable batteries up to 65 Amp Hours. Unlike ordinary testers which only measure static criteria, the Life Testermeasures internal conductivity, the best indicator of a battery's health and life expectancy. The conductivity value, expressed in Mhos (the inverse of resistance, or Ohms), is compared with an adjustable Mhos Reference Setting stored in the LifeTester. Every battery type has a characteristic Mhos value when it is brand new and fully charged. The test results are displayed as a percentage of the Mhos reference setting. If below 70% the battery should be replaced. A supply of self adhesive labels is included for recording test data results onto batteries. ELK-BLTL/IBELS Pack of 100 self adhesive test data labels Rechargeable Sealed Leas! Acid Batteries • 2 Year Warranty • UL listed component 6V - 1.3Ah • Part # ELK-0610 • 3.82" x 0.98" x 2.20" • .73 lbs. 6V - 5Ah • Part # ELK-0640 • 2.8" x 1.9" x 4.2" • 1.81bs. 6V - 7.5Ah • Part # ELK-0670 • 5.90" x 1.34" x 3.90" • 3.09 lbs. 6V - 12Ah • Part # ELK-06120 5.90" x 1.97" x 3.90" • 4.63 lbs. 12V - 1.3Ah • Part # ELK-1212 • 3.8"x 1.7x2.2" • 1.31bs. 12V - 3.3Ah Part # ELK-1233 • 5.27" x 2.64" x 2.60" • 2.871bs. 12V - 4.5Ah • Part # ELK-1240 • 3.5" x 2.8" x 4.2" • 3.61bs. 12V - 8.0Ah • Part # ELK-1270 • 6"x2.5"x4" • 5.8 lbs. 12V - 12Ah • Part # ELK-12100 • 417 • 8.8 lbs. 12V - 18Ah • Part # ELK-12170 • 71'x3"x6.6" • 13.5 lbs. 12V - 26Ah • Part # ELK-12250 • 6.511x6.9"x5" • 201bs. 800 797 9355 • 828 397 4200 • Fox 828 397 4415 • www.elkproducts.com • info@elkproducts.com PDWer-Limited Multiple Conductor/Unshielded DESCRIPTION ntR • ASTM bare copper 1 • PVC insulation � Twisted pair or cabled construction • PVC fillers as required • Polyester binders as required • Overall 75' C PVCjacket n_ RATING U`fV IL fisted NEC type FPLR - Contructed in accordance with h Iandard 1424 - ionplies with UL 1666 Vertical !haft (riser) Flame Test - en,Derature range: -V C to 75 ° C dry locations - leek 300 volt requirements as speed in Section 760 of the NEC AIPLICATIONS Indoo (non -conduit per NEC) for: - Auda circuits - Control circuits - Initiating circuits • Notification circuits S PECIAL NOTES Select cables are available in ouldoor and direct burial versions. See Aquaseal® product line for details • Orange ripcord under jacket • Catalog No. 980, 982; and 990 arealso available with a Blue, Green, White or Yellow jacket 50 --WEST PENN WIRE/CDT- . r _+ inch mm inch mm inch mm :.�... ..25 .020 .51 .179 4.55 1084 6 22.Solid .010 17.5 aff 1086 ' 8 22 Solid .010 .25 MO 51 .193 4.90 17.5 QIM' 980 1 18 Solid .010 .25 .020 .51 .156 3.96 Pair 6.5 Off 982 4 18 Solid 010 25 . .020 .51 .188 4.78 6.5 U/M' 984 6 18 Solid .010 .25 .020 .51 .224 5.69 6.5 92/M' 986 8 18 Solid .010 .25 .020 .51 .252 6.40 6.5 Q/M' 988 10 18 Solid .010 25 .020 51 .294 7.47 6.5 UN 990 1 16 Solid .010 .25 .020 .51 165 4.19 Pair 4.1 Q/M' 902 4 16 Solid .010 .25 .020 ..51 .213 5.4,1 4.1 92/M' 994 1 14 Solid .012 .30 .025 64 .205 Pair 2.6 ON' 998 1 12 Solid .012 .30 .025 64 .235 5.97 1 Pair 1.8 92/M' Standard spool size 1000 feet COLOR CODE i AR ii BE 1 Black 6 Yellow 2 Red 7 Purple 3 Brown 8 Green 4 Blue 9 Red/Black 5 Orange 10 Red/White JACKET: Red opper Building Wire THH i. 600Volty Copper Conductor, T'tnm"oplastic Bsasulatiaril�yr£On sheath Heat, Moisture, re, Oil, and Gasofine Resistalnti, All Sizes Rated Ti 'Vl"2, fill Stranded Sizes Ratedlkl AV40 Sizes 14 T'hrr< uggi 6 Rated A1kf9M :PING Sizes 14 Through 1 Rated VW.4 and Larger. Sizes Rated for i;?l,l-a. APPLICAT'I;ONS Southwire Type THHN or THWN 2 conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services, feeders, and branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical Code2. When used as Type THHN, conductor is suitable for use in dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90°C. When used as Type THWN-2, conductor is suitable for use in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 900C or not to exceed 75°C when exposed to oil or coolant. When used as Type MTW, conductor is suitable fa use In wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant at temperatures not to exceed 50°C or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90°C (with ampacity limited to that for 75°C conductor temperature per NFPA 79). Conductor temperatures not to exceed 1050C in dry locations when rated AWM and used as appliance wiring material. Voltage for all applications is 600 volts. SPECIFICATIONS Southwire Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW (also AWM) meets or exceeds all applicable ASTM specifications, UL standard 83, UL standard 1063 (MTW), Federal Specification J-C-30B, and requirements of the National Electrical Code, CONSTRUCTION Southwire Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW copper conductors are annealed (soft) copper, insulated with a tough heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), over which a nylon (polyamide) or UL-listed equal jacket is applied. Available in black, white, red, blue, green, yellow, brown, orange, and grey. Some colors standard, some subject to economic order quantity. Sizes 1 AWG through 1,000 kcmil available in black only. Oil and gasoline resistance II as defined by Underwriters Laboratories. z 1999 Edition. • AM/g17E Copyright 1998, Southwlre Company. f�(Ll �6 d USA Printed on Recycled Papar `;¢,/� StlA�lt�C` o� All Rights Reserved. . @ 1998 briductor Allowable Ampacities+ Nominal Approx. Net Insulation Jacket 0.D. Weight Per Standard Six No Thickness Thickness (mils) 1000' Obs.) Package (A,VC or (mils) (mils) 60°C 75°C 900C Strands Fccfrd� Sal. Str. Sol. Str. " 11 19, 15 4 102 109 15 16 15 15 15 DNF° 19` 15 4 119 128 23 24 20 20 20 DNF' " 18. 19, 20 4 150 161 37 38 30 30 30 DQF^ "8 19 30 5 213 63 40 50 55 F "N 19 30 5 249 95 55 65 75 E 4 19 40 6 318 152 70 85 95 C 3 19 40 6 346 188 85 100 110 BC Z 19 40 6 378 234 95 115 130 C 1 19 50 7 435 299 110 130 150 B 1i6 19 5u 7 474 371 1.25 150 i70 B * 19 50 7 518 461 145 175 195 B 30 19 50 7 568 574 165 200 225 B 40 19 50 7 624 717 195 230 260 B 20 37 60 8 694 850 215 255 290 B 310 37 60 8 747 loll 240 285 320 B 31. 37 60 B 796 1172 260 310 350 B 40 37 60 8 842 1333 280 335 380 B 50 37 60 8 925 1653 320 380 430 B 50 61 70 9 1024 1985 355 420 475 G 7t 61 70 9 1126 2462 400 475 535 C 1CD 61 70 9 1276 3255 1 455 1 545 615 C 'scWdonstrucdon available In sizes 14, 12. & 10 as Types THHN or THWN-2 or AWM only. STANDARD PACKAGE CODE: 4'Alsoldtable for 105°C appliance wiring material (AWM). 'Four W' spools per carton. B- 1000' Reel ^Two to' spools per carton. C- 500' Reel +AncoWfe Ampadties: D - 2500' Spool AltovvVe ampachles shown are for general use as specified by the National Electrical Code. E - 1000' Spool 1999 ifdon, section 310-15, F - 500' Spod 60-C Mhen terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for 014 N - 2000' Carton lough #1 conductors: MTW wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant. � Q - 350' Carton 75-C when terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than #1. THWN-2 when exposed to oil or coolant. MTW dry locations. 90'C 4HHN dry locations. THWN-2 wet or dry locations. Ali Awi sizes 14 through 1 rated VW-1. Larger, sizes rated for CT Use, REGOMMENDED SAMPLE SPECIFICATIONS: (MTVVOR THHN OR THWN-2) Conductors shall be UL-listed Type MTW or THHN orTHWN-2 gasoline and oil resistant II, suitable for operations at 600 volts as specified In the National Electrical Code. AWG sizes 14 through 1 shall be rated VW-1, larger sizes shall be rated for CT use. Conductors shall be annealed copper, insulated with high -heat and moisture resistant PVC, jacketed with abrasion, moisture, gasoline, and oil resistant nylon or UL-listed equivalent, as manufactured by Southwire Company or approved equal, (AWM) Conductors shall be UL-listed Type THHN or THWN-2 or MTW or AWM, suitable for operation at 600 volts at conductor temperatures not to exceed 105°C. �^ One Southwire Drive soAthw�I>r'e" Carrollton, GA 30119 USA 2 ® S01outfrw'ae is a registered trademark of Southwire Company. 770hwire.c 4m www.southwlre.com Del Air - Sanford + 01-16-07 '"o wyle Y or L Noi 86(i Style W Ngtinca 867 LX-Bus Style W Annunciator (ON) Active Zones (EOL installed) Interface Annunciator (ON) Active Zones (EOL installed) w/Receiver Standby Current Alarm Current Qty 1 X 80 mA 80 mA Qty 1 X 80 mA 80 mA Qty 2 X 30 mA 60 mA Qty X 30 mA 0 mA Qty X 5 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 5 mA 0 mA Qty X 1.6 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 2 mA 0 mA Qty X 4 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 30 mA 0 mA Qty X 0.1 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 0.1 mA 0 mA 1500 mA mA Qty 1,- X - • 12; mA 12 rnA • Qty 1 'X 50;mA 50 mAy; ' '' Qty X 7 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 7'mA 0 mA Qty x so,mA o,niA Qty o :x SOnA o mo ". Qty X 50 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 50 mA 0 mA Qty X ,$5 mA O;mA Qty Qty X 15 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 15 mA 0 mA Qty X 45: mA _ 0 mA Qty 0 ' X 45 mA 0 mA `mA Qty X 26 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 85 0 mA Qty - 2's X 45,i.mA '� 90rriA�Qty 2 =X 75s[nA--150 mA., Qty X 30 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 85 mA 0 mA aty 1 ;X 100'mA 100 mA Qty 1 X 100 mA 100 mA aty X 1 B=mA 0„rriA :Qty ]ty X 100 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 100 mA 0 mA Qty 0, X 20 mA 0 mA ]ty X 1.6 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 2 mA 0 mA ;Qty 2ty X 30 n-A 0 mA Qty 0 X 30 mA . 0 rrA... Qty 0 X 20 mA 0 mA ]ty X 1.6 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 2 mA 0 mA Oty ; X 25'mA 0 mA , Qty 0 X 25 mq - 0 mq -' f XX Oty X 75 mA 0 mA Qty 0 75 mA 0 mA 708 Bus Extended Modules Qty X 20 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 20 mA 0 mA 710'Bus SplitterlRepeater .' <; Qty X 30 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 30 mA 710E Bus Extender Qty X 30 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 30 mA 0 mA 711 7,11E or 714 Zone Expander Qty 35 ;X 7;mA 245 mA Qty a 35 X 7 mA 245 mq Active Zones`(EOL installed) Qty 35,. X 1 6:mq 56 mQ a : , 4 X 2; rTiA 8 mA Qty 714-8 or 714-16 Zone Expander Qty X 20 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 20 mA 0 mA Active Zones (EOL installed) Qty X 1.6 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 2 mA 0 mA 715•Yone Expander Qty X 7 mA 0; rriA Qty 0 . X! 7. mA 0, IM Actve Zones (EOL installed) O mA :Qty 0 X 30`mA O mA 2 WIre Smokes ;Qty X 0 1rmA 0 mA 0 X 0 1 mA 0. .:. 715-8 or 715-16 Zone Expander Qty X 20 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 20 mA 0 mA Active Zones (EOL installed) Qty X 4 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 30 mA 0 mA 2-Wire Smokes Qty X 0.1 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 0.1 mA 0 mA 716 Output Expander Qty X 7 mA 0 mA Qty Active Fonn G Relays ah% 0 mA 717 Graphic Annunciator Qty X 10 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 10 mA 0 mA Annunciator Outputs Qty 0 X 1 mA 0 mA 521 LX and LXT Smoke Detectors ;; Qty ; ,= „ , . 1 ; ;'X 8 8 mA - " ". 8:8, mA (lty 1 JC 28 mA 28. mA FA400-DMP Remote Receiver Qty X 40 rrA 0 mA Qty 0 X 40 mA 0 mA FA926!' 16 Point deceiver Qty , ,iX 47:mA , O,n1A •Qty • 0 ",X„ 47 niA -°_ 0 mA ?, �.� iCOM Internet Alarm Router Qty X 78.1 mA 0 mA Qty 0 X 78.1 mA 0 mA Aux Powered Devices on Terminals`? and 11 mA mA ,' (Other.than ke : ads^anQLX Bus�modules) Total Standby 651.8 mA Total Alarm 661 mA Number of standby hours needed 4 i ► 24 Total number of standby mA hours 15643 Print Total number of mA hours 16304 Start Over Amp hours required 17 LT-0634 (12/02) • Del Air 24vdc Duct Detector Power Supply Stand-by Cales. 01-16-07 504-Z4e' •. _. --:.: '. : -::,:. ., .'-: QtY '1.X '".2W rM'; .:: .;ZW nW''' .. ;.;Qty- 1 _X ZDO:-MA, LUU'..MA, 24VDC Variable candela Strobes 921-MCW 15cd RSS-24MCW Oty X 49 mA 0 mA 921-MCW„ 30cd R55 24MC1N OtV ` X 85 nW777TnA' 921-MCW 75cd RSS-24MCW oty X 137 mA 0 mA 921 MCYJ, 110cd :: RS524MCN/ QtY X 180 O 'rruq. 24VDC Variable candela Strobes Reim Kit 922-MCW 15cd RSSP-24MCW oty X 49 mA 0 mA 922-MCW 30cd,-,, RSSP-24MC1N .. Otv. .` ' , X= .. BS mA; .. 0 rriA" 922-MCW 75cd RSSP-24MCW oty X 137 mA 0 mA 922,MCW ilOcd, .. .. RSSP 24MCW, ` o.r;As; 24VDC Variable candela Hom/Strobe 923-MCW 95 dBA 15cd NS-24MCW oty X 75 mA 0 mA 923 MCW , 95 d811'. 30cd . ; N5, 24MCINa; Oty X 923-MCW 95 dBA 75cd NS-24MCW Oty X 161 mA 0 mA Kw192 923 W +95 dBA ,110cd ..':' `NS 24MCW Otv. X`: mA i. 0 mA!' 923-MCW 90 dBA Y5cd NS-24MCW Oty X 61 mA 0 mA 923 M„90 dBA= 30cd NS 24MCW`:'..- OM r X: .u.86.mA;" D irA; 923 MCW 90 dBA 75cd NS-24MCW Oty X 147 mA 0 mA 423 MCW , 90dBA; 110cd �. !: NS 24MCW;'.. •, �:, ;, :Oti< X:�^ 183, riiA;, • �,' 0 ink, 24VDC Variable candela Horn/Strobe 924-MCW 99 dBA 15cd AS-24MCW Oty X 93 mA 0 mA 924-MCYV• 99dBA;30cd i.: 'AS-24MCW'., •.: t ... `..=` '. .:•.. ., . s OCYr ,:X 126,mQ; OmAt] 924-MCW 99 dBA 75cd AS-24MCW. Oty X 183 mA 0 mA 924-Mfi1N 99dBA110cd'.•.... y ;.`.A524MGw; .., . .. Otv X. 236`mAi; ,0 mA�,:. 924-MCW 95 dBA_ 15cd AS 24MCW oty X 72 mA 0 mA 924MCW , 95 _BA.30cd •. (,. .. .. , ,. . _ OtYi • X, 1f0;!mA,'� 0 rn,A,;�r 924-MCW 95 dBA 75cd AS-24MCW Oty X 165 mA 0 mA 924MCW , ° 95 dBA4_i30cd, AS 24MCW.;' ...,._ .. '.- Qtys 2 ° . X 218 rM ' 0 mA'ti 924-MCW 90 dBA 15cd AS 24MCW Oty X 63 mA 0 mA 924-MCW 90 dBA:, 30cd AS I4MC1N.;; 901 Mini Hom _.,:.`.MB;G6-24 906-10 10" Bell MB-G10-24 B02 Muhl Tone Hom (Hom) ;,,.. 662 Multi Tone Hom (Bell) MT-12/24 802 Multi Tone Hom;: (March,Timel MT 12/24 , 802 Multi Tone Hom (Code 3 Hom) MT-12/24 802 Multl,Tone. Homl(Code 3,Torie) MT 12/24. . 802 Mum Tone Hom (Slow Whoop) MT-12/24 802MuIti;Tone,Horri(Siren) ;r MT,12/24.: 802 MUM Tone Hom (HI/L0) MT-12/24 �:, .803 Standard Hom @24VDC 95tl6A ';NH 12/24 ,; - -• '+ 803 Standard Hom @24VDC 90dBA NH-12/24 83f SvnrModule`Co_24VDC ( ,. SM 12/24' . ' , 832 Sync Module @ 24VDC DSM-12/24 Other Aux powered devices from 16 Oty 20 X 15 mA 300 mA Total Standby 500 mA Required Minimum Alarm Time in minutes OMinutes 0.08 Number of standby hours needed 24 Total number of standby mA hours 12000 Total required alarm current 133 Total number of mA hou 1 1 Contingency factor 0% �_12133 Amp hours required 13 aH See Standby Battery Selection Section of 504-24 Installation Guide (LT-0453). This spreadsheet calculator has not been evaluated by UL. DMP is not responsible for errors, omissions or inaccuracies. Oty X 41 mA 0 mA OIY,'E X; 24mA:;: OmA Oty X 17 rrA - 0 mA oty X 30 mA 0 mA Otv otv X 12 mA 0 mA oty X 23 mA 0 mA Oty X 26 mA 0 mA Oty X 14 mA 0 mA Oty X 15 mA 0 mA 36;mA Oty X 43 mA 0 mA Otv 20 X 70 mA moo mA IC C L E F C H J r w MirTone MIRBPS6 N,A,C. Panel Battery Calculation Worksheet Del Air NAC l 01-16-07 Device Numbe r of Devices Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current For each device use this formula: This column X This column = Current per # of devices MIRBPS6 (Current draw from battery) 1 Standby: 70 mA 70 mA 1 Alarm: 190 mA 190 mA MUMPS6 Current 71 70 mA 190 mA Auxiliary Devices Refer to device manual for current ratings. Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Auxiliary Devices Current 0 mA 0 mA Notification appliances Refer to device manual for current ratings. NAC1-1 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 854 mA 0 mA 854 mA NAC1-2 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 996 mA 0 mA 996 mA NAC 1-3 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 1112 mA 0 mA 1112 mA NAC1-4 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 1531 mA 0 mA -1531 mA Notification Appliances Current 0 mA 4493 mA Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + line C) 70 mA 4683 mA Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x .001) 0.070 A 4.683 A Number of standby hours (24 or 60 for NFPA 72, Chapter 1, 1-5.2.5) 24 H Multiply lines E and F Total standby AH 1.680 AH Alarm sounding period in hours (For example, 5 minutes = .0833 hours) 0.08 H Multiply lines E and H Total alarm AH 0.390 AH Add lines G and I Total standby and alarm AH 2.070 AH Multiply line J by 1.20 (20% extra insurance to meet desired performance) Total ampere -hours required 2.484 AH DEL AIR NAC1 PER CIRCUIT LOADS 01-16-07 ckt 1 Signal Circuits DESCRIPTION NAC1-1 MGC- HDVMH HIS @ 115 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 252 0 MGC- HDVMH HIS @ 95 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 220 0 0 MG1- VM STROB E @ 15 CD 2 mA draw @ 24VDC 55 110 MG1- HDVM HIS @ 15 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 71 0 MG1- HDVM H/S @ 30 CD 3 mA draw @ 24VDC 90 270 MG1- HDVM HIS @ 75 CD 3 mA draw @ 24VDC 168 474 MG1- HDVM H/S @ 110CD mA draw @ 24VDC 200 0 TOTAL DRAW 854 2 NAC1-2 0 0 0 0 2 142 2 180 3 474 1 200 996 3 NAC1-3 0 0 0 3 165 7 497 5 450 0 0 1112 4 NAC1-4 0 0 0 0 7 497 4 360 3 474 1 200 1531 device counts 0 0 0 5 16 14 9 2 TOTAL 44g3 PCL-MULTI CD NAC1.xls 1/16/2007 9:08 AM G C I E F C F I J K MirTone MIRBPS6 N.A.C. Panel Battery Calculation Workshe6t Del Air NAC2 01-16-07 Device Numbe r of Devices Current per Device Standby Current Alarm Current For each device use this formula: Tlris column X This column = Current per # of devices MIRBPS6 (Current draw from battery) 1 Standby: 70 mA 70 mA 1 Alarm: 190 mA 190 mA MHZBPS6 Current 70 mA 190 mA Auxiliary Devices Refer to device manual for current ratings. Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Standby/Alarm mA 0 mA 0 mA Auxiliary Devices Current 0 mA 0 mA Notification appliances Refer to device manual for current ratings. NAC2-1 (see attached) i Alarm: 1874 mA 0 mA 1874 mA NAC2-2 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 2280 mA 0 mA 2280 mA NAC2-3 (see attached) 1 Alarm: 2164 mA 0 mA 2164 mA spare Alarm: mA 0 mA 0 mA Notification Appliances Current 0 mA 6318 mA Total current ratings of all devices in system (line A + line B + line C) 70 mA 6508 mA Total current ratings converted to amperes (line D x .001) 0.070 A 6.508 A Number of standby hours (24 or 60 for NFPA 72, Chapter 1, 1-5.2.5) 24 H Multiply lines E and F Total standby AH 1.680 AH Alarm sounding period in hours (For example, 5 minutes = .0833 hours) 0.08 H Multiply lines E and H Total alarm AH 0.542 AH Add lines G and I Total standby and alarm AH 2.222 AH Multiply line J by 1.20 (20% extra insurance to meet desired performance) Total ampere -hours required 2.666 AH DEL AIR NAC2 PER CIRCUIT LOADS 01-16-07 ckt Signal Circuits DESCRIPTION MGC- HDVMH HIS @ 115 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 252 MGC- HDVMH HIS @ 95 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 220 MG1- VM STROB E @ 15 CD mA drawFMGI- @ 24VDC 55 HDVM HIS @ 15 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 71 MG1- HDVM HIS @ 30 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 90 MG1- HDVM HIS @ 75 CD mA draw @ 24VDC 158 MG1- HDVM HIS @ 110CD mA draw @ 24VDC 200 TOTAL DRAW 1 NAC2-1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 474 7 1400 1874 2 NAC2-2 0 4 880 0 0 0 0 0 7 1400 2280 3 NAC2-3 0 0 0 0 0 1 90 3 474 8 1600 2164 4 SPARE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TOTAL device counts 0 4 0 0 0 1 6 22 6318 PCL-MULTI CD NAC2.xls 1/16/2007 9:08 AM